003d Amm en

DOCUMENTATION BULLETIN
DB No. L-410/003d Airplane Type: L-410
Date of Issue: 10. 12. 2020 Model: L410 UVP-E, -E9, -E20
The technical content of this document is approved under the authority of DOA No. EASA.21J.119
Applicability: Maintenance Manual for L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20 Aeroplane

No. Do-L410-1232.2 (Nov 1/11 Edition)
Subject: Revision No. 36 of Maintenance Manual for L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20
Aeroplane No. Do-L410-1232.2 (Nov 1/11 Edition)
Reason: Issue the Revisions of Chapters No. 006-1, 008-5, 012-18, 020-13, 021-6,
025-8, 026-10, 027-20, 028-18, 029-16, 030-12, 031-12, 032-14, 033-11,
034-16, 038-2, 051-8, 052-4, 053-5, 055-7, 056-2, 057-11, 061-7, 077-6,
090-1 of the Maintenance Manual for L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20 Aeroplane
(Nov 1/11 Edition).
Measure: Following the instructions in the appropriate columns of the Record of
Revisions replace, insert or remove the specified pages of the Maintenance
Manual for L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20 Aeroplane (Nov 1/11 Edition).
Compliance Time: After receiving of the bulletin

Implemented by: Operator.
Necessary Material: The revised pages of Maintenance Manual are enclosed to this bulletin.
Maintenance Manual for L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20 Aeroplane
No. Do-L410-1232.2 (Nov 1/11 Edition) with Revision No. 36 can be
send on the CD on depend of customer request.
Order address: [email protected]
Date of Issue: On the date of receiving this bulletin
Total Pages: 1+616 pages
FQ050102E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF ISSUED DOCUMENTATION BULLETINS
Bulletin No. Number of Revised Date of Entry

No. Data of issue
L 410 UVP-E / .... chapters and Signature
1 001 d Dec 15 / 95 000-1, 009-1, 010-1, 011-1, 012-1,

020-1, 022-1, 023-1, 024-1, 025-1,
026-1, 027-1, 028-1, 029-1, 030-1,
031-1, 032-1, 033-1, 035-1, 051-1,
052-1, 077-1, 079-1, 082-1, 090-1
2 004 d Dec 15 / 95 034-1,
Jan 8 / 96 000-2, 021-2, 023-2, 024-2, 027-2,
028-2, 029-2, 051-2, 053-2, 055-1,
057-1, 076-1
3 006 d Aug 20 / 96 011-2, 012-2, 022-2, 031-2, 038-1
4 010 d Jan 10 / 97 033-2
5 020 d Mar 28 / 97 020-2, 027-3, 029-3, 031-3, 032-2,
034-2, 035-2, 071-1
6 027 d Jan 6 / 98 009-2, 012-3, 027-4, 028-3
7 028 d Feb 10 / 98 011-3
8 037 d Oct 1 / 98 022-3, 026-2, 027-5, 028-4, 029-4,
030-2, 031-4, 032-3, 034-3, 035-3,
061-1, 071-2, 076-2, 079-2
9 040 d Feb 25 / 99 025-2, 033-3
10 045 d May 3 / 99 020-3
11 053 d Apr 30 / 99 007-1, 027-6, 028-5, 082-2
12 060 d Nov 20 / 01 012-4
13 062 d Aug 17 / 05 024-3, 026-3, 028-6, 029-5, 030-3,
031-5, 032-4, 033-4, 034-4, 061-2,
076-3, 077-2
14 068 d Sep 11 / 06 031-6
15 070 d Sep 11 / 06 051-3
16 075 d Not issued
17 081 d Feb 23 / 07 008-2, 012-6, 027-8, 057-2
18 097 d Nov 20 / 07 004-1, 008-3, 009-3, 011-4, 012-7,
024-4, 025-3, 026-4, 027-9, 028-7,
029-6, 033-5, 034-5
19 098 d Mar 11 / 08 022-4, 029-7, 030-5, 032-5,
033-6, 079-3
20 101 d May 16 / 08 20-4
21 102 d Oct 31 / 08 012-8, 023-3, 028-8, 030-6
EFFECTIVITY RECORD OF ISSUED

DOCUMENTATION BULLETINS
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bulletin No. Number of Revised Date of Entry

No. Data of issue
L 410 UVP-E / .... chapters and Signature
22 107 d Nov 18 / 08 004-2, 012-9, 024-5, 025-4, 026-5,

027-10, 028-9, 029-8, 033-7, 034-6,
052-2, 055-2, 079-4, 080-1
23 135d Nov 1 / 11 022-5
24 142d Feb 15/12 022-6, 030-7
MM is reissued Nov 1/11. This contains revisions from No. 1 to No. 24
25 145d May 31/12 012-10, 020-5, 023-4, 024-6, 026-6,

027-11, 028-10, 030-8, 034-7, 055-3,
057-3, 061-3
26 170d Apr 5/13 005-1, 012-11, 020-6, 022-7, 023-5,
026-7, 027-12, 028-11, 029-9, 030-9,
031-7, 032-6, 033-8, 034-8, 053-2,
061-4, 071-3, 076-4, 077-3, 079-5
27 178d Nov 15/13 020-7, 024-7, 027-13, 029-10,
032-7, 034-9
28 196d May 30/14 010-2, 012-12, 020-8, 021-3, 023-6,
024-8, 025-5, 026-8, 027-14, 028-12,
029-11, 030-10, 031-8, 032-8, 033-9,
034-10, 035-4, 051-4, 052-3, 053-3,
054-1, 055-4, 056-1, 057-4, 061-5,
071-4, 076-5, 077-4, 079-6, 080-2,
082-3
29 208d Dec 10/14 011-5, 012-13, 020-9, 021-4, 022-8,
023-7, 024-9, 025-6, 028-13,
029-12, 034-11, 057-5, 061-6
30 212d Apr 15/15 005-2, 012-14, 020-10, 022-9, 023-8,
027-15, 031-9, 032-9, 034-12, 057-6
31 220d Nov 20/15 012-15, 020-11, 022-10, 024-10;
026-9; 027-16, 028-14, 029-13; 032-10,
034-13, 057-7, 077-5
32 225d Mar 30/16 011-6, 020-12, 025-7, 051-5, 055-5,
057-8
33 236d Mar 10/17 008-4, 009-4, 022-11, 027-17, 028-15,
029-14, 032-11, 034-14, 051-6
34 249d Feb 23/18 010-3, 012-16, 027-18, 028-16, 029-15,
030-11, 031-10, 032-12, 033-010, 034-15,
035-5, 051-7, 053-4, 055-6, 057-9, 071-5,
079-7
35 300d Oct 30/19 010-4, 012-17, 021-5, 022-12, 023-9,
027-19, 028-17, 031-11, 032-13, 057-10
36 L-410/003d Dec 10/20 006-1, 008-5, 012-18, 020-13, 021-6,
025-8, 026-10, 027-20, 028-18, 029-16,
030-12, 031-12, 032-14, 033-11, 034-16,
038-2, 051-8, 052-4, 053-5, 055-7,
056-2, 057-11, 061-7, 077-6, 090-1
EFFECTIVITY RECORD OF ISSUED

DOCUMENTATION BULLETINS
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Chapter Page Date Chapter Page Date

Section Section
Subject Subject
Title page - - 006.00.01 19 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 20 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 21 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20 22 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 006.00.02 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
Record of Temporary Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 7 Dec 10/20
006.00.01 1 Nov 1/11 8 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 006.00.03 1 Dec 10/20
4 Nov 1/11 3 Dec 10/20
5 Nov 1/11 4 Dec 10/20
6 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
7 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11 006.00.04 1 Nov 1/11
10 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
11 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
12 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
13 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
14 Nov 1/11 7 Nov 1/11
15 Nov 1/11 8 Nov 1/11
16 Nov 1/11 9 Nov 1/11
17 Nov 1/11 10 Nov 1/11
18 Nov 1/11
EFFECTIVITY: 006-LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
006.00.04 11 Nov 1/11

Description and Operation 12 Dec 10/20
13 Nov 1/11
14 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Chapter, Numbers of Pages

Rev. Document Date of
Section,
No. Rev. Pages New. Pages Del. Pages Number Revision
Subject
MM is reissued on Nov 1/11.
1 006-List of 1, 2 - -
Effective Pages
006-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
006.00.02 7 - -
006.00.03 1, 3, 4 - -
006.00.04 12 - -
EFFECTIVITY: 006-RECORD OF REVISIONS

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Fin and rudder

Height ............................................................................................................. 3 310 mm
Total area ......................................................................................................... 7.3 sq.m
Sweep angle (at quarter-chord) ................................................................................. 35°
Aspect ratio................................................................................................................ 1.5
Taper ratio ................................................................................................................. 0.5
Mean aerodynamic chord ............................................................................... 2 285 mm
Rudder:
Area .............................................................................................................. 2.814 sq.m
Max. deflection (to both sides)................................................................. 17° + 0° / - 30'
NOTE: Max. rudder deflections are marked by gauge lines on the airplane - see Fig. 4
Rudder trim tab area..................................................................................... 0.433 sq.m

Max. rudder trim tab deflection (if UT-6D electromechanical strut is installed):
.........................................................................................10° + 0° / - 1° (to the left side)
................................................................................. 10° + 0° / - 1° 30' (to the right side)
Max. rudder trim tab deflection (if 60 LUN 2520 linear actuator is installed):
............................................................................... 28° + 1° 30' / - 1° 30' (to both sides)
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.02
ALL Page: 7
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 4 GAUGE LINES MARKING MAX. RUDDER DEFLECTIONS

(1) Gauge lines in red color to check max. rudder deflection
(2) Gauge line in white color
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.02
ALL Page: 8
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRCRAFT ZONING
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
This section includes a description of the method used in zoning the aircraft and defines the boundaries
of the major zones and major sub - zones.
All zones are identified by three-digit numbers. The first digit defines the major zone.
The major zones are identified in Figure 1 and are as follows:
Major
Definition
zone No.
100 Lower half of fuselage to rear frame No. 21

200 Upper half of fuselage to rear frame No. 21
300 Stabilizers. Includes stabilizers, rudder, elevators and tail section of fuselage rear of frame No. 21
400 Power plants and struts
500 Left wing
600 Right wing
700 Landing gear and landing gear doors
800 Doors
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.03
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 MAJOR ZONES
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.03
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This major sub zones are identified by the remaining two digits and are shown in Figure 2 and 3.
They are defined as follows:
Major
Definition
Sub-zone No.
110 Between fuselage frames No. 1 and No. 4 but excluding the nose wheel well which is part of
major zone 700
120 Between fuselage frames No. 4 and No. 7
140 -
150 -
210 Fuselage nose
220 Between fuselage nose and fuselage frames No. 4
240 Between fuselage frames No. 7 and No. 21 and between passenger compartment floor and roof
levels
260 Between fuselage frames No. 12 and No. 14 (wing center)
261 Wing-to-fuselage aerodynamic fairing
280 Passenger cabin-internal sub-divided:
281 - frame No. 7 - No. 9
282 - frame No. 9 - No. 12
283 - frame No. 12 - No. 13
284 - frame No. 13 - No. 14
285 - frame No. 14 - No. 15
286 - frame No. 15 - No. 18
287 - frame No. 18 - No. 21
310 Fuselage rear section of frame No. 21
311 Rear fairing
312 Ventral fin and tail cone
320 Vertical stabilizer
321 Fin
322 Rudder
323 Rudder trim tab
330 Left horizontal stabilizer
331 Left horizontal stabilizer
332 Left elevator
333 Left elevator trim tab
340 Right horizontal stabilizer
341 Right stabilizer
342 Right elevator
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.03
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Major
Definition
Sub-zone No.
343 Right elevator trim tab

410 Engine nacelle
420 -
430 Engine mount
440 Fire bulkhead
510 (610) Left (right) wing leading edge to rear spar between airplane center line and wing tip root rib
520 (620) Left (right) wing trailing edge aft of rear spar between fuselage side and wing tip root rib
530 (630) Left (right) wing flaps and slats
540 (640) Left (right) aileron
541 Left aileron trim tab
550 (650) Left (right) spoiler
560 (660) Left (right) ABC tab
710 Nose wheel well and nose landing gear doors
720 (730) Left (right) landing gear nacelle. Left (right) main landing gear tilting door
810 (820) Left (right) front compartment door
830 Pilot's cockpit emergency exit door
840 (850) Left (right) passenger compartment emergency exit door
860 Main door (entrance door, cargo door)
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.03
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 10 ACCESS PANELS - LANDING GEAR NACELLE
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.04
ALL Page: 11
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 11 ACCESS PANELS - VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL STABILIZERS
EFFECTIVITY:
006.00.04
ALL Page: 12
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
LEVELLING AND WEIGHING
Chapter, Page Date Chapter, Page Date

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - -
List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11
008.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
008.20.00 1 Mar 10/17
Description and Operation 2 Mar 10/17
Servicing 301 Dec 10/20
302 Dec 10/20
303 Dec 10/20
304 Dec 10/20
305 Dec 10/20
306 Dec 10/20
307 Dec 10/20
308 Dec 10/20
309 Dec 10/20
310 Dec 10/20
311 Dec 10/20
312 Dec 10/20
EFFECTIVITY 008-LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
LEVELING AND WEIGHING
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
MM is reissued on Nov 1/11. This contains revisions from No. 1 to No. 3
4 008-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
008-Record of 1 - -
Revisions L410UVP-E/236d Mar 10/17
008-Contents 1 - -
008.20.00 1 to 2 - -
5 008-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
008-Record of 1 - -
Revisions L-410/003d Dec 10/20
008-Contents 1 - -
008.20.00 - 301 to 312 -

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
LEVELLING AND WEIGHING
CONTENTS
Subject Chapter, Page Effectivity

Section,
Subject
WEIGHING 008.10.00 1 ALL
Description and Operation 1
General 1
Weighing procedure 2
LEVELLING 008.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Positioning of the airplane into horizontal position 1
Positioning of the airplane into the “flight” position 1
(e.g. for adjustment of fuel gauges, autopilot
adjustment etc.)
Servicing 301
Levelling of the airplane 301
EFFECTIVITY 008-CONTENTS
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEVELLING
1. General
The airplane levelling must be done in following cases:
• after disassembly and assembly of a wing, a vertical stabilizer and horizontal stabilizer,
• in case, that the maximum speed has been exceeded, or the operational load factor has been
exceeded (acceleration),
• after extraordinary hard landing or more serious airplane damage,
• in case of flight performance deterioration that has been caused by airframe deformation.
2. Positioning of the airplane into horizontal position

The positioning of the airplane into horizontal position is done as follows:
• in transversal plane by means of levelling points No. 19 on the left and right wing – refer to the fig. 1.
Both levelling points must be found in one plane (left and right point).
• in longitudinal plane by means of levelling points No. 1, 7.
The horizontal positioning of the airplane itself is made by means of hydraulic lifting jacks in
accordance with Chapter 7.
A list of levelling points and other dimensions for the levelling are given in the Levelling Record,
Document No. – Do-L410-1262.2, which is issued by the manufacturer for each airplane separately.
When checking on the levelling in operation, the previously measured levelling values have to be
relied upon; these are mentioned in the Levelling Record.
3. Positioning of the airplane into the “flight” position (e.g. for adjustment of fuel gauges,
autopilot adjustment etc.)
- eventually other units according to the requirement in other chapters.
The positioning itself into the required position is made by the means of hydraulic lifting jacks in
accordance with Chapter 7.
The positioning of the airplane into the “flight” position (e.g. for adjustment of fuel gauges, autopilot
adjustment etc.) is made as follows:
• in transversal plane by means of levelling points no.19 on the left and right wing
Both levelling points must be found in one plane (left and right point)
• in longitudinal plane into the position 1.5° of the front fuselage section up from the horizon plane
by means of levelling points No.3 and 6 situated in levelling plane of the fuselage – refer to the
Levelling Record.
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 1
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
At lifted front fuselage about angle α=1.5° and at distance between the levelling points (3-6) L=4484 mm
levelling point No.3 is to be about distance H NB3 higher from the horizontal plane passing through the
levelling point No.6.
H NB3 = L x sin α = 4484 mm x sin 1.5° = 117 mm
FIG. 1 HORIZONTAL POSITIONING OF THE AIRPLANE

(Except levelling points No. 1 and 7, which are important for positioning into the horizontal
position, there are also levelling points No. 3 and 6 marked situated in fuselage levelling plane
– refer to the Levelling Record)
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 2
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEVELLING
SERVICING
1. Levelling of the airplane

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 112-610-22027 Levelling truck;
9-618-005 Mobile hydraulic pressure source;
Ruler 500 (Ord. No. 70050500);
Levelling device (e.g. Zeiss NI 002);
Plummet – 2 pcs (Ord. No. 75650010);
Tape measure-steel (Ord. No. 76269120);
112-610-39690 Rulers kit; Marker – alcohol based;
112-610-39691 Template of middle of the static
pressure head;
112-610-39740 Ruler for measuring of the wheel
track; B596301N Protractor;
B098796N Check Template and protractor with the
indicator for measuring of the deflection of Rudder
and Rudder trim tab;
B096981N Check Template for elevator;
B096674N Adjusting fixtures kit for nose landing
gear (refer to the section 032.50.00);
Portable lamp; Auxiliary needle
- refer to the figs. 302 up to 303
B. Materials Levelling Record No. Do-L410-1262.2;

B590230X – Drawing of the Levelling of the
L 410 UVP-E, -E9, -E20 airplane or
L 410 UVP-E20 Brazil airplane or
L 410 UVP-E20 airplane with H80 Engines;
C. Tools Screwdriver; Double-ended spanner; Twine for

marking of fuselage middle; Rod for adjusting a
piston rod of jack - refer to the fig. 304
D. Referenced Information -
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Procedures
(1) General
(a) No other work may be performed on the airplane during levelling.
(b) Airplane is protected in the building from the effects of weather and shocks (bridge crane,
etc.).
(c) Measure the deflections of flight control surfaces, wing flaps, spoilers and ABC-tabs –
values are mentioned in Levelling Record.
Levelling of engines is performed according to the respective Drawing of the Levelling –
refer to the step B. Materials above, if necessary, adjust the engine position on the values
that are mentioned in the drawing. Adjust the engine position use adjusting struts of the
engine mount.
(d) The instruction video was made for leveling of the L410 airplane, which is sent at the
customer's request only.
I. Phase
(1) Move the mounting platforms, mounting steps and fixtures away from the airplane.
(2) Place the airplane on the 112-610-22027 levelling truck. Connect the mobile hydraulic pressure
source. Lift the airplane. Set the supports. Ensure the same distance of both supports from
airplane surface. Fold again the folding supports. When airplane is not in good height, lift it
to the required height. Secure the levelling truck against movement. Secure the piston rods
with screw supports, insert the ends into the grooves. Relieve the pressure from levelling truck.
At pressure relieve, check that the ends of screw supports are fitted into the grooves in the
heads. Disconnect the mobile hydraulic pressure source from levelling truck.
(3) Remove the covers radio-electro equipment in nose section of fuselage, upper cover of the LH
main landing nacelle and lower fin on the rear section of fuselage.
(4) Place the levelling device to the front position 1. Select the positions so that levelling points
(LP) 11, 12 on the left side of the airplane are visible. (refer to the fig. 301).
II. Phase
Necessary fixture: 112-610-39690 Rulers kit.
(5) Position the airplane to the transversal horizontal plane according to the axis, determined of the
levelling points (LP) No. 19 LH and 19 RH (refer to the fig. 305).
After eventually handling with the hydraulic jacks, repeat the measurement (for check).
(6) Relocate the levelling device to the side position 2 (refer to the fig. 301).
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Position the airplane to the approximately longitudinal horizontal plane according to the axis,
determined of the levelling points (LP) No. 3 + 6, pay attention to tolerance (refer to the
Levelling Record, Table 3).
To measure according to the levelling points (LP) No. 3 + 6, select a suitable hole on the ruler
(refer to the fig. 306). Levelling points (LP) No. 3 + 6 must reach the same value. Check the
flatness according to the levelling points (LP) No. 1 + 7, pay attention to the tolerance values
(refer to the Levelling Record, Table 3).
Perform a control measurement of the levelling points heights of the right side of the fuselage
(No. 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7) with a focus under the fuselage.
After eventually handling with the hydraulic jacks, repeat the measurement (for check).
(8) Measure the values for levelling points (LP) No. 21, 22, 23, 24 L (refer to the Levelling Record,
Table 10). Record the values to the Levelling Record.
(9) Measure the values for levelling points (LP) No. 21, 22, 23 24 P (refer to the Levelling Record,
Table 10). Record the values to the Levelling Record.
(10) Replace the measuring tip on the levelling ruler with a short one.
(11) Measure the static pressure head position – control measurement of LH side height in relation
to levelling point No. 1 (refer to the Levelling Record, Table 5 – Y value) (refer to the fig. 307)
(12) Measure the static pressure head position – control measurement of RH side height in relation to
the levelling point No. 1 (refer to the Levelling Record, Table 5 – Y value) (refer to the fig. 307)
(13) Position the 112-610-39691 template of middle of the static pressure head, according to the
levelling point No. 1 on the LH + RH side of the fuselage using two pieces of plummets.
(14) Insert the plummet into the groove of the 112-610-39691 template determining the middle of
the static pressure head.
(15) Measure the X distance of the middle of the static pressure head position on the LH side of
fuselage. The plummet must be located in a tolerance field determined by two parallels –
the X distance in relation to the levelling point No. 1 on the LH side (refer to the Levelling Record,
Table 5 – X value). Record the values to the Levelling Record.
(16) Measure the X distance of the middle of the static pressure head position on the RH side of
fuselage. The plummet must be located in a tolerance field determined by two parallels –
the X distance in relation to the levelling point No. 1 on the RH side (refer to the Levelling Record,
Table 5 – X value). Record the values to the Levelling Record.
(17) Relocate the levelling device to the front position 1 (refer to the fig. 301).
(18) Replace the measuring tip on the levelling ruler with a long one.
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(19) Measure the height of the levelling point No. 19 on the LH side and then on the RH side of the
airplane. If the values are the same, continue with measurements with other levelling points on
the wing. If the values are the different, repeat the previously steps.
(20) Gradually measure the heights of the levelling points No. 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12 and
11 on the RH side of the airplane. The obtained values will be used to check the requirements
resulting from Table 9 (wing twist) and Table 15 (wing position relative to the levelling plane,
angle of dihedral) of the Levelling Record.
(21) Measure the D and E values on RH side of the airplane, according to the requirements of the
Table 2 of the Levelling Record. After the control measurement of the height of the propeller
shaft axis, it is necessary to correct (add) the measured height by the radius of the propeller
shaft and by 10 mm (The basic datum of the fuselage is 10 mm below the levelling plane)
(radius a 10mm is added to the measured height). Further measurement is the check of the
height of the E value, the engine levelling facet.
(22) Similarly measure the heights of the individual levelling point on the LH side of the airplane.
Measure the heights of the levelling points No. 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14 and 13 on the LH side
of the airplane. The obtained values will be used to check the requirements resulting from
Table 9 (wing twist) and Table 15 (wing position relative to the levelling plane, angle of
dihedral) of the Levelling Record. Further measure the D and E values on LH side of the
airplane, according to the requirements of the Table 2 of the Levelling Record.
After the control measurement of the height of the propeller shaft axis, it is necessary to correct
(add) the measured height by the radius of the propeller shaft and by 10 mm (The basic datum
of the fuselage is 10 mm below the levelling plane) (radius a 10mm is added to the measured
height). Further measurement is the check of the height of the E value, the engine levelling
facet.
(23) Relocate the levelling device to the side position 2 (refer to the fig. 301).
(24) In the first step, perform a control measurement of the heights of the levelling points No. 13 and
14 and then the heights of the levelling points No. 11 and 12 from the side position 2.
(25) Compare the values of the heights of the levelling points No. 13 and 14 from the front position 1
and the heights of these levelling points from the side position 2, and detect with comparing ,
the value by which the height of the levelling plane changed at moving the levelling device from
the front position to the side position. The measured height for levelling points No. 11 and 12
measured from the side position of the levelling device is corrected by this value.
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
III. Phase – Measurement of the heights values of the individual levelling points
(26) Position the needle to middle of the levelling point No. 3 and attach to this needle the end of the
ruler with the modified scale that begins from zero (refer to the fig. 308). Determine the height
of this levelling point use a levelling device. With this value will be further worked on, when
calculating the heights of individual levelling points to the levelling plane.
(27) Determine the positions of the levelling plane in relation to the height of the individual
measuring planes.
(28) Record the measured height values of the levelling points to the auxiliary levelling record (for
LH side levelling points No. 13 to 20, for RH side levelling points No. 11 to 20. Record the
height values of the levelling points, measured from the side position of levelling device, into
the table cells highlighted in red. Subtract the difference of values between side and front
position for LP No. 13 and LP No. 14.
(29) Add the difference found between levelling points No. 13 and 14 measured from the front and
side positions to the measured values of height values of the levelling points No. 11 and 12 on
the LH side. In this way we find out the actual values of levelling points No. 11 and 12.
Write the given values into the L side of levelling points No. 11 and 12 (highlighted in green).
(30) Write the value of levelling point No. 3 in the NR column in the auxiliary levelling record (applies
to both left and right side).
(31) Attach a ruler for measuring the levelling plane with the measured value of levelling point No. 3 to
the 112-610-39690 ruler on the line of the measured value of levelling point No. 11. (line to line, see
instruction video). Then measure the distance between the tip of the 112-610-39690 ruler and in
front of the ruler for measuring the levelling plane. This is the height of the levelling point No. 11
relative to the levelling plane (the requirement of the Levelling protocol is 1019.31 +/- 3 mm).
(32) Add the height of the levelling point No. 11 measured with the ruler to the measured distance.
The resulting value is a constant for the individual levelling points on the wing for both the LH
and RH sides. Write the results in the auxiliary levelling record (yellow column).
(33) Similar calculate the remaining values on both sides of the wings, engines and end wing tip fuel tanks.
(34) From the obtained values calculate the nominal values according to Table 15 of the Levelling
Record and required values of the wing twist – refer to the Table 9 of the Levelling Record.
IV. Phase - Check of fuselage curvature
(35) Mark the fuselage axis on the floor using the twine so that it passes through levelling point
No. 8 and levelling point No. 10. Check the values according to the Table 8 of the Levelling
Record. The deviation of the plummet tip at the levelling point No. 9 from the fuselage axis
must be within a permitted tolerance of +/- 5 mm. Perform a similar check at the levelling point
No. 4 (if is the levelling point No. 4 is accessible).
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 305
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
V. Phase - Check of landing gear track
(36) Position the 112-610-39740 ruler for measuring of the wheel track in the middle of the fuselage
axis and use two plummets to determine the wheel track distance. The tips of the plummets
must be located in the tolerance field of the ruler and correspond to the H and K values
mentioned in Table 14 of the Levelling Record.
VI. Phase – Check of alignment F, G according to the table 6 of Levelling Record
(37) Measure the required F distance mentioned in the Table 6 of the Levelling Record for the RH
side, which is equal to 2408.6 mm. Ensure measurements in perpendicular direction to the
fuselage axis. Mark the distance on the floor. This is the first point through which the parallel
with the axis of the fuselage at the required distance.
(38) In the same way, create a second point through which the parallel with the fuselage axis
passes at a distance of 2408.6 mm. Thread the twine between both created points as a parallel
with the fuselage axis, to which the F and G control distances will be measured (mentioned in
Table 6 of the Levelling Record on the RH side of the airplane).
(39) Thread the plummet line over the propeller shaft and check compliance with the 2408.6 mm
dimension. It is necessary to take into account the difference in the radius of the propeller shaft.
The subtracted F dimension on the RH side of the airplane corrected by the shaft radius may
differ by the tolerance given in Table 6 of the Levelling Record.
(40) Measure the levelling point No. III on the engine levelling facet, specified as G dimension in
Table 6 of the Levelling Record on the RH side of the airplane.
(41) Perform identical measurements on the LH side of the airplane.
VII. Phase - Check of alignment A, B according to the table 7 of Levelling Record
(42) Measure the B values on the LH and RH side of the airplane, which must correspond to the
values in Table 7 of the Levelling Record.
(43) Measure the A values on the LH and RH side of the airplane, which must correspond to the
VII. Phase - Check of alignment C according to the table 12 of Levelling Record
(44) Measure the C values on the LH and RH side of the airplane, which must correspond to the
Perform the check of measurements and record the values to the Levelling Record.
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 306
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Approximately Positions of Levelling

Device
FIG. 301 POSITION OF THE LEVELLING DEVICE
FIG. 302 TOOL

(1) Fixed Ruler included in 112-610-39690 Rulers kit; (2) 112-610-39740 Ruler for measuring of
the wheel track; (3) Ruler with the replaceable tip included in 112-610-39690 Rulers kit;
(4) 112-610-39691 Template for static pressure head
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 307
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 303 TOOL

(6) Replaceable tip included in 112-610-39690 Rulers kit; (7) Ruler for measuring of levelling plane
included in 112-610-39690 Rulers kit; (8) 112-610-39691 Template of middle of the static pressure
head; (9) Plummet; (10) Tape measure-steel; (11) Portable lamp; (12) Auxiliary needle
FIG. 304 TOOL

(13) Screwdriver; (14) Double-ended spanner; (15) Twine for marking of fuselage middle;
(16) Rod for adjusting a piston rod of jack
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 308
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 305 DETAIL OF THE SETTINGS OF RULER
FIG. 306 DETAIL OF THE SETTINGS OF AUXILIARY NEEDLE
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 309
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 307 CHECK OF MEASURING A LOCATION OF THE STATIC PRESSURE HEAD
FIG. 308 MODIFICATION OF LEVELLING RULER. THE EDGE OF THE RULER BEGINS FROM ZERO.
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 310
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 309 SAMPLE OF THE AUXILIARY LEVELLING RECORD
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 311
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
008.20.00
ALL Page: 312
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12
SERVICING

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 012.00.00 15 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 16 Feb 23/18
2 Dec 10/20 17 Nov 1/11
3 Dec 10/20 18 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 19 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 20 Nov 20/15
2 Feb 23/18 21 Oct 30/19
3 Dec 10/20 22 Nov 20/15
4 Nov 1/11 23 Nov 20/15
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 24 Nov 20/15
2 Nov 1/11 25 Nov 20/15
2 Dec 10/20 27 Nov 20/15
3 Feb 23/18 28 Nov 20/15
4 Feb 23/18 29 Nov 20/15
012.00.00 1 Nov 20/15 30 Nov 20/15
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 31 Nov 20/15
3 Nov 20/15 32 Nov 20/15
4 Nov 1/11 33 Nov 20/15
5 Nov 1/11 34 Oct 30/19
6 Nov 1/11 35 Nov 20/15
7 Nov 1/11 36 Nov 20/15
8 Nov 1/11 37 Nov 20/15
9 Nov 1/11 38 Nov 20/15
10 Nov 1/11 39 Nov 20/15
11 Nov 1/11 40 Nov 20/15
12 Nov 1/11 41 Dec 10/20
13 Nov 1/11 42 Dec 10/20
14 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.00.00 43 Dec 10/20 012.00.00 311 Nov 1/11

Description and Operation 44 Feb 23/18 Servicing 312 Nov 1/11
45 Nov 20/15 012.00.01 1 Nov 20/15
46 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 20/15
47 Nov 20/15 012.00.02 1 Nov 20/15
49 Feb 23/18 3 Nov 20/15
50 Feb 23/18 4 Nov 20/15
51 Nov 20/15 5 Nov 20/15
52 Nov 20/15 6 Nov 20/15
53 Nov 20/15 7 Nov 20/15
54 Feb 23/18 8 Nov 20/15
55 Feb 23/18 9 Nov 20/15
56 Feb 23/18 10 Nov 20/15
57 Feb 23/18 11 Nov 20/15
58 Nov 20/15 12 Nov 20/15
59 Nov 20/15 13 Nov 20/15
60 Nov 20/15 14 Nov 20/15
61 Nov 20/15 15 Nov 20/15
62 Nov 20/15 16 Nov 20/15
63 Oct 30/19 17 Oct 30/19
64 Nov 20/15 18 Oct 30/19
65 Nov 20/15 012.00.03 1 Nov 20/15
66 Feb 23/18 Description and Operation 2 Nov 20/15
Servicing 301 Feb 23/18 012.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
304 Feb 23/18 302 Dec 10/20
305 Feb 23/18 303 Feb 23/18
306 Nov 1/11 304 Dec 10/20
307 Feb 23/18 305 Feb 23/18
308 Feb 23/18 306 Feb 23/18
309 Apr 5/13 307 Feb 23/18
310 Nov 1/11 308 Feb 23/18

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
012.10.00 309 Dec 10/20 012.30.02 305 Oct 30/19

Servicing 310 Feb 23/18 Servicing 306 Oct 30/19
311 Feb 23/18 012.30.03 1 Feb 23/18
312 Feb 23/18 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
313 Dec 10/14 Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
314 Dec 10/14 302 Feb 23/18
315 Feb 23/18 303 Feb 23/18
316 Nov 1/11 304 Feb 23/18
317 Nov 1/11 305 Feb 23/18
318 Feb 23/18 306 Feb 23/18
319 Feb 23/18 307 Feb 23/18
320 Feb 23/18 308 Feb 23/18
321 Feb 23/18
322 May 30/14
323 May 30/14
324 May 30/14
325 May 30/14
326 May 30/14
012.20.00 1 May 30/14
Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13
3 May 30/14
4 Nov 1/11
012.30.00 1 Feb 23/18
Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
302 Feb 23/18
012.30.01 1 Feb 23/18
Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
012.30.02 1 Feb 23/18
Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
302 Feb 23/18
303 Feb 23/18
304 Feb 23/18

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
16 012.30.00 1, 301 to 302 - 303 to 312

012.30.01 - 1 to 2 -
012.30.02 - 1 to 2 -
L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
- 301 to 306 -
012.30.03 - 1 to 2 -
301 to 308 -
17 012-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
012-List of 3 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/300d Oct 30/19
012.00.00 21, 34, 63 - -
012.00.02 - 17 to 18 -
012.30.02 305, 306 - -
18 012-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
012-List of 3 - -
Revisions
012-Contents 2 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
012.00.00 41 to 43, 46 - -
012.00.04 - - 1, 2
012.10.00 302, 304, 309 - -

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Sets of tools for operational and periodic maintenance

B598992N Tools for propeller and engine – column E
B596333N Tools for the landing gear and hydraulic system – column F
B096477N Tools for el. equipment engineer – column G
B096470N Tools for the aircrew – column H
Figure Type (Ord. No.) Name E F G H
22x22 TONA 22 Open & ring end spanner • - - -

02063808
E101107N Auxiliary pin 3mm dia • - - -

AM-63A-01/03
w/o E101108N Spanner • - - -

145-PM 30
E101109N Auxiliary pin 5mm dia • - - -
146-PM 2001
E101110N Puller for removing the engine • - - -

145-PM 22 fuel pump filter
E101112N Engine oil drainage adapter • - - -

M601-9020.7
E101113N Square socket spanner • - - -

146-PM160 s=3mm
146-PM161 s=4mm
146-PM162 s=5mm
E101105N Engine fuel system drainage • - - -
M601-915.9 (2 pcs) adapter
E101123N Reduction gearbox drainage • - - -

M601-903.7 (1 pcs) adapter
E101164N Remover of engine pressure • - - -

M601-9028.7 reducing valve; shaft packing
ring
EFFECTIVITY
012.00.00
ALL Page: 41
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E101118N Puller for removing the engine • - - -

145-PM 2037 fuel pump lid
1821 Breaker bar • - - -

E101165N to remove the mounting
bolts/nuts and blade clamp
nuts of the propeller
200TH Torque wrench (40 -200 Nm) • - - -

75190110 to tighten and torque the
mounting bolts of propeller
75190115 Socket 19 mm (3/4 inch) • - - -
75190118 Socket 22 mm (7/8 inch) • - - -
10768-4 Hexagon key wrench • - - -

75190112
E101116N Adapter for engine • - - -

M601-9019.7 preservation and
de-preservation
E101154N Ball joint spanner for propeller • - - -

152 99 400 governor installation
03167051 Gap gauge 0.05 – 1/10 for • - - -

clearance check in engine
controls
w/o E101145N Mirror for compressor blades • - - -

M601-913.9 inspection
E101147N Ratchet spanner • - - -
+ +
M601-919.4 Adapter for gas generator
or manual turning
E101163N
+
M601-919.6
EFFECTIVITY
012.00.00
ALL Page: 42
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B096040N Spanner of fuel cleaner hose • - - -
B096320N Open end wrench • - - -
w/o OMK 10 (02072110) Torque wrench • - - -

or TONA E113105T
17 DIN 894 Open end wrench - • - -
74933017
P 10 Pressure gauge - • - -
95214346
Kennedy KEN5583920K Safety wire twisting pliers - • - -

75366102
B955940N or Main wheel disc spanner - • - -

L410.9559
B096322N Spanner of lock safety pin of - • - -

landing gear
B097341N Socket wrench - • - -
B097730N Spanner for air filter - • - -
75287301 Flat screwdriver 8x175 - • - -

75287302 Flat screwdriver 2.5x75 - - • -
75287303 Flat screwdriver 3.5x100 - - • -
EFFECTIVITY
012.00.00
ALL Page: 43
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

75258001 Socket wrench 10 - • - -
3/8" DIN 3124
75258002 Socket wrench 12 - • - -
3/8" DIN 3124
75258003 Socket wrench 13 - • - -
3/8" DIN 3124
75258017 Socket wrench 17 - • - -
3/8" DIN 3124
75258019 Socket wrench 19 - • - -
3/8" DIN 3124
75258012 Socket wrench 12 - - - •
DIN 3124-S
75258013 Socket wrench 7/16” - - - •
75259107 STAHLWILLE Adapter - • - -
3/8"x125 DIN 3123-B610
75259104 STAHLWILLE Adapter - - - •
1/4"x355 DIN 3123-B6,3
75259105 GARANT Adapter - - - •
1/4"x100
75259106 GARANT Adapter - - - •
1/4"x150
75260008 Ratchet spanner - • - -
3/8"
75260007 Ratchet spanner - - - •
1/4"
TONA E100106 Torque wrench 10–50 Nm; - • - -
75190023 3/8" 400x28
96279910 Fixture for tyre dismantling - • - -

(K 20-7100)
02065974 Handle 10 CR - • - -
02065976 Handle 16 CR - • - -
B096018N Special spanner - - • -
B596668N Special screwdriver - - • -
EFFECTIVITY
012.00.00
ALL Page: 44
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B096480N Modified screwdriver - - • -
B914082N or Special screwdriver - - • •

L410.9141-05
ETP5 125W/230V Soldering gun - - • -

00900009
42035720 Soldering wire - - • -
74801016 Needle file 160 - - • -
75287500 Hexagonal screwdriver - - • •

3/32”
75239031 Hexagonal screwdriver - - - •
7/64”
75633001 Pocked knife - - • •
100-NH-1A
75650124 Clamp - - • -
3x145 Flat end tweezers - - • -

75650300
LYON 8 Brush for collector cleaning - - • -

89012208
95227409 or Multimeter EXTECH - - • -

95227411
EFFECTIVITY
012.00.00
ALL Page: 45
Nov 20/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D901060N or Dural mandrel - - - •

Z37.9110-01
D901061N or - - - •
Z37.9110-02
D901062N or - - - •
Z37.9110-03
D901088N or Modified screwdriver - - - •
Z37.9110-10
75539704 Centre punch - - - •
75639526 Metal sheet snears - - - •
75259010 Socket wrench GOLA 10 • - - -

1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
EFFECTIVITY
012.00.00
ALL Page: 46
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPLENISHING
SERVICING
1. Fuel filling
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment B596558N Ladder; Extinguisher;
Steps (e.g. B097365N)
B. Materials Not applicable
C. Tools Not applicable
D. Referenced information 012.10.00.A; (012.10.28.A)

Routine
E. Procedures
(1) General
(a) Fuel filling has to be carried out from the tanker which is provided with the fuel filters and
corresponds to the requirements of aircraft service. When filling the fuel be careful that no
impurities from filling gun surface penetrate into the fuel tank. Max. permissible mechanical
impurities in fuel = 20 microns.
CAUTION: BEFORE STARTING THE FUEL FILLING FROM THE ROAD TANKER,
MAKE SURE THAT THE TANKER HAS BEEN CHECKED AND CONTAINS
NO WATER AND OTHER IMPURITIES.
(b) Fuel density v = 0.775 kg/cu.dm at the temperature 20°C. In the winter time, carry out refueling
of the aircraft having the fuel with crystallization initial temperature max. - 50°C (T50) at latest
1 hour after landing with the fuel of crystallization initial temperature max. - 60°C. If the air
ambient temperature on the airfield is below - 45°C, then the fuel T - 50 must be
discharged from the fuel tanks and the fuel system and the fuel of crystallization initial
temperature minus 60°C must be filled into the fuel system.
(c) Used fuel sort
JET A1 according to ASTM D 1655 or DERD 2494

RT according to ST SEV 5024 or GOST 10227 or CSN 656520
TS-1 according to ST SEV 5024 or GOST 10227 or CSN 656520
PSM2 according to PN 86/C 96026
T-1 according to ST SEV 5024 or GOST 10227
PL-6 according to PND 25 005
PL-7 according to PND 25 005
JET-A according to ASTMD 1655
EFFECTIVITY
012.10.00
ALL Page: 301
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
All above fuels are allowed to mix each other.
Purity of the fuel at the fuel filter inlet port has to be meet the NAS 1638 standard max.
grade 8 as minimum or max. grade 11 in accordance with GOST 17216-2001 standard.
(d) Fuel admixtures:

Lubricity Improver
HITEC 580 – Additives used for improving an anticorrosive and lubricating properties.
Icing Inhibitors
FSII (Fuel System Icing Inhibitor) anti icing additives for electric conductivity enhancement,
additives for bonding of free water in the fuel.
Recommended type: APITOL 120 Fuel System Icing Inhibitor
For more information please see: http://advancepetro.com/fsii.htm
(e) Following regime is recommended for filling:
Pressure on the road

Filling speed Cycle: FILLING/DWELL
tanker pressure gauge
1/min MPa/kp/cu.cm Filling sec Dwell sec Filling sec Dwell sec ...
100 - 150 0.04 - 0.06 (0.4 - 0.6) 60 10 60 10 ...
NOTE: Filling regime provided standard filling gun of dia 38 mm is used.

(f) Fuel filling
For aircraft with 8 fuel tanks and wing tip fuel tanks Liters Kg LB
Total capacity of all 8 fuel tanks and 2 wing tip fuel tanks 1694.8 1313.7 2895,4
(after deducting expansion spaces)
Expansion space 91 - -
Fuel remainder that cannot be pumped out 16.8 12.7 28,-
Total usable amount 1678 1301 2867,4
CAUTION: THE OPERATING PERSONS MUST BE PROPERLY TRAINED ABOUT THE

WORK SAFETY AND FUEL HANDLING. THE OPERATING PERSONS MUST
NOT WEAR CLOTHES MADE OF ARTIFICIAL FIBRES (SILON). OPERATING
PERSONS MUST WEAR RUBBER GLOVES. NO OPEN FLAME IS ALLOWED
EFFECTIVITY
012.10.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NEAR THE AIRCRAFT. IN CASE THE AIRCRAFT IS PARKING ON A

CONCRETE APRON, THEN THE AIRCRAFT MUST BE EARTHED.
WHEN USING THE LADDER FOR THE ACCESS TO THE WING UPPER SIDE,
SPECIAL CARE MUST BE PAID TO PREVENT THE FALL DOWN.
RUBBERSOLED SHOES MUST BE USED WHEN MOVING OVER THE WING.
WHEN HANDLING THE FILLING HOSES, CARE MUST BE PAID TO AVOID
ANY DAMAGE ON THE RUBBER DEICERS OF THE WING LEADING EDGES.
(2) CENTRAL PRESSURE FUELLING (if installed)
NOTE: In case, the failure in the system of central pressure fuelling occurs, carry out the
gravity fuelling.
(a) Bring the fire extinguisher.
(b) Let the road fuel tanker drive to the right side of the fuselage rear section.
(c) Open the cover of the central pressure fuelling system (pos. 1, Fig. 301).
(d) Unscrew the cap of the pressure fuelling filler neck (pos. 2, Fig. 301) and connect
the fuel delivery hose of the fuelling equipment (pos. 5, Fig. 301).
(e) Ground the fuelling equipment – grounding point (pos. 3, Fig. 301) is located in vicinity of
filler neck (pos. 4, Fig. 301).
FIG. 301 CENTRAL FILLER NECK

(1) Cover; (2) Filler cap; (3) Grounding point; (4) Filler neck; (5) Fuelling equipment
(f) Switch on the digital protractor by pressing ON/OFF push-button. Check if the
“ABS” icon is visible on the LCD display. If not then change the measurement
mode by pressing ZERO push-button.
(g) Read the current value of the aircraft lateral level angle. When the readout is “0”
the aircraft is in the optimum lateral level for maximum fuel filling.
All fuel tanks shall be filled at the same time.
EFFECTIVITY
012.10.00
ALL Page: 303
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
When the readout is different from “0” identify which fuel tanks (LH or RH) are higher
situated than opposite side of fuel tanks by means of the arrows (▲ or ▼) shown on the
display of the digital protractor. Wing tip tank on the higher side and both main fuel tanks
shall be filled first. By unsymmetrical fuel loading the lateral pitch will be balanced and after
that fuel opposite side allowing the filling of main tank on lower side up to maximum
quantity.
(h) Switch on the BATTERY I, II, PRESSURE FUELLING and CWD-ELECTRO circuit
breakers on the overhead panel.
(i) Press the SIGNALIZATION push-button on the LH control panel. Check whether all the
lights cells illuminate. After the check release the SIGNALIZATION push-button.
(j) Depress the POWER SUPPLY push-button on the central pressure fuelling control panel
(Fig. 302 ). It will be illuminated.
(k) Let switch on fuelling on the tanker. When fuel pressure builds up in the filling line the
FUELLING light cell on the central pressure fuelling control panel will be illuminated.
(l) Check the automatic shut-off means for the fuel overflow prevention in main tanks:
• Open the valves by depressing the VALVE OPEN push-buttons of the LH, RH main tanks
• Depress the TEST push-button on the central pressure fuelling control panel until the
LH, RH VALVE CLOSED (main tank only) signal cells illuminate indicating the closed
position of valves and the VALVE OPEN signal cells go out (in about 8 seconds).
Release the TEST push-button.
(m) Open the valves by depressing the VALVE OPEN push-buttons of the required main and
wing tip tanks.
(n) Watch the fuel gauge indicators an switch manually off the fuel supply to particular tanks
by depressing the appropriate VALVE CLOSED push-buttons when the required fuel
quantity or the maximum fuel quantity 1065 lb / 485 kg is filled to the LH or RH main tanks
and/or 348 lb / 158 kg is filled to the LH or RH wing tip tanks. At fuelling of maximum fuel
quantity into wing tip tanks the automatic switching off by fuel level switches (instead of
manual one) can be used.
The difference between fuel quantities in LH and RH main fuel tanks should not be higher
than 132 Ib (60 kg).
NOTE: In case of the failure of the fuel level switch in the wing tip tanks the fuelling of
these tanks is stopped by means of the float-controlled valve. This valve switches
off by hydraulic means and the switching off is not signalized. The VALVE OPEN
push-buttons (for wing tip tanks fuelling on the fuelling control panel) remains in
EFFECTIVITY
012.10.00
ALL Page: 304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Drain the water and contaminates from wing tip tanks only if are filled with fuel.
(1) Bring the steps (e.g. B097300N) between the engine nacelle and the fuselage and the steps
(e.g. B097365N) to the wing tip fuel tank, if installed on the aircraft.
(2) Prepare the vessel under the fuel drain tube / hose under the fuselage.
(3) Drain of water and contaminates from fuel tanks by means of drain valves below the leading
edge of left and right wing and below the wing tip fuel tank.
(4) Open the FUEL DRAIN access lid located on the LH wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(5) Unscrew the cap of the B066095N (LUN 7350-8) drain valve and slip onto the discharge valve
the B096591N fuel drain tube of main tanks.
(6) Discharge 0.5 - 1 l of fuel into the vessel to secure the fuel purity
Shift out the B096591N fuel drain tube of main tanks for about 1 cm. In this way the drain valve
is closed. After emptying the fuel from B096591N tube, remove the B096591N tube
(7) Screw the cap on the B066095N (LUN 7350-8) drain valve.
(8) Close the FUEL DRAIN access lid located on the LH wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(9) Slip the B596560N fuel drain tube for drain wing tip tanks on the B560430N drain valve on the
left wing tip fuel tank and continue the operation according to item (6).
(10) Repeat the steps (4) to (9) on the RH wing.
(11) Take away the steps and vessel with drained fuel.
3. Drain of water and contaminates from fuel cleaners

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment B097300N Steps (or equivalent)
B097441N Hose for fuel drain and a bottle
(or equivalent fuel drain kit),
External power supply
B. Materials dia. 0.5 mm binding wire
C. Tools Necessary tools from the tool kit
D. Referenced Information 012.10.00.C

(012.10.28.C)
Routine
E. Procedures
Refer to the work procedure 028.00.00.F
EFFECTIVITY
012.10.00
ALL Page: 309
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Fuel discharging
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097300N); Steps (e.g. B097365N);
B096116N Fuel discharge hose;
B096591N Fuel drain tube for main tanks;
B596560N Fuel drain tube for wing tip tanks
D. Referenced information -
E. Procedures
CAUTION: OPERATION PERSONNEL MUST BE TRAINED IN HANDLING THE FUEL.

NO OPEN FLAME IS ALLOWED NEAR THE AIRCRAFT.
(1) Bring the steps (e.g. B097300N) between the engine nacelle and the fuselage and the steps
(e.g. B097365N) to the wing tip fuel tank, if installed on the aircraft.
(2) Connect the ground power unit to the airplane.
(3) Prepare the suitable tank(s) for fuel discharge.
(4) Open the lids in the aerodynamic transition cover wing-fuselage. Drain the water and
contaminates from fuel system. Drain of the fuel tanks is described in the work procedure
012.10.00.B.
(5) Screw the B096116N fuel discharge hoses to the 1703 A discharge valves.
(6) Unscrew the cap of the B066095N (LUN 7350-8) drain valve and slip onto the discharge valve
the B096591N fuel drain tube of main tanks.
(7) Discharging of the fuel operation can be speeded up when the FUEL STOP COCK levers are in
SHUT position, fire cocks are open and switches / circuit breakers of BATTERY I, II and MAIN
FUEL PUMP LH, RH located on the overhead panel are switched on. Continue in pumping, until
each of fuel tank section contains 50 kg of fuel. Switch-off the switches and circuit breakers placed
on the overhead panel and let the fuel remainder discharge from the fuel tanks due to the gravity.
NOTE: Fuel discharge can be done simultaneously from all drain/discharging valves or
only when using some of them.
(8) Discharging of left and right wing tip fuel tanks is to be carried out in such a way that the B596560N
fuel drain tube for wing tip tanks will be slipped on the B560430N discharge valve of the left and
right fuel wing tip tank.
(9) Take away the steps.
EFFECTIVITY
012.10.00
ALL Page: 310
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 020.01.04 1 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Harness storage 2 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 and shipment
3 Dec 10/20 020.01.05 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 Installation of instruments and 2 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Nov 15/13 units and radio equipment on 3 Nov 1/11
2 Mar 30/16 the airplane 4 Nov 1/11
3 Dec 10/20 020.10.00 701 Mar 30/16
4 Nov 1/11 Cleaning / Painting 702 Mar 30/16
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 802 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Mar 30/16 803 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 804 Nov 1/11
020.00.00 1 Mar 30/16 805 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 20/15 806 Nov 1/11
807 Nov 1/11
020.01.01 1 Nov 1/11 808 Nov 1/11
General instructions for the 2 Nov 1/11 809 Nov 1/11
installation of cabling and 810 Nov 1/11
instruments of electro-radio 811 Nov 1/11
equipment 812 Nov 1/11
020.01.02 1 Nov 1/11 813 Nov 1/11
Assembly of harness and 2 Nov 1/11 814 Nov 15/13
coaxial conductors 3 Nov 1/11 815 Nov 15/13
4 Nov 1/11 816 Nov 15/13
020.01.03 1 Nov 1/11 817 Nov 15/13
Assembly of electric panels 2 Nov 1/11 818 Mar 30/16
and racks 020.11.00 1 Mar 30/16
Sealants and Adhesives 2 Mar 30/16

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
020.11.00 3 Mar 30/16 020.20.00 803 Apr 5/13

Sealants and Adhesives 4 Mar 30/16 Approved Repairs 804 May 30/14
5 Mar 30/16 805 Nov 1/11
6 Mar 30/16 806 Nov 1/11
7 Mar 30/16 807 Nov 1/11
8 Mar 30/16 808 Apr 5/13
9 Mar 30/16 809 May 30/14
10 Mar 30/16 810 Apr 5/13
11 Mar 30/16 811 Nov 1/11
12 Mar 30/16 812 Nov 1/11
13 Mar 30/16 813 Dec 10/20
14 Mar 30/16 814 Nov 1/11
15 Mar 30/16 815 Nov 1/11
16 Mar 30/16 816 Nov 1/11
020.12.00 1 Mar 30/16 817 Dec 10/20
Protective Coatings 2 Mar 30/16 818 Dec 10/20
3 Mar 30/16 819 Nov 1/11
4 Mar 30/16 820 Nov 1/11
5 Mar 30/16 821 Nov 1/11
6 Mar 30/16 822 Nov 1/11
7 Mar 30/16 823 Nov 1/11
8 Mar 30/16 824 Nov 1/11
9 Mar 30/16 825 Nov 1/11
10 Mar 30/16 826 Nov 1/11
11 Mar 30/16 827 Nov 1/11
12 Mar 30/16 828 Nov 1/11
13 Mar 30/16 829 Dec 10/20
14 Mar 30/16 830 Nov 1/11
020.20.00 801 Mar 30/16 831 Dec 10/20
Approved Repairs 802 Nov 20/15 832 Nov 1/11
802A Apr 5/13 833 Dec 10/20
802B Apr 5/13 834 Dec 10/20
802C Apr 5/13 835 Nov 1/11
802D Apr 5/13 836 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
020.20.00 837 Nov 15/13 020.50.00 503 Dec 10/20

Approved Repairs 838 Nov 15/13 Adjustment / Test 504 Dec 10/20
839 Nov 15/13 505 Dec 10/20
840 Nov 15/13 506 Dec 10/20
841 Mar 30/16 507 Dec 10/20
842 Mar 30/16 508 Dec 10/20
843 Mar 30/16 509 Dec 10/20
844 Mar 30/16 510 Dec 10/20
845 Mar 30/16 511 Dec 10/20
846 Mar 30/16 512 Dec 10/20
020.30.00 601 Dec 10/20 513 Dec 10/20
Inspection / Check 602 Dec 10/20 514 Dec 10/20
603 Dec 10/20 515 Dec 10/20
604 Dec 10/20 516 Dec 10/20
605 Dec 10/20 517 Dec 10/20
606 Dec 10/20 518 Dec 10/20
020.31.00 601 Dec 10/20 519 Dec 10/20
Inspection / Check 602 Dec 10/20 520 Dec 10/20
603 Dec 10/20 521 Dec 10/20
604 Dec 10/20 522 Dec 10/20
605 Dec 10/20 523 Dec 10/20
606 Dec 10/20 524 Dec 10/20
607 Dec 10/20 525 Dec 10/20
608 Dec 10/20 526 Dec 10/20
609 Dec 10/20 527 Dec 10/20
610 Dec 10/20 528 Dec 10/20
611 Dec 10/20 529 Dec 10/20
612 Dec 10/20 530 Dec 10/20
613 Dec 10/20
614 Dec 10/20
020.40.00 1001 Dec 10/20
Spare Parts Storage 1002 Dec 10/20
020.50.00 501 Dec 10/20
Adjustment / Test 502 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
13 020- List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
020-Record of 3 - -
Revisions
020-Contents 2 - -
020.20.00 813, 817, 818, - -
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
829, 831, 833, - -
834 - -
020.30.00 601 to 606 - 607 to 614
020.31.00 - 601 to 614 -
020.50.00 501 to 530 - -

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
GENERAL 020.00.00 1 ALL
General instructions for the installation of cabling and instruments 020.01.01 1 ALL
of electro-radio equipment
Assembly of harness and coaxial conductors 020.01.02 1 ALL
Assembly of electric panels and racks 020.01.03 1 ALL
Harness storage and shipment 020.01.04 1 ALL
Installation of instruments and units and radio equipment on 020.01.05 1 ALL
the aircraft
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS PREPARATION 020.10.00 701 ALL
Cleaning / Painting 701
Approved Repairs 801
Conversion tables of used materials 801
SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES 020.11.00 1 ALL
Preparation of three-components putty U-30 M 1
(for application with a spatula)
Preparation of five-components putty U-30 M 1
(for application with a brush)
Preparation of five-component putty U-30 M 2
(for application with a spatula)
Processing of PRC sealing compounds (hermetics) 3
Processing of VUKOPLAST D 420 adhesive 8
Processing of ALDURIT putty 9
Processing of LETOXIT PL 20 adhesive 10
Processing of LETOXIT KFL 120 adhesive 12
Equivalents of Adhesives 15
PROTECTIVE COATINGS 020.12.00 1 ALL
Corrosion protection of the fasteners (bolts, 1
screws, nuts etc.)
Protective coatings hard / soft film corrosion 2
preventive compound
Chemical conversion coatings (BONDERITE or 6
ALODINE) application
Application (spray application) of REVAX 30 13
preparation
ROUTINE REPAIRS 020.20.00 801 ALL
Repairs of parts skin and fasteners attacked by 801
corrosion
Repair of perforated skin 802D
Repair of loosen riveted joints 803
ALL Page: 1
Mar 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Repair of fabric skin of control surfaces 020.20.00 804 ALL
Repair of aircraft outer paint 808
Repair of aircraft internal paint 809
Repair of aircraft signs and markings 811
Tightening and locking of joint bolts and nuts 811
Piping connection assembly with cap nuts and their 817
locking
Securing of socket-plug connections 822
Repair of conductors 823
Directions for repair of load-bearing elements of 824
airframe structure
Elimination of backlash in the controls and attachment 832
fittings
Repair of corroded magnesium-alloy components 835
Repairs of sandwich parts 837
Sealing of connectors 843
Repair of loose screws of access covers 844
STANDARD NDI METHODS 020.30.00 601 ALL
Inspection / Check 601
Standard NDI methods 601
STANDARD INSPECTION OF THE CONTROL SURFACES 020.31.00 601 ALL
Inspection of covering unevenness and linkage of 601
movable areas contours
Depth measuring of scratches, collapsed and 604
corroded places with dial depth gauge GI-2
Check and adjustment of mass balance of control 606
surface
SPARE PARTS STORAGE 020.40.00 1001 ALL
Spare Parts Storage 1001
INSTRUCTION 020.50.00 501 ALL
Adjustment / Test 501
Directive for Mass Balancing of control Surfaces 501
Instruction for alternative Mass Balancing of the 525
Aileron suspended on the Wing
(in OPERATING CONDITION)
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Adhere to the following requirements, when securing the nuts with split pins:
(a) do not unscrew the nut in order to fit the nut notch with the hole in the bolt (cap screw).
Tighten the nut in order to fit, but not more as by 30°, or replace the washer under the nut
or replace the nut itself
(b) replace the split pins by new ones. The split pin must fit to the hole free or after slight
pressure and must fit with the notch in the nut
(c) bending of split pin ends on the nut edge has to be performed with a copper or aluminum
alloy mandrel, bend split pin ends in the nut notch with a blunt screwdriver
(5) The following is allowed when securing the nuts with split pins:
(a) for securing of type A, B castle nuts (see Fig. 801) it is allowed that the end of the split pin
does not fit into (dig in) neighboring notch in the nut (according to ONL 1336 standard)
(b) insufficient pressing of split pin ends to the nut surface in the range 0.1 - 0.3 mm
(c) the contact of split pin bent ends with bolt threaded sections (cap screw)
(d) split pin pitching-off (in case of split pin great length) with subsequent burying and coating
the pinched-off place with a paint
Following defects are not allowed:
• squeezing of split pin head,
• tears and cracks on the split pin ends,
• expanding and twisting of split pin ends,
• to use the split pin more than once.
(6) Adhere to the following requirements when securing the nuts and bolts with a wire:
NOTE: The “binding wire“ is the “safety wire”.
(a) the diameter of binding wire has to be selected in such a manner so that it will fit exactly into
the hole of bolt head (nut),
(b) the wire must be placed in such a manner so that in case of spontaneous induction of oriented
force the thread tightens,
(c) binding wire must be coiled without a force, number of coils must be min 4 up to 10 mm for
the wire dia 0.8 mm included and no less than 3 coils on the length 10 mm for the wire having
the dia more as 0.8 mm,
(d) it is not necessary to coil the wire on badly accessible places, when the distance between
the elements to be secured is small,
(e) ends of binding wire must be coiled to 3 - 4 coils and pressed,
(f) the wire must be firmly tightened, deflection and diameter reduction not permitted,
(g) when securing it is not allowed cutting the wire, or twisting or loops formation on the wire
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 813
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Automatic locking
FIG. 801 LOCKING OF BOLTS AND NUTS
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 814
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Double locking
(1) Retaining ring; (2) Washer
If the fitted part of a bolt exceeds the bolted joint, before locking the bolt by a retaining ring it is
necessary to slide such a number of washers on it so that after tightening the bolt is not loose
- refer to the figure below:
FIG. 801 LOCKING OF BOLTS AND NUTS (cont.)
9. Piping connection assembly with cap nuts and their locking

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Slide rule
B. Materials Binding wire ∅ 0.8 mm and 1.2 mm;

Hydraulic liquid AMG-10, GOST 6794-75;
Petrol B-70 or NEFRAS CSN 656541
C. Tools Double-end spanners;

Wire cutting pliers;
Wire nippers;
Leading tongs
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 817
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Procedures
(1) The fitting cap nut and expanded piping surface must be washed with petrol or with NEFRAS.
(2) Make sure that the cone of the pipe fitting, the union nut and the flared part of the pipe are clean.
(3) Using a narrow spatula, apply a thin layer of BU paste, or Shell Aviation Grease 5.7108
(per MIL-G-6032D Specification), or equivalent grease per the same MIL Specification on the
threaded part of the pipe fitting.
FIG. 804 AREA OF PASTE APPLICATION
CAUTION: IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO APPLY THE GREASE ON THE FITTING

CONE, THE FLARED PART OF THE PIPE, OR ON THE THREAD OF THE
UNION NUT (SEE FIG. 804).
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO APPLY THE GREASE WITH A FINDER OR WITH A
BRUSH.
(4) Connect the piping with the fitting and slip the cap nut by hand. During this operation be careful
not to slip the cap nut over the thread.
(5) Hold the fitting with spanner, to prevent its turning (see Fig. 805), set it up to the stop and perform
final tightening of the cap nut.
(6) Connect the other piping side to the fitting in the same way as mentioned above, if required.
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 818
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Button-head rivets Flush rivets

Rivet diameter
C (minimum) C (recommended) C (minimum) C (recommended)
2.6 5 7 - 7
3 6 7 - 7
3.5 7 7 - 7
4 7 8 - 8
5 9 10 - 10
TABLE 804: MINIMUM MARGINS (mm)
(14) Clamp the parts of skins or patch by means of cleco skin pin clamps or temporary bolts with
nuts during riveting. Insert the washers under the nuts to avoid damage of the surface
treatment. Holes which do not coincide must not be pressed together with force. Rebore the
hole to a suitable larger diameter, and a bigger rivet used. If, for any reason, it is not possible to
enlarge the rivet hole, it is permissible to use a strap plate made of D 16 ATV material long
enough to enable at least two rivets to be placed on each side of the wrong hole.
(15) Alignment of deformed airframe skins. In case of permanent deformation, they lose their strength
and stability after alignment, even though no cracks appear. It is therefore necessary to stiffen the
repaired (aligned) parts of highly stressed components in a suitable way.
Align the slightly buckled skins without cracks by means of a rubber or wooden mallet or hammer,
with a block of hard wood laid under the aligned area. If the deformation has larger extent, cut out
the damaged part and replace with a new one.
Disturbed sheets with cracks must be replaced with new ones. This can only be done in an
approved repair shop equipped with assembly jigs.
(16) Stopping of cracks in the skin and blinding of small holes - they can be stopped by drilling a hole
with the help of a drill of diameter 2.1 mm to 3 mm. After a certain period, however, the crack can
continue to propagate. In such a case a new hole is to be drilled. During scheduled
maintenance, check that the crack was stopped.
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 829
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In case the crack propagation continues or it is a major crack, or in case it is located near an important
structural member, the affected part is to be cut out. There must be a distance of at least 5 mm
between the end of the crack and the edge of the cut-out. A patch of the same material and the
same or greater thickness as the original skin is to be used for repair.
(17) Small holes drilled by mistake or drilled incorrectly are to be blinded by button-head rivets.
The following applies to holes drilled by mistake in important load bearing members:
• If the hole center is located at a distance of min. three diameters of the hole from the free
edge of a load bearing member (a flange or a spar), or from the centers of the nearest rivets,
the hole is to be blinded as instructed above.
• A reduction in cross section due to the hole is to be compensated by means of a strap piece
(refer to para. 7 above).
(18) Major skin damage is to be repaired by means of (anodized) patches. Refer to Chapter 053 of the
Maintenance Manual for patch design. Mark the damaged part and cut out the most suitable
geometric shape (a circle, square, or rectangle). Care must be taken to cut out sufficient part of
the skin with all cracks and adjacent corroded spots. Corners of the cut out openings must
have a radius of not less than 15 mm and edges filed down. The edge of the cut-out must be at
least 5 mm from the end of a crack.
A patch overlap depends on the area of the cut-out:
• A patch of less than 50 cm2 is to be fastened with a single row of rivets. The patch must
overlap the cut out opening by a margin equal to 4 to 5 times the diameter of the rivets used
for attachment. (Refer to paras 7 through 13 for rivet and pitch).
• A patch with the area of more than 50 cm2 is to be fastened with a double row of rivets,
and a minimum patch overlap must be equal to 8 times the diameter of the rivets used.
Refer to paras 7 through 13 for rivet size and pitch).
If a damaged area is situated near the spar flange, spar, rib or frame, the patch must be sized
so that it overlaps the adjacent structural members and can be riveted to them.
A patch must fit perfectly to the original structure to prevent a decrease in the ultimate strength
of riveted points, and their loosening due to varying load.
Therefore the patch is to be bent slightly around its border to that it fits on to the original skin
when riveted on.
(19) The following types of patches are used according to the part of the structure to be repaired:
(a) Surface patches. The most common type which can be used in all places where smooth
surface is not a concern, i.e. anywhere except on the wing, stabilizer and fin leading edges.
After a patch is cut to shape, rivet holes are to be marked and rough-drilled using a drill of
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 830
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the next bigger size than the rivets used. Locate the patch on the skin and drill four holes
through the holes in the corners of the patch using a drill size corresponding to the rivets to
be used. Attach the patch by means of temporary bolts (cleco skin pin clamps) and drill the
remaining holes. Use more cleco skin pin clamps as necessary for a large patch. Rivets in the
corners are to be riveted first, then the middle rivets between the corners and finally the
remaining rivets.
(b) Flushed patches. They are used for repair of the wing, stabilizer and fin leading edges.
A damaged skin is to be cut out to receive a regular-shape opening with rounded corners.
Deburr the cut out opening and rivet a stiffening plate (frame) on the inner side of the skin.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual, chapter 53. The stiffening frame is to be riveted by means
of duralumin countersunk-head rivets having a shear strength of τ pt
= 250 MPa.
Flush patches are also to be used for repair of parts which are not accessible for riveting from
the inside.
The cut out opening in the skin is to be adapted so as to allow insertion of the stiffening frame.
It means that the diagonal of the opening must exceed the width of the stiffening frame.
After the stiffening frame has been riveted on the inner side of the skin, fit on a patch and rivet
it to the stiffening frame by means of special rivets, or other rivets accessible from one side.
It is also possible to use anchor nuts located on the stiffening plate and attach the patch to the
frame by means of countersunk-head bolts.
(c) Surface patches over spars, frames, and ribs. Having cut out a damaged skin over a spar or
a frame, fill the resultant gap between a patch and the spar or frame with a strap plate of the
same thickness as the skin.
The strap plate is to be fastened to the spar or frame by means of 2.6 mm dia. countersunk
rivets speed at 60 mm to 100 mm so that the rivets are located between the original rivet
holes. The patch is to be attached at a few points and then rivet holes drilled from the inside.
The original rivet holes in the spars and frames are to be used for riveting.
(d) Flush patches over spars and frames.

The same procedure as described in para (b) is to be used, except that the stiffening frame
is to be split to pass over a spar or a frame. The parts of the stiffening frame must fit on the
spar or frame with a clearance of 1 mm.
Both the stiffening frame and the patch are of the same thickness as the skin.
(20) Skin buckled over a small area (without a typical oil-canning effect) can be left as it is. If the skin
is buckled over a larger area (with a typical oil-canning effect), it is to be stiffened across a wave
between two adjacent frames or spars.
Use , , or L-shape stiffeners of 0.6 mm or 0.8 mm sheet thickness. Flatten

out the stiffener end, push it under the border of a frame, rib, or spar, and rivet it to the skin.
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 831
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(21) The rivet length before clinching is to be equal to L (i.e. the thickness of all sheets to be riveted)
+ 1.5 times the rivet diameter.
Rivet pitch must not exceed 30 mm or the rivet pitch used in the parts adjacent to the repaired area.
(22) It is strictly forbidden to cut away rivet heads in order to replace the rivets.
13. Elimination of backlash in the controls and attachment fittings

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Forcing device
Beading device
Center-punching device
Puller
Brush
B. Materials Points as required for repair

RESISTIN ML
CIATIM 201 grease
MOLYKA grease paste
White spirit
C. Tools Reamer of required size

Check gauge
Tools from the set of tools
E. Procedures
(1) Backlash detected in the controls may be due to:
• a bearing with excessive clearance
• a bush worn out above permissible tolerance
• a fitted bolt with ground surface worn out above permissible tolerance
(2) Backlash in the controls and attachment fittings is to be eliminated according to the instructions
given below.
(3) Replacement of a faulty bush in a component made of Al-alloy.
(a) Force out the faulty bush by means of a forcing device.
(b) Check the bush hole tolerance according to the Album of production, operation and repair
tolerances of the aircraft.
(c) Force in a new bush by means of the forcing device.
(d) Ream the hole in the new buck to a required diameter.
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 832
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Repair the damaged surface finish as instructed in the technological procedure in
subsection 020.20.00.
(4) Replacement of a faulty bush in a component made of Mg-alloy.
(a) Force out the faulty bush by means of the forcing device.
(b) Ream the bush hole to the next higher diameter for abnormal bush - see the Album of
production, operation and repair tolerances of the aircraft.
(c) The reamed surface is to be chemically oxide coated as instructed in the technological
procedure in subsection 020.20.00.
(d) Force in a new bush using the forcing device.
(e) Ream the hole in the new bush to a required diameter.
(f) Repair the damaged surface finish as instructed in the technological procedure in
subsection 020.20.00.
(5) Replacement of a fitted bolt
(a) Remove the bolt from its hole.
(b) Check for deviations of the fitted part of the bolt and the hole.
(c) Use either a new fitted bolt or an abnormal bolt as required depending on the deviations
found and ream the hole to a size required as per the Album of production, operation and
repair tolerances of the aircraft.
(d) Fit and secure the fitted bolt.
(6) Repair of a faulty hinge
(a) Remove the wire from a piano hinge. If the wire is seized, remove the complete hinge.
(b) Fit a new wire or a new piano hinge. Grease the hinge with Molyka grease paste.
(7) Replacement of a headed bearing.
(a) Force out the faulty bearing by means of the forcing device - see Fig. 810.
(b) Check the bearing hole diameter for correct tolerance as per the Album of production,
operation and repair tolerances of the aircraft.
(c) Force in a new bearing by means of the forcing device. Fix it by beading or center-punching
using a special device (see Fig. 811 - center - punching device).
(d) Mark the bearing as follows:
• after the first replacement apply a 10 mm wide strip of green color around the bearing
• after the second replacement apply a 10 mm wide strip of red around the bearing
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 833
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A bearing beaded on one side can be replaced twice, a bearing beaded on both sides can
be replaced four times (the first and third replacement from one side the second and fourth
replacement from the other side).
(8) Replacement of a pressed - in bearing by means of the forcing device or by means of a puller.
(a) Force out the pressed-in bearing by means of the forcing device or by means of a puller.
(b) Check the bearing hole diameter for correct tolerance as per the Album of production,
operation and repair tolerances of the aircraft. If the tolerance is not correct, replace the
component with a new one.
(c) Wash and grease a new bearing and press it in by means of the forcing device.
(d) Secure the bearing in the same way as was used for the original one.
FIG. 810 FORCING DEVICE
EFFECTIVITY
020.20.00
ALL Page: 834
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD NDI METHODS

INSPECTION / CHECK
1. Standard NDI methods

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment - refer to the step (2) and (3)
B. Materials - refer to the step (2) and (3)
C. Tools - refer to the step (2) and (3)
E. Procedures
(1) Next steps describes the standard NDI Methods used during maintenance of airplane.
(2) Visual Inspection
(a) All surfaces to be examined shall be clean, dry, and free of soils, oil, grease, paint and other
coatings, or any other material that could prevent the fault detection.
(b) The direct visual inspection is carried out as a local visual inspection by means a magnifier,
when sufficient accessibility of the inspected surface to the eye from a distance less than
600 mm and the angle at least 30 degrees relative to the inspected surface.
For the enhancement of the angle of inspection use the mirror and equipment such as an
borescope and instruments with the optical fibers.
(c) Inspected component(s) must be illuminated, if necessary, with the auxiliary light reaching at
least 160 lux at a general visual inspection and at least 500 lux at a local visual inspection.
(d) For maximize of effectiveness of inspection must be taken into account at the using of the light:
• optimal light direction of the inspected point;
• avoid glare;
• using of the light with regard to the reflectance of surface.
(e) If there is a direct visual inspection not feasible, it may be replaced for indirect visual
inspection. At the indirect visual inspection use the equipment as the borescope and
instruments with the optical fibers in conjunction with a camera (photographic film or other
photographic memory device) or other suitable means.
(f) Unless otherwise specified, inspect the all accessible outer and inner surfaces (areas).
(g) Inspection personnel, which carry out the visual inspection according to the this work
procedure must prove that:
• is familiar and trained with the used appropriate procedures
EFFECTIVITY
020.30.00
ALL Page: 601
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• have a satisfactory visual capability in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9712 or equivalent
national standard for visual capability.
(3) Penetrant Fluorescent Inspection (according to the ASTM E1417-05)

Personnel performing examinations to this practice shall be qualified and certified in accordance
with ASNT Personnel Qualification SNT-TC-1A, ANSI/ASNT CP-189, NAS 410, or MIL-STD-410 for
military purposes.
The agency performing this practice may be evaluated in accordance with Practice ASTM E 543.
(a) Classification of penetrant system and materials
Following classification according to the ASTM E1417-05:
Type: I – Fluorescent Dye
Sensitivity: Level 3 – High
Method: A – Water Washable

C – Solvent Removable
Developers: a – Dry Powder

d – Non-aqueous
(b) Materials:
The used materials must be recorded in the test record and must be conform to the
SAE AMS 2644 standard, including ensuring their traceability.
Materials i.e. Penetrant, cleaner and developer must be from one manufacturer, including
certificate and must ensure optimal sensitivity. All materials must be used as a group.
The group is a series of items used to perform penetration tests, which is supplied by the
manufacturer. Groups of the penetrating materials should not be mixed.
Cleaner Met-L-Chek E-59A

Met-L-Chek Spezialreiniger
Penetrant Met-L-Chek FP-903 - level 3
Developer Met-L-Chek D-90G

Met-L-Chek D-70
(c) Surface Preparation

All surfaces to be examined shall be clean, dry, and free of soils, oil, grease, paint and other
coatings, corrosion products, chemical residues, or any other material that could prevent the
penetrant from entering discontinuities, suppress dye performance, or produce unacceptable
background. Cleaning methods selected for a particular component shall be consistent with the
contaminants to be removed and shall not be detrimental to the component or its intended
function.
EFFECTIVITY
020.30.00
ALL Page: 602
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Clean the surface of parts with the suitable cleaner e.g. IBS-EL/Extra or equivalent. Instruction
for use are shown on the package IBS-EL/Extra cleaner.
(d) Inspection performance

The process flow chart is mentioned in table below.
min. max.
No. Process dwell dwell Additional Information
time time
1 Cleaning - - Using of Met-L-Chek E-59A

Cleaner
2 Part must be clean, dry and at - - -

the temperature 4 - 52°C
before penetrant is applied
3 Apply penetrant; Penetration 10 min 60 min Use spray or brush on application,

time Part must be in 4–50°C temperature
range;
at temperatures <10°C extend min. time
to double
4 Wash with water spray - 2 min Water temperature 10–38°C; water

pressure, max. 275 kPa; inspection
use UV-A illumination
5 Inspection of the penetrant - - Use UV-A illumination of

removal min. 100 µW/cm2; ambient white
illumination intensity, max. 100 lx
6 Removal of the water residue - - Air pressure, max. 172 kPa

with air pressure
7 Hot air drying to 25 min Air temperature, max. 70°C

drying Surface temperature, max. 50°C
8 Developer application, 10 min 30 min Apply Dry Developer (form “a”) on the all
Developing time areas of the part or Spray thin even film
of Non-aqueous Developer (form “d”)
9 Removal of the Developer - - With use lightly tapping, shakeout, air

excess blowing, air pressure max 35 kPa
10 Inspect - - Use UV-A illumination of

min. 1200 µW/cm2 in darkened area of
0–20 lx
EFFECTIVITY
020.30.00
ALL Page: 603
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Penetrant Application
• The inspected part must be grounded before the penetrant application.
• Apply the penetrant with use electrostatic spraying or painting with a brush on the all
surfaces, which are be inspected. Parts must be fixed to prevent the accumulation of
penetrant in some places. Check the all surfaces for a compact of penetrant
application with use UV-A illumination. Apply again the penetrant on the omitted areas.
• Drip away the penetrant excess. Part must be in 4–50°C temperature range.
• Unless otherwise specified, it is applied min. penetration time specified in the table in
paragraph (d).
• At temperatures of penetrant, parts or ambient temperature lower than 10°C extend the
penetration time to double.
(f) Penetrant removal
• Method A Process – Water-washable penetrants shall be removed with a water spray

in cleaning chamber under conditions mentioned in the table in paragraph (d).
Washing shall be conducted under appropriate illumination. Caution shall be exercised
to ensure that over-washing does not occur. If over-washing occurs, the component(s)
shall be thoroughly dried and reprocessed. Water spray must be applied at an angle
other than 90°to the surface of the component(s).
• Method C Process – Solvent-removable penetrants are removed by first wiping the

excess penetrant with a clean, lint-free, dry cloth or absorbent toweling. The remainder
of the surface penetrant is then removed with a solvent-dampened lint-free cloth or
towel. The surface of the component shall not be flushed with solvent and the cloth or
towel shall not be saturated with solvent. The component and cloth or toweling shall be
observed under UV-A illumination to ensure adequate removal of the surface
penetrant. Over-removal of the surface penetrant shall require the component to be
cleaned and reprocessed. Before applying of the developer must the test surface to
dry with free evaporation of solvent residues.
(g) Inspection of the penetrant removal

Perform the inspection of the penetrant removal with the UV-A illumination after washing
under conditions mentioned in the table in paragraph (d).
(h) Drying
Remove the water residue from the component(s) with air pressure before the drying under
conditions mentioned in the table in paragraph (d). Drying is performed in a closed drying
box with the hot air circulation under conditions mentioned in the table in paragraph (d).
Component(s) which exceeded maximum drying time must be cleaned and reprocessed.
EFFECTIVITY
020.30.00
ALL Page: 604
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Over heating or long drying time adversely affects the sensitivity. For further drying of
component(s) can also use a hair dryer.
(i) Developer application
• The inspected part must be grounded before the developer application.
• The developer is applied in order to “suction” of penetrant from defect places and causes
distinct indications. The dry developer is applied by means electrostatic spraying, the
non-aqueous developer is applied by means spraying. Components shall be dry before
the developer is applied. Apply the developer so completely cover all surfaces to be
inspected.
• Remove the dry developer excess by means lightly tapping or shakeout, eventually
with air blowing.
• The non-aqueous developer in aerosol must be thoroughly shake before use.

Non-aqueous developer shall be applied as a uniform thin coating over the entire surface
to be inspected. If is applied too thick layer of developer must be components cleaned
and inspection reprocessed.
• Developing time when using dry or non-aqueous developer is calculated from

application of developer on the component(s) before its own inspection.
If is exceeded the max. developing time, is necessary repeat whole process again.
The conditions are mentioned in the table in paragraph (d)
(j) Inspection
• The chamber for penetrant Fluorescent inspection of the component(s) must not be
contaminated with a fluorescent material (penetrant).
• The inspection is performed in the dark chamber with the UV-A illumination under
conditions mentioned in the table in paragraph (d). The presence of white reflective
objects in the chamber must be minimal.
• In case of close investigation of a defect, use the white lighting with intensity
min. 1000 lx and magnifier with 10x magnification.
• Inspector’s vision shall be dark adapted during of 2 min prior to examining

components.
• The minimum time to reach of the UV lamp full power is about 5 minutes and must be
at least 1200 µW/cm2 at a distance of 38 cm. The source of illumination must not be
positioned closer than 15 cm from the inspected surface.
EFFECTIVITY
020.30.00
ALL Page: 605
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(k) Evaluation
After inspection of the surface, evaluate the indication, which are relevant for determining of the
quality of component(s). Similar defect indications may be caused with disordered structure of
surface. In individual cases, reprocess the inspection to determine whether it is a defect.
(l) False indication

To verify false (disputed) indication is determined the following procedure:
• use the cloth or cotton swab moistened with a solvent approved for the type of
penetrant, wipe the area of false indication to one direction;
• apply the developer immediately;
• after dwell (standard developing) time, inspect and evaluate again the area of defect
indication;
• If is no occurrence of indication after repeated of the inspection, inspect the area of the
original defect indication under white light and magnifying glass min. 10x magnifying
- if not seen any defect indications, is the initial indication considers as false.
This procedure (I) can be performed only twice in one place.
EFFECTIVITY
020.30.00
ALL Page: 606
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD INSPECTION OF THE CONTROL SURFACES

INSPECTION / CHECK
1. Inspection of covering unevenness and linkage of movable areas contours

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Set of cylindrical pins dia 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 mm.
Steel rule L = 1500 mm
Gap gauge
Slide rule
E. Procedures
(1) Check the unevenness of wing covering and stabilizer and elevator surfaces with a rule 1500 mm
in length. Attach the rule in the same percentage profile depth along the spar. Wing allowed
unevenness are as follows:
• before the spar ............... ± 1.5 mm
• behind the spar ............... ± 2.0 mm
Allowed unevenness on flaps, ailerons, rudder and elevator surfaces are as follows:
before the spar ............... ± 1.25 mm
behind the spar ............... ± 1.5 mm
Permitted unevenness must fluently link with adjacent surface (incline min. 1 : 400).
(2) Check crossing of ailerons and elevating flaps on the trailing edges. Max. permissible crossing
± 3 mm (max. shears 6 mm).
The allowance between the wing and the aileron - 3 mm min.
(3) Check the linkage of aileron external contour to the wing contour. Max. allowed difference ± 2 mm.
(4) Inspect the linkage of external contour of rudder and elevator to the contour of pertaining fix surface.
Max. permissible difference is as follows:
• rudder ............... ± 3 mm
• elevator ............... ± 2 mm
(5) Check the linkage of elevating flaps contour to the wing contour (see Fig. 601).
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 601
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Permissible differences are specified in the following table:
Detail Mutual area of parts Upper contour Lower contour
+ 1 mm + 3 mm
A Wing - slat
- 2 mm - 2 mm
+ 1.6 mm
B Slat - flap ± 2.6 mm
- 2.6 mm
+ 1.1 mm + 3.1 mm
C Wing - flap
- 3.1 mm - 2.1 mm
D Wing - spoiler ± 1.5 mm -
E Wing - ABC tab ± 1 mm
FIG. 601 INSPECTION OF LINKAGE OF WING ELEMENTS EXTERNAL CONTOURS
(6) Check the size of gaps between the slat and wing shroud and between the elevating flap and
slat shroud.
The gaps must be kept in the range according to Fig. 602 (A).
x = 4 ............ on the internal elevating flap
x = 4 - 11 ..... on the external elevating flap
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 602
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Check the gaps on the wing upper side between the trailing edge of the wing shroud and slats
and between slats trailing and elevating flaps in retracted position.
The gaps must be kept in the range according to Fig. 602 (B).
x = 3 ............ on the internal elevating flap
x = 4 ............ on the external elevating flap
(8) Check the gaps on the wing upper side between the spoiler trailing and the slat and the gap
between the spoiler lower side and the bar of the wing shroud.
The gaps must be kept in the range according to Fig. 602 (C).
(9) Check the clearance between the wing trailing bar and oval head rivets of the slat leading edge.
Before sticking on the protection layer, it must be min. 0.6 mm. After sticking on the protection
layer the contact of rivets is allowed.
(10) The repair should be done at special reparatory works or at the producer.
FIG. 602 GAPS CHECK BETWEEN THE SLATS, WING SHROUD AND ELEVATING FLAP
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 603
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Depth measuring of scratches, collapsed and corroded places with dial depth gauge GI-2
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Indicator depth gauge GI-2 (TU 2-034-671-76)
B. Materials Cotton cloth

Petrol B-70 or NEFRAS or CSN 656541
Transformer oil GOST 982-80
C. Tools Steel rule 500 mm
E. Procedures
(1) Wash the lubricated instrument parts with clean petrol B-70 or NEFRAS and wipe with clean,
soft cloth.
(2) Remove the dirt from damaged surface.
(3) Check if the calipers are properly screwed-in both in the measuring bar and bush fastening in
instrument base.
(4) Check the instrument function. Shifting of the measuring bar in the bush and the indicator in both
directions must be continuous, without jumps, stops and knocks at the end of the movement.
(5) In case the bar or indicator does not move continuously it is allowed to flush the mechanism a
bit without indicator complete disassembly. Therefore it is necessary to remove the cover and
to dip the indicator mechanism into clean petrol B-70 or NEFRAS. Care must be paid to prevent
petrol penetration to the indicator dial. In case the dirt remains on the cog-wheel, remove it with
a brush wetted in petrol.
(6) For measurement of the depth of scratches, grooves and corroded places, a caliper with sharp
edge R = 0.03 is used, for the measurement of collapsed places a ball caliper is used.
(7) Personnel safety precautions
(a) If no special requirements are presumed for operator safety, who is using the depth GI-2,
beside general safety precaution when working with airborne technique.
(8) Measuring technical requires.
(a) Max. measurable depth of flutes, scratches, collapsed and corroded places on the skin pipes,
control bars an other elements = 2 mm.
(b) Maximum area of collapsed places, whose depth can be measured is 20 x 10 mm.
The length of a groove is not limited.
(c) Measurement outside may be carried out only if no atmospheric precipitation exist.
(d) Air temperature during measurement must be in the range from - 10 up to + 50°C, and relative
humidity of 80 % max.
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 604
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) The measurement at temperatures below - 10°C is allowed only in case that the movement
of the measuring bar in the bush and the indicator in both directions is continuous without any
troubles.
(f) Vibration of surfaces and elements during measurement of the depth of grooves, scratches,
collapsed and corroded places is not permitted.
(g) The measured place must be well illuminated.
(9) Check the zero position of GI-2
(10) Put the instrument directly on the surface of measured element on the groove (scratch, collapsed
or corroded place), whilst it is important to observe the damaged place and the instrument caliper
through the base cross-section.
(11) In case of need turn align the zero position with the indicator by means of turning the depth gauge
edge.
(12) Transfer instrument to the grooves (scratches, collapsed or corroded places) and read out the
depth. When transferring the instrument with needle caliper, it is necessary first of all to lift the
bar in order not to damage the checked surface.
(13) Operation according to para (9) ÷ (11) should be performed 3 times.
(14) To obtain the depth of a groove (scratch, collapsed place), calculate the root mean squares of
3 dimensions.
(15) After finishing measurement, lubricate the body and instrument GI-2 friction surfaces with
transformer oil GOST 982-80.
(16) After work completion store the depth gauge, base and calipers in the box.
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 605
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Check and adjustment of mass balance of control surface

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Special balancing device, special attachment fittings
Elevator: 112-513-21779
Rudder: 112-510-20260
Aileron: 12-513-1198/1, 12-513-1198/2
E. Procedures
(1) When the control surfaces and trim tabs are repaired in a servicing plant, new mass balancing of
control surfaces is performed in accordance with work procedure in section 020.50.00.
(2) When the control surfaces, trim tabs, and their paint are repaired, or the trim tabs and their controls
replaced in field conditions, the following must always be carried out:
a) check of mass balance of the control surfaces (in accordance with the following procedure)
b) adjustment of mass balance, if necessary (based on the results of the mass balance check).
Perform mass balance according to instruction mentioned in section 020.50.00.
(3) When the mass balance is adjusted, a new Balance Record is to be made out in two copies.
This new Balance Record supercedes the preceding one (having a lower ordinal number).
One copy of the Balance Record is filed by the department carrying out the check and adjustment
of mass balance, the other copy is filed by the airplane operator (like the Leveling and Rigging
Record). The operator must also file the preceding Balance Record showing reasons for their
cancellation as well as the numbers of the superseding Balance Records.
This file provides a chronological survey of interventions in the control surfaces.
NOTE: If the original (S/N 1) Balance Records is not included in the airplane documentation,
the first Balance Record made out after a repair and subsequent adjustment of mass
balance is given the ordinal numbers. In this case it should be stated in the Note that
No. 1 Balance Record was not included in the airplane documentation. (The Balance
Records are being included in the documentation starting from the year 1996).
(4) Balance Record forms for each particular control surface and for various airplane Models (to be
reproduced) are stated in section 020.50.00.
(5) It is forbidden to coat the control surfaces and the trim tabs with another layer of paint.
If it is necessary to change the painting, the original paint layer must be removed before the new
paint coat is applied.
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 606
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) The value of mass balance of a control surface (σ) is defined by the following formula:
X T (m)
σ (% C) = x 100
C (m)
where
X T (m) ........... perpendicular distance of C.G. of the control surface from its axis of rotation
( + behind the axis of rotation)
C (m) ............. geometric mean chord of the control surface behind its axis of rotation
(perpendicular to the axis of rotation)
FIG. 603
σ < 0 .............. The control surface is statically overbalanced (heavy on the leading edge)
σ = 0 .............. The control surface is statically balanced (the C.G. is it the axis of rotation)
σ > 0 .............. The control surface is statically underbalanced (heavy on the trailing edge)
(7) A general-purpose balancing device (Fig. 604) can be used to check and adjust the mass balance
of the control surfaces.
However, special attachment fittings are needed to fit the control surfaces (elevator, rudder, aileron)
in the balancing device.
It is recommended to have the mass balance of the control surfaces checked and adjusted in a
special repair shop equipped with special devices.
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 607
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 604 GENERAL – PURPOSE BALANCING DEVICED

(1) Frame; (2) Adjustable clamps with arms for suspension of control surface; (3) Control surface;
(4) Locking of trim tab with self-adhesive tape (on elevator); (5) Special attachment fitting
(8) Check and adjustment of mass balance of elevator.

Each half of the elevator must be mass balanced separately so that the center of gravity of the
balanced elevator lies within.
+ 4.3 < σ E [% C E ] < + 4.7
which is with
C E = 0.431 m : 18.5 < X E [mm] < 20.3
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 608
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 605
(9) Check of elevator mass balance by calculation (without balancing device).
NOTE: This method can only be used if there is a Balance Record for the elevator showing its
condition before the repair. If such Balance Record (usually S/N 1) is not included in
the airplane documentation, the mass balance of the elevator is to be checked and/or
adjusted in compliance with para (2) subpara (b).
This method is applicable for small repair (e.g. repair of elevator fabric covering by
patches) when additional mass (Δ G R ) and perpendicular distance of its C.G. from the
elevator axis of rotation (X R ) can be reliably determined by calculation and/or weighing.
Procedure:
(a) Before the repair, weight the complete elevator and compare the weight with the value of
G E (BAL) [kg] indicated in point 5 of the Balance Record for the elevator before the repair.
If the two values are not coincident, check and/or adjust the mass balance of the elevator
in compliance with para (2) subpara (b).
(b) If the two weights are coincident, read the value of mass balance σ E [% C E ] indicated in
point 3 of the Balance Record for the elevator before the repair.
NOTE: This value is only applicable if the value indicated in point 4 of the Balance
Record is Δ G 1 = 0.
If the value indicated in point 4 of the Balance Record is
Δ G 1 ≠ 0, then
σ E = + 4.5 [% C E ]
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 609
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Determine the following values:
G R [kg] ..... increase + or decrease - of elevator weight ("additional mass")
X R [m] .......... perpendicular distance of additional mass C.G. (Δ G R ) from the axis of rotation
(d) Calculate the new weight and the value of mass balance of the repaired elevator using the
following formulas:
G E (R) [kg] = G E (BAL) + ∆ G R .... the resultant weight of one elevator half after the repair
(without adjustment of mass balance)
σ. 100
GE( BAL) E + ∆ GR . X R .
σ CE
E( R) [% C E( BAL) ] = ………the resultant value of mass
GE( R)
balance of one elevator half after the repair, without any change in the mass balance
NOTE: C E = 0.431 m
If the condition + 4.3 σ E(R) < [% E ] + 4.7 is met, no change in the mass balance is to be
done. A new Balance Record is to be made out (marked with the next ordinal number) which
must indicate (in the "Notes") the description of the executed repair and the resulting changes
in the weight characteristics of the repaired elevator:
Δ G R [kg], X R [m], G E (R) [kg], and σ E (R) [% C e ].
This new Balance Record will supersede the original and/or preceding Balance Record -
- see para (3).
If the above stated condition is not met, adjustment of the mass balance (which actually means
new mass balancing) is to be done in compliance with para (2) subpara (b) and a new Balance
Record made out to supersede the preceding one.
(10) Check of mass balance of repaired elevator by means of balancing device.

The check of mass balance is to be made.
(a) if it is not possible to determine the distribution of additional masses, their centers of gravity,
and arms relative to the elevator axis of rotation
(b) whenever the trim tab is replaced
(c) when a new paint coat is applied on the elevator, or when a major repair of the paint coat
is made
(d) when a new paint coat is applied on the elevator trim tab
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 610
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Check and/or adjustment of rudder mass balance

The rudder must be statically balanced (σ R = 0). If the rudder is overbalanced ("heavy on the
leading edge"), this will not affect aeroelastic characteristics but it means an unnecessary extra
weight. Since the procedure for rudder mass balancing is very simple, it is recommended to
check and adjust the mass balance by means of the balancing device after any repair of the
rudder, including execution of a new Balance Record (as per para (2) subpara (b), para (3),
para (5).
(12) Check and/or adjustment of aileron mass balance

Each aileron must be statically balanced and/or overbalanced (it means that its center of gravity
must be on or forward of the axis of rotation).
σ A [% C A ] ≤ 0
NOTE: Dynamic balance of the ailerons is provided for by means of a balancing mass of
G B2 = 0.325 kg (lead rollers + duralumin spacing tube) which is, and must always
remain in the outboard mass balance bushing.
(13) In consideration of the above condition for aileron mass balancing, the procedure indicated in
para (2) subpara (b) is recommended as the simplest method for checking and/or adjusting the
aileron mass balance after an aileron repair. A new Balance Record is to be made out after each
check/adjustment of mass balance.
This procedure must be carried out
(a) when there is no Balance Record showing the aileron mass balance before the repair
(b) when the aileron trim tab, or the trim tab control is replaced
(c) when a new paint coat is applied on the aileron
(d) when a new paint coat is applied on the aileron trim tab
(e) after any repair resulting in a displacement of the center of gravity behind the axis of rotation
(toward the trailing edge).
This applies to all ailerons which were hundred-per-cent statically balanced before the repair
(i.e. σ A = 0% C A ).
(The value of σ A is shown in point 7 of the aileron Balance Record).
(14) Check of aileron mass balance after a repair by calculation.

This method can only be used if there is a Balance Record showing the aileron condition before
the repair. It is applicable if the aileron before the repair was hundred-per-cent statically balanced
(σ A = 0), if the repair evidently results in a displacement of the center of gravity forward of the axis
of rotation, and if the increase in weight Δ G R [kg] and the perpendicular distance of additional
mass C.G. Δ X R [m] from the axis of rotation cannot be reliably determined.
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 611
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 606
Then
G A (R) [kg] = G A + G R ..... resultant weight of the aileron after the repair
σ 100 ∆ GR [kg] x X R [m]

A( R) [% C A ] = x ……... resultant value of aileron mass
C A [m] G A( R) [m]
balance after the repair (σ A (R) < 0)
where C A = 0.257 m
Since in this case σ a (R) [% C A ] is always less than zero (σ A (R) [% C A ] < 0) no adjustment of
mass balance is made. It is, however, necessary to make out a Balance Record indicating (in the
"Notes") the description of the repair and the resulting changes in the weight characteristics of the
repaired aileron:
Δ G R [kg], X R [m], G A (R) [kg], σ A (R) [% C A ]
If the aileron of airplane is statically overbalanced and if it is possible to determine reliably the
increase in weight Δ G R [kg] and the perpendicular distance of additional mass C.G. X R [m]
from the axis of rotation (both forward of the axis of rotation - , and aft of the axis of rotation
+ , proceed as follows:
(a) Before the repair, weigh the complete aileron and compare its weight with the value of G A [kg]
indicated in point 6 of the Balance Record of the aileron before the repair.
If the two values are not coincident, check and/or adjust the mass balance of the aileron in
compliance with Instruction for performing mass balance (refer to the para (2) subpara (b)
mentioned in this WP).
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 612
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) If the two weights are the same, read the value of static mass balance σ A [% C A ] indicated
in point 7 of the Balance Record.
(c) Determine the values of Δ G R [kg] and X R (m) by weighing, measurement or calculation.
(d) Calculate new weight characteristics of the repaired aileron.
using the following formulas:
G A (R) [kg] = G A + ∆ G R .......... resultant weight of the aileron after the repair
(without adjustment of mass balance);
σ G A [kg] σ
x A [% C A ] + 389 . 105 x ∆ GR [kg] x X R [m]
A( R) [% C A ] = ...resultant value of
G A( R) [kg]
static mass balance of the aileron after the repair, without any change in the mass balance.
(e) If the condition σ A (R) [% C a ] ≤ 0 is met, no adjustment of the mass balance is required. It is,
however, necessary to make a new Balance Record (marked with the next ordinal number)
which must indicate the description of the repair and the resulting changes in the weight
characteristics of the repaired aileron:
Δ G R [kg], X R [m], G A (R) [kg] and σ A (R) [% C A ]
This new Balance Record will supersede the original and/or preceding Balance Record
(see para (3) of this WP).
(f) If the above stated condition is not met, i.e. σ A (R) [% C A ] > 0 an adjustment of mass balance
(which actually means new mass balancing) is to be done in compliance with section
020.50.00 (refer to the para (2) subpara (b) mentioned in this WP), and a new Balance
Record made out to supersede the preceding one, see para (3) of this WP.
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 613
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
020.31.00
ALL Page: 614
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUCTION
ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. Directive for Mass Balancing of Control Surfaces

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Not applicable
B. Materials BP20204L – Balance Record for LH Elevator of

L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and L410NG Airplane;
BP20204P – Balance Record for RH Elevator of
L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and L410NG Airplane;
BP20205N – Balance Record for Rudder of
L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and L410NG Airpalnes;
BP20206L – Balance Record for LH Aileron of
L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and L410NG Airplanes;
BP20206P – Balance Record for RH Aileron of
L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and L410NG Airplanes
C. Tools Necessary tools from tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) The control surfaces (elevator, rudder, and ailerons) must be mass balanced to a prescribed
value in accordance with the airworthiness requirements, aeroelastic calculation and tests.
The value of mass balance of a control surfaces (σ) is defined by the following formula:
X T [m]
σ [%C] = X 100 where
C [m]
X T [m] .......... perpendicular distance of C.G. of the control surface from its axis of rotation
( + behind the axis of rotation)
C [m] ........... geometric mean chord of the control surface behind its axis of rotation
(perpendicular to the axis of rotation)
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 501
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 501
σ < 0 .......... the control surface is statically overbalanced
σ = 0 .......... the control surface is statically balanced
σ > 0 .......... the control surface is statically underbalanced
(2) Mass balancing must be made after the control surface has been completely finished (including
installation of electrical equipment, controls, etc.) and painted (including colored sings and markings).
(3) Mass balancing of the control surfaces must be carried out in a balancing device which enables
deflecting the control surfaces with minimum friction in the attachment fittings. The control surfaces
are to be suspended at two points, and the bearings must be clean and greased.
(4) The Balance Record provides evidence of mass balancing of each particular control surface, as well
as of its history on a particular aircraft. The Balance Record is developed during mass balancing
of a control surface and its installation on an aircraft.
(a) A separate Balance Record is made out in two copies for each particular control surface in
a language version according to customers option. One copy is archived in the Manufacturers
Certificates Department, the other one is delivered to the aircraft operator, as a part of the
technical documentation for the aircraft.
NOTE: Control surfaces manufactured as spare parts are stored unpainted and unbalanced.
Before being dispatched to a particular customer (when they have been painted
with the top coat including colored signs and markings) they are mass balanced
in accordance with this Directive, and both copies of the Balance Record are made
out. In this case, only Part A, and the name of the customer in Part B of the Balance
Record is filled in. One copy is passed to the file of the Manufacturers Certificates
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 502
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Dept., while the other one is delivered to the customer together with the control
surface. Part C, and the remaining sections of Part B will be filled in by the Quality
Control of the operator when the control surface is installed on a particular aircraft.
(b) Part A of the Balance Record is filled in by the department having carried out the mass
balancing, and confirmed by the Quality Control Inspector of that department.
• Parts B and C are filled in by the Quality Control Inspector of final assembly when a
control surface is installed on a particular aircraft. The Quality Control Inspector also
arranges for and is responsible for development of Balance Records in the appropriate
language version for the customer.
• Part D of the Balance Record (information concerning cancellation of its validity) is

filled in only by the aircraft operator when a new Balance Record (marked with the next
higher ordinal number) is developed after the mass balance of a control surface has
been adjusted due to a repair, or due to replacement of the original control surface by
another one.
NOTE: Therefore, part D of the Balance Records (in Czech) archived in the
Manufacturers Certificates Department is always blank.
(5) The operator is obliged to archive the Balance Records for all the control surfaces of this aircraft
in chronological order showing any intervention in the mass balance (after a repair of a control
surface, a repair of its paint coat, after replacement of any trim tab or after replacement of a control
surface with another one). This means that both the "valid" and the "cancelled" Records must be
archived. Chronology is indicated by ordinal numbers of Balance Records for each particular control
surface on a particular aircraft. (The Balance Records delivered by the manufacturer together with
each aircraft are marked with serial number 1).
• When a control surface is repaired, or its paint coat is repaired, or any trim tab is replaced,
the authorized department must carry out a repeated mass balancing of the control surface, and
make out a new Balance Record (Part A).
When this control surface is reinstalled on the original aircraft (or installed on another aircraft),
the operator (or the Quality Control Inspector of final assembly) fill the Parts B and C of this
Balance Record, and mark the Record with the next higher ordinal number compared to that
of the preceding Balance Record (for the control surface installed on that aircraft before).
• If a new (spare) control surface is installed on the aircraft, the operator (or the Quality
Control Inspector of final assembly) will fill in Parts B and C of the Balance Record delivered
with the replacement control surface. Part A of the Record is already filled in by the aircraft
manufacturer. The Balance Record is marked with the next higher number following that of the
preceding Record (for the original control surface).
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 503
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Validity of the preceding Balance Record must be cancelled by the operator who will fill in Part
D showing the date, the reason for cancellation (repair or replacement of a control surface),
and the ordinal number of the Balance Record superseding it.
NOTE: a) The operator is responsible for obtaining new forms of the Balance Records
by copying the samples provided in this Directive.
b) If an aircraft (e.g. a prototype intended for testing) is operated by Aircraft
Industries, an authorized department (usually Aircraft Prototype Production
Dept.) is considered as the aircraft operator.
(6) Any repeated paint coating of the control surfaces is forbidden. If it is necessary, for any reason,
to change the painting, the original paint layer must be removed before the new paint coat is applied.
(7) Should a condition occur when using this Directive, which cannot be resolved while observing the
instructions herein, it is necessary to discuss any deviation with Department of Project and
Technical Analyses (PTA) of airplane producer Aircraft Industries, a. s.
(8) During check flights and before the aircraft is put into service, all the requirements of this Directive
must be met.
(9) Mass balancing of elevator Dwg. No. B533200L / B533200P,

Dwg. No. B533270L / B533270P
(10) All the principles given in steps (1) to (8) of this Directive must be observed.
(11) Each half of the elevator must be mass balanced so that the value of the mass balance ranges
between 4.38 % and 4.7 % GMC (C E ) behind the axis of rotation (toward the trailing edge):
4.3 < σ E [% C E ] < 4.7
(12) Each half of the elevator is mass balanced separately.
(13) Conditions for mass balancing:
(a) The elevator trim tab must be locked in the neutral position by means of the adhesive tape.
(b) Balancing weight (G B ) is to be suspended in the hole of the tubular rivet fastening the outboard
mass balance.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 504
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: THE WEIGHT OF G B INCLUDES THE WEIGHT OF THE DISH FOR LEAD
SHOT.
(14) Geometric characteristics
(a) Geometric mean chord of the elevator behind its axis of rotation C E = 0.431 m, measured
perpendicular to the axis of rotation.
(b) Required position of elevator center of gravity (when underbalanced to σ E = + 4.5 % G E ):
4 .5
X T (E) = x C E = 0.0194 m
100
(15) Basic procedure for mass balancing
(a) Weigh each half of the elevator separately and determine G E
(b) Balance the elevator by means of the balancing device to σ E = 0 %, using balancing weight
G B - see step (13-b).
NOTE: • For exact balancing use lead shot as balancing weight.

• Balancing to the value σ E = 0 means setting the elevator in the balancing device
to horizontal balanced position (using balancing weight G B ) in which the elevator
stays without action of external forces.
(c) Calculate the value of mass balance σ e by means of formula No. 3 given in the BP20204L and
BP20204P Balance Records.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 505
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) If the value of σ E is within 4.3 % and 4.7 % C E , no change in mass balance is required,
and a value of Δ G 1 = 0 kg is to be entered in the Balance Record (item No. 5).
(e) When the center of gravity position is outside the permissible range, it is necessary to change
the weight of the inboard mass balance (B033562N) by the value of Δ G 1 (calculated by
means of formula No. 5 given in the BP20204L and BP20204P Balance Records) in order
to mass balance the elevator σ e = 4.5 % C E (behind the axis of rotation).
• If the value of Δ G 1 is negative (corresponding to σ E < 4.5 % C E ), the weight of the

inboard mass balance is to be reduced by this value by drilling out (or milling out) the
appropriate amount of material as shown in the Table No. 1).
• If the value of Δ G 1 is positive (corresponding to σ E > 4.5 % C E ) the weight of the inboard
mass balance is to be increased by this value by drilling holes in area mentioned in
Table No. 1 and then filling the holes with P/N B270129N (lead rollers of 15.5 mm in
diameter and not more than 20 mm in length) in order to receive the prescribed value.
Clinch the rollers when inserted in the holes to secure in them in position.
(16) Mass balancing of rudder Dwg. No. B531200N up to Serial No. 2903; Dwg. No. B531309N
from Serial No. 2904 and Dwg. No. B531239N
(a) All the principles given in steps (1) to (8) of this Directive must be observed.
NOTE: Triangular fastening members of middle hinges do not belong to the rudder and
therefore, the rudder must be weighed and balanced without these members.
(b) The rudder must be mass balanced to σ R = 0 %, it means that its center of gravity is located
on the axis of rotation.
(c) The rudder trim tab must be set to the neutral position.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 506
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d1) Mass balancing of rudder Dwg. No. B531200N and B531239N:

If the rudder is heavy on the trailing edge, it is to be balanced by increasing Δ G MU (i.e.
weight of “upper additional mass balance”) in the upper mass balance. Its value of the additional
mass is to be determined according to the upper balance weight (G BU ) suspended in the
auxiliary hole in rib No. 17 to balance the rudder to σ R = 0 %. The G BU weight is
understood a storage device (dish) for storing lead pieces including.
(d2) Mass balancing of rudder Dwg. No. B531309N:

If the rudder is heavy on the trailing edge, it is to be balanced by increasing Δ G MU (i.e.
weight of “upper additional mass balance”) in the upper mass balance.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 507
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) If the rudder is heavy on the leading edge, it is to be balanced by drilling off the excess weight
Δ G ML (i.e. weight of “drilled out lower mass balance”) from the lower mass balance (G ML ).
The value of the weight to be drilled off is determined according to the lower balance weight
(G BL ) suspended in the auxiliary hole rib. No. 11. The G BL weight is understood a storage
device (dish) for storing lead pieces including.
(17) Geometric mean chord of the rudder behind its axis of rotation is:
(a) C R = 0.590 m – valid for rudder B531200N and B531239N
(b) C R = 0.6522 m – valid for rudder B531309N
Measured perpendicular to the axis of rotation.
(18) Weight the rudder, G R (0) [kg]
Fit the rudder in the balancing device and determine whether it is:
“heavy on the trailing edge” (σ R > 0 %)
“statically balanced” (σ R = 0 %)
“heavy on the leading edge” (σ R < 0 %).
If the rudder is not statically balanced, proceed as follows:
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 508
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Rudder is “heavy on the trailing edge”.
• Remove the upper mass balance and weight its.
• Suspend a dish in the auxiliary hole in the middle of the front spar and balance by
adding the weight of the G BU [kg] to value σ R = 0 %. Observe the conditions
mentioned in the step (13-b). From the difference between the G BU value [kg] and the
upper mass balance, determine the required weight of “upper additional mass balance”
Δ G BU [kg].
If Δ G BU (kg) exceeds the value 0.5 kg, Chart No. D.3 must be used, even if it is not a
repeated coat.
• Increase weight of upper mass balance by the detected value by screwing 2 mm thick
lead plates (weights) (P/N B031551N) in predetermined locations (B531205N bolts).
First fit the weights (6 pcs at the most) in the bottom location A, and then successively
to the locations B, C and D (see the Chart No. D.1A). The number of weights in each
location must not exceed 6 pcs. Secure the screws according to the drawing.
• When all balancing locations are full (see NOTE below), continue again from location
A by adding a maximum of 9 pieces (the total number is 15 pieces) gradually to other
locations as needed - see Chart No. D.3. If all balancing locations are filled with 15
pieces of weights (see WARNING! below), it is possible to continue by adding another
max. 5 pieces (max. number in each balancing point is 20 pieces).
WARNING: BALANCE RECORD IN THIS CASE MUST BE SUBMITTED (SENT)

AND CONSULTED WITH THE DEPARTMENT OF PROJECT AND
TECHNICAL ANALYSES (PTA) OF AIRPLANE PRODUCER
AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES, A. S.!
NOTE: At the rudder that is balanced before this modification must be replaced the
original bolts M5 ČSN 02 1103.44 for a B531205N bolts and nuts according
current condition of Dwg. No. B031550N.
• Lock the weights according to the drawing and reinstall the upper mass balance.
(b) Rudder is “heavy on the leading edge”
• Determine the value of the lower balance weight (G BL ) required to set the rudder into
equilibrium (σ r = 0 % according to the step (16-e)).
• In Chart No. D.2 read the depth H [mm] of four holes to be drill-out in the lower mass
balance, according to the value of G BL [kg] and the diameter of drill selected
(d = 20 or 23.5 or 25 mm)
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 509
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Lower mass balance:
• Remove the lower mass balance and drill four holes of a selected diameter to the
depth found in the Chart at Premark locations.
NOTE: If H max exceeds 25 mm, further procedure must be consulted with Department of
Project and Technical Analyses (PTA) of airplane producer Aircraft Industries, a. s.
• Determine the drill-out value of Δ G ML [kg] to be removed from the RH vertical scale in
the Chart No. D.2.
NOTE: For all drill diameters, the Δ G ML value is to be read from the curve for
d = 23.5 mm. At repeat balancing an already drilled out balance, the depth is
added to the depth of the previous drilled out.
• Reinstall the lower mass balance
(c) Check for proper mass balancing and fill in the Balance Record.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 510
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(19) Mass balancing of aileron Dwg. No. B025601L or B524910L and B025601P.
All the principles given in steps (1) to (8) this Directive must be complied with.
(a) Each aileron is provided with:
• inboard mass balance (between ribs No. 21b and 22)
• outboard mass balance (between ribs No. 30b and 31a).
(b) Static mass balance is characterized by the value of σ A indicating the aileron central
gravity position X T (A) in per cent of geometric mean chord (C A ) of the aileron area behind the
axis of rotation:
XT( A)
σ A [% C A ] = x 100 where
CA
C A = 0.257 m ..... geometric mean chord of the aileron area behind its axis of rotation
X T (A) [m] ............ position of aileron center of gravity with regard to its axis of rotation
(c) The trim tab on the left aileron must be set to neutral position.
(d) Requirements for aileron mass balance
• Each aileron must be mass balanced so as to ensure dynamic overbalance for the 1st
anti-symmetrical wing bending mode of vibration, on value 2 [% C A ] while it must be
statically balanced “to the axis of rotation” (σ A = 0 % C A ) or overbalanced (i.e. “heavy
on the leading edge” σ A < 0 % C A ).
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 511
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Dynamic overbalance is provided by means of "basic" balancing mass of G B2 = 0.325 kg

(lead rolls + duralumin spacing tube) which is always put in the outboard mass balance
bushing).
• The required static mass balance is to be obtained by adding balancing mass (lead rollers)
first in the inboard mass balance bushing (G B1 [kg]) and after this bushing has been filled,
adding balancing mass Δ G B2 [kg] in the outboard mass balance bushing (in which the
balancing mass of G B2 = 0.325 kg had already been put).
(e) Basic procedure for mass balancing
• Put the "basic" balancing mass of G B2 = 0.325 kg (lead rollers + duralumin spacing table)
in the outboard mass balance bushing of the complete aileron, and screw in the plug of
the bushing. The inboard mass balance bushing is to remain empty, but its plug is to be
plugged in.
• Weigh such completed aileron and enter the weight G A (0) [kg] in the BP20206L and
• Suspend the aileron in the balancing device and determine whether it is
• “heavy on the trailing edge”
• “statically balanced”
• “heavy on the leading edge”
Proceed according to the corresponding procedure as follows:
(f) Aileron is “heavy on the trailing edge”. Statically balance the aileron “to the axis of rotation”,
i.e. σ A = 0 % C A .
First add lead rollers to the inboard mass balance as follows:
• Suspend a dish compensating for the weight of the plug and the lock screw in the inboard
mass balance bushing.
• Add balance weights to the dish to determine the balancing mass required to set the aileron
into equilibrium.
• If this balancing mass (lead rollers) can be put completely in the inboard mass balance
bushing, no other balancing mass is required for mass balancing.
The following values are to be entered in the BP20206L a BP20206P Balance Records:
G B1 [kg]
Δ G B2 = 0 kg,
G M = 0 kg,
G A [kg] = G A (0) + G B1 ,
G A = 0 [% C A ]
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 512
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
If the required balancing mass cannot be put completely in the inboard mass balance bushing,
proceed as follows:
• Put as much balancing mass G B1 [kg] as possible in the inboard mass balance bushing.
• Fix the lead rollers by means of a rubber insert, screw in the plug and lock it.
• The remaining balancing “to the axis of rotation” carry out on the outboard mass balance.
Proceed in the same way as indicated above for the inboard mass balance.
The required balancing mass, Δ G B2 [kg], is added to the "basic" balancing mass of
G B2 = 0.325 kg providing for dynamic overbalance to – 2 % C A .
• Fix the balancing mass in the center mass balance bushing screw in the plug and lock it.
• Enter the following values in the BP20206L a BP20206P Balance Records:
G B1 [kg],
Δ G B2 [kg],
G M = 0 [kg],
G A [kg] = G A (0) + G B1 + Δ G B2 ,
σ A = 0 [% C A ]
• Check for static balance of the aileron “to the axis of rotation” in the balancing device:
(g) Aileron is “heavy on the leading edge”
• The aileron center of gravity is forward of its axis of rotation (X T < 0 m) which means that
the aileron is statically overbalanced (σ A < % C A ) and therefore no balancing mass is to
be added.
• Determine the value of static overbalance σ A [% C A ] as follows:
• Suspend the aileron in the balancing device.
• Insert a pin in the middle attachment fitting (on rib. No. 24), attach a string to the pin,
route the string over the trailing edge, and suspend a dish on its end.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 513
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• By means of weights put on the dish, determine the "additional" mass G M [kg] required
for putting the aileron into balanced state. Enter the value of G M in the BP20206L a
• Calculate the value of static overbalance σ a using the following formula:
100 x X M x GM G [kg]
σ A [% C A ] = - = - 106.81 x M
C A x GA G A [kg]
• Enter the following values in the Balance Record.
Δ G B2 = 0 kg,
G M > 0 kg,
G A [kg] = G A (0) ,
σ A < 0 [% C A ]
(20) Samples of the balance charts and records – Refer to the following pages
(a) Chart of determine the necessary upper additional mass balance – Chart No. D1A
Chart of determine the necessary upper additional mass balance – Chart No. D.1B
(b) Chart of determine the excess of lower mass balance - Chart No. D2
(c) Chart of determine the necessary upper additional mass balance – Chart No. D.3
- this chart follows the Chart No. D.1A
(d) Adjustment of elevator inboard mass balance – Table No.1
(e) Sample of BP20204L – Balance Record for LH Elevator of L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and
L410NG Airplanes
(f) Sample of BP20204P – Balance Record for RH Elevator of L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and
L410NG Airplanes
(g) Sample of BP20205N – Balance Record for Rudder of L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and
L410NG Airplanes
(h) Sample of BP20206L – Balance Record for LH Aileron of L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and
L410NG Airplanes
(i) Sample of BP20206P – Balance Record for RH Aileron of L410UVP, UVP-E, L-420 and
L410NG Airplanes
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 514
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chart No. D.1A
Rudder Dwg. No. B531200N up to Serial No. 2903 and Dwg. No. B531239N
This chart is used to determine the necessary weight of "upper additional mass balance" Δ G MU [kg]
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 515
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chart No. D.1B
Rudder Dwg. No. B531309N from Serial No. 2904

This chart is used to determine the necessary weight of "upper additional mass balance" Δ G MU [kg]
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 516
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chart No. D.2

This chart is used to determine the "excess of lower mass balance" Δ G ML [kg].
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 517
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chart No. D.3

Chart of determine the necessary upper additional mass balance - this chart follows the Chart No. D.1A
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 518
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table No. 1
Adjustment of elevator inboard mass balance
1 Inboard mass balance before the

adjustment
2 Adjustment of mass balance if the

weight is to be reduced.
One hole of 15.5 mm in dia. and 20 mm in length represents a 0.031 kg

reduction in weight.
NOTE: No more than 10 holes can be drilled.
3 Adjustment of mass balance if the
weight is to be increased
Fill the holes of 15.5 mm in dia. with 15.5 mm dia. lead rollers
(B270129N). Clinch the roller in the hole to secure it in position.
The weight of a 20 mm long roller is 0.045 kg. Hence, the total increase in
weight with be 0.014 kg per hole. No more than 10 rollers can be used.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 519
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 520
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 521
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 522
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 523
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 524
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Instruction for alternative Mass Balancing of the Aileron suspended on the wing
(in OPERATING CONDITION)
B. Materials BP20206L – Balance Record for LH Aileron of

BP20206P – Balance Record for RH Aileron of
E. Procedures
(1) General
(a) Mass balancing on prescribed value must be accomplished after the ailerons suspended
on the wing have been assembled completely (including installation of electrical
equipment, controls, etc.) and painted (including coloured signs and markings).
(b) During the mass balancing of the aileron suspended on the wing the aircraft must be
located in closed hangar and positioned in horizontal position (levelled) on hydraulic lifting
jacks.
(c) Mass balancing of the aileron should be carried on the wing which enables deflecting the
aileron with minimum friction in hinges. The aileron (disconnected off the control rod) must
be therefore suspended on two hinges (onto wing ribs No. 21K and No. 27K). The
suspension bearings must be at mass balancing free of dust collectors, cleaned and
greased.
End suspension of the aileron on the rib No. 31a must be removed. Aileron tie rod must be
inserted into the wing as much as possible and tilted as much as possible towards the side
of aerodynamic cover to not hamper to free deflection of the aileron. Fix the tie rod in this
position by some kind of soft material (e.g. rag, foam rubber).
(d) The aileron suspended on the wing can be considered as statically balanced, if the aileron
end rib is in side alignment with the end rib No. 31a on the wing.
(2) Balance Record

The Balance Record serves as evidence of mass balancing of each particular aileron, as well
as of its history on a particular aircraft. The Balance Record is developed during mass
balancing of the aileron and its installation on the aircraft.
(a) Part A of the Balance Record is filled in by the person who carried out mass balancing and
then confirmed by the Quality Control Inspector. Parts B and C should be filled in by the
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 525
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Quality Control Inspector when the aileron has been installed on a particular aircraft.
Part D of the Balance Record (information concerning its validity) should be filled in only
after the new Balance Record (marked with the next higher ordinal number) is elaborated
after new mass balance of the aileron has been performed (because of an aileron repair,
repair of the finishing coat, after replacement of the trim tab, after replacement of the
aileron with another one etc.)
(3) The operator of the particular aircraft is obliged to archive the Balance Records for all the
ailerons being ever installed on this aircraft in chronological order, showing every intervention
in the mass balance (see item 2-a). This means that both the “valid” and the “cancelled”
Records should be archived.
The chronology is indicated by the ordinal number of Balance Records for each particular
aileron on the particular aircraft. (The Balance Records delivered by the manufacturer together
with each new aircraft are marked with ordinal No. 1).
After any intervention in the mass balance (see item 2-a) mass balancing of the aileron must be
accomplished again and then the new Balance Record should be elaborated (Part A).
When the aileron is installed back on the original aircraft (or on another aircraft), the parts B
and C of the Balance Record should be filled in. The Record must be marked with the next
higher ordinal number compared to the ordinal number of the Balance Record of the aileron,
which has been installed on that aircraft before it.
In case that the new (spare) aileron is suspended on the aircraft, fill in Parts B and C of the
Balance Record delivered with the substituted aileron. Part A of the Record should be filled in
by the new (spare) aileron supplier.
The Balance Record is marked with the next higher ordinal number compared to the Balance
Record of the aileron, which has been suspended on that aircraft before it.
The validity of the precedent Balance Record should be cancelled (in Part D of the Balance
Record), showing the date, the reason for cancellation (see item 2-a), and the ordinal number
of the Balance Record replacing it.
NOTE: Samples of Balance Record forms are available in this section, see Balance Record
forms No. BP20206L and No. BP20206P enclosed.
(4) Any repeated finishing paint of the aileron is forbidden. If it is necessary for any reason to
change the original painting, the original paint layer must be removed before the new finishing
paint is applied.
(5) Should during usage of this Instruction the condition occur which cannot be re-solved while
observing the instruction herein, it is necessary to consult any deviation with the manufacturer
– Aircraft Industries, a.s. Kunovice.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 526
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) During the flights and before the putting the aircraft into the service, all the requirements of this
Instruction must be met.
(7) Below described mass balancing procedure is applicable to the ailerons of following aircraft
models:
L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20 - Dwg. No. B025601L or B524910L and B025601P
(8) All conditions given in step (1) of this Instruction must be complied with.
(9) Each aileron is provided with two different balancing positions:
• inboard mass balance (between the ribs 21b – 22)
• outboard mass balance (between the ribs 30b - 31a)
(10) “Static” mass balance is characterized by the value of σ A , indicating the aileron centre of
gravity position [X T(A) ] in per cent of geometric mean chord (CA ) of the aileron behind the axis
of rotation:
X T( A )
σ A [%C A ] = × 100
CA
where:
CA = 0.257 m ……the aileron geometric mean chord percentage behind the axis of
rotation
XT (A) [m] ………..aileron centre of gravity position regarding to the axis of rotation
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 527
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) The trim tab on the left aileron must be set in the neutral position
(12) Requirements for aileron mass balance
(a) Each aileron must be mass balanced so that to ensure dynamic overbalance 1.AO K
(i.e. the 1st anti-symmetrical wing bending mode of vibration), over the value of -2 [%CA]
while it must be statically balanced “to the axis” ( σA = 0 % CA ) or “overbalanced” ( i.e.
heavy on the leading edge):
( σA < 0 % C A )
(b) Dynamic overbalance is provided by means of “basic” balancing mass of GB2 = 0.325 kg
(lead rollers + duralumin spacing tube) which is always put into the outboard mass balance
bushing).
(c) Realize the required static mass balance by means of adding balancing mass (lead rollers)
at first into the inboard mass balance bushing (GB1 [kg]) and after that when bushing has
been filled, by adding balancing mass ∆GB2 [kg] in the outboard mass balance bushing
(in which the balancing mass of GB2 = 0.325 kg had been already put).
(13) Basic procedure for mass balancing
(A) Put the “basic” balancing mass of GB2 = 0.325 kg (lead rollers + duralumin spacing tube) in
the outboard mass balance bushing of the complete aileron, and screw in the plug of the
bushing. Leave the inboard mass balance bushing empty, but screw in its plug.
(B) Weigh such completely assembled aileron and enter the weigh GA (0) [kg] in the Balance
Records No. BP20206L and No. BP20206P.
(C) Suspend the aileron on the wings (on hinges on the ribs No. 21K and No. 27K) according
to the side alignment of the aileron’s end rib with end rib No. 31a on the wing and define
balance condition:
• “heavy on the trailing edge”
• “statically balanced"
• “heavy on the leading edge”
(C1) Aileron is “heavy on the trailing edge”

Statically balance the aileron to the axis of rotation, i.e.
σA = 0% CA.
(a) At first realize balancing by means of inside balancing as follows:
• Suspend a dish compensating with its weight the weight of the plug and
locking screw in the inboard mass balance bushing.
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 528
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• By means of balance weights put into the dish determine the balancing
mass necessary for balancing of the aileron into balance position.
• If this balancing mass (lead rollers) can be put completely in the inboard
mass balance bushing, no other balancing mass is required for mass
balancing.
The following values must be entered in the Balance Records
No. BP20206L and No. BP20206P:
GB1 [kg],
∆GB2 = 0 kg,
GM = 0 kg,
GA [kg] = GA (0) + GB (1), and σA = [%CA].
(b) If the required balancing mass can not be put completely into the inboard
mass balance bushing, proceed as follows:
• Put as much balancing mass GB1 [kg] as possible into the inboard mass
balance bushing.
• Fix the lead rollers by means of a rubber insert, screw in the plug and
lock it.
• Realize the remaining balancing mass ”to the axis” on outboard mass
balance. Proceed in the same way as indicated above for the inboard
mass balance.
The required balancing mass, ∆GB2 [kg], is added to the “basic”
outboard balancing mass of GB2 = 0.325 kg providing dynamic
overbalance to -2% CA .
• Fix the balancing mass in the centre mass balance bushing, screw in the
plug and lock it.
• The following values must be entered in the Balance Records
No. BP20206L and/or No. BP20206P:
GB1 [kg],
∆GB2 = 0 kg,GM = 0 kg,
GA [kg] = GA (0) + GB (1), and σA = [%CA].
Check the static balance “to the axis” of rotation at re-suspension of the
aileron on the wing (in hinges on ribs No. 21K and 27K).
(C2) Aileron is heavy on “the leading edge”
The aileron centre of gravity is forward of its axis of rotation
(XT < 0 m), that means the aileron is statically overbalanced
( σA < 0 % CK ) and therefore no balancing mass must be added.
Determine the value of static overbalance σA [% CA] as follows:
(a) Suspend the aileron on the wing (onto suspensions on ribs No. 21A and 27A).
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 529
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Attach the hook connected to string directly to the skin edge in the suspension
cut-out, lead the string along the trailing edge, then suspend e.g. dish on its end.
(c) By means of the weight put on the dish determine the “additional” mass GM [kg]
needed to set the LH aileron (heavy on the leading edge) into equilibrium state.
Record the value of GM in the Balance Records No. BP20206L and/or
No. BP20206P.
(d) Calculate the value of static overbalance σA by means of the following formula:
100 × X M × GM G [kg]
σ A [%C A ] = − = −106.81× M
C A × GA G A [kg]
(e) Enter the following values in the Balance Record:

GB1 = 0 kg,
∆GB2 = 0 kg,
GM > 0 kg,
GA [kg] = GA(0), σA < 0 [% CA]
EFFECTIVITY
020.50.00
ALL Page: 530
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
AIR CONDITIONING

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 021.20.02 1 Nov 1/11

2 Dec 10/20 021.20.03 1 May 30/14
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 021.20.04 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 021.20.05 1 Nov 1/11
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Dec 10/20 302 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 021.40.00 1 Dec 10/20
021.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
202 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Dec 10/20
021.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 302 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 303 Dec 10/20
3 Nov 1/11 304 Dec 10/20
Servicing 301 May 30/14 402 Dec 10/20
302 Dec 10/20 403 Nov 1/11
303 Dec 10/20 404 Dec 10/20
304 Dec 10/20 405 Nov 1/11
305 Dec 10/20 406 Dec 10/20
306 May 30/14 021.40.01 1 Dec 10/20
021.20.01 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
021.40.01 401 Dec 10/20 021.80.01 1 Nov 1/11

Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
021.40.02 1 Nov 1/11 021.80.02 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20 021.80.03 1 Nov 1/11
021.40.03 1 Dec 10/20
021.50.00 1 Oct 30/19
Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19
3 Oct 30/19
4 Oct 30/19
5 Oct 30/19
6 Oct 30/19
Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
302 Dec 10/14
303 Dec 10/14
304 Dec 10/14
305 Dec 10/14
306 Dec 10/14
307 Dec 10/14
308 Dec 10/14
309 Dec 10/14
310 Dec 10/14
311 Dec 10/14
312 Dec 10/14
021.60.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
021.80.00 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
AIR CONDITIONING
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
3 021- List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
021-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
021-Contents 1 to 2 - -
021.20.00 301 to 304 305 to 306 -
L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
021.20.03 1 - -
021.40.00 301 to 304 - -
021.50.00 5 - -
301 to 311 - -
021.80.00 2 - -
4 021- List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
021-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/208d Dec 10/14
021-Contents 2 - -
021.50.00 1 - -
301 to 312 - -
5 021- List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
021-Record of 1 - - L410UVP-E/300d Oct 30/19
Revisions
021.50.00 1 to 6, 301 - -
6 021- List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
021-Record of 1, 2 - -
Revisions
021-Contents 1, 2 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
021.20.00 4, 302 to 305 - -

021.40.00 1, 2, 301 to 304
402, 404, 406

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
6 021.40.01 1, 401 - -
021.40.02 401 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
021.40.03 - 1 to 2 -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
AIR CONDITIONING
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject

Purpose 1
Maintenance Practices 201
General 201
DISTRIBUTION 021.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
List of components 4
Servicing 301
Check of the air intake of air-conditioning system 301
Inspection of the heating control flaps and their 301
controls in the pilot's cockpit and passenger cabin
Inspection of the compensators in the air 302
distribution ducting between the frames No. 2-3,
8-9 and 11-12
Inspection of the compensators in the air 304
distribution ducting between the frames No. 11-12
Inspection of the compensators in the air distribution 305
ducting between the frames No. 2-3 and 8-9
B580230N AIR INTAKE WITH FLAP 021.20.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
B580693N ANNULAR EJECTOR 021.20.02 1 ALL
Purpose 1
B580697N SILENCER 021.20.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
B580206N DISTRIBUTION PIECE 021.20.04 1 ALL
Purpose 1
B085015N AIR SHOWER 021.20.05 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Servicing 301
Checking functions and completeness of air 301
showers
Removal / Installation 401
Removal and installation of the B085015N air 401
shower
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
HEATING 021.40.00 1 ALL

General 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the tightness of non-return valves and 301
shut-off flap in the pilot's cabin, passenger's cabin
between the frames No. 2-3, wing, engine nacelles
Check of the function of the heating control flap on 304
the left control panel
Removal of the heating system piping in the fuselage 401
Installation of the heating system piping in the fuselage 402
Removal of the heating piping in the wing 403
Installation of the heating system piping in the wing 404
Removal of the heating piping in the engine nacelle 404
Installation of the heating piping in the engine nacelle 406
B851039N OR L 410.8510-08 NON-RETURN VALVE 021.40.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Removal of the B851039N or L 410.8510-08 non- 401
return valve
Installation of the B851039N or L 410.8510-08 401
non-return valve
B085180N SHUT-OFF FLAP 021.40.02 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Removal in the B085180N shut-off flap 401
Installation of the B085180N shut-off flap 401
COOLING (if installed) 021.50.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Inspection of the tension and/or alignment of the 301
compressor drive belt
Inspection of the brush and bearing of the 304
compressor drive motor
Check of the R-134A compressor assembly for 310
leakage of oil refrigerant
Inspection of the evaporator module assembly 311
(evaporator coil, condensate and tubing, cool air
ducting)
Check of the air-conditioning system function 312
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 2 SUPPLY OF AIR SHOWERS - SCHEMATIC

a - cold atmospheric air intake
Explanatory notes - see the list in paragraph 2.
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 3
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF KA 33 BLOWER (IF INSTALLED)
2. List of components
No. Name Type (Dwg. No.) Qty Location
1. Air intake with flap B580230N 1 Between frames No. 2 and 3

2. Annular ejector B580693N 1 Between frames No. 2 and 3
3. Silencer B580697N 1 Between frames No. 3 and 4
4. Distribution piece B580206N 1 Between frames No. 4 and 5
5. Air duct - - Passengers’ cabin floor, LH, RH
6. Outlet for pilots’ legs fanning B580491N 2 Between frames No. 4 and 5
7. Outlet for side window fanning B581270L 1 Between frames No. 5 and 6
B581270P 1
8. Airscoop - - -
9. Air channel - - Passengers’ cabin ceiling, LH, RH
10. Air shower B085015N 21 Passengers’ cabin ceiling, LH, RH
11. Air intake - - -
12. Hose 16/25.5 CSN 635383 - Between frames No. 1 and 2
13. Circuit breaker BLOWER AZRGK-5 1 Overhead panel
(if installed)
14. Blower (if installed) KA 33 1 Between frames No. 4 and 5
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
SERVICING
1. Check of the air intake of air-conditioning system

B. Materials Cloth
D. Referenced information 021.20.00.A

Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Check the air intake of the air-conditioning system for the following faults:
• dirt
• foreign objects in the air intake
(2) Remove dirt, if any, using a clean, soft cloth.
2. Inspection of the heating control flaps and their controls in the pilot's cockpit and
passenger cabin
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097365N),
Pocket-size battery lamp
C. Tools Z 37.9110-10 screwdriver
D. Referenced information 021.20.00.C

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Place the steps (e.g. B097365N) to the wing.
(2) Remove the wing to fuselage fairing using the Z 37.9110-10 screwdriver.
(3) Using the Z 37.9110-10 screwdriver remove the cover on the LH side between frames No. 2
and 4.
(4) Check of the controls of the cabin heating and ventilation system.
(5) Move the HEATING control lever on the left-hand control panel alternatively to the open and
closed position. Another worker watches the shut-off flap (under the front upper wing to fuselage
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 301
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
fairing) to see whether its lever is moving correspondingly to the marked open and closed positions.
All flaps and controls must take up their correct positions.
(6) Move the COCKPIT AIR CONTROL levers on the left-hand control panel alternately to the upper
and lower position. Set the left pedal at the left pilot’s seat backward. Using a portable lamp, check
whether the control levers of the flaps move correspondingly, i. e. to the marked open and closed
positions (the levers are located behind the instrument panel on the left-hand side in front of
frame No. 4, and are to be checked from the space above the pedals).
(7) Move the VENTILATION control lever on the left-hand control panel alternately to its open and
closed position.
Another worker checks at the air intake flap whether its lever moves correspondingly.
(8) Place and screw down the cover between frames No. 2 and 4 on the LH side.
(9) Set and screw down the wing to fuselage fairing.
(10) Remove the steps.
3. Inspection of the compensators in the air distribution ducting between

the frames No. 2-3, 8-9 and 11-12
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097365N and B097300N);
Carpet for the protection of the wing (e.g. B936760L
and B936760P)
B. Materials 4 mm dia., 500 mm long glass fabric;

Lock wire 0.8 mm dia., CSN 426406
C. Tools No. 697-6x120 Screwdriver;

B914082N or L 410.9141-05 Screwdriver;
Z 37.9110-10 Screwdriver;
and ecessary tools from tool kit
D. Referenced information 021.20.00.D

Periodical
E. Procedures
(2) Place the carpet for the protection of the wing (e.g. B936760L and B936760P) on the wing.
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Using the Z 37.9110-10 screwdriver remove the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
and 4. Using the B914082N or L 410.9141-05 screwdriver release the locks on the upholstery
overhead panel between the frames No.7 and No.10 and drop down the panels.
(5) Inspect and check the compensator bellows at the wing-to-fuselage by pressing it gently. Defects
not allowed: cracked or distorted compensators. Replace a defective (cracked) compensator.
(6) On the left-hand side of the passenger cabin, between frames No. 8 and 9, carefully remove the
tightening insulation in the compensator area to make the compensator accessible.
By gently pressing the compensator bellows make sure that any cracks and deformation are not
present. Replace defective (cracked) compensator. Re-insulate the compensator with glass fabric
and secure the insulation.
(7) In the area between frames No. 2 and 3 gently press the compensator bellows to make sure that
any cracks and deformation are not present. Replace defective (cracked) compensator.
(8) Set and screw up the cover between the frames No. 2 and No. 4 on the left hand side. Cover the
upholstery central overhead panels and ensure them with locks using the B914082N or
L 410.9141-05 screwdriver.
(9) Install and screw down the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(10) Roll up and remove the carpet for the protection of the wing from the wing.
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

the frames No. 11-12
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097365N and B097300N);
and B936760P)
C. Tools Screwdriver (e.g. Z 37.9110-10)

and necessary tools from tool kit
D. Referenced information 021.20.00.E

Periodical
E. Procedures
(3) Using the screwdriver (e.g. Z 37.9110-10) remove the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(4) Inspect and check the compensator bellows at the wing-to-fuselage by pressing it gently.
Defects not allowed: cracked or distorted compensators.
Replace a defective (cracked) compensator.
(5) Install and screw the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(6) Roll up and remove the carpet for the protection of the wing from the wing.
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

the frames No. 2-3 and 8-9
B. Materials 4 mm dia., 500 mm long glass fabric;

Lock wire 0.8 mm dia., CSN 426406
C. Tools No. 697-6x120 Screwdriver;

B914082N or L 410.9141-05 Screwdriver;
Screwdriver (e.g. Z 37.9110-10)
and necessary tools from tool kit
D. Referenced information 021.20.00.F

Periodical
E. Procedures
and 4. Using the B914082N or L 410.9141-05 screwdriver release the locks on the upholstery
overhead panel between the frames No.7 and No.10 and drop down the panels.
(2) On the left-hand side of the passenger cabin, between frames No. 8 and 9, carefully remove the
tightening insulation in the compensator area to make the compensator accessible.
By gently pressing the compensator bellows make sure that any cracks and deformation are not
present. Replace defective (cracked) compensator. Re-insulate the compensator with glass fabric
and secure the insulation.
(3) In the area between frames No. 2 and 3 gently press the compensator bellows to make sure that
any cracks and deformation are not present. Replace defective (cracked) compensator.
(4) Set and screw up the cover between the frames No. 2 and No. 4 on the left hand side. Cover the
upholstery central overhead panels and ensure them with locks using the B914082N or
L 410.9141-05 screwdriver.
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 305
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
021.20.00
ALL Page: 306
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING
1. General
The hot air for the heating is tapped from both engines after the last (radial) compressor stage.
The hot air is conducted by a piping provided with thermal insulation. In the area of the engine nacelles,
the piping comprises a branch from which the hot air is taken engine air intake deicing - see Chapter 030.
The piping is running from the left-hand and the right-hand engine join in a mixer in the wing centre section.
Located on the piping before their entry into the mixer are non-return valves, a compensator and a pipe
coupling. The mixer comprises a branch where the hot air is tapped for airframe deicing - see Chapter 030.
Welded to the mixer is also a test pressure connection with a blinding plug. The hot air from the mixer is
led to a shut-off flap. The shut-off flap controls the hot air flow rate. From the shut-off flap, the hot air is led
by a piping with compensators to an annular ejector. The annular ejector incorporates a branch through
which the hot air is supplied to the storage battery bay.
FIG. 1 HEATING SYSTEM - SCHEMATIC

For description of figure see the List of components in para 2.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Non-return valve B851039N or 2 between frames No. 11 and 12

L 410.8510-08
2. Shut-off flap B085180N 1 between frames No. 11 and 12
3. Compensator B851018N or 1 between frames No. 11 and 12
L 410.8510-05
4. Mixer B851006N or 1 between frames No. 11 and 12
L 410.8510-03
5. Compensator B852040N or 1 between frames No. 8 and 9
L 410.8520-14 1 between frames No. 2 and 3
6. Storage battery bay heating - - -
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING
SERVICING
1. Check of the tightness of non-return valves and shut-off flap in the pilot's cabin,
passenger's cabin, between the frames No. 2-3, wing, engine nacelles
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Test equipment consisting of compressed air bottle,
pressure gauge and pressure hose with possibility of
reduction to pressure of 0.39 MPa (4 kp/cm2);
Stepladder (e.g. B097365N);
Stepladder (e.g. B097300N);
and B936760P)
B. Materials ∅ 4 mm and 500 mm long fibre glass,

∅ 0.8mm Binding wire,
B851037N (or L410.8510-10) Packing (2 pcs);
B852048N (or L410.8520-25) Packing (2 pcs);
HYLOMAR H (also known as SQ 32-H) (82177002)
Sealing compound (1 tube)
C. Tools Screwdriver (e.g. No. 697 (4.5x120, 6x120));

Screwdriver (e.g. Z 37.9110-10);
Screwdriver (e.g. L 410.9141-05);
Pincers; Wire pliers;
Open-end wrench (e.g. 17 CSN 290625.6);
Spanner (e.g. 30 CSN 230625.6);
Spanner (e.g. 5.5 x 7 CSN 230611.6);
B851020N or L 410.8510.06 Blinding plug

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Put the stepladder (e.g. B097365N) to the wing - and the stepladder (e.g. B097300N) to the
engine nacelle.
(3) Remove the wing-to-fuselage fairing using a screwdriver (e.g. Z 37.9110-10).
(4) Open the lower engine cowl of the engine nacelles using a screwdriver (e.g. No. 697-6x120).
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove the upper front cowl, rear cowl, and the side cowl panel from both engine nacelles
according to the instructions given in chapter 054.
(6) Release the press button fasteners and remove the caps on the lower side of the wing leading
edge, next to the engine nacelles.
(7) Remove the cover on the fuselage located between bulkheads No. 2 and No.4 on the left hand
side of the nose section using the screwdriver (e.g. Z 37.9110-10).
(8) Check of tightness of non-return valves and shut-off flap valve.
(9) Check for tightness of the heating system in the wing and fuselage, including check of tightness
of the non-return valves and the shut-off flap valve as follows:
(a) Using pincers, remove locking wires from the bleed air distribution pipelines and bushings
located on the lower side of the wing leading edge in both engine nacelles.
Disconnect the pipelines from the bushings using a 30 CSN 230625.6 spanner.
(b) Using a 5.5 x 7 CSN 230611.6 spanner, loosen two nuts of the sleeves located in the front
area between the frames No. 2 and 3, which fasten the compensator to the annular ejector and
distribution pipelines. Remove the compensator carefully. Blind the open end of the pipeline
in front of the ahead frame No.3 by an B851020N or L 410.8510.06 blinding plug.
(c) Using a 5.5 x 7 CSN 230611.6 spanner, loosen two nuts of the sleeves located under the front
upper part of the wing-to-fuselage fairing which attach the compensator to the mixer branch pipe
and the de-icing pipeline – refer to the fig. 1, section 021.40.03. Remove the compensator
carefully. Blind the mixer branch pipe end with B851020N or L 410.8510.06 blinding plug.
(d) Disconnect the piping outlet of the pressurization system of hydraulic tank from mixer branch
pipe – refer to the fig. 1, section 021.40.03. Blind the mixer branch pipe end with blinding
plug.
(f) Connect hose of the test equipment consisting of a compressed air bottle provided with a
pressure gauge, and a pressure hose to the LH bushing located on the lower side of the leading
edge above the engine. The hose is connected to the bushing by means of a union nut.
Blind the RH bushing located on the lower side of the leading edge above the engine with
blinding plug.
(g) Check the tightness of LH air system with apply air pressure of 500 kPa (5 kp/cm2).
Pressure drop in the system from 500 kPa (5 kp/cm2) to 200kPa (2 kp/cm2) in less than
20 seconds is not permissible. If is detected any air leakage, specify the leaking points and
do the action for fault elimination.
(h) Check the tightness of non-return valve on the RH system. Remove blinding plug from RH
bushing located on the lower side of the leading edge above the engine. Apply air pressure of
500kPa (5 kp/cm2). Pressure drop in the system from 500kPa (5 kp/cm2) to zero in less
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
than 20 seconds is not permissible. If is detected any air leakage, specify the leaking
points and do the action for fault elimination.
(i) Connect hose of the test equipment consisting of a compressed air bottle provided with a
pressure gauge, and a pressure hose to the RH bushing located on the lower side of the leading
edge above the engine. The hose is connected to the bushing by means of a union nut.
Blind the LH bushing located on the lower side of the leading edge above the engine with
blinding plug.
(j) Analogously check the tightness RH system refer to the step (9-g) and the tightness of
non-return valve on the LH system refer to the step (9-h). If is detected any air leakage,
specify the leaking points and do the action for fault elimination.
(k) Set the HEATING lever on the LH control panel to OPEN.
(l) Connect hose of the test equipment as described in step (9-f)
(m) Check the tightness of wing-fuselage air system with apply air pressure of 500kPa
(5 kp/cm2). Pressure drop in the system from 500kPa (5 kp/cm2) to 200kPa (2 kp/cm2) in
less than 20 seconds is not permissible. If is detected any air leakage, specify the leaking
points and do the action for fault elimination.
(n) Remove the test equipment. Connect the bleed air pipelines to the bushings using a
30 CSN 230 625.6 spanner. Before connecting the two parts, smear the pipe union with
HYLOMAR SQ 32-H sealing compound. Lock the pipe union with 0.8 mm dia. locking wire
using wire pliers.
(o) Remove blinding plug and reinstall the compensator between the pipeline and the annular
ejector in the space between frames No. 2 and 3. Use new B852048N (or L410.8520-25)
packing for the compensator joints. Smear the packing with HYLOMAR SQ 32-H sealing
compound before fitting them. Connect the compensator to the pipeline by means of
sleeves. Tighten the sleeves by nuts using a 5.5 x 7 CSN 230611.6 spanner.
(p) Remove blinding plug and reinstall the compensator between the pipeline of de-icing
system and the mixer in the space under the upper front part of the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
Use new B851037N (L410.8510-10) packing for the compensator joints. Smear the packing
with HYLOMAR SQ 32-H sealing compound before fitting them. Connect the compensator
to the pipeline and to the mixer branch pipe by means of sleeves. Tighten the packing by
must using a 5.5 x 7 CSN 230611.6 spanner.
(q) Remove blinding plug and connect the piping outlet of the pressurization system of hydraulic
tank on mixer branch pipe.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Reinstall and screw on the cover on the left side of the nose section, between frames No. 2 and 4.
(11) Fasten the caps on the lower side of the wing leading edge next to the engine nacelles.
(12) Reinstall the upper front cowl, rear cowl, and the side cowl panel of both engine nacelles as instructed
in chapter 054.
(13) Close the lower engine cowl of both engine nacelles.
(14) Fit and reinstall the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(15) Remove the carpets.
(16) Remove the stepladders.
2. Check of the function of the heating control flap on the left control panel
B. Materials Gasoline, Lubricate gel
D. Referenced information 021.40.00.B

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Check of the heating control flap (shut-off flap) free movement
(2) Open and close the hot air supply by the HEATING control lever on the left-hand control panel.
Defects not allowed: seizing of the flap during its opening or closing.
(3) If the flap is defective, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the flap - refer to the work procedure in 021.40.02.
(b) Disassemble the shut-off flap and wash its moving parts in gasoline.
If the flap has been distorted or damaged in any other way, correct the defect.
(c) Install the shut-off flap - refer to the work procedure in 021.40.02.
(d) Check free movement of the shut-off flap - refer to the step (1).
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. Removal of heating system piping in the fuselage

C. Tools Spanners and screwdrivers of appropriate sizes from

the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the cover of the upper wing-to-fuselage fairing, ceiling upholstery in the top front part
of the left-hand of the fuselage between frames No. 7 and 11, as well as the upholstery on the
left-hand bottom part of the fuselage between frames No. 7 and 8.
(2) Remove the left-hand pilot’s seat and the floor sections in this area.
(3) Remove the aluminum wrapping foil from the piping and disconnect the flexible push-pull rod
from the piping.
(4) Remove the covers on the left-hand side between frames No. 2 and 4, using the Z 37.9110-10
screwdriver.
(5) Successively remove the following components (see Fig. 401): piping (1); compensator (2);
piping (5); piping (6); compensator (2); piping (7); piping (4) and shut-off flap (3).
The shut-off flap should be removed in accordance with the appropriate work procedure.
Before removal, release all the piping as well as the flexible push-pull rod from their clips.
FIG. 401 HEATING SYSTEM PIPING IN FUSELAGE

(1) Piping; (2) Compensator; (3) Shut-off flap; (4) Piping; (5) Piping; (6) Piping; (7) Piping
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 401
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Installation of the heating system piping in the fuselage

B. Materials B852048N (or L410.8520-25) Packings – 10 pcs.;

Sealing compound (one tube)

the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Successively install the piping sections (4), (7), (6) and (5) - see Fig. 401 from frame No. 11 as
far as frame No. 4, including the compensator (2) between frames No. 8 and 9.
Attach the piping and the flexible push-pull rod with clips. Use new packings to seal the joints.
Apply thin coat of HYLOMAR SQ 32-H sealing compound to the packings prior to installation.
NOTE: The piping section and compensator between frames No. 2 and 4 will be installed
only after the tightness check of the heating system piping joints.
(2) Carry out the tightness check of the heating system in fuselage in accordance with the appropriate
work procedure (021.40.00.A).
(3) Install the shut-off flap (3) according to the appropriate work procedure.
(4) Install the pipe section (1) and compensator (2) at frame No. 2. Use new packings to seal the
joints. Apply thin coat of HYLOMAR SQ 32-H sealing compound to the packings prior to
installation.
(5) Place and screw down the covers on the left-hand side between frames No. 2 and 4.
(6) Re-wrap the piping in aluminum foil and the upholstery inside the fuselage.
(7) Re-install the left-hand pilot’s seat and the corresponding floor sections.
(8) Install the cover of the upper wing-to-fuselage fairing.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Removal of the heating piping in the wing


the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the cover of the upper wing-to-fuselage fairing.
(2) Remove the upper front wing cover behind the engines, and the assembly lids on the bottom skin
of the wing at the engine nacelles.
(3) Remove the pneumatic deicing piping (8) - see fig. 402.
(4) Remove the bracket attaching the piping (9) at the wing flap actuator.
(5) Release the piping sections (6) and (7) from attaching sleeves (10). Remove the coupling clamps,
compensator (11), pipe coupling (12), mixer (4) and the pipe sections (6) and (7).
FIG. 402 HEATING SYSTEM PIPING IN THE WING
(1) Non-return valve; (2) Piping; (3) Coupling; (4) Mixer; (5) Shut-off flap; (6) Piping; (7) Piping;
(8) Pneumatic deicing piping; (9) Bracket; (10) Attaching sleeve; (11) Compensator; (12) Pipe
coupling
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 403
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Installation of heating system piping in wing

B. Materials B851037N (or L410.8510-10) Packing – 8 pcs

the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Successively install the piping section (6), piping section (7), mixer (4), compensator (11), pipe
coupling (12) and bracket (9) and attaching sleeves (10) - see fig. 402.
(2) Test the assembled piping for tightness in accordance with the work procedure 021.40.00.A.
(3) Install the pneumatic de-icing piping (8)
(4) Fit the upper wing cover behind the engines and the assembly lids on the bottom skin of the wing
at the engine nacelles.
(5) Fit the upper wing-to-fuselage fairing cover.
5. Removal of the heating piping in the engine nacelle

B. Materials The 0.5 mm dia lock wire

the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Open the lower engine cowl of the engine nacelle and remove the upper cowl of the engine nacelle.
(2) Remove the lock wire from the couplings of the piping (4) and (5) - see fig. 403.
(3) Remove the piping section (5) by disconnecting it from the coupling (7) in the fire wall and from
the coupling (8) in the wing.
(4) Remove the piping section (4) by disconnecting it from the coupling (7) in the fire wall, the shut-off
cock coupling (9) and the engine.
(5) Protect the uncoupled ends by wrapping them in polyethylene foil.
NOTE: When dismantling the piping, use two spanners to avoid transferring the torque onto
the piping.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 403 HEATING PIPING IN ENGINE NACELLES

(1) Bolt; (2) Flange; (3) Gasket; (4) Piping; (6) Thermal insulation; (7) Fire wall coupling;
(8) Wing coupling; (9) Shut-off cock
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 405
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Installation of heating piping in engine nacelle

B. Materials ∅ 0.5 mm zinc coated binding wire;

HYLOMAR H (also known as SQ 32-H) Sealing
compound
C. Tools Crown-head socket wrench.

Spanners and screwdrivers of appropriate sizes from
the tool kit.
E. Procedures
NOTE: Apply the the HYLOMAR SQ 32-H sealing compound on the all connections.
(1) Remove the polyethylene foil from the pipe section (4) – see fig. 403. Blow the piping through,
set it on the engine and fit the bolts (supplied by the engine manufacturer).
Only a crown-head socket wrench can be used for this purpose. Connect the remaining ends of
the piping to the firewall coupling (7) and the shut-off cock (9) coupling. After installation lock all
couplings, bolts and nuts with ∅ 0.5 mm binding wire.
(2) Re-install the pipe section (5) by connecting it to the firewall coupling (7) and to the wing coupling (8).
Before the assembly apply a thin layer of HYLOMAR SQ 32-H onto the couplings.
After installation lock the couplings with ∅ 0.5 mm binding wire.
NOTE: Test the pipe section (5) for tightness with pressure air of 0.78 MPa (8 kp/cm2) for five
minutes.
(3) Fit the upper cowl of the engine nacelle and close the lower engine cowl of the engine nacelle.
NOTE: When assembling the piping, use two spanners to avoid the torque transfer onto the
piping.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.00
ALL Page: 406
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B851039N OR L 410.8510-08 NON-RETURN VALVE

1. Purpose
The non-return valve prevents the pressure air in the hot air piping from escaping into the atmosphere if
one of the engines fails. The non-return valve closes the failed engine branch by means of flaps.
FIG. 1 B851039N OR L 410.8510-08 NON-RETURN VALVE

(1) Shell; (2) Pin; (3) Grille; (4) Flaps; (5) Pin
a = air flow direction
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.01
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.01
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B851039N OR L 410.8510-08 NON-RETURN VALVE

1. Removal of B851039N or L 410.8510-08 non-return valve


the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the wing-to-fuselage fairing cover.
(2) Remove the clamps attaching the non-return valve.
(3) Remove the packings between the non-return valve and the compensator or the pipe coupling,
and the mixer. Remove the non-return valve.
2. Installation of B851039N or L 410.8510-08 non-return valve

B. Materials B851037N or L 410.8510-10 packings (4 pieces);

Sealing compound

the tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) Install the non-return valve between the mixer and the compensator or pipe coupling. Insert the
B851037N or L 410.8510-10 packings. Apply a thin coat of HYLOMAR H sealing compound to the
packing before installation.
CAUTION: INSTALL THE NON-RETURN VALVE IN SUCH A WAY THAT THE ARROW
ON ITS BODY AGREES WITH THE AIR FLOW DIRECTION I.E. FROM THE
ENGINE TO THE MIXER.
(2) Fix the non-return valve with clamps.
(3) Screw down the cover of the wing-to-fuselage fairing.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.01
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.01
ALL Page: 402
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B085180N SHUT-OFF FLAP

1. Removal of B085180N shut-off flap


the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the wing-to-fuselage fairing cover.
(2) Remove the split pin, pin and washer connecting the control rod with the flap lever.
(3) Remove the clamps attaching the shut-off flap. Remove the packings between the shut-off flap,
mixer and piping. Remove the shut-off flap.
2. Installation of B085180N shut-off flap

B. Materials B852048N or L 410.8520-25 packing (2 pieces);

AEROSHELL GREASE 6 lubricating grease;
Sealing compound (1 tube)

the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Install the shut-off flap between the piping and the mixer. Insert the B852048N or L 410.8520-25
packings. Apply a thin coat of HYLOMAR H sealing compound to the packings prior to installation.
(2) Attach the shut-off flap by means of the clamps.
(3) Connect the control rod by means of the pin, washer and split pin. Before assembly, grease the
pin with the lubrication grease in use.
(4) Check the shut-off flap function. Pay special attention to the tightness of the flap in its closed position.
(5) Screw down the wing-to-fuselage fairing cover.
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.02
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.02
ALL Page: 402
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B851006N OR L410.8510-03 MIXER

1. Purpose
The B851006N or L410.8510-03 mixer is part of the hot air distribution from the engine compressors to
the air-conditioning system, to the de-icing system and to the hydraulic tank pressurization system.
FIG. 1 B851006N OR L410.8510-03 MIXER

(1) Connection of the external air source with a blind
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.03
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
021.40.03
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25
EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS

Section Section
Subject Subject
Title page - - 025.10.00 1 Nov 1/11

2 Dec 10/20 3 Nov 1/11
3 Dec 10/20 4 May 30/14
4 Dec 10/20 5 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/14 6 May 30/14
2 Dec 10/20 7 May 30/14
3 Nov 1/11 8 Mar 30/16
4 Nov 1/11 9 Mar 30/16
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 10 Mar 30/16
2 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/14
3 Dec 10/20 402 Dec 10/14
4 Mar 30/16 025.10.01 1 Nov 1/11
6 Dec 10/14 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
025.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
202 Nov 1/11 025.11.00 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
303 May 30/14 4 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
305 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
306 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
307 May 30/14 102 Nov 1/11
308 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
025.11.00 401 Nov 1/11 025.20.00 405 Mar 30/16

Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 406 Mar 30/16
025.11.01 1 May 30/14 407 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 408 Mar 30/16
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 409 Mar 30/16
102 Nov 1/11 410 Mar 30/16
103 Nov 1/11 025.21.00 1 Nov 1/11
Cleaning / Painting 701 May 30/14 3 Nov 1/11
702 May 30/14 4 Nov 1/11
025.12.00 1 Mar 30/16 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Mar 30/16 402 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 025.21.01 1 Nov 1/11
025.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 Cleaning / Painting 701 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 702 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11 025.22.00 1 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
9 Nov 1/11 025.23.00 1 Nov 1/11
10 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20
11 Nov 1/11 025.24.00 1 Nov 1/11
13 Nov 1/11 025.25.00 1 Dec 10/20
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 025.40.00 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11 025.50.00 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
025.51.00 1 Dec 10/20 025.60.01 1 Nov 1/11

3 Nov 1/11 025.60.02 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 May 30/14 025.60.03 1 Nov 1/11
025.52.00 1 Nov 1/11 025.60.04 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 May 30/14
4 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
5 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
6 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
7 Nov 1/11 025.60.05 1 Nov 1/11
9 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
10 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
12 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 303 May 30/14
302 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11 025.60.06 1 Dec 10/20
025.60.00 1 Nov 1/11 3 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 4 Dec 10/20
3 May 30/14 Servicing 301 May 30/14
4 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
5 Nov 1/11 303 Nov 1/11
6 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20
302 Dec 10/20 402 Dec 10/20
Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14 403 Dec 10/20
402 Nov 1/11 404 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Page Date

Section
Subject
025.60.07 1 Nov 1/11

Servicing 301 May 30/14
302 May 30/14
303 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11
025.60.08 1 Mar 30/16
Description and Operation 2 Mar 30/16
025.60.09 1 May 30/14
3 May 30/14
4 May 30/14
5 May 30/14
6 May 30/14
302 May 30/14
303 May 30/14
304 May 30/14
305 May 30/14
306 May 30/14
307 May 30/14
308 May 30/14

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25
EQUIPMENT / FURNISHING
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
5 025-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
025-Record of 1 - -
Revision
025-Contents 1 - -
3 to 5 - -
025.00.00 301 - -
303 - -
307 - -
025.10.00 4 - -
6 7 to 8 -
025.11.01 1 - -
701 to 702 - -
L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
025.51.00 301 - -
025.60.00 2 to 3 - -
301 to 302 - 303 to 304
401 - -
025.60.04 301 to 302 - -
025.60.05 301 - -
303 - -
025.60.06 301 to 302 - -
025.60.07 301 to 302 - -
025.60.08 301 to 302 - -
025.60.09 - 1 to 6 -
- 301 to 308 -
6 025-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
025-Record of 1 to 2 - - L410UVP-E/208d Dec 10/14
Revision

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
6 025.10.00 - 401 to 402 - L410UVP-E/208d Dec 10/14

7 025-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
025-Record of 2 - -
Revision
L410UVP-E/225d Mar 30/16
025.10.00 8 9 to 10 -
025.12.00 1 to 2 - -
025.20.00 - 405 to 410 -
025.60.08 1 to 2 - 301 to 304
7 025-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
025-Record of 2 - -
Revision
025-Contents 1 to 3, 5 - -
025.00.00 301 - -
025.20.00 407 - -
025.23.00 2 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
025.24.00 2 - -
025.25.00 - 1-2 -
025.51.00 1 - -
025.60.00 302 - -
025.60.06 1, 2 3, 4 -
- 401 to 404 -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25
EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
General 1
General 201
Servicing 301
Check of the pilots’ seats and seats for passengers 301
Check of the emergency equipment 301
Inspection of protective covers and safety belts of 302
pilots’ passengers’ seats and foldable serving plates
Check of the reliability of fixing of crew and 303
passenger seats to the floor of the aircraft
Inspection of passenger and flight compartment 303
upholstery
Cleaning of passenger and flight compartment 304
Inspection of the safety belts of crew and 307
passenger seats
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 025.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
Navigator’s table 2
Spare fuse box 2
DV 3 FAN 5
Flight compartment upholstery 5
Flight documentation case 5
Map spring clips 6
EFB –iPad holders 8
Servicing 301
Inspection of the navigator’s table and its tilting 301
mechanism
Inspection of the spare fuse box (if installed) 301
Removal and installation of the navigator’s table 401
(if installed)
DV-3 FAN 025.10.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Servicing 301
Check of DV - 3 fan brush height and inspection of 301
its collector-brush assembly
DV - 3 fan removal and installation 401
EFFECTIVITY: 025-CONTENTS
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
PILOTS’ SEATS 025.11.00 1 ALL
General 1
Fault Isolation 101
Removal / installation 401
Removal and installation of pilots’ seats and elbow rests 401
SAFETY BELTS AMSAFE P/N 504388 SERIES 025.11.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
Task - Testing on Aircraft 101
Procedure for Fault Isolation 103
Cleaning the safety belts 701
CURTAINS 025.12.00 1 ALL
General 1
Removal and installation of curtains 401
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 025.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Passenger transport version – 19 seats 1
(basic version)
Passenger executive version – 8 seats 3
Flying ambulance 4
Parachute jumping 8
Cargo version 14
Servicing 301
Wounded person loading (if flying ambulance is 301
installed)
Removal and installation equipment for wounded 401
persons (if flying ambulance is installed)
Removal and installation of the parachute seats 403
(three-seated benches) (if parachute jumping is
installed)
Removal and installation of the anchor cables 404
(if parachute jumping is installed)
Removal and installation of the tables of passenger 405
executive (VIP) version (if installed)
Removal and installation of the salon seats of 408
passenger executive (VIP) version (if installed)
PASSENGER’S SEATS 025.21.00 1 ALL
General 1
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Removal / Installation 025.21.00 401
Removal and installation of single and double 401
passenger seat sets
SAFETY BELTS AMSAFE P/N 2019 SERIES 025.21.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
Task - Testing on Aircraft 101
Procedure for Fault Isolation 102
Cleaning the safety belts 701
PARTITION BETWEEN FLIGHT AND PASSENGER 025.22.00 1 ALL
COMPARTMENT (if installed)
General 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the doors of the partition between flight 301
and passenger compartment (if installed)
PASSENGER AND FLIGHT COMPARTMENT UPHOLSTERY 025.23.00 1 ALL
General 1
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 025.24.00 1 ALL
Head wear shelf (rack) (if installed) 1
Newspaper and magazine holder (if installed) 1
Foldable serving plate (if installed) 1
Installation of fans (if installed) 2
INSPECTOR SEAT INSTALLATION 025.25.00 1 ALL
General 1
Description
Operation
LAVATORIES 025.40.00 1 ALL
General 1 ALL
Servicing 301
Inspection of the equipment of the toilet section 301
CARGO COMPARTMENTS 025.50.00 1 ALL
General 1
CARGO COMPARTMENTS IN PASSENGER VERSION 025.51.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the front and rear baggage 301
compartment structure
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
CARGO COMPARTMENTS IN CARGO VERSION 025.52.00 1 ALL
Cargo version 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the polyamide net 301
Inspection of the fastening belts 301
Inspection of cargo version equipment 301
Cargo version equipment installation 401
Cargo version equipment removal 402
Installation and removal of the seat for the person 404
accompanying cargo
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 025.60.00 1 ALL
General 1
First-aid kit installation in the passenger 025.60.00 2
compartment
First-aid kit installation in the flight compartment 3
Emergency axe 3
Crew call signalling (see fig. 2) 4
Life rafts, emergency packages and life jackets 5
Emergency locator transmitter (ELT) 5
Servicing 301
Inspection of emergency equipment 301
Check of the operation of push-buttons for calling 303
the crew
Removal and installation of life jackets, life rafts 401
and emergency packages
ASZH-63P LIFE JACKET (if installed) 025.60.01 1 ALL
General 1
SP-12 LIFE RAFT (if installed) 025.60.02 1 ALL
General 1
NAZ-7 EMERGENCY PACKAGE (if installed) 025.60.03 1 ALL
General 1 ALL
ELT-10 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (if installed) 025.60.04 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Check of the battery pack / Battery pack 301
replacement in the ELT-10 Emergency Locator
Transmitter
Check of the operation of ELT-10 Emergency 302
Locator Transmitter
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Removal / Installation 025.60.04 401 ALL
ELT-10 disassembly and re-assembly 401
POINTER 3000 (POINTER 200, POINTER 3000-10) 025.60.05 1 ALL
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (if installed)
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
replacement in the POINTER 3000 Emergency
Locator Transmitter
Check of the operation of POINTER 3000 303
Emergency Locator Transmitter
POINTER 3000 disassembly and re-assembly 401
ARTEX C 406 - 2 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER 025.60.06 1 ALL
(if installed)
General 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
replacement in the ELT C 406-2 Emergency
Locator Transmitter
Check of the operation of C 406-2 Emergency 302
Locator Transmitter
Removal and installation of the C 406 - 2 401
AMERI-KING AK-451 EMERGENCY LOCATOR 025.60.07 1 ALL
TRANSMITTER (if installed)
General 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Check of the battery pack / Battery pack replacement in 301
the ELT AK-451 Emergency Locator Transmitter
Check of the operation of AK-451 Emergency 302
Locator Transmitter
ARM-406 AS1 PORTABLE EMERGENCY LOCATOR 025.60.08 1 ALL
ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
KANNAD 406 AP PORTABLE EMERGENCY LOCATOR 025.60.09 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 2
Controls 3
Working mode information 4
Battery pack 5
Servicing 301
replacement in the KANNAD 406 AP Emergency
Locator Transmitter
Check of the operation of KANNAD 406 AP 307
ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
SERVICING
1. Check of the pilots’ seats and seats for passengers


Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Inspection of seat covers. The covers must be clean, non-torn and non-ripped.
(2) Check for completeness of fastening belts. The number of safty belts must correspond to the
number of seats.
(3) Check for life jacket completeness. The number of life jackets must correspond to the number
of seats.
(4) Inspect and check passenger seat covers, safety belts and life jackets for completeness and for
compliance with the requirements of para. 1, 2 and 3.
2. Check of the emergency equipment


Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Check the life jackets in the passenger compartment (if installed). Check that each seat in the
passenger compartment is provided with a life jacket. At the same time check proper condition
of the life jacket cover. The life jackets are placed in the pockets below the seats. Supplement
missing life jackets; replace damaged jackets by new ones.
(2) Check that each seat in the flight compartment is provided with a life jacket. At the same time
check proper condition of the life jacket cover. The life jackets are placed in the pockets of the
back rest cover (on the rear side). Supplement missing life jackets, replace damaged jackets by
new ones.
EFFECTIVITY
025.00.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Check the first-aid kits for correct condition and fixing. The first-aid kits are placed in the flight
compartment and in passenger compartment.
(4) Check the axe for correct condition and fixing. The axe is placed in the flight compartment
behind the pilot’s seat on the wall of the partition between the flight and passenger
compartments. Replace the damaged axe fastening straps by new ones.
3. Inspection of protective covers and safety belts of pilots, passengers seats and foldable
serving plates

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Check the condition of the seat covers and safety belts in the flight compartment.
Check the function and condition of the safety belt locks.
(2) Check the condition of the seat covers in the passenger compartment. Check condition of the safety
belts as well as the condition and functioning of the safety belt locks. Check conditions and function
of the foldable serving plates located in the passenger seats at the partition between the flight and
passenger compartment as well as the foldable serving plates located at the fuselage sides at
the first row of passenger seats.
(3) Defects not allowed:

damaged covers of passengers’ and pilots’ seats, damaged safety belts or their parts, damaged
hinges and damaged safety equipment for foldable serving plates, deformed or otherwise
damaged foldable serving plates (if installed).
EFFECTIVITY
025.00.00
ALL Page: 302
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Removal of B593209N salon rear table:
(a) Loosen and unscrew the screws (9) attaching the salon table to the salon compartment
floor.
(b) Loosen and unscrew the screws (4) (nuts (8), washers (5, 6)) attaching the salon table to
the top holders (3) on right side of fuselage.
(c) Remove the salon table by pulling the table upward.
(d) Tilt up the two top holders (3) on the right side of fuselage and install the covers on the
Velcro tapes on respective places on the right side of fuselage.
FIG. 403 B593209N REAR TABLE OF THE PASSENGER EXECUTIVE (VIP) VERSION
(1) B093258N Rear table; (2) B595773N Leg; (3) Top holder; (4) M8x45 – A2 FABORY 51060
Screw (2 pc); (5) 8.4 CD Washer (2 pc); (6) B595087N Washer (2 pc); (8) M8 CD ONL 3248
Nut (2 pc); (9) M6x25 ISO 4762 Screw (2 pc); (10) 4.8x13 A2 DIN 7971C Screw (6 pc)
EFFECTIVITY
025.20.00
ALL Page: 407
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Removal and installation of the salon seats of passenger executive (VIP) version
(if installed)
B. Materials B515440N Screw (8 pc);

B093437N Screw (4 pc)
C. Tools 12x11 CSN 230611.6 open-end spanner
E. Procedures
(1) Installation of salon seats:
WARNING: FOR SEAT FIXING ONLY THE PRESCRIBED SCREWS WITH NON
-REMOVABLE WASHER SHALL BE USED. SALON SEATS
SHALL BE INSTALLED ON A CARPETED FLOOR ONLY.
(a) Make sure that the clearance between the screw heads and the floor surface is sufficient.
(b) Match the round holes of the legs with holes in the floor of fuselage fig. 404 pos.2. After
that put on the screws fig. 404 pos.1 and 5 into the round holes of the legs and tighten the
screws.
NOTE: For tightening the screws attaching the salon seats to the floor use the
12x11 CSN 230611.6 open-end spanner.
(2) Removal of salon seats:
(a) Loosen and unscrew the screws fig. 404 pos.1 and 5 attaching the salon seats to the salon
compartment floor.
NOTE: For loosening the screws attaching the salon seats to the floor use the 12x11,
CSN 23 0611.6 open-end spanner.
(b) Remove the double salon seat fig. 404 pos.3 and.4) sets by pulling the seats upward.
(c) Replace damaged attachment screws by new ones.
EFFECTIVITY
025.20.00
ALL Page: 408
Mar 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER AND FLIGHT COMPARTMENT UPHOLSTERY

1. General
The passenger and flight compartment upholstery consists of:
• ceiling upholstery
• lateral wall upholstery
• lining of the partition between flight and passenger compartment
• flight compartment window frame upholstery
• carpets
The passenger compartment upholstery has mainly the form of panels. The panels above the windows
are with battens, the panels under the windows panels and light assembly panels are made of LEXAN
plastic. The panels under and above the windows are of sandwich structure, the ceiling panels are of
frame structure made of duralumin sections. All the panels are covered with a leatherette. The inter-
window panels made of Prepregs are fixed with screws. The ventilation channel and the light assembly
panels have a glued-on leatherette.
The air channel of the heating system has a protective varnish coating. The partition between flight and
passenger compartment is covered both from the passenger and pilot compartments with leatherette.
The flight compartment window frame upholstery is made of form-backed black plastic leather. The
floors of both passenger and flight compartment are covered with the crest carpet biscuit, sample No.4.
The carpets are removable after removal of the seat sets and of the fastening battens.
EFFECTIVITY
025.23.00
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 FLIGHT AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT UPHOLSTERY

(1) Window panel, (2) Inter-window panel, (3) Batten, (4) Front panel, (5) Above the door panel,
(6) Rear panel, (7) Ceiling panel, (8) Front tape, (9) Lining, (10) Light assembly, (11) Light
assembly screen, (12) Above the window panel, (13) Cover panel, (14) Front door upholstery,
(15) Main door upholstery, (16) Dado, (17) Cover, (18) Lining, (19) Cockpit ceiling panel,
(20) Flight compartment upholstery panel, right hand, (21) Flight compartment upholstery
panel, rear left-hand, (22) Flight compartment upholstery panel, front left hand, (23) Pocket,
(24) Sun visor, (25) Carpet, (26) Rear baggage compartment lining.
EFFECTIVITY
025.23.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
1. Head wear shelf (rack) (if installed)

The head wear shelf with rack is situated near the main door between the frames No. 18 and 21. Carry
on baggage is transported in the passenger compartment. The head wear shelf with rack consist of a
beam on which clothes hooks are fixed. Attached to the beam is the shelf proper consisting of a frame
with nylon net.
FIG. 1 HEAD WEAR SHELF (RACK)

(1) Beam, (2) Hook, (3) Shelf frame, (4) Nylon net
2. Newspaper and magazine holder (if installed)

The newspaper and magazine holder is placed at the rigid part off the pilot’s partition. The holder is
formed by a frame and netting. The netting is stabilized with a rubber cord in its upper open part.
3. Foldable serving plate (if installed)

All the passenger seats are provided with foldable serving plates. The foldable serving plates for the
passengers occupying the first seat row are placed at the fuselage sides and at the rigid part of the
pilot’s partition. The foldable serving plates for the rest of passengers are always placed at the seats
rear side of the previous seat row.
EFFECTIVITY
025.24.00
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 2 FOLDABLE SERVING PLATE ARRANGEMENT AT SEAT AND AT FUSELAGE SIDES

A – Foldable serving plates arrangement at fuselage sides
B - Foldable serving plates arrangement at a seat
4. Installation of fans (if installed)

Airplane can be equipped dependently on customers with installation of HFG 802 AR 3077 SF ECDC
fans in the passenger cabin on the vertical control channel above the transparencies, and on the wall of
the rear baggage compartment. Fan(s) controls the FANS circuit breaker on the overhead panel and/or
FRONT/ FAN /REAR switch(es) on the window frame next to the second pilot.
EFFECTIVITY
025.24.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSPECTOR SEAT INSTALLATION

1. General
The airplane is provided with a portable inspector seat. The seat is installed as required between frames
No. 7 and 9 on the left-hand side of the passenger compartment. When not installed, the seat is stowed
behind the last double seats, or it the front baggage compartment.
2. Description
The seat consists of a frame made of metal tubes, a seat cushion filled with foamed material and coated with
a self-extinguishing fabric. The seat has no back rest. It is provided with two sliding hinges and a metal-tube
tilting strut. The seat is provided with a lap safety belt consisting of two straps, attachment fasteners, and a
lock. The length of the safety belt is adjustable. The belt is locked by connecting the two parts of the lock
(sliding one into the other). Pressing a red pushbutton on the upper side of the lock will release the latch.
3. Operation
If required for en route inspection the inspector’s seat is to be removed from its stowage behind the rear
passenger seat or from the front baggage compartment before the flight and installed in the airplane.
The seat is installed by slipping its hinges over the pins of the fixed hinges located between frames No. 7
and 9 on the LH side of the passenger compartment forward of the first passenger seat.
The inspector’s seat is tilted up and fixed in this position by means of an adjustable stop.
The inspector is seated on the first single seat. In flight, be will stand-up, release the inspector’s seat, release
a tilting strut, tilt the seat to the horizontal position, and secure the strut on the heating duct by means of
a safety pin.
The inspector will sit on the seat, faster the safety belt, take the third (standby) earphones from the pocked
on the back of the captain’s seat, and connect the connector of the earphones into the INSP. PHONES jack
on the captain’s instrument box. (refer to the chapter 23).
After his activity is finished, the inspector will restore the equipment to its original condition.
EFFECTIVITY
025.25.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 INSPECTOR SEAT INSTALLATION

(1) Inspector’s seat; (2) Safety belt; (3) Tilting strut
EFFECTIVITY
025.25.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS IN PASSENGER VERSION

1. General
The front and the rear baggage compartments (if installed) are used as cargo compartments.
The front baggage compartment is situated between the bulkheads No. 2 and 4. Its volume is 0.7 m3, and
its permissible load is 100 kg. It is accessible from the outside after opening of covers on the left-hand and
right-hand sides. Optional is installed the fixing bags of the front baggage compartment (see Fig 1.)
The rear baggage compartment is located between the frame No. 19 and bulkhead No. 21 and is
divided by means of sandwich panel into two sections. Two detachable sandwich covers are provided to
close both sections which can secure in place with lock.
When stowing the baggage, remove and store the covers behind the passenger’s seat – see Fig. 2 – so that
cover damage may be prevented.
The technical compartments in which the different major components of the aircraft systems are installed
have no special design and are a constituent part of the aircraft structure.
EFFECTIVITY
025.51.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 FIXING BAGS OF THE FRONT BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT (IF INSTALLED)

(1) Binding belt (83159951); (2) Net (B 593 841 N); (3) Single-point grips (83159961); (4) Bags
EFFECTIVITY
025.51.00
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT-PASSENGER VERSION

SERVICING
1. Examination of the emergency equipment


Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Check correct fixing of the first-aid kits in both the flight and passenger compartments.
Defects not allowed: damaged and uncompleted first-aid kits, damaged first-aid kit fixing
elements, damaged fastening straps of the emergency axe and fixing
elements for ELT.
(2) Check the seals of first-aid kits in the passenger compartment and in pilot's compartment.
Check the expired time of components of the first-aid kits on the label.
Should the seals are damaged or packing of some item be damaged or the contents incomplete,
replace it by new one.
(3) Check the axe for correct condition and fixing. The axe is placed in the flight compartment behind
the copilot’s seat on the wall of the partition between the flight and passenger compartments.
Replace the damaged axe fastening straps by new ones.
(4) Remove the lid from Velcro tapes between the frames No. 18 and 19, or release the ceiling
upholstery of the passenger compartment between the frames No. 14 and 18 by releasing 5 quick-
acting latches using the L 410.9141-05 screwdriver and take down the upholstery ceiling panel
behind the frame No. 18 by moving the upholstery ceiling panel forward.
Check fixing of the mounting bracket assembly of ELT in the airframe and check also the latch
fixing ELT in the mounting bracket assembly.
Check the antenna mounting and engaging the contact separator between the portable antenna
and the contact finger. Check that no corrosion signs occur in the vicinity of ELT.
Check the ELT functional serviceability according to the procedure specified in section 025.60.04 or
025.60.05 or 025.60.06 or 025.60.07 or 025.60.08 or 025.60.09.
(5) Install the lid on the Velcro tapes between the frames No. 18 and 19 or re-install the passenger
compartment ceiling upholstery.
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.00
ALL Page: 301
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Check of the operation of push-buttons for calling the crew


Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches and the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME circuit
breaker on the overhead panel.
(2) Depress the PUSH-TO-CALL-CREW pushbutton located on the panel above the passenger
compartment seats between the frames No. 14 and 15. In the flight compartment, the assistant
checks that the CABIN CALL signaling cell on the central warning display lights up.
(3) Depress the PUSH-TO-CALL-CREW pushbutton situated above the passenger compartment seats
between the frames No. 10 and 11. In the flight compartment, the assistant checks that the CABIN
CALL signaling cell on the central warning display lights up.
(4) Switch off the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME circuit breaker and the BATTERY I, II
switches.
(5) Defects not allowed: defective pushbutton, defective lamp of the CABIN CALL signaling cell.
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ARTEX C 406–2 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (IF INSTALLED)

1. General
The ARTEX C 406 - 2 emergency locator transmitter (ELT) system is designed for the aircraft direction
finding in the case of emergency landing.
The ARTEX C 406 - 2 ELT system consist of the following components:
- ELT Unit:
• a. G-Switch
• b. Transmitter
• c. Microprocessor
• d. Miscellaneous components
• e. "ON" Light
• f. 406.025 MHz Transmitter Module
- Battery pack
- Fixed antenna
- Connecting Coax Cable
- Mounting Tray
- Mounting Tray End Cap
- Cockpit Remote Switch Assembly
- Buzzer
- Installation kit
No. Name Type (Drwg. No.) Qty Location
1 Circuit breaker KLIXON 7277-2-1 1 Between frames 1 and 2

2 Emergency locator transmitter ARTEX C 406-2 1 Between frames 18 and 19
(455-5010)
3 Buzzer 130-4004 1 Vertical control channel
4 Antenna Rod 110-320 1 Between frames 18 and 19
5 Remote switch panel 345-6196-04 1 Left instrument panel
6 Circuit breaker KLIXON 7277-2-5 1 Between frames 1 and 2
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Operation
The ELT automatically activates during a crash and transmits the standard swept tone on 121.5 and
243.0 MHz. Every 50 seconds for 520 milliseconds (long message protocol) the 406.025 MHz
transmitter turns on. During that time a encoded digital message is sent to the satellite.
The information contained in that message is shown below:
• Serial number assigned to the ELT by the beacon manufacturer or the national beacon registration
authority, or
• Aircraft identification or registration number, and
• Country of registration and country code; plus
• Position Coordinates (optional)
The 406.025 MHz transmitter will operate for 24 hours and shut down automatically.
While the 121.5/243.0 MHz transmitter will continue to operate until the unit has exhausted the battery
power which typically will be at least 72 hours.
The C406-2 Series ELT main assembly is housed in a high impact, fire resistant, polycarbonate plastic
case, which is enclosed in a protective mounting frame assembly made of similar material. See Figure 1.
NOTE: The ELT main assembly and its mounting frame assembly are capable of withstanding
extremely harsh environments and have been subjected to the rigorous environmental
testing required by COSPAS-SARSAT for certification.
FIG. 1 C406-2 SERIES ELT AND MOUNTING FRAME ASSEMBLY
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The cockpit-mounted remote switch assembly is comprised of an ELT status LED and control switch and
allows an operator to manually turn the ELT on (i.e., activate) for testing and reset (i.e., deactivate) the
ELT. See Figure 2.
NOTE: The ELT CANNOT be disarmed or disabled from the cockpit. Cockpit operation is limited to
deactivating or manually activating the ELT.
More information are described in “Description, Operation, Installation and Maintenance Manual”
(Doc. No. 570-5000 Rev N or later) ARTEX ELT C406-2 and Flight Manual of the aircraft.
FIG. 2 ELT CONTROL SWITCH PANEL
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ARTEX C 406–2 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (IF INSTALLED)

1. Removal and installation of the C 406 - 2 Emergency Locator Transmitter

C. Tools B914082N or L 410.9141-05 Screwdriver
E. Procedures
Before the removal or installation of the ELT, open the ceiling upholstery panels of the passenger
compartment between the frames No. 14 and 18 by releasing 5 quick-acting latches using the
B914082N screwdriver.
Remove the upholstery-ceiling panel between the frames No. 18 and 19a by moving the upholstery
ceiling panel forwards.
(A) Removal of the C 406-2 Emergency Locator Transmitter – refer to the fig. 401
FIG. 401 ELT REMOVAL SEQUENCE
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Loosen the mounting frame cap thumbscrews (2 pcs).
(2) Slide the mounting frame cap back away from the ELT.
(3) Lift the protective top cover up, away from the ELT and set it aside.
(4) Disconnect the two antenna coax cables from the ELT.
(5) Disconnect the harness receptacle from the ELT, if necessary.
NOTE: The receptacle may disconnect when the mounting frame cap is pulled back.
(6) Lift the ELT up from the connector end.
NOTE: Careful use of a flat blade screwdriver as a lever will make this step easier.
(8) Slide the ELT up and out, away from the mounting tray.
(9) Remove the mounting tray assy from airframe structure – refer to the fig. 402. Save the
connecting material for next using.
FIG. 402 TYPICAL MOUNTING TRAY INSTALLATION
(B) Installation of the C 406-2 Emergency Locator Transmitter
(1) Verify labels on the new mounting tray that corresponds with the new ELT Main assy.
(2) Install the new or repaired ELT in reverse order – refer to the previous steps (A) (1) to (9).
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Make functional check of the ELT as per the work procedure specified in section
025.60.06.
(4) Fix the upholstery-ceiling panel between the frames No. 18 and 19a by moving the
upholstery ceiling panel rearwards. Close the upholstery ceiling panels between the frames
No. 14 and 18 by securing 5 quick-acting latches using the B914082N screwdriver.
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
025.60.06
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 26
FIRE PROTECTION

Section Section
Subject Subject
Title page - 026.10.00 801 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Approved Repairs 802 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 026.10.01 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 026.10.02 1 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Nov 20/15
2 Dec 10/20 Servicing 301 May 30/14
3 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
2 Nov 1/11 026.10.03 1 May 30/14
Contents 1 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 May 30/14
3 May 30/14 302 Nov 1/11
4 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
026.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 026.10.04 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 602 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 026.10.05 1 Nov 20/15
6 Nov 1/11 026.10.06 1 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11 026.10.07 1 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 20/15 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 026.10.08 1 Dec 10/20
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20
302 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
026.10.08 301 Dec 10/20 026.20.01 601 Nov 1/11

Servicing 302 Dec 10/20 Inspection / Check 602 Nov 1/11
026.20.00 1 May 30/14 603 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 604 Nov 1/11
3 May 30/14 605 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 606 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11 026.20.02 1 Nov 1/11
7 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
10 Nov 1/11 302 Apr 5/13
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 026.20.03 1 Dec 10/20
104 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
Servicing 301 Nov 20/15 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 20/15 402 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 20/15 026.20.04 1 Nov 1/11
026.20.01 1 Apr 5/13 Servicing 301 May 30/14
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
4 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Apr 5/13 026.20.05 1 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11 026.20.07 1 Nov 1/11
406 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 26
FIRE PROTECTION
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
6 026-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
026-List of 1 - - L410UVP-E/145d May 31/12
Revisions
026.20.00 2 to 3 - -
7 026-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
026-List of 1 - -
Revisions
026-Contents 3 - - L410UVP-E/170d Apr 5/13
026.20.01 1 - -
301 to 302 - -
026.20.02 302 - -
8 026-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
026-List of 1 to 2 - -
Revisions
026.10.00 301 - -
026.10.02 301 to 302 - -
026.10.03 1 to 2 - -
301 - -
026.10.08 301 to 302 - - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
026.20.00 1 to 3 - -
301 to 305 - -
026.20.01 302 to 303 - -
026.20.02 301 - -
026.20.03 1
301 to 302 - 601 to 602
026.20.04 301 to 302 - -
026.20.05 301

ALL Page: 1
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
8 026.20.07 301 - -
026.20.09 - 1 to 4 - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
- 301 to 302 -
9 026-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
026-List of 2 - -
Revisions
026-Contents 2 - -
026.10.00 1 - -
101 - -
L410UVP-E/220d Nov 20/15
026.10.01 2 - -
026.10.02 2 - -
026.10.03 301 - -
026.10.05 1 - -
026.10.08 2 - -
026.20.00 301 to 304 - 305 to 306
10 026-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
026-List of 2 - -
Revisions
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
026.10.08 1 to 2 - -
301 to 302 - -
026.20.03 1, 301 - -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DS-3M2 SMOKE DETECTOR

1. Purpose
The DS-3M2 smoke detector is intended for signaling smoke (fire) in the front (rear-if installed) baggage
compartment.
2. Technical data
Voltage 27 V ± 10 %
Time of operation on case of air transparency reduction of 40 % at a
temperature of 25 ± 10°C max. 10 s
The smoke detector will actuate if air transparency is reduced by 30 ± 10 % and more
3. Operation
When the DS-3M2 smoke detector is switched on, the lamp situated in the photo resistor axis lights up.
The diaphragm, placed between the lamp and the photo resistor, protects the photo resistor from direct
influence of lamp light beams. This way the photo resistor is lighted insufficiently and the detector
remains out of operation. The smoke generated by fire penetrates into the space between the
diaphragm and the photo resistor. Smoke particles break the light beams which fall onto the resistor and
actuate the detector.
EFFECTIVITY
026.10.08
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 DS-3M2 SMOKE DETECTOR

(1) Nut; (2) Cover; (3) Spring; (4) SM-28-4.8-1 or SM-28-4.8 or SM 30 Bulb; (5) Socket;
(6) Damper; (7) Screen; (8) Assembly plate
EFFECTIVITY
026.10.08
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DS-3M2 SMOKE DETECTOR

SERVICING
1. Inspection of the DS-3 M2 smoke detector

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stepladder (e.g. B097300N)
B. Materials Dry cloth

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Set the stepladder (e.g. B097300N) to the front baggage compartment.
(2) Open the doors of front baggage compartment.
(3) Check the smoke detectors for mechanical damage, cleanliness and security of attachment.
Replace the damaged parts. Clean the surface with use clean and dry cloth. Tighten screwed
joints.
(4) Remove the stepladder.
(5) Close the doors of the front baggage compartment.
NOTE: Carry out the step (3) in the rear baggage compartment if installed the smoke
detectors in rear baggage compartment.
2. Replacement of the signaling bulb of the DS-3M2 smoke detector.

Check of the operation of the smoke detector.
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stepladder (e.g. B097300N); Air pressure source
(max. 1 bar)
B. Materials SM-28-4.8-1 or SM-28-4.8 or SM 30 Bulb
C. Tools Necessary tools from the instruments kits

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Set the stepladder (e.g. B097300N) to the fuselage nose section and open the door of the front
baggage compartment and rear (if installed) baggage compartment.
EFFECTIVITY
026.10.08
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Bulb removal:
(a) Remove the protective grid of smoke detector.
(b) Hold the case of the detector with one hand (to avoid damage to the shock absorbers),
remove the cover by turning it counterclockwise.
(c) Remove the nut fixing the bulb socket in the detector.
(d) Remove the old bulb from the socket.
(e) Blow out the detector with compressed air (at a pressure of not more than 1 bar) to remove
dust and moisture.
(3) Bulb installation:
(a) Install a new SM-28-4.8-1 or SM-28-4.8 or SM 30 bulb.
(b) Reassembly in the reverse order, and pay attention to the presence of the spring ring.
NOTE: It is forbidden to install a bulb of another type or power.

When replace the bulbs, must be switched off supply voltage.
(c) Install the protective grid of smoke detector.
(4) Carry out the check of the correct operation of the smoke detection system of front and/or rear
baggage compartment according to the work procedure 026.10.00.A shown in section
026.10.00 DETECTION- SERVICING.
(5) Close the door of the front baggage compartment and rear (if installed) baggage compartment.
(6) Remove the stepladder.
EFFECTIVITY
026.10.08
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T 7607 (OR B594280N) FIRE EXTINGUISHER

1. Purpose
The T 7607 (or B594280N) fire extinguisher is intended for extinguishing fire in the front baggage
compartment of the airplane.
2. Technical data
Volume of extinguisher vessel: 1.2 +/- 0.03 l
Extinguishing agent: HALON C 2 F 4 Br 2
Weight of extinguishing agent: 1.1 kg
Pressure gas: Nitrogen
Pressurized on the: 1.2 +0.5 MPa at the temperature +20+/-2°C
[11.8 +0.5 kp/cm2, 174 + 7 PSI]
Gross weight of extinguisher assembly 2.6 kg
Weight of extinguisher assembly without
extinguishing agent 1.5 kg
Operating temperature range: -50°C to +60°C
3. Operation
By turning the charge valve the inlet tube transferring the charge pressure from the bottle to the pressure
gauge in the pilot’s cabin is opened or closed.
Another valve is fitted with a device enabling to actuate the fire extinguisher from the pilot’s cabin.
The fire extinguisher is provided with a safety valve protecting the bottle from excessive pressure.
EFFECTIVITY
026.20.03
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 T 7607 (OR B594280N) FIRE EXTINGUISHER

(1) Bottle; (2), (3) Valve; (4) Plug.
EFFECTIVITY
026.20.03
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T 7607 (OR B594280N) FIRE EXTINGUISHER

SERVICING
1. Inspection of the T 7607 (or B594280N) fire extinguisher and its attachment parts

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the cover on the right-hand side of the fuselage nose section between frames No. 2
and 4 (beneath the front baggage compartment) by loosening 33 quick-release locks.
(2) Inspect the fire extinguisher.
Following defects not allowed:
• fire extinguisher corrosion

• incorrect fire extinguisher attachment
Remove corrosion. Replace damaged parts.
(3) Re-install the cover on the right-hand side of the fuselage nose section.
2. Check of the pressure in the T 7607 (or B594280N) fire extinguisher in the front baggage
compartment

Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Check of the pressure in the fire extinguisher of the front baggage compartment as indicated by
the board pressure gauge.
EFFECTIVITY
026.20.03
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Pressure in the fire extinguisher depends upon ambient temperature and shall not drop below
the values listed in the following table:
2. Minimal pressure indicated on

Ambient 1. Pressure in the T 7607 (B594280N)
the pressure gauge on the RH
temperature Fire extinguisher
instrument panel
[°C]
[MPa] [kp/cm2] [PSI] [MPa] [kp/cm2] [PSI]
- 50 0.913 +0.04 8.96 +0.4 132.4 +6 0.84 8.2 122
- 40 0.954 +0.04 9.36 +0.4 138.3 +6 0.87 8.5 126
- 30 0.995 +0.04 9.76 +0.4 144.3 +6 0.91 8.9 132
- 20 1.036 +0.04 10.16 +0.4 150.2 +6 0.95 9.3 138
- 10 1.077 +0.04 10.57 +0.4 156.2 +6 0.99 9.7 144
0 1.118 +0.05 10.97 +0.5 162.1 +6 1.02 10.0 148
+ 10 1.159 +0.05 11.37 +0.5 168.1 +7 1.06 10.4 154
+ 20 1.200 +0.05 11.77 +0.5 174.0 +7 1.10 10.8 160
+ 30 1.241 +0.05 12.17 +0.5 179.9 +7 1.14 11.2 165
+ 40 1.282 +0.05 12.58 +0.5 185.9 +7 1.18 11.6 171
+ 50 1.323 +0.06 12.98 +0.6 191.8 +9 1.21 11.9 175
+ 60 1.364 +0.06 13.38 +0.6 197.8 +9 1.25 12.3 181
(3) Check whether the pressure indicated on the pressure gauge located on the RH instrument
panel corresponds to the requirements given in table of step (2).
If the value not corresponds with values, mentioned in table of step (2) replace the T 7607
(or B594280N) fire extinguisher.
EFFECTIVITY
026.20.03
ALL Page: 302
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 027.00.00 305 Nov 20/15

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Servicing 306 Mar 10/17
2 Dec 10/20 307 Mar 10/17
3 Dec 10/20 308 Nov 1/11
4 Dec 10/20 309 Nov 15/13
5 Dec 10/20 310 Apr 15/15
6 Mar 10/17 311 May 30/14
Record of Revisions 1 Nov 15/13 312 Nov 20/15
2 Apr 15/15 313 Nov 20/15
3 Feb 23/18 314 Nov 1/11
4 Dec 10/20 315 Apr 15/15
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 316 Apr 15/15
2 Nov 1/11 317 Nov 1/11
2 May 30/14 319 May 30/14
3 Mar 10/17 320 May 30/14
5 Mar 10/17 402 Nov 1/11
6 Feb 23/18 Cleaning / Painting 701 Nov 1/11
7 Oct 30/19 702 Nov 1/11
8 Oct 30/19 027.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
202 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 5 Nov 1/11
303 May 30/14 6 Nov 1/11
304 May 30/14

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
027.11.00 101 Nov 1/11 027.12.02 401 Nov 1/11

Fault Isolation 102 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20 027.12.04 1 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 501 Dec 10/20 027.20.00 1 Nov 1/11
503 Nov 15/13 027.21.00 1 Nov 1/11
505 Mar 10/17 3 Nov 1/11
506 Nov 15/13 4 Nov 1/11
027.12.00 1 May 30/14 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 303 May 30/14
102 Nov 1/11 304 May 30/14
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
302 May 30/14 402 Nov 1/11
027.12.01 1 Nov 1/11 403 May 30/14
3 Nov 1/11 405 Mar 10/17
4 Nov 1/11 406 Mar 10/17
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 407 Mar 10/17
402 Nov 1/11 408 Mar 10/17
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11 409 Mar 10/17
602 Nov 1/11 410 Mar 10/17
027.12.02 1 Nov 1/11 411 Feb 23/18
3 Nov 1/11 413 Mar 10/17
4 Nov 1/11 414 Mar 10/17
Servicing 301 May 30/14 415 Mar 10/17
302 Nov 1/11 416 Mar 10/17

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
027.21.00 417 Mar 10/17 027.31.00 1 May 30/14

Removal / Installation 418 Mar 10/17 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
027.22.00 1 Mar 10/17 3 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Mar 10/17 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 102 Nov 1/11
027.22.01 1 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 May 30/14
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 302 Oct 30/19
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 402 Oct 30/19
027.22.02 1 Nov 1/11 403 Oct 30/19
027.22.03 1 Nov 1/11 027.32.00 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
027.22.04 1 Nov 1/11 3 Feb 23/18
3 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 May 30/14 7 May 30/14
302 May 30/14 8 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
027.22.05 1 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
027.22.06 1 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 403 Oct 30/19
4 Nov 1/11 404 Feb 23/18
Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11 027.50.00 1 Feb 23/18
502 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
027.30.00 1 Nov 1/11 3 Feb 23/18
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 4 Feb 23/18

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
027.50.00 5 Nov 1/11 027.50.06 1 Nov 1/11

7 Apr 5/13 027.50.07 1 Nov 1/11
8 Apr 5/13 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
9 Apr 5/13 027.50.08 1 Nov 20/15
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Nov 20/15
102 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
027.50.01 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Mar 10/17 Removal / Installation 401 Mar 10/17
302 Mar 10/17 402 Mar 10/17
Removal / Installation 401 Mar 10/17 403 Mar 10/17
402 Nov 15/13 404 Mar 10/17
027.50.02 1 Nov 15/13 027.50.11 1 Feb 23/18
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
3 Nov 15/13 3 Feb 23/18
4 Nov 15/13 4 Feb 23/18
027.50.03 1 Feb 23/18 027.60.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 027.61.00 1 Oct 30/19
4 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19
Fault Isolation 101 Feb 23/18 3 Oct 30/19
102 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
027.50.04 1 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
027.61.01 1 Nov 1/11

027.61.02 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
027.61.03 1 Oct 30/19
3 Oct 30/19
4 Oct 30/19
027.62.00 1 Oct 30/19
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
5 Apr 5/13
6 Nov 1/11
7 Nov 1/11
8 Apr 5/13
302 Nov 1/11
027.62.01 1 Nov 1/11
027.62.02 1 Nov 1/11
027.62.03 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 6
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
16 027-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages 3 to 4
027-List of 3 - -
Revisions
027-Contents 6 - -
027.00.00 305 - - L410UVP-E/220d Nov 20/15
312 to 313 - -
027.50.00 1 to 2 - -
027.50.08 1 - -
301 - -
17 027-List of 1 to 4 5 to 6 -
Effective Pages
027-List of 3 - -
Revisions
027-Contents 3, 5, 6 to 8 - -
027.00.00 306 to 307 - -
027.11.00 501, 505 - - L410UVP-E/236d Mar 10/17
027.21.00 404 405 to 418 -
027.22.00 1, 301 - -
027.32.00 402 to 403 - -
027.50.01 301 to 302, - -
401
027.50.10 - 401 to 404 -
18 027-List of 1 to 5 - -
Effective Pages
027-List of 3 - -
Revisions
027.21.00 401 - -
027.32.00 2 to 3 - -
402 to 404 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
027.50.00 1 to 4, 10 - -
027.50.03 1, 101 - -
027.50.11 - 1 to 4

ALL Page: 3
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
19 027-List of 1 to 5 - -
Effective Pages
027-List of 4 - -
Revisions
027.31.00 302, 402, 403 - - L410UVP-E/300d Oct 30/19
027.32.00 402, 403 - -

027.61.00 1 to 3 - -
027.61.03 - 1 to 4 -
027.62.00 1 to 2 - -
20 027-List of 1 to 5 - -
Effective Pages
027-List of 4 - -
027-Contents 1 - -
027.11.00 501 401, 402 -

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject

General 1
General 201
Servicing 301
Check of flight controls function 301
Inspection of the bonding strips on all moving parts 302
of the controls
Check of the individual control centres 302
Inspection of control cables at all accessible places 304
Adjustment of the control cables tension 306
Inspection of the components made of electron for 310
corrosion
Inspection of glued joints 314
Inspection of the individual pull-rods levers of the 315
controls
Inspection of the threaded ends of the control pull- 316
rods
Check of lock nuts on control rods of trim tabs of 317
elevator, rudder and ailerons for security of tightening
Inspection of the dust catchers at the individual 319
control parts
Installation of new cables 401
Cable cleaning 701
AILERON AND TAB 027.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
AILERON CONTROL 027.11.00 1 ALL
General 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the play in the aileron and aileron trim tab 301
control
Replacement of the aileron control cable in control 401
column
Adjustment the tension of aileron control cables in 501
control column
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
AILERON TRIM TAB CONTROL 027.12.00 1 ALL

General 1
Operation 2
Fault isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the operation of the electric control of 301
aileron trim tab
Check of the play in the aileron and aileron trim tab 302
control
UT 6D ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STRUT 027.12.01 1 AIRCRAFT WITH
UT 6D ELECTRO-
MECHANICAL STRUT
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Removal and installation of the UT 6D 401
electro-mechanical strut
Condition check of the UT 6D electro-mechanical 601
strut brushes
AIRCRAFT WITH
100 LUN 2522 LINEAR ACTUATOR 027.12.02 1
100 LUN 2522
LINEAR ACTUATOR
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Replacement of scraper rings 301
Removal and installation of the 100 LUN 2522 401
linear actuator
AIRCRAFT WITH
LUN 1688-8 TRIM TAB POSITION TRANSMITTER 027.12.03
100 LUN 2522
LINEAR ACTUATOR
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
AIRCRAFT WITH
LUN 1687-8 TRIM TAB POSITION INDICATOR 027.12.04 1
100 LUN 2522
LINEAR ACTUATOR
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
ALL Page: 2
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON CONTROL
1. Replacement of the aileron control cable in control column
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment IN 11 - B971051N (L410.9712) Dynamometer

(or equivalent)
B. Materials B035291N Cable with chain
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the control column assembly – see the Removal of the manual control assembly
procedure on the page 401 in the section 027.31.00
(2) On the removed control column assembly set the LH and RH control wheel to the neutral
position – see Fig. 503 in the section 027.11.00, and connect the lever (13) on the LH control
column (see Fig. 2 in the section 027.11.00) to the lever (13) on the RH control column by the
removed pull rod (1) using the (4) bolt with dust catchers, nut, washer and split pins.
CAUTION: REPLACE THE CABLE WITH THE CHAIN (10) IN ONE CONTROL COLUMN
FIRST, AND THEN REPLACE THE CABLE WITH THE CHAIN IN THE SECOND
COLUMN TO MAINTAIN THE CORRECT POSITION OF THE LEVER (13)
RELATIVE TO THE STEERING WHEEL. DO NOT RELEASE THE CABLE WITH
CHAIN IN BOTH CONTROL COLUMNS SIMULTANEOUSLY OTHERWISE THE
CONTROL COLUMN ASSEMBLY MUST BE COMPLETED IN THE SPECIAL
ASSEMBLY JIG.
DURING THE REPLACEMENT OF THE B035291N CABLE WITH CHAIN, BOTH
CONTROL WHEELS MUST BE HELD IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION ALL THE
TIME – SEE FIG. 503 IN THE SECTION 027.11.00
(3) Release the B035291N cable with the chain pos. (10) – see the Fig. 2 in the section 027.11.00
in the control column
• Remove the (9) Bolt with dust catcher, insertion, nut, washer and split pin
• Remove the (8) Pulley with bearing
• Release and remove the (14) nut with the lock washer
(4) Remove the B035291N cable with the chain pos. (12) – see the Fig. 3 in the section 027.11.00
• Remove the (9) cap of the control column
EFFECTIVITY
027.11.00
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Remove the (12) cable with the chain
(5) Install new B035291N cable with chain (10) – see the Fig. 2 in the section 027.11.00
• Rinse all sliding contacts with the technical petrol
• Lubricate all sliding contacts, bearings and chain with the Aeroschell Grease 22
• Clean the cable with the cloth before the installation
• Mark the central link of the chain (10)
• Set the chain central link of new B035291 cable with chain (10) just to the top of the chain
wheel (position 13 on the Fig 3 in the section 027.11.00)
• Pass the new B035291N cable with chain (10) through the control column and lead the
ends of the cable through the runner of the segment (11 or 12 depending on side) – see
the Fig. 2 in the section 027.11.00
• Install the (8) Pulley with bearing to its original position using the (9) Bolt with dust catcher,
insertion, nut, washer and split pin
• Secure the cable with chain (10) with the (14) nut with the lock washer
• Adjust the tension of the cable with chain (10) in accordance with the subparagraph (6) of
the procedure 027.00.00.E
(6) Repeat the steps (3) to (5) of this procedure for the control column on the opposite side.
NOTE: The control wheels may be released from its neutral position now.
(7) Remove the pull rod (1) – see the Fig. 2 in the chapter 027.11.00 from the control column
assembly.
(8) Install the control column assembly – see the Installation of the manual control assembly
procedure on the page 402 in the section 027.31.00
EFFECTIVITY
027.11.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON CONTROL
ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1A. Adjustment the tension of aileron control cables in control column

(A. OPTION - procedure without fixtures for securing aileron control cables)
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment IN 11 - B971051N (L410.9712) Dynamometer
(or equivalent)
B. Materials Securing varnish,

Securing washers 8.2 ONL 3288.1 (8 pcs)
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the LH and RH seats according to the work procedure mentioned in chapter 025.
(2) Remove the protected fillets and carpet on the LH and RH side between frames No. 5 and 6.
(3) Pull out the carpet under LH and RH seats.
(4) Remove the floors on LH and RH side in the cockpit.
(5) Remove the lid (10) on LH (RH) side of the lower part of fuselage - refer to the fig. 501.
(6) Set the IN 11 - B971051N (L 410.9712) dynamometer to the measuring position on the LH
control column (and then on RH control column) - refer to the fig. 303 mentioned
in section 027.00.00.
(7) Work procedure must perform two workers.

One worker (in cockpit) checked the tension values of aileron control cable on the IN 11
dynamometer, secured the nut of control cable (1) - refer to the fig. 502 - against turning and
secured the neutral position of steering wheels.
Required, that the both steering wheels must be in neutral position - refer to the fig. 503.
Other worker adjusted of the tension of aileron control cables thru access hole (10)
- refer to the fig. 501.
CAUTION: IF IS NOT SECURED THE NUT OF CONTROL CABLE AGAINST TURNING,

CAN OCCUR UNTANGLING OF THE CONTROL CABLE.
UNTANGLING OF CONTROL CABLE IS NOT PERMITTED.
(8) Adjustment the tension of aileron control cables in control column is successfully, if is reached
the value of tension of control cable, mentioned in work procedure 027.00.00.E and if are
steering wheels in neutral position.
EFFECTIVITY
027.11.00
ALL Page: 501
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Secure the nuts (2) and (3) - refer to the fig. 502 - with help the securing washers 8.2 ONL 3288.1
and with a securing varnish, against loosening.
(10) Remove the IN 11 dynamometer.
(11) Install the lid (10) on LH (RH) side of the lower part of fuselage - refer to the fig. 501.
(12) Install the floors on LH and RH side in the cockpit.
(13) Set and install the carpet under LH and RH seats.
(14) Install the protected fillets and carpet on the LH and RH side between frames No. 5 and 6.
(15) Install the LH and RH seats according to the work procedure mentioned in chapter 025.
FIG. 501 ACCESS HOLE FOR THE ADJUSTMENT THE TENSION OF THE AILERON CONTROL
CABLE
(10) Lid of access hole
EFFECTIVITY
027.11.00
ALL Page: 502
Nov 15/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28
FUEL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 028.00.00 303 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Servicing 304 May 30/14
2 Dec 10/20 305 Feb 23/18
3 Dec 10/20 306 May 30/14
4 Dec 10/20 307 May 30/14
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 308 May 30/14
2 Mar 10/17 309 May 30/14
3 Dec 10/20 310 May 30/14
4 Nov 1/11 311 May 30/14
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 312 May 30/14
2 Nov 1/11 028.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20
2 May 30/14 3 Dec 10/20
3 May 30/14 4 Nov 1/11
4 May 30/14 5 Oct 30/19
5 Mar 10/17 6 Nov 1/11
6 Nov 20/15 7 Mar 10/17
7 Oct 30/19 8 Mar 10/17
8 May 30/14 9 Nov 1/11
028.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 10 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13 11 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 12 Oct 30/19
4 Nov 1/11 13 Oct 30/19
5 Dec 10/20 14 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
028.10.00 401 May 30/14 028.20.01 401 Nov 1/11

Removal / Installation 402 Mar 10/17 Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11
403 May 30/14 403 Nov 1/11
404 May 30/14 404 Nov 1/11
405 Mar 10/17 028.20.02 1 Nov 1/11
406 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20
407 May 30/14 028.20.03 1 Nov 20/15
409 May 30/14 3 Nov 1/11
410 Dec 10/14 4 Nov 1/11
411 Mar 10/17 Servicing 301 Apr 5/13
412 Dec 10/14 302 Nov 1/11
413 Dec 10/14 028.20.04 1 Nov 1/11
028.10.01 1 Nov 1/11 028.20.05 1 Nov 1/11
028.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 028.20.06 1 Nov 1/11
4 Mar 10/17 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 20/15 028.20.07 1 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
9 Nov 1/11 403 Nov 1/11
10 Nov 1/11 404 Nov 1/11
11 Nov 1/11 028.20.08 1 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
028.20.01 1 Mar 10/17 Servicing 301 May 30/14
302 Mar 10/17 304 May 31/12

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
028.20.08 401 Nov 1/11 028.40.00 5 Nov 1/11

028.20.09 1 Nov 1/11 7 Nov 1/11
028.20.09 301 May 30/14 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
028.20.10 1 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
028.20.11 1 May 30/14 303 Oct 30/19
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 304 Oct 30/19
3 May 30/14 028.40.01 1 Nov 1/11
028.20.12 1 May 30/14 3 Nov 1/11
028.20.13 1 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
028.20.14 1 May 30/14 028.40.02 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
3 May 30/14 028.40.03 1 Nov 1/11
028.30.00 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20
102 Nov 1/11 402 Dec 10/20
028.30.01 1 Nov 1/11 028.40.04 1 Mar 10/17
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Mar 10/17
028.30.02 1 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Mar 10/17
028.30.03 1 Nov 1/11 028.40.05 1 Mar 10/17
Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19 402 Nov 1/11
3 Oct 30/19 028.40.06 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
028.40.06 401 Nov 1/11 028.40.15 1 Oct 30/19

Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19
028.40.07 1 Nov 1/11 3 Oct 30/19
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 028.40.16 1 Oct 30/19
302 Apr 5/13 Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19
303 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
304 Nov 1/11 302 Oct 30/19
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11
404 Nov 1/11
405 Nov 1/11
406 Nov 1/11
028.40.08 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
028.40.09 1 Nov 1/11
028.40.10 1 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11
028.40.11 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20
402 Dec 10/20
028.40.12 1 Oct 30/19
028.40.13 1 Nov 1/11
028.40.14 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
16 028-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
028-Record of 3 - -
Revision
L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
028.00.00 305 - -
028.40.00 303
028.40.12 1
17 028-List of 1, 3, 4 - -
Effective Pages
028-Record of 3 - -
Revision
028-Contents 7 - -
028.10.00 2, 5, 12, 13 - -
028.40.00 2, 3, 301 - - L410UVP-E/300d Oct 30/19
303 to 304 - -
028.40.12 1 - -
028.40.15 - 1 to 4 -
028.40.16 - 1 to 2 -
- 301 to 302 -
18 028-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
028-Record of 3 - -
Revision
028-Contents 1 - -
028.00.00 5 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
028.10.00 2, 3 - -
028.20.02 2 - -
028.40.03 401, 402 - -
028.40.11 401, 402 - -

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28
FUEL
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject

General 1
General 201
Servicing 301
Inspection of the components and piping of the fuel 301
system
Inspection of lower wing surface for fuel leaks 302
Check of the drain pipes and drain holes on lower 302
wing surface
Check of fuel cross-feed piping for correct function 303
Inspection of the piping and hoses of the fuel system 304
Drain of the fuel cleaners 306
Leakage test of fuel system 308
STORAGE 028.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
Collector fuel tank 3
Middle fuel tank 4
Outer fuel tank 6
Additional fuel tank 9
Wingtip fuel tank (if installed) 12
Venting tank (if installed pressure fuelling system) 14
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Inspection of the fuel tank venting tube orifices 301
Inspection of the rubber sleeves with filling necks 301
and the screens in the filling necks of fuel tanks
Inspection of the wing tip fuel tanks conditions (if 302
installed)
Removal of the collector fuel tank 401
Installation of the collector fuel tank (from spare parts) 402
Removal of the middle fuel tank 403
Installation of the middle fuel tank (from spare parts) 404
Removal of the outer fuel tank 406
Installation of the outer fuel tank (from spare parts) 407
Removal of the additional fuel tank 408
Installation of the additional fuel tank (from spare parts) 409
Removal of the wingtip fuel tank 410
Installation of the wingtip fuel tank 411
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Removal of the venting tank between ribs No. 14 028.10.00 412

and 15 (if installed pressure fuelling system)
Installation of the venting tank (if installed pressure 413
fuelling system)
General instructions for handling rubber fuel tanks 414
LUN 7783-8, 140 LUN 7783.01-8 AND 210 LUN 7783.01-8 028.10.01 1 ALL
FUEL TANK FILLER CAPS
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
DISTRIBUTION 028.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 6
Fault Isolation 101
410 PCR-1V (8), ECN-40, LUN 6283-8 FUEL PUMP 028.20.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Check of the tightness of the 410 PCR-1V (8), 301
ECN 40, LUN 6283-8 fuel pump
Check of the brushes on the 410 PCR-1V (8), 302
ECN 40, LUN 6283-8 fuel pump
Removal and installation of the 410 PCR-1V (8), 401
ECN-40, LUN 6283-8 fuel pump
LUN 2474.3-8 SOLENOID VALVE 028.20.02 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
LUN 7691.XX-8 FUEL FILTER 028.20.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Replacement of cartridges in the LUN 7691.XX-8 301
fuel filter
LUN 7370-8 FUEL COCK 028.20.04 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
ALL Page: 2
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Description of the fig. 1:

(1) LUN 1649-8 Wingtip tank fuel gauge transmitter; (2) LUN 2474.3-8 Solenoid valve;
(3) LUN 6281-8 Fuel pump; (4) 0.012 K LUN 1492.01-8 Pressure switch; (5) LUN 1635-8 Fuel gauge
transmitter; (6) LUN 1636.01-8 or LUN 1636.01-8/MOD.A Fuel gauge transmitter; (7) LUN 1637-8 Fuel
gauge transmitter; (8) LUN 1638-8 Fuel gauge transmitter; (9) B560528N (S-2) or B563299N (S-2.01)
Fuel level annunciator; (10) LUN 1642-8 Power supply box; (14) LUN 1634.01 Fuel gauge indicator;
(15) LUN 1674 Wingtip tank fuel gauge indicator; (16) LUN 1538.01 Three-pointer indicator;
(17) LUN 1559-8 Fuel pressure transmitter; (18) 0.02 K LUN 1492.01-8 or 0.03 K LUN 1492.01-8
Pressure switch

(1) 0.016 S LUN 1492.01-8 Pressure switch; (2) LUN 7349-8 Two-way valve; (3) 0.2 S LUN 1492.03-8
Pressure switch; (4) 0.012 K LUN 1492.01-8 Pressure switch; (5) LUN 1635-8 Fuel gauge transmitter;
(6) LUN 1638.01-8 or LUN 1636.01-8/MOD.A Fuel gauge transmitter; (7) LUN 1637-8 Fuel gauge
transmitter; (8) LUN 1638-8 Fuel gauge transmitter; (9) B560528N (S-2) or B563299N (S-2.01) Fuel
level annunciator; (10) LUN 1642-8 Power supply box; (14) LUN 1634.01 Fuel gauge indicator;
(15) LUN 1674 Wingtip tank fuel gauge indicator; (16) LUN 1538.01 Three-pointer indicator;
(19) B563570L and B563570P (SH) Level switches; (20) LUN 7452 Differential valve; (21) Venting
tank (between 14. and 15. ribs); (22) LUN 6281-8 Fuel pump; (23) LUN 7748-8 Filler neck;
(24) B563562N (SH-1) level switch; (25) LUN 7391 Float-controlled valve; (26) B563450L and
B563450P Float controlled valves; (27) LUN 1649-8 Wingtip tank fuel gauge transmitter; (28) PC 900
series Fuel flow rate indicator; (29) M 2002 Thermal switch
NOTE: No. 1, 3, 19, 20, 21, 23, 24, 25 and 26 are used only if central fueling system is installed.

(2) LUN 2474.3-8 Solenoid valve; (11) 410 PCR 1 V (8) or LUN 6283-8 Fuel pump; (12) B560454N
Thermo-regulator; (13) LUN 7691.0X-8 Fuel filter; (17) LUN 1559-8 Fuel pressure transmitter;
(18) 0.02 K LUN 1492.01-8 or 0.03 K LUN 1492.01-8 Pressure switch
EFFECTIVITY
028.00.00
ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
028.00.00
ALL Page: 6
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORAGE
1. General
Fuel is stored in the collector, middle, outer, additional and wingtip fuel tanks.
The collector, middle, outer and additional fuel tanks are manufactured of rubberized fabric. They are installed in
sheet metal vats between the spars of the LH and RH wing. The wing ribs are lined with foamed polyurethane
plates in places where they could damage the fuel tank faces.
The fuel tanks are accessible through access holes in the upper wing skin.
The wingtip tanks are manufactured of light alloy. Each wingtip tank is attached to the outermost wing rib
by three attachment fittings.
The fuel tanks are filled from above through filler necks situated on the middle (only E, E9 a/c), outer and
wingtip fuel tanks. Filler necks (their caps) are accessible after opening the lids situated on the upper wing
skin and on wingtip tank. Located inside the fuel tanks under the filler necks are screens with protective
cones.
The middle (only E, E9 a/c) and outer tank filler necks carry rubber collars connected to the fuel tank
and to the wing skin preventing spilled fuel to penetrate into the wing.
Draining pipes connected to the nipples of the collars permit spilled fuel to drain overboard through the lower
wing skin.
Filler neck for central pressure fuelling is accessible after opening the lid located between frames No. 24
and 25 at the right side of fuselage (if installed).
FIG. 1 DIAGRAM OF FUEL TANK LAYOUT

Legend for figure - see the List of components
EFFECTIVITY
028.10.00
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No. Name Type Drawing No. Qty Location
LH Collector fuel tank 621 1232 621 1232 (B003023L) 1 Between wing ribs No. 1 and 3, LH
1.
RH Collector fuel tank 621 1242 621 1242 (B003024P) 1 Between wing ribs No. 1 and 3, RH
LH Middle fuel tank 621 1251 XL410.6612 (B004574L) 1 Between wing ribs No. 3 and 8, LH
2.
RH Middle fuel tank 621 1261 XL410.6622 (B004576P) 1 Between wing ribs No. 3 and 8, RH
LH Outer fuel tank 621 1271 XL410.6613 (B004575L) 1 Between wing ribs No. 10 and 14, LH
3.
RH Outer fuel tank 621 1281 XL410.6623 (B004577P) 1 Between wing ribs No. 10 and 14, RH
LH Additional fuel tank 621 1301 XL410.6631 (B004579L) 1 Between wing ribs No. 15 and 20, LH
4.
RH Additional fuel tank 621 1311 XL410.6641 (B004580P) 1 Between wing ribs No. 15 and 20, RH
LH Wingtip fuel tank * B562600L

1 Outer wing ribs No. 31, LH
(without press. fueling) ** B563906L
RH Wingtip fuel tank * B562600P

1 Outer wing ribs No. 31, RH
(without press. fueling) ** B563906P
5.
LH Wingtip fuel tank * B563400L
1 Outer wing ribs No. 31, LH
(with pressure fueling) ** B563907L
RH Wingtip fuel tank * B563400P

1 Outer wing ribs No. 31, RH
(with pressure fueling) ** B563907P
Middle fuel tank, LH, RH
6. Fuel tank cap 210 LUN 7783.01-8 2
(valid only for UVP-E, -E9 a/c)
140 LUN 7783.01-8 (only
for UVP-E, -E9 a/c)
7. Fuel tank cap 2 Outer fuel tank, LH, RH
LUN 7783-8
(only for UVP-E20 a/c)
8. Fuel tank cap LUN 7783-8 2 Wingtip fuel tank, LH, RH
B562570N (if installed
9. Venting tank 2 Between ribs No. 14 and 15, LH, RH
pressure fueling)
NOTE: * - Type of wingtip fuel tank with BANO position lights installation – refer to the section 033.40.01
** - Type of wingtip fuel tank with WHELEN position lights installation – refer to the section 033.40.01
EFFECTIVITY
028.10.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Collector fuel tank

The outer face of the tank carries one rubber neck at the top and two rubber necks at the bottom connecting the
collector tank to the middle fuel tank. The bottom necks are provided with non-return flap valves.
Located on the bottom of the collector fuel tank near the face carrying the connecting necks is a sump equipped
with a rubber tube. The tube serves for connecting the pipe leading to the drain valve.
Two further rubber tubes for fuel delivery are installed in the front and in the rear bottom part of the collector fuel
tank. Tube elbows fitted with cylindrical filter screens and facing the tank bottom are installed inside the tubes.
The tank cap carries a fuel gauge transmitter and an elbow with a ball valve for the connection of the venting pipe
and a neck for the connection of the return fuel hose.
The capacity of the collector fuel tank is 140 liters.
FIG. 2 COLLECTOR FUEL TANK

(1) Cap; (2) LUN 1635-8 fuel gauge transmitter; (3) Elbow; (4) Ball; (5) Sealing ring; (6) Split pin;
(7) Screw; (8) Neck; (9) Ring; (10) Nut; (11) Connecting necks; (12) Top suspension; (13) Bottom
suspension; (14) Sump; (15) Tube for the connection of drain valve piping; (16) Tube with screen
for the connection of fuel pump piping; (17) Flange; (18) Fuel gauge sealing
I - Bottom suspension (detail view)
II - Top suspension (detail view)
EFFECTIVITY
028.10.00
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Middle fuel tank

The middle fuel tank carries on its inner face one rubber connecting neck on the top and two connecting necks
at the bottom. They are identical with those in the collector fuel tank. The outer face carries two bottom necks
connecting the middle fuel tank with the outer fuel tank. A rubberized fabric baffle is installed approximately
midway in the tank preventing fuel from rolling. One of the two caps carries a fuel gauge transmitter and
a level switch. The other cap carries a filling neck (only E, E9 a/c), a venting pipe elbow and a neck for
connecting the return fuel piping for fuel return from the engine.
The middle fuel tank capacity is 276 liters.
EFFECTIVITY
028.10.00
ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 2474.3-8 SOLENOID VALVE

1. Purpose
The LUN 2474.3-8 solenoid valves are intended for the:
• interconnection of the fuel systems of the left hand and right hand engine
(during normal flight the fuel systems of the left hand and right hand engine are separated)
The solenoid valve is designed so that it is permanently closed and it opens only if it is energized.
2. Technical data
Nominal voltage 28 V DC
Maximum current 300 mA
Minimum operating voltage 21 V
Fuel flow at 0.07 MPa (0.7 atm) min 5 l/min
The valve is leak-proof up to 0.3 MPa (3 kp/sq.cm)
3. Operation
The solenoid valve consists of two main parts:
the valve control system and the valve body. Both parts are connected by a housing. The housing is secured
against angular displacement in respect to the valve body and to the threaded unit by two setting screws.
The main part of the control system is a solenoid with a coil and an armature. The pressed-in face and the
pressed-on face on a brass sleeve from together with the brass sleeve a coil former with coil windings.
The sleeve accommodates an armature with a tapered end to improve solenoid characteristics. The armature
carries plug with a guide and a sealing. If the coil does not carry any current the sealing seats against the
valve body neck and thus cuts off the fuel flow.
The plug is held in this position by a spring resting against the coil face. A connector plug attached to the
other face with three screws is connected by a threaded unit to the connector socket. A sealing between
the valve body and the coil face prevents fuel from leaking into the coil space. When current is applied to
the coil, the solenoid armature is drawn into the coil former sleeve and the plug connected with the armature
opens the fuel flow. If current is removed, the plug will return to its former position and shut off the fuel flow.
EFFECTIVITY
028.20.02
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Dimension Thread
a M 22 x 1.5
b M 18 x 1.5
FIG. 1 LUN 2474.3-8 SOLENOID VALVE

(1) Face; (2) Face; (3) Sleeve; (4) Armature; (5) Cone; (6) Guide; (7) Sealing; (8) Spring;
(9) Valve body; (10) Threaded union; (11) Screw; (12) Housing; (13) Screw; (14) Plug;
(15) Coil winding
EFFECTIVITY
028.20.02
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 1635-8 FUEL GAUGE TRANSMITTER

1. Removal and installation of the LUN 1635-8 fuel gauge transmitters

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Suitable steps (e.g. B097365N);
B936760L or L410.9361 and B936760P or
L410.9362 Wing mats;
B968051N or L410.9682 Service trolley;
B. Materials 87 E1 Fuel gauge sealing (8 pieces);

0.6 mm dia Locking wire;
300 x 440 PVC bag (8 pieces)
C. Tools No. 697 (4,5x120) Screwdriver;

No. 697 (5,5x130) Screwdriver;
Z 37.9110-10 Screwdriver
E. Procedures
CAUTION: THE FUEL GAUGE TRANSMITTERS MUST NOT BE REMOVED OR INSTALLED IN

DUSTY ENVIRONMENT.
(1) Place the suitable steps (e.g. B097365N), wing trestles, B936760L or L410.9361 and B936760P
or L410.9362 wing mats, B968051N or L410.9682 service trolley and the external power supply
to the aircraft.
(2) Secure the wings with the trestles, place the mats on the wings.
(3) Place the steps to the left / right wing.
CAUTION: ALL SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE SET TO OFF POSITION
DURING THE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.
(4) Removal of the fuel gauge transmitters.
(a) Using the No. 697 (4.5x120) screwdriver screw off six screws on the external lid connecting
the rubber cuff with the filler neck on the outer fuel tank.
(b) Using the Z 37.9110-10 screwdriver screw off 12 screws on the lids of the collector fuel tank,
the middle fuel tank, the outer fuel tank, the additional fuel tank and the wingtip fuel tank.
Remove the outer lids.
EFFECTIVITY
028.40.03
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Mark out the fuel gauge transmitter original position. Unlock and release the fuel gauge
transmitter plug with the hand. Using the No. 697 (5.5x130) screwdriver screw off five screws
connecting the fuel gauge transmitter to the inner lid of the outer fuel tank.
(d) Remove the fuel gauge transmitters from all fuel tanks in the left wing following the procedure
described in para (c).
NOTE: Should the fuel gauge transmitters remain removed for a longer period of time,
secure the fuel tanks against dirt.
(5) Installation of the fuel gauge transmitters.
(a) Having the fuel gauge transmitters replace the 87 E 1 sealing by a new one. Referring to
the markings fit the fuel gauge transmitter to the inner lid of the outer fuel tank and tighten
five screws. Repeat for all fuel gauge transmitter of all respective fuel tanks.
(b) Plug in the connector(s) of the fuel gauge transmitter(s), tighten it and secure it with
0.6 mm dia. locking wire.
(c) Place the outer lid over the outer tank fuel gauge transmitter and tighten six screws connecting
the rubber cuff to the filler neck.
(d) Using the Z 37.9110-10 screwdriver tighten 12 screws on the outer lids of the collector fuel
tank, the middle fuel tank, the outer fuel tank, the additional fuel tank and the wingtip fuel
tank.
(e) Connect the external power supply to the aircraft.
(f) Check that all switches and circuit breakers on the overhead panel are switched off.
Set the control levers of both fuel cocks on the front control panel to the SHUT position.
(g) Switch on the BATTERY I, II, INVERTERS 36 V AC I, II switches on the overhead panel and
on the fuel gauge indicators on the instrument panel check the condition of the electrical wiring
between the fuel gauge transmitters and the fuel gauge indicators. Switch off all switches
and circuit breakers.
CAUTION: IF A FUEL GAUGE SET OR AN INDIVIDUAL FUEL GAUGE TRANSMITTER

OR INDICATOR HAVE BEEN REPLACED OR IF IN DOUBT ABOUT FUEL
QUANTITY INDICATION MINIMUM FUEL RESERVE SIGNALING CARRY
OUT A NEW CALIBRATION ACCORDING TO THE WORK PROCEDURE
028.40.00.A.
(6) Remove the mats from the left and right wing. Remove the steps and the trestles from under the
wings.
(7) Disconnect and remove the external power supply and the service trolley.
EFFECTIVITY
028.40.03
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 1649-8 WINGTIP TANK FUEL GAUGE TRANSMITTER

1. Removal and installation of the LUN 1649-8 wingtip fuel gauge transmitter
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Suitable steps (e.g. B097365N);
B. Materials 87 E1 fuel gauge sealing (2 pieces);

0.6 mm dia locking wire;
PVC bag, 300x440 mm (2 pcs)
C. Tools No. 697 (6x120) Screwdriver;

No. Z 37.9110-10 Flat screwdriver
E. Procedures
CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE OR INSTALL WINGTIP TANK FUEL GAUGE TRANSMITTER IN

DUSTY ENVIRONMENT.
(1) Place the suitable steps (e.g. B097365N), wing trestles and an external power supply to the
aircraft.
(2) Secure wings with trestles.
(3) Removal of wingtip tank fuel gauge transmitters.
(a) Using the flat screwdriver screw off six screws from the lid above the transmitter of the LH
and RH wingtip fuel tank. Remove the lid.
(b) Mark the positions of the LH and RH wingtip tank fuel gauge transmitter. Unlock and loosen
the fuel gauge transmitter connector by hand. Using a No. 697 - 6x120 screwdriver screw off
five screws retaining the fuel gauge transmitter in the RH and LH wingtip tank.
(c) Remove the fuel gauge transmitters from the RH and LH wingtip tank and mark out the aircraft
number and the transmitter location in the aircraft (LH or RH wingtip fuel tank).
NOTE: Should the fuel gauge transmitter remain removed for a longer period, protect the
fuel tanks against possible soiling.
EFFECTIVITY
028.40.11
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Installation of wingtip tank fuel gauge transmitters.
(a) Before the installation of fuel gauge transmitters replace the 87 E 1 sealing gaskets by new
ones. Following markings fit the fuel gauge transmitter into the corresponding wingtip tank
and tighten five screws.
(b) Plug-in the wingtip tank fuel gauge connector, tighten the connector and secure it with 0.6 mm
dia locking wire.
(c) Fit the lid over the wingtip tank fuel gauge transmitter and secure the lid by tightening six screws.
(d) Connect the external power supply to the aircraft.
(e) Check that all switches and circuit breakers on the overhead panel are OFF. Set the FUEL
control levers of both engines on the front control panel to the SHUT position.
(f) Switch on the BATTERY I, II, INVERTERS 36 V I, II switches on the overhead panel and on
the fuel gauge indicators on the central instrument panel check out the condition of electric
circuits from the fuel gauge transmitters up to the fuel gauge indicators in the cockpit. Switch
off all switches and circuit breakers.
CAUTION: WHEN REPLACING A FUEL GAUGE SET OR A SEPARATE FUEL GAUGE

TRANSMITTER OR INDICATOR, OR WHEN IN DOUBT ABOUT CORRECT
READINGS OF MINIMUM FUEL RESERVE, RECALIBRATE THE SET
ACCORDING TO THE WORK PROCEDURE No. 028.40.00.A.
(5) Remove the steps and the wing supporting trestles.
(6) Disconnect and remove the external power supply.
EFFECTIVITY
028.40.11
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 29
HYDRAULIC POWER

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 029.00.00 101 Dec 10/20

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Fault Isolation 102 Dec 10/20
2 Dec 10/20 Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11
3 Dec 10/20 202 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 302 May 30/14
2 Mar 10/17 303 May 30/14
3 Dec 10/20 304 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 305 May 30/14
2 Nov 1/11 307 May 30/14
2 May 30/14 309 Nov 1/11
3 May 30/14 310 Nov 1/11
4 May 30/14 311 May 30/14
5 May 30/14 312 Nov 20/15
6 May 30/14 313 Nov 20/15
029.00.00 1 Dec 10/14 314 Nov 20/15
Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20 315 Feb 23/18
3 Dec 10/20 316 Nov 20/15
4 Dec 10/20 317 Nov 20/15
5 Dec 10/20 318 Nov 20/15
6 Dec 10/20 319 Nov 20/15
7 Dec 10/20 320 Nov 20/15
8 Dec 10/20 321 Nov 20/15
9 Dec 10/20 322 Nov 20/15
10 Dec 10/20 323 Nov 20/15
11 Dec 10/20 324 Nov 20/15
12 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
029.00.00 325 Nov 20/15 029.11.06 303 Mar 10/17

Servicing 326 Nov 20/15 Servicing 304 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 305 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 306 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Mar 10/17
404 Nov 1/11 402 Mar 10/17
405 Nov 1/11 403 Mar 10/17
406 Nov 1/11 404 Mar 10/17
Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11 029.11.08 1 Nov 1/11
503 Nov 1/11 029.11.09 1 Nov 1/11
029.11.00 1 Nov 1/11 029.11.11 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
029.11.01 1 Nov 1/11 029.11.12 1 Nov 1/11
029.11.02 1 Nov 1/11 029.11.13 1 Nov 1/11
029.11.03 1 Dec 10/20 029.11.14 1 Nov 1/11
029.11.04 1 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Dec 10/14
029.11.05 1 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Mar 10/17
029.11.06 1 Nov 1/11 029.11.16 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Mar 10/17 029.12.00 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
029.12.00 301 May 30/14 029.13.03 301 Mar 10/17

303 Nov 1/11 029.13.04 1 Nov 1/11
305 May 30/14 029.13.05 1 Nov 1/11
029.12.01 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
029.12.02 1 Nov 1/11 029.13.06 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Servicing 301 Dec 10/20
302 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11 029.30.00 1 Nov 1/11
029.12.03 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
029.13.00 1 Nov 1/11 029.30.01 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Dec 10/20 029.30.03 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Mar 10/17 302 Dec 10/14

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
029.30.03 401 Nov 1/11


ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
15 029-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
029-Record of 3 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
Revisions
029.00.00 2 to 4, 6, 315 - -
16 029-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
029-Record of 3 - -
Revisions
029.00.00 2 to 10, 11 to 12 -
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
101, 102 - -
029.11.03 1 - -
029.13.02 301 - -
029.13.06 301 - -

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. General
The hydraulic system has a steady rated pressure of 14.7 MPa (150 kp/cm2) and is intended for control of
aircraft moving parts and units.
As the pressure hydraulic energy sources there are two LUN 6102.01-8 automatic hydraulic piston pumps.
The hydraulic pumps are located directly on the engines and work independently of each other. That is why
in case of supply break from one of the pumps, the second pump is sufficient to supply a necessary amount
of energy to the hydraulic system. All the system is protected by relief valve LUN 7545-8.
As the emergency hydraulic energy source there is LUN 6100.03-8 hand-operated hydraulic pump provided
with an emergency amount of fluid in a separate emergency hydraulic tank.
NOTE: Optionally the LUN 7369-8 switch-over valve can be installed in the aircraft, then it is possible
to perform all functions of the hydraulic system by using LUN 6100.03-8 hand operated
pump. After switching “TEST” lever (located on the right control panel) up ward the pressure
circuit is pressured constant and it is used for ground test of the hydraulic system parts
without using ground source.
The piping is mostly made of light alloys. The pressure piping of inside diameter Js8 (and greater) and all
piping in the engines fire zones are made from stainless steel.
In order to facilitate orientation, all piping is marked with symbols. The symbols are composed of serial number,
letter H and a letter corresponding to the circuit. The hydraulic system is filled with AMG-10 hydraulic fluid
according to the standard GOST 6794-75 (boiling point 200°C, flash point 92°C, point of congelation -
70°C, density 0.85 kg/dm 3) or with Aeroshell Fluid 4 according to the standard
MIL-H-5606A or with Aeroshell Fluid 41 according to the standard MIL-H-5606B.
NOTE: Hydraulic fluid service life is 4.800 flight hours or 10 years.
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. List of instruments and components
1. - - - -
2. Suction filling connection LUN 7741-8 1 Left side of LH engine nacelle behind
firewall
3. Pressure filling connection LUN 7740-8 1 Left side of LH engine nacelle behind
firewall
4. Hydraulic pump LUN 6102.01-8 1 LH engine
1 RH engine
5. Disconnecting valve LUN 7366-8 1 Firewall of LH engine nacelle
1 Firewall of RH engine nacelle
6. - - - -
7. - - - -
8. Relief valve LUN 7545-8 1 LH engine nacelle behind of firewall
9. - - - -
10. Hydraulic filter LUN 7614.01-8 1 Firewall of LH engine nacelle
11. Hydraulic filter LUN 7614.03-8 1 RH side of LH engine nacelle
12. Hydraulic filter LUN 7613.02-8 1 RH side of LH engine nacelle
RH side of RH engine nacelle (up to
S/N 1714)
13. Non-return valve LUN 7549-8 1 LH engine nacelle, behind of firewall
14. Non-return valve LUN 7560-8 1 Leading part of the wing central part,
above fuselage
1 LH engine nacelle, ahead of firewall
1 RH engine nacelle, ahead of firewall
15. Non-return valve 674 600B (8) 1 LH landing gear nacelle
1 Between 4 and 5 frames (if installed)
16. Hydraulic accumulator LUN 6953.05-8 1 LH engine nacelle, behind of firewall
17. Hydraulic accumulator LUN 6953.02-8 1 LH landing gear nacelle
18. Non-return valve 674 500B (8) 1 Fuselage frame No. 5;
2 Leading part of the wing, between ribs
No. 4 and 5, LH, RH (for L-420 only)
19. Solenoid valve GA 163 T/16 or 1 Front wing spar, in center (above the
LUN 7447.02-8 fuselage)
1 In LH landing gear nacelle
20. Hydraulic tank B057801N 1 Wing above LH engine nacelle
21. Emergency lock actuator LUN 7183.03-7 1 Front wing spar
(up to S/N 1802) 1 LH landing gear nacelle
22. Wing flap actuator LUN 7231.02-8 1 Front wing spar, in center
(from S/N 1803 1 LH landing gear nacelle
up to S/N 2135)
(from S/N 2136) 1 LH landing gear nacelle
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
25. Spoiler actuator LUN 7138-8 1 Rear wing spar

26. ABC tab actuator LUN 7134-8 1 28th wing rig, LH side
1 28th wing rib, RH side
27. Choke ∅ 0.6 mm dia B557319N 1 At the throttle cock pos. 41, behind the LH
control panel
28. Choke ∅ 1 mm dia B463247N 1 At the solenoid valve pos. 54, in fuselage
(XL 410.4630-42) nose part, under control panel cover
29. Choke ∅ 2 mm dia B557374N 1 Between the unlocking cylinder pos. 32 and
52HB hose (valid from the airplane
S/N 3108 and airplane with executed
Information Bulletin No. L410 UVP-E/487b)
30. - - - -
31. - - - -
32. Unlocking cylinder LUN 7185-7 1 Nose landing gear bay on the nose
landing gear lock
33. Electrohydraulic distributor LUN 2575.01-7 1 Landing gear nacelle, LH side
(from S/N 1826) 1 Landing gear nacelle, RH side
34. Electrohydraulic distributor LUN 2575-7 1 Landing gear nacelle, LH side
(up to S/N 1825) 1 Landing gear nacelle, RH side
35. Self-sealing coupling SP 1 (7) 1 LH side, landing gear wheel axis
1 RH side, landing gear wheel axis
36. Brake valve LUN 7367.03-8 4 Under floor in the fuselage nose part
37. Reduction valve LUN 7514.02-8 1 LH landing gear nacelle
38. Brake shuttle valve LUN 7368.01-8 2 On the 4th bulkhead in the fuselage nose
part
39. Hand-operated valve LUN 6578-8 1 Fuselage nose part, on the RH control
panel
40. Windshield wiper GA-211A.00-4 1 Fuselage nose part, on the 4th bulkhead
41. Throttle cock GA-171/6 1 LH control panel
42. Hand-operated valve LUN 6577-8 2 RH control panel
43. Shuttle valve LUN 7547.03-7 1 Main landing gear, LH side
1 Main landing gear, RH side
44. Pressure switch 0.7 S 1 LH landing gear nacelle
(if installed) LUN 1492.04-8 (If the Cockpit voice recorder is installed)
45. Safety valve LUN 7557.01-8 1 LH landing gear nacelle
46. Brake accumulator LUN 6900-8 1 LH landing gear nacelle
47. Dual pressure gauge UI 2-240 K 1 Instrument panel
48. Pressure gauge MA-100 1 Instrument panel
49. Dual pressure gauge LUN 1446.02-8 1 Instrument panel
50. Pressure switch 10K LUN 1492.06-8 1 LH landing gear nacelle
(if installed)
51. Pressure transmitter ID-240 2 LH landing gear nacelle
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
52. Pressure transmitter LUN 1540.04-8 2 Fuselage frame No. 5, down

(if installed)
53. Hydraulic thermoswitch LUN 3192-8 1 LH engine nacelle, ahead of firewall
54. Solenoid valve LUN 7471-8 or 1 Fuselage nose part, under the control
GA 184 U/2 panel cover
1 Wing rib No. 3, RH side
1 Wing rib No. 3, LH side
1 Front wing spar
55. Choke D-002 2 At the pressure transmitter pos. 51, in the
LH landing gear nacelle;
2 At the non-return valve pos. 18, leading
part of the wing, between ribs No. 4 and 5,
LH, RH (for L-420 only)
56. Choke ∅ 0.45 mm dia B057049N 1 At the front wing spar between ribs No. 1
and 2, RH
1 Between the MA 100 pressure gauge and
4HG hose (valid from the airplane
S/N 3110 and airplane with executed
Information Bulletin No. L410 UVP-E/486b)
57. Choke ∅ 0.45 mm dia B557366N 1 At the front wing spar between ribs No. 1
and 2, RH (for L-420 only)
58. Hydraulic hand pump LUN 6100.03-8 1 Cockpit, on RH side of frame No. 6
59. Throttle valve 12 LUN 7573.4-7 2 Front wing spar, in the fuselage center
60. Emergency tank B057430N 1 Fuselage nose section, on the frame No.
4, under the control panel cover
61. Pressure transducer ETM-375M-2500 PSI 1 LH Landing gear nacelle;
(if installed) or 1 Frame 6, right, hand pump or before frame 5
ETM-375M-170BARA (under pilot's floor)
(Ord No. B573956N)
62. Pressure transducer ETM-375M-1000 PSI 2 Fuselage frame No. 5, down
(if installed) or
ETM-375M-70BARA
(Ord No. B573955N)
63. - - - -
64. Air release valve B057120N 1 LH engine nacelle, ahead of firewall
3 LH landing gear nacelle
3 RH landing gear nacelle
3 In the nose landing gear nacelle
1 Emergency tank
65. Hydraulic fluid sampling LUN 7386-8 1 LH engine nacelle behind the firewall
cock (from 22. series)
66. - - - -
67. Stabilizing valve LUN 7561-7 1 LH landing gear nacelle
68. Non-return valve B057824N 1 Hydraulic tank
69. - - - -
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
70. Non-return valve LUN 7521-8 1 Wing, above LH engine nacelle

1 LH engine nacelle
71. Desiccator 3976 0872 1 Wing above LH engine nacelle
72. Air cleaner 723 900-4 (8) 1 Wing above LH engine nacelle
73. Auxiliary tank B057862N 1 Wing above LH engine nacelle
74. Reduction valve LUN 6651.01-8 1 Wing above LH engine nacelle
75. Safety valve LUN 7548-8 1 Wing above LH engine nacelle
76. Pressure gauge MA-4 1 LH engine nacelle
77. Hand-operated valve LUN 7351-8 2 LH engine nacelle
78. Main landing gear jack, LH LUN 7108.11-7 or 1 LH landing gear nacelle
side LUN 7108.13-7
79. Nose landing gear jack LUN 7233.04-7 1 Nose landing gear bay
80. Main landing gear jack, RH LUN 7108.12-7 or 1 In the RH landing gear nacelle
side LUN 7108.14-7
81. Lock release cylinder LUN 7188-7 1 In the LH landing gear nacelle, on landing
gear lock
1 In the RH landing gear nacelle, on landing
gear lock
82. Pressure transducer ETM-375MCO-1000 PSIA 1 LH Landing gear nacelle;
(if installed) 1 Frame 6, right, hand pump or before frame 5
(under pilot's floor)
83. Pressure transducer ETM-375MCO-2500 PSIA 2 Fuselage frame No. 5, down
(if installed)
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Hydraulic system diagram
FIG. 1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM I

For description see table in the 2. List of components and pages 10, 11
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM II

EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 7
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM III

EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 8
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM III (DETAILS)

EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 9
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Description of the figures 1, 2, 3 and 4:

a - Hydraulic system of the fuselage nose section
b - Servo-control
c - RH brake valve
d - LH brake valve
e - 1. pilot
f - 2. pilot
g - Hydraulic system of the fuselage center section
h - Fuselage outline (contour)
j - Landing gear nacelle platform
k - Main landing gear brakes installation
l - RH landing gear
m - LH landing gear
n - Wing outline (contour)
o - Wing flaps control
p - Hydraulic system of the wing
r - Firewall of engine nacelle
s - Front wing spar
t - Rear wing spar
u - RH engine nacelle
v - LH engine nacelle
y - Spoilers control
z - RH ABC-tab control
x - LH ABC-tab control
v - extending
z - retracting
R - Hand control (manual)

N - Foot control
4 - Fuselage frames numbers
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 10
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Description of the figures 1, 2, 3 and 4:
Marking of piping Piping symbol
Circuit of constant pressure HA, HF

Return circuit HV
Main pumps suction circuit HA
Working circuit of the landing gear HB
Working circuit of the wing flaps HC
Working circuit of the brakes HF
Working circuit of the servo-control HH
Working circuit of the spoilers HJ
Working circuit of the ABC tabs HK
Hand pump pressure HN
Emergency circuit of the landing gear HP
Emergency circuit of the wing flaps HS
Parking brake working circuit HG
Hand pump suction circuit HN
Circuit of hydraulic tank pressurization system HD
Flexible connections - Hoses
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 11
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 12
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
FAULT ISOLATION
No. Trouble Possible cause Correction
1. The pressure rises on the system a) Trouble occurs during run of both a) Replace the relief valve
pressure gauge over 16.2 MPa engines-defective relief valve
(165 kp/cm2) LUN 7545-8
b) Trouble occurs during run only b) Replace the defective hydraulic
one of the engines pump
- automatic control of the
hydraulic pump has failed
2. The pressure non rises on the a) Trouble occurs during run of both a) Replace the relief valve
system pressure gauge to a engines-defective relief valve
working pressure of LUN 7545-8
14.4 MPa -0.39 MPa
(147 kp/cm2 - 4 kp/cm2)
b) Trouble occurs during run only b) Replace the defective hydraulic
one of the engines pump
- automatic control of the
hydraulic pump has failed
3. Hydraulic pump is noisy. Suction piping of hydraulic pump is De-aerate the hydraulic pump
full of air
4. System pressure gauge indicates Broken piping or defective Replace defective components
zero pressure while engines are instrument in constant pressure
running circuit or in any working circuit
except of the brakes circuit
5. System and brakes pressure Broken piping or defective Replace defective components
gauges indicate zero pressure instrument in the brakes circuit
6. With one running engine the Hydraulic pump automatic control Replace defective hydraulic pump
system pressure gauge indicates has failed
pressure different from that
prescribed
7. With running engines, the signal a) Contaminated hydraulic fluid a) Replace the fluid
cell HYDRAULICS lights on the
warning display b) Increased resistance of hydraulic b) Replace hydraulic cleaner filter
filter in the return branch element
c) Hydraulic thermoswitch failure c) Check hydraulic thermoswitch
function according to work
procedure 029.30.02.B
d) Hydraulic pump failure d) Replace defective hydraulic
pump
8. With one running engine, signal cell Increased scaring of a hydraulic Replace defective hydraulic pump
HYDRAULICS lights on warning pump (hydraulic fluid supply
display reduced)
9. On one engine running, lights on Increased wearing of a hydraulic Replace defective hydraulic pump
warning display signal cell pump (hydraulic fluid supply
HYDRAULICS on CWD during reduced)
engine starting
10. Hydraulic hand pump does not work Emergency hydraulic tank is Deaerate the emergency hydraulic
aerated, check through inspection tank
hole
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 101
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No. Trouble Possible cause Correction
11. Hydraulic fluid flows out through Main hydraulic tank is filled with Drain excessive amount of
LUN 7548-8 safety valve which is in hydraulic fluid over admissible limit hydraulic fluid from main tank
relief hose
12. 3976 0372 desiccator silica gel Inside leakage of hydraulic tank Check for tightness, remove
filling should be often replaced pressurization system circuits untightness
Safety valve LUN 7548-8 permits Replace defective safety valve
flow through at a pressure lower LUN 7548-8
than 0.18 MPa
Reduction valve LUN 6651.01-8 Adjust output pressure reduction
has an exit pressure higher than valve to lower value of working
0.12 MPa pressure range of 0.08 to 0.12 MPa
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING NON-RETURN VALVES, A SPECIAL ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO

MOUNT THEM IN CORRECT POSITIONS (NOT REVERSELY). IT IS NECESSARY TO FOLLOW
MARKING OF FLOW DIRECTION AS INDICATED ON NON-RETURN VALVE BODY AND ON
NEIGHBORING PIPINGS.
EFFECTIVITY
029.00.00
ALL Page: 102
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 6102.01-8 HYDRAULIC PUMP

1. Purpose
LUN 6102.01-8 hydraulic pump is intended for production of pressure in the aircraft hydraulic system.
2. Technical data
Pump drive from the engine
Number of revolutions max. 7.650 r.p.m.
Rated pressure 14.4 MPa - 0.39 MPa
(147 kp/cm2 - 4 kp/cm2)
Capacity of pump (flow) at 7.600 r.p.m., exit pressure
12.7 MPa (130 kp/cm2), inlet pressure 0.1 MPa (1 kp/cm2)
and working fluid temperature 40 ± 5°C 11 l/min - 0.5 l/min
Inlet pressure (at working fluid temperature of 20°C) 26.7 kPa (200 torr) min
Piping rated inside diameter Inlet Js 12 (M20 x 1.5)
Outlet Js 8 (M14 x 1.5)
Discharge Js 4 (M10 x 1)
Discharge Js 2.5 (M8 x 1)
3. Operation
During their delivery stroke, the pistons deliver a certain amount of hydraulic fluid. On exceeding a certain
pressure value in hydraulic pump outlet, the regulating slide valve being loaded by pressure lets hydraulic
fluid flow under the regulating piston actuating the suspension finger. In this way, the suspension is rotated
and the hydraulic pump set to zero flow through. When pressure drops, the slide valve by shifting enables
escape of hydraulic fluid from the space below the regulating piston to the discharge pipe and the spring-
-fitted reverse piston sets the hydraulic pump at maximum flow.
EFFECTIVITY
029.11.03
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 LUN 6102.01-8 HYDRAULIC PUMP

(1) Fuse; (2) Coupling; (3) Coupling spring; (4) Regulating piston spring plug; (5) Packing ring;
(6) Reverse piston; (7) Regulating piston spring; (8) Regulating piston plug; (9) Packing ring;
(10) Regulating piston; (11) Inlet; (12) Packing ring; (13) Coupling pipe; (14) Packing ring;
(15) Complete body; (16) Cover; (17) Shaft packing; (18) Packing ring; (19) Bush; (20) Front
packing; (21) Ball bearing; (22) Shaft with runner; (23) Packing ring; (24) Spring; (25) Block
spring; (26) Regulation screw; (27) Safety nut; (28) Regulation plug; (29) Slide valve spring;
(30) Slide valve plug; (31) Slide valve bush; (32) Slide valve; (33) Head; (34) Packing ring;
(35) Packing ring; (36) Body; (37) Packing; (38) Cap nut; (39) Cylinder block; (40) Roller bearing;
(41) Block coupling; (42) Screw; (43) Complete suspension; (44) Swing plate; (45) Sliding block
with piston; (46) Retaining cage; (47) Sliding bearing; (48) Needle bearing; (49) Suspension pin;
(50) Pumps coupling; (51) Pump body; (52) Bush; (53) Screw; (54) Packing ring; (55) Flange
EFFECTIVITY
029.11.03
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3976 0872 DESICCATOR

SERVICING
1. Inspection of the colouring of the silica gel filling of the 3976 0872 desiccator
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stairs (e.g. B097300N)
B. Materials Silica gel with indicator filling Ord. No. 82021821

(GOST 8984-75 or equivalent) only in case of
replacement
C. Tools Z 37.9110-10 adapted screwdriver

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Put stairs (e.g. B097300N) to the left-hand engine nacelle.
(2) Dismount the bottom cover of the left-hand engine nacelle according to technologic procedure
described in chapter 54.
(3) Inspect coloring of the silica gel filling. Coloring of the silica gel filling must correspond to the
following hues:
Color of dry silica gel - pale blue to dark blue

Color of moist silica gel - lilac to pink
In case that coloring does not comply with the stated requirements, dry or replace the silica gel
filling. Only granulated silica gel in accordance with the standard GOST 8984-75 may be used.
Use of crystalline silica gel is not permissible.
The indicator silica gel can be recovered by drying at a temperature of 120°C + 3°C for 1 hour,
the max. thickness of silica gel layer being 20 mm. Silica gel recovered in this way must be filled
in the desiccator immediately after it has been dried.
(4) Mount the bottom cover to the left-hand engine nacelle according to technologic procedure as
indicated in chapter 54.
(5) Remove the stairs.
EFFECTIVITY
029.13.02
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
029.13.02
ALL Page: 302
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 7548-8 SAFETY VALVE

SERVICING
1. Check of the operation of the LUN 7548-8 safety valve

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stairs (e.g. B097300N);
B097690N ground air source equipment for hydraulic
system overpressurization
C. Tools Z 37.9110-10 Screwdriver

Periodical
E. Procedures
CAUTION: IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT NOT EXCEEDED OF 0.5 ± 0.04 MPa (5 ± 0.4 kp/cm2)
PRESSURE, OTHERWISE CAN TO OCCURS THE DESTRUCTION OF AUXILIARY TANK.
(1) Put stairs (e.g. B097300N) to the left-hand engine nacelle.
(2) Dismount the bottom cover of the left-hand engine nacelle behind the fireproof frame according
to work procedure described in chapter 54.
(3) By means of the hand-operated valve “PRESSURE RELEASE” release pressure in the
hydraulic tank pressurization system.
(4) Unscrew the closing nut on the ground air branch pipe. Connect the ground air source 0.3 MPa
(3 kp/cm2) to the ground air branch pipe.
(5) Increase gradually air overpressure in the main hydraulic tank by opening hand - operated valve
TEST till safety valve opening occurs. Safety valve opening must occur at pressure 0.2 ± 0.02 MPa
(2 ± 0.2 kp/cm2). Watch pressure value by air pressure gauge MA 4.
If the valve opening is not correct, adjust it at given pressure using nut (3) – refer to the fig. 1.
NOTE: If the parking time of the aircraft exceeds than 12 hours, first opening of safety valve is
permissible at pressure max. 0.23 MPa (2.3 kp/cm2).
(6) Disconnect the ground air source. Close the ground air branch pipe by means of the closing nut.
(7) Check hand-operated valves to be closed.
(8) Mount the bottom cover of the left-hand engine nacelle according to work procedure described in
chapter 54.
EFFECTIVITY
029.13.06
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
029.13.06
ALL Page: 302
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 030.10.00 301 Dec 10/20

2 Feb 23/18 303 Nov 1/11
3 Dec 10/20 304 Feb 23/18
4 Dec 10/20 305 May 31/12
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 306 Feb 23/18
2 Dec 10/20 307 May 31/12
3 Nov 1/11 308 May 31/12
4 Nov 1/11 309 May 31/12
2 Nov 1/11 311 May 31/12
Contents 1 May 30/14 312 May 31/12
3 May 30/14 402 Nov 1/11
4 Feb 23/18 403 Nov 1/11
5 Feb 23/18 404 Nov 1/11
6 Dec 10/20 Approved Repairs 801 May 31/12
030.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 802 May 30/14
Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11 804 May 31/12
202 Nov 1/11 805 May 31/12
030.10.00 1 Feb 23/18 806 May 31/12
Description and operation 2 Nov 1/11 030.10.01 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
7 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
030.10.02 1 Nov 1/11 030.20.00 301 May 30/14

Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Servicing 302 May 30/14
3 Nov 1/11 303 May 30/14
4 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Inspection / Check 601 May 30/14
102 Nov 1/11 602 Nov 1/11
030.10.03 1 Nov 1/11 030.20.01 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 030.20.02 1 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
030.10.06 1 Nov 1/11 030.20.03 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
030.10.07 1 Nov 1/11 030.30.00 1 May 31/12
030.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
5 May 30/14 030.30.01 1 May 31/12
6 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 May 31/12
7 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 May 31/12
8 Nov 1/11 102 May 31/12
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 May 31/12
102 Nov 1/11 402 May 31/12

ALL Page: 2
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
030.30.02 1 May 31/12 030.42.02 1 Nov 1/11

Fault Isolation 101 May 31/12 030.42.03 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 May 31/12 Servicing 301 Dec 10/20
402 May 31/12 302 Dec 10/20
030.40.00 1 Nov 1/11 303 May 30/14
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
302 May 30/14 402 Nov 1/11
303 May 30/14 030.60.00 1 Nov 1/11
030.41.00 1 May 30/14 3 Nov 1/11
4 Feb 23/18 102 Nov 1/11
5 Feb 23/18 Servicing 301 Dec 10/20
6 Feb 23/18 302 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 030.60.01 1 Apr 5/13
030.41.01 1 Feb 23/18 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18 303 Nov 1/11
402 Feb 23/18 304 Nov 1/11
403 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
404 Feb 23/18 402 Nov 1/11
030.41.02 1 Nov 1/11 030.60.02 1 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
030.42.01 1 Nov 1/11 403 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11

802 Nov 1/11
030.60.03 1 Nov 1/11
030.80.00 1 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11
030.80.01 1 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11
030.80.02 1 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
402 Dec 10/20
403 Dec 10/20
404 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
8 030-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
030-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
030-Contents 1 - -
3 to 6 - -
030.10.00 305 to 312 - 313
- - 314
801 to 806 - 807 to 810
L410UVP-E/145d May 31/12
030.30.00 1 - -
030.30.01 - 1 to 2 -
- 101 to 102 -
- 401 to 402 -
030.30.02 - 1 to 2 -
- 101 to 102 -
- 401 to 402 -
030.60.00 301 - -
9 030-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
030-Record of 1 - -
Revisions L410UVP-E/170d Apr 5/13
030.20.00 3 - -
030.60.01 1 - -
10 030-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
030-Record of 1 to 2 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
030.10.00 301 to 302 - -
306 - -

ALL Page: 1
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
10 030.10.00 310 - -
802 to 803 - -
030.10.03 2 - -
030.20.00 3 - -
5 - -
301 to 303 - -
601 - -
030.30.00 301 - -
030.40.00 301 to 303 - - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
030.41.00 1 - -
030.41.01 1 to 2 - -
030.42.03 301 to 303 - -
401 - -
030.60.00 301 - -
030.60.02 301 to 302 - -
030.80.01 301 - -
030.80.02 301 - -
11 030-List of 1 to 4 - -
Effective Pages
030-Record of 2 - -
Revisions
030-Contents 4 to 6 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
030.10.00 1, 3, 304, 306 - -

030.41.00 3 to 4 5 to 6 -
030.41.01 1 401 to 404 -
12 030-List of 1, 3, 4 - -
Effective Pages
030-Record of 2 - -
Revisions
030-Contents 6 - -
030.10.00 301 - -
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
030.42.03 301, 302 - -
030.60.00 301 - -
030.80.01 301 - -
030.80.02 - 401 to 404 -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
PROPELLERS 030.60.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the operation propellers deicing by 301
inoperative engines
LUN 3193 OR LUN 3193.1 CYCLIC SWITCH 030.60.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Check of LUN 3193 or LUN 3193.1 cyclic switch of 301
the propeller deicing
Removing and installing of the cyclic switches 401
LUN 7850 COLLECTOR 030.60.02 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the LUN 7850-7 collector and its 301
brushes
Check of the carbon brushes wear of the 301
LUN 7850-7 collector
Removing and installing the LUN 7850 collector 401
Replacement of the collector carbon brushes 801
TKD 103 DOD, TKD 133 DOD CONTACTOR 030.60.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
DETECTION 030.80.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
ALL Page: 5
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
LUN 1771.3-8, LUN 1771.4-8 ROTARY ICE DETECTOR 030.80.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the LUN 1771.3-8 or LUN 1771.4-8 301
rotary ice detector
Check of the operation of the LUN 1771.3-8 or 301
LUN 1771.4-8 rotary ice detector
Removing of the LUN 1771.3-8 or LUN 1771.4-8 401
rotary ice detector
Installation of the LUN 1771.3-8 or LUN 1771.4-8 401
rotary ice detector
SI (7) STATIC ICE DETECTOR 030.80.02 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the static ice detector 301
Check of the operation of the heating of the SI (7) 301
static ice detector
Removal and installation of the SI (7) static ice 401
detector
ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRFOIL
SERVICING
1. Inspection of the de-icers surface

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stairs (e.g. B097343N and B097365N)

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Place the stairs (e.g. B097343N) to the wing and the stairs (e.g. B097365N) to the tail unit.
(2) Check the deicers surface of the glued deicing sections on the leading edges of the wing, stabilizer
and fin for defects listed bellow.
(3) The following defects are not permitted:
• corrosion
• surface contamination of deicers with oil from the engine or by the exhaust gases
• cracks in the deicing sections (the second, brown rubber layer should not be visible)
• peeling of the protective paint
• any releasing of deicers within the edges (the releasing is permitted only at the distance
exceeding 50 mm from the edge)
• releasing of the deicers over the area exceeding 1.5 % of the entire area of the deicers,
whilst only single releasing is permitted on every 30 cm of the length with the greatest
area of 15 sq.cm.
(4) If is deicer freed within the edges, check the area under deicer for corrosion. If necessary
remove corrosion (see work procedure in section 020.20.00) and repair the freed deicer area
(see work procedure in the section 030.10.00 of the Airframe Repair Manual)
EFFECTIVITY
030.10.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Check of the operation of the de-icing control box


Routine, Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Switch on the switches BATTERY I, II on the overhead panel and the circuit breaker
DEICING-AIRFRAME.
(2) Switch the main switch on the LUN 3294-8 control box of the airframe deicing to the position
ON and check, that 3 lighting bulbs on the control box of the airframe deicing light up.
(3) Switch over the selector of the operation selection to the position MANUAL. Switch over the
selector of individual sections to the positions A, B and C. At the same time the relevant control
bulb must light up.
(4) Switch over the main switch to the position OFF on the LUN 3294-8 control box of the airframe
deicing.
(5) Turn off the circuit breaker DEICING-AIRFRAME and the switches BATTERY I, II on the
overhead panel.
3. Check of the operation of the de-icing system of wings and tail unit
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stairs (e.g. B097343N and B097365N),
Pressure air source with the hose
Stop watch
Vessel with soap water
Sponge
C. Tools Z 37.9110-10 Modified screwdriver

19x22 Open end double ended wrench
(CSN 23 0611.6 or equivalent)

Periodical
EFFECTIVITY
030.10.00
ALL Page: 302
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SJ 3 (7) WINDSHIELD WIPER

SERVICING
1. Check of the wiper fixing and adjustment

B096675N Dynamometer (or equivalent digital force
gauges, e.g. EXTECH ..)
C. Tools 4.5x120 Screwdriver (No. 697 or equivalent)

Seasonal, Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Place the stairs (e.g. B097365N) to the fuselage front section.
(2) Make sure, by means of the 4.5x120 screwdriver, that there is not any slackening of the locking
screws on the wipers arms, poor pressing force of the wiping blades against the front windshields.
(3) Check, with help of the dynamometer, the pressing force of 14.7 ± 1 N (1.5 ± 0.1 kp) on the
wiper journal.
(4) Adjust the pressing force on the wiper journal by means of the 4.5x120 screwdriver.
By tightening the regulating screw the pressing force is increased, by releasing the regulating
screw the pressing force is reduced.
(5) Replace the defective wiping blades.
(6) Take away the stairs.
2. Inspection of the protecting coat of wiper levers

PE paint dishes
B. Materials Fiber-free cloth (Molino)

No. 150 Emery paper (or equivalent)
S2318 Primer (or equivalent); S7307 Thinner;
S6300 Diluting agent;
U2056/1100 Polyurethane coat (or equivalent);
U7002 Thinner; U6002 Diluting agent
C. Tools No. 12 Flat brush (or equivalent)
EFFECTIVITY
030.42.03
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Seasonal, Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Place the stairs (e.g. B097365N) to the fuselage front section.
(2) Check the wipers arms and make sure that there is no damaged paint as deep as to the metal,
damaged galvanic layer and corrosion spots.
(3) Grind the damaged or corroded areas with use of the emery paper No. 150 to the basic metal.
(4) Clean the grinded areas with a brush or a piece of cloth and remove grinded particles.
(5) Prepare the S2318 Primer: - mix the 6 weight parts S2318 + 1 weight part of S7307 Thinner and
mixing with the S6300 Diluting agent. Apply the S2318 Primer on the cleaned areas and let
them dry at the temperature of 18 to 25°C.
(6) Prepare the U2056/1100 Polyurethane coat: - mix the 4 weight parts U2056 + 1 weight part of
U7002 Thinner and mixing with the U6002 Diluting agent. Apply the U2056/1100 Polyurethane
coat and let it dry at the temperature of 18 to 25°C for the min. time of 16 hours.
(7) Wash and take away the brushes and the vessels for paints.
(8) Take away the stairs.
3. Check of the operation of wipers

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Stairs (e.g. B097300N),
Hydraulic truck (e.g. HYDROCOM MA-801-03 or
equivalent)
Ground electric source
B. Materials Toilet soap

Rag

Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Place the spraying device to the aircraft; this device provides the continuous water supply on
the front wind screens.
(2) Place the stairs (e.g. B097300N) to the left engine nacelle.
(3) Unlock and tilt the lower engine cowl of the left engine nacelle according to the work procedure
outlined in the chapter 54.
EFFECTIVITY
030.42.03
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLERS
SERVICING
1. Check of the operation propellers deicing by inoperative engines


Routine, Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches and the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY - ENGINE LH, RH
circuit breakers on the overhead panel.
(2) Switch the PROPELLER DEICING selector on the instrument panel to the I MAIN position
(interval app. 40 sec.)
(3) Press the BLADES push-button on the left control panel. When is the propellers deicing function
correct, the signalization of both PROPELLER DEICING signal cells on the signaling block must
corresponds (illuminating and extinguishing of the signal cells) as described in the section
030.60.01 on the figs. 303 and 304.
Any other condition indicates the failure of the propellers deicing.
(4) Switch the PROPELLER DEICING selector to the 0 position.
(5) Switch off the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY - ENGINE LH, RH circuit breakers and the
BATTERY I, II switches.
EFFECTIVITY
030.60.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
030.60.00
ALL Page: 302
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 1771.3-8, 1771.4-8 ROTARY ICE DETECTOR

SERVICING
1. Inspection of the LUN 1771.3-8 or LUN 1771.4-8 rotary ice detector

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Gap gauge set 0.05-1.00 mm (or equivalent)

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedure
Check the rotary ice detector.

The following defects are not permitted:
contamination of the detector rotary and fixed part, corrosion. The same distance 0.1 up to 0.15 mm
is required along the entire length between the indicator rotary and fixed part.
2. Check of the operation of the LUN 1771.3-8 or LUN 1771.4-8 rotary ice detector

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedure
(1) Switch on the switches BATTERY I, II, CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME,

INVERTERS 36V AC I, II and ICE DETECTOR-ROTARY on the overhead panel.
(2) The assistant lightly holds, from the aircraft outer side, the sensor of the rotary ice detector.
The signal cell ICING must light up on the central warning display. After releasing the sensor
of the rotary ice detector, the cell ICING goes off.
(3) Switch off the switches ICE DETECTOR-ROTARY, CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-
AIRFRAME, INVERTERS 36V AC I, II and BATTERY I, II.
EFFECTIVITY
030.80.01
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
030.80.01
ALL Page: 302
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SI (7) STATIC ICE DETECTOR

1. Removal and installation of the SI (7) static ice detector

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Suitable stairs (e.g. B097300N)
B. Materials B889021N or XL410.8890-07 Gasket;

LOCTITE 5922 Flange Sealant;
S2318 Primer (or equivalent); S7307 Thinner;
S6300 Diluting agent;
U2056 or U2054/RAL (respective color shade)
Polyurethane coat (or equivalent); U7002 Thinner;
U6002 Diluting agent;
Technical petrol; Piece of cloth; Paint brush; Water
E. Procedure
(1) Prepare the suitable steps at the nose section of airplane. Verify that the airplane battery and all
power are switch OFF.
(2) Removal of the static ice detector:
(a) Remove the upholstery panels in pilots’ cabin on LH side. Then partially remove the
insulation material to ensure access to the terminal board, where the cabling of the static
ice detector is connected.
(b) Remove 3 pcs bolts (pos. 10) – refer to the fig. 401. Clean (in technical petrol) and save the
connecting parts for next using. Replace the defected connecting parts for new ones.
(c) Disconnect the cabling of the static ice detector from the terminal board located in the
pilots’ cabin. Pull out the cabling and remove the static ice detector.
(d) Position (6) is a gasket that is both sides sealed i.e. on the fuselage and on the static ice
detector. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the rests of this gasket and old sealant from
skin of fuselage (even from the static ice detector - if it will be used again).
EFFECTIVITY
030.80.02
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) If necessary, repair the outer and inner coat with S2318 Primer and U2056 or U2054/RAL
(respective color shade) Polyurethane coat:
(a) Prepare the S2318 Primer: - mix the 6 weight parts S2318 + 1 weight part of S7307
Thinner and mixing with the S6300 Diluting agent. Apply the S2318 Primer on the repaired
areas and let them dry at the temperature of 18 to 25°C.
(b) Prepare the U2056 or U2054/RAL (respective color shade) Polyurethane coat: - mix the 4
weight parts U2056 or U2054 + 1 weight part of U7002 Thinner and mixing with the U6002
Diluting agent. Apply the U2056 or U2054/RAL Polyurethane coat and let it dry at the
temperature of 18 to 25°C for the min. time of 16 hours.
(4) Installation of the static ice detector:
(a) Check that the mounting holes in the skin intended for the static ice detector is neither
damaged nor deformed. If is any defect of skin is detected, perform repair according to the
section 020.20.00 of AMM.
(b) Pull through the cabling of the static ice detector through the new gasket (6) and the hole in
skin of the fuselage. Verify the length of cabling to the terminal board.
(c) Apply the LOCTITE 5922 Flange Sealant on both sides of new gasket (6). Place the static
ice detector over mounting holes, using the three bolts holes to align the antenna. Insert the
three bolts and tighten its. Torque should be evenly applied across all mounting screws to
avoid deformation of the mounting area. Observe that the signaling device is perfectly
sealed. Allow a LOCTITE 5922 Flange Sealant to dry.
(d) Connect the cabling of the static ice detector to the terminal board located in the pilots’
cabin.
(e) Before installation of insulation material and upholstery panels in pilots’ cabin:
• If necessary, repair the outer and inner coat as described in step (3).
• Check the operation of the heating of the SI (7) static ice detector according to the work
procedure 030.80.02.B
• Verify tightness of static ice detector installation (use water and visually recognize
whether moisture does not flow into the cabin).
(f) When the all tests are finished, install the insulation material and upholstery panels in pilots’
cabin on LH side to original position. If necessary, repair the outer and inner coat as
described in step (3).
EFFECTIVITY
030.80.02
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 401 STATIC ICE DETECTOR INSTALLATION

(5) B889016N SI (7) Static Ice Detector; (6) B889021N or XL410.8890-07 Gasket;
(10) M4x14 CD Bolt ONL 3147.4
EFFECTIVITY
030.80.02
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
030.80.02
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31
INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEM

Section Section
Subject Subject
Title page - - 031.00.00 301 May 30/14

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Servicing 302 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 031.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
4 Dec 10/20 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
5 Dec 10/20 102 Nov 1/11
7 Dec 10/20 302 Apr 15/15
8 Dec 10/20 303 May 30/14
9 Dec 10/20 304 May 30/14
10 Dec 10/20 305 May 30/14
11 Dec 10/20 306 May 30/14
12 Dec 10/20 307 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 308 Nov 1/11
2 Feb 23/18 031.11.00 1 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Apr 15/15 6 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
3 Dec 10/20 402 Feb 23/18
4 Dec 10/20 403 Feb 23/18
5 Dec 10/20 404 Nov 1/11
6 Dec 10/20 031.12.00 1 Nov 1/11
8 Dec 10/20 3 Nov 1/11
031.00.00 1 Apr 15/15 4 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.12.00 5 Nov 1/11 031.20.05 101 Dec 10/20

Description and Operation 6 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 102 Dec 10/20
Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18 Servicing 301 Dec 10/20
402 May 30/14 302 Dec 10/20
403 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20
404 Nov 1/11 402 Dec 10/20
031.13.00 1 Nov 1/11 031.20.06 1 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 3 Dec 10/20
402 Nov 1/11 4 Dec 10/20
031.14.00 1 Nov 1/11 031.30.00 1 May 30/14
031.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 031.30.00 303 May 30/14
031.20.01 1 Nov 1/11 305 Apr 15/15
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 501 Feb 23/18
302 Nov 1/11 502 Feb 23/18
031.20.02 1 Nov 1/11 031.31.00 1 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
031.20.03 1 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
031.20.04 1 Nov 1/11 7 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Apr 5/13 9 Feb 23/18
302 Apr 5/13 10 Feb 23/18
402 Nov 1/11 12 May 30/14
031.20.05 1 Dec 10/20 13 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20 14 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.31.00 15 Nov 1/11 031.31.00 509 Nov 1/11

Description and Operation 16 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 510 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 May 30/14 511 Nov 1/11
102 May 30/14 512 Nov 1/11
103 May 30/14 513 Nov 1/11
104 Nov 1/11 514 Nov 1/11
105 Nov 1/11 515 Nov 1/11
106 Nov 1/11 516 Nov 1/11
107 Nov 1/11 517 Nov 1/11
108 Nov 1/11 518 Nov 1/11
109 Nov 1/11 519 Nov 1/11
110 Nov 1/11 520 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 522 Nov 1/11
303 May 30/14 523 Nov 1/11
304 May 30/14 524 Nov 1/11
305 May 30/14 525 Nov 1/11
306 May 30/14 526 Nov 1/11
307 May 30/14 527 Nov 1/11
308 May 30/14 528 Nov 1/11
309 May 30/14 529 Nov 1/11
310 May 30/14 530 Nov 1/11
311 May 30/14 531 Nov 1/11
312 May 30/14 532 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 534 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11 535 Nov 1/11
502 Nov 1/11 536 Nov 1/11
503 Nov 1/11 537 Nov 1/11
504 Nov 1/11 538 Nov 1/11
505 Nov 1/11 539 Nov 1/11
506 Nov 1/11 540 Nov 1/11
507 Nov 1/11 541 Nov 1/11
508 Nov 1/11 542 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.31.00 543 Nov 1/11 031.31.00 598.5 Nov 1/11

Adjustment / Test 544 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 598.6 Nov 1/11
545 Nov 1/11 598.7 Nov 1/11
546 Nov 1/11 598.8 Nov 1/11
547 Nov 1/11 598.9 Nov 1/11
548 Nov 1/11 598.10 Nov 1/11
549 Nov 1/11 598.11 Nov 1/11
550 Nov 1/11 598.12 Nov 1/11
551 Nov 1/11 598.13 Nov 1/11
552 Nov 1/11 598.14 Nov 1/11
553 Nov 1/11 598.15 Nov 1/11
554 Nov 1/11 598.16 Nov 1/11
555 Nov 1/11 598.17 Nov 1/11
556 Nov 1/11 598.18 Nov 1/11
557 Nov 1/11 598.19 Nov 1/11
558 Nov 1/11 598.20 Nov 1/11
559 Nov 1/11 598.21 Nov 1/11
560 Nov 1/11 598.22 Nov 1/11
561 Nov 1/11 598.23 Nov 1/11
562 May 30/14 598.24 Nov 1/11
563 Nov 1/11 598.25 Nov 1/11
564 Nov 1/11 598.26 Nov 1/11
565 Nov 1/11 598.27 Nov 1/11
566 Nov 1/11 598.28 Nov 1/11
567 Nov 1/11 598.29 Nov 1/11
568 Nov 1/11 598.30 Nov 1/11
569 Nov 1/11 598.31 Nov 1/11
570 Nov 1/11 598.32 Nov 1/11
571 Nov 1/11 598.33 Nov 1/11
572 Nov 1/11 598.34 Nov 1/11
598.1 Nov 1/11 598.35 Nov 1/11
598.2 Nov 1/11 598.36 Nov 1/11
598.3 Nov 1/11 598.37 Nov 1/11
598.4 Nov 1/11 598.38 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.31.00 598.39 Nov 1/11 031.31.00 598.73 Nov 1/11

Adjustment / Test 598.40 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 598.74 Nov 1/11
598.41 Nov 1/11 598.75 Nov 1/11
598.42 Nov 1/11 598.76 Nov 1/11
598.43 Nov 1/11 598.77 Nov 1/11
598.44 Nov 1/11 598.78 Nov 1/11
598.45 Nov 1/11 598.79 Nov 1/11
598.46 Nov 1/11 598.80 Nov 1/11
598.47 Nov 1/11 598.81 Nov 1/11
598.48 Nov 1/11 598.82 Nov 1/11
598.49 Nov 1/11 598.83 Nov 1/11
598.50 Nov 1/11 598.84 Nov 1/11
598.51 Nov 1/11 598.85 Nov 1/11
598.52 Nov 1/11 598.86 Nov 1/11
598.53 Nov 1/11 598.87 Nov 1/11
598.54 Nov 1/11 598.88 Nov 1/11
598.55 Nov 1/11 598.89 Nov 1/11
598.56 Nov 1/11 598.90 Nov 1/11
598.57 Nov 1/11 598.91 Nov 1/11
598.58 Nov 1/11 598.92 Nov 1/11
598.59 Nov 1/11 598.93 Nov 1/11
598.60 Nov 1/11 598.94 Nov 1/11
598.61 Nov 1/11 598.95 Nov 1/11
598.62 Nov 1/11 598.96 Nov 1/11
598.63 Nov 1/11 598.97 Nov 1/11
598.64 Nov 1/11 598.98 Nov 1/11
598.65 Nov 1/11 598.99 Nov 1/11
598.66 Nov 1/11 598.100 Nov 1/11
598.67 Nov 1/11 598.101 Nov 1/11
598.68 Nov 1/11 598.102 Nov 1/11
598.69 Nov 1/11 598.103 Nov 1/11
598.70 Nov 1/11 598.104 Nov 1/11
598.71 Nov 1/11 598.105 Nov 1/11
598.72 Nov 1/11 598.106 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.31.00 598.107 Nov 1/11 031.31.00 607 May 30/14

Adjustment / Test 598.108 Nov 1/11 Inspection / Check 608 May 30/14
598.109 Nov 1/11 609 May 30/14
598.110 Nov 1/11 610 May 30/14
598.111 Nov 1/11 611 May 30/14
598.112 Nov 1/11 612 May 30/14
598.113 Nov 1/11 031.31.01 1 Nov 1/11
598.114 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
598.115 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
598.116 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
598.117 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
598.118 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
598.119 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
598.120 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
598.121 Nov 1/11 031.31.02 1 May 30/14
598.122 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 May 30/14
598.123 Nov 1/11 3 May 30/14
598.124 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
598.125 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
598.126 Nov 1/11 402 May 30/14
598.127 Nov 1/11 403 May 30/14
598.128 Nov 1/11 404 May 30/14
598.129 Nov 1/11 405 Nov 1/11
598.130 Nov 1/11 406 Nov 1/11
598.131 Nov 1/11 031.31.03 1 Nov 1/11
598.132 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
598.133 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
598.134 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
Inspection / Check 601 May 30/14 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
602 May 30/14 302 Nov 1/11
604 May 30/14 402 Nov 1/11
605 May 30/14 031.31.04 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.31.04 3 Nov 1/11 031.31.09 1 May 30/14

Description and Operation 4 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 May 30/14
302 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
304 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18 031.31.10 1 Nov 1/11
031.31.06 1 Nov 1/11 031.31.11 1 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
303 Nov 1/11 303 May 30/14
304 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11
306 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14 031.31.12 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 402 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 1/11 031.31.13 1 Oct 30/19
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
402 Nov 1/11 302 Oct 30/19
031.31.08 1 May 30/14 031.32.00 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14 Servicing 301 May 30/14
402 May 30/14 302 May 30/14
403 May 30/14 303 May 30/14
404 Nov 1/11 304 May 30/14

ALL Page: 7
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.32.00 305 May 30/14 031.32.00 7 Oct 30/19

Servicing 306 May 30/14 Servicing 8 Oct 30/19
307 Nov 1/11 9 Oct 30/19
308 Nov 1/11 10 Oct 30/19
309 Nov 1/11 301 Oct 30/19
310 Nov 1/11 302 Oct 30/19
031.33.00 1 Nov 1/11 303 Apr 5/13
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 304 Apr 5/13
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 305 Oct 30/19
302 Nov 1/11 306 Apr 5/13
303 Nov 1/11 307 Apr 5/13
304 Nov 1/11 308 Oct 30/19
305 Nov 1/11 309 Apr 5/13
306 Nov 1/11 310 Apr 5/13
307 Nov 1/11 311 Apr 5/13
308 Nov 1/11 312 Apr 5/13
309 Nov 1/11 313 Apr 5/13
310 Nov 1/11 314 Apr 5/13
311 Nov 1/11 315 Apr 5/13
312 Nov 1/11 316 Apr 5/13
313 Nov 1/11 317 Apr 5/13
314 Nov 1/11 318 Apr 5/13
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 319 Apr 5/13
402 Nov 1/11 320 Feb 23/18
031.34.00 1 Nov 1/11 321 Apr 5/13
Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19 322 Apr 5/13
3 Feb 23/18 323 Apr 5/13
4 Feb 23/18 324 Apr 5/13
031.35.00 1 Nov 1/11 325 Apr 5/13
Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13 326 Apr 5/13
3 Nov 1/11 327 Apr 5/13
4 Oct 30/19 328 Apr 5/13
5 Oct 30/19 329 Apr 5/13
6 Apr 5/13 330 Apr 5/13

ALL Page: 8
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.35.00 331 Apr 5/13 031.35.00 353.13 Apr 5/13

Servicing 332 Apr 5/13 Servicing 353.14 Apr 5/13
333 Apr 5/13 353.15 Apr 5/13
334 Apr 5/13 353.16 Apr 5/13
335 Apr 5/13 353.17 Apr 5/13
336 Apr 5/13 353.18 Apr 5/13
337 Apr 5/13 353.19 Apr 5/13
338 Apr 5/13 353.20 Oct 30/19
339 Apr 5/13 353.21 Apr 5/13
340 Apr 5/13 353.22 Apr 5/13
341 Apr 5/13 353.23 Oct 30/19
342 Apr 5/13 353.24 Apr 5/13
343 Apr 5/13 353.25 Apr 5/13
344 Apr 5/13 353.26 Apr 5/13
345 Apr 5/13 353.27 Apr 5/13
346 Apr 5/13 353.28 Apr 5/13
347 Apr 5/13 353.29 Apr 5/13
348 Apr 5/13 353.30 Apr 5/13
349 Apr 5/13 353.31 Apr 5/13
350 Apr 5/13 353.32 Apr 5/13
351 Apr 5/13 353.33 Apr 5/13
352 Apr 5/13 353.34 Apr 5/13
353.1 Apr 5/13 353.35 Apr 5/13
353.2 Apr 5/13 353.36 Apr 5/13
353.3 Apr 5/13 353.37 Apr 5/13
353.4 Apr 5/13 353.38 Apr 5/13
353.5 Apr 5/13 353.39 Apr 5/13
353.6 Oct 30/19 353.40 Apr 5/13
353.7 Apr 5/13 353.41 Apr 5/13
353.8 Apr 5/13 353.42 Apr 5/13
353.9 Apr 5/13 353.43 Apr 5/13
353.10 Apr 5/13 353.44 Apr 5/13
353.11 Oct 30/19 353.45 Apr 5/13
353.12 Apr 5/13 353.46 Apr 5/13

ALL Page: 9
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section Section
Subject Subject
031.35.00 353.47 Apr 5/13 031.35.00 353.81 Apr 5/13

Servicing 353.48 Apr 5/13 Servicing 353.82 Apr 5/13
353.49 Apr 5/13 353.83 Apr 5/13
353.50 Apr 5/13 353.84 Apr 5/13
353.51 Apr 5/13 354.1 Oct 30/19
353.52 Oct 30/19 354.2 Oct 30/19
353.53 Apr 5/13 354.3 Oct 30/19
353.54 Apr 5/13 354.4 Oct 30/19
353.55 Oct 30/19 354.5 Oct 30/19
353.56 Apr 5/13 354.6 Oct 30/19
353.57 Apr 5/13 354.7 Oct 30/19
353.58 Apr 5/13 354.8 Oct 30/19
353.59 Apr 5/13 354.9 Oct 30/19
353.60 Apr 5/13 354.10 Oct 30/19
353.61 Apr 5/13 354.11 Oct 30/19
353.62 Apr 5/13 354.12 Oct 30/19
353.63 Apr 5/13 354.13 Oct 30/19
353.64 Apr 5/13 354.14 Oct 30/19
353.65 Apr 5/13 354.15 Oct 30/19
353.66 Apr 5/13 354.16 Oct 30/19
353.67 Apr 5/13 354.17 Oct 30/19
353.68 Apr 5/13 354.18 Oct 30/19
353.69 Apr 5/13 354.19 Oct 30/19
353.70 Apr 5/13 354.20 Oct 30/19
353.71 Apr 5/13 354.21 Oct 30/19
353.72 Apr 5/13 354.22 Oct 30/19
353.73 Apr 5/13 354.23 Oct 30/19
353.74 Apr 5/13 354.24 Oct 30/19
353.75 Apr 5/13 354.25 Oct 30/19
353.76 Apr 5/13 354.26 Oct 30/19
353.77 Apr 5/13 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
353.78 Apr 5/13 402 Apr 5/13
353.79 Apr 5/13 031.35.01 1 Oct 30/19
353.80 Apr 5/13 Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19

ALL Page: 10
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Page Date

Section
Subject
031.36.00 1 May 30/14

031.36.00 3 May 30/14
102 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
302 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 11
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 12
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
11 031-List of 1, 7 to 10 - -
Effective Pages
031-Record of 3 - -
Revisions
031-Contents 7 - -
031.31.13 1, 301, 302 - -
031.34.00 2 - -
031.35.00 4, 5, 7 to 10 354.1 to -
354.26 L410UVP-E/300d Oct 30/19
301, 302, 305, - -
308, 353.6, - -
353.11, 353.20, - -
353.23, 353.52, - -
353.55 - -
031.35.01 - 1 to 2 -
031.36.00 301 - -
12 031-List of 1 to 10 11, 12 -
Effective Pages
031-Record of 3 - -
Revisions
031.20.05 - 1 to 2 - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
- 101 to 102 -
- 301 to 302 -
- 401 to 402 -
031.20.06 - 1 to 4 -

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31
INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEM
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
General 1
Servicing 301
Check of the operation of the cockpit instruments 301
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS 031.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Inspection of the instrument panel including shock 301
absorbers of instrument panel and inspection of
hoses of the pitot-static system
Inspection of the instruments on the instrument 303
panel, control panels and on the overhead panel
Cleaning of all controls and instruments on the 307
instrument panel, the control panels and the
overhead panel from dust
INSTRUMENT PANEL 031.11.00 1 ALL
General 1
Instrument panel complete installation 401
Instrument panel complete installation 402
Instrument panel partial removal 403
CONTROL PANEL 031.12.00 1 ALL
General 1
Removal of the control panels 401
Installation of the control panels 402
OVERHEAD PANEL 031.13.00 1 ALL
General 1
Removal of the overhead panel 401
Installation of the overhead panel 401
FUSE / CIRCUIT BREAKERS PANEL 031.14.00 1 ALL
General 1
Description
ALL Page: 1
Apr 15/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
GLARE SHIELD 031.15.00 1 ALL
General 1
INDEPENDENT INSTRUMENT 031.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
ACHS-1M CLOCK (IF INSTALLED) 031.20.01 1 ALL
General 1
Description 1
Function 1
Servicing 301
Setting of the AChS - 1M clock 301
LC – 6 CLOCK (if installed) 031.20.02 1 ALL
General 1
Description 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Check and adjustment of correct time of aircraft 301
clock
CITIZEN STOP WATCH (IF INSTALLED) 031.20.03 1 ALL
GROB-MICRO-BENZ AIRCRAFT CLOCK P/N 115EG-7780 031.20.04 1 ALL
(IF INSTALLED)
Purpose 1
Description 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Replace the battery 301
Removal of the clock 401
Installation of the clock 401
THOMMEN CM 30 DIGITAL CHRONOMETER (IF INSTALLED) 031.20.05 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 2
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Replacement of the battery 301
Removal and replacement of the CM 30 401
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
TABLET EFB SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED) 031.20.06 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 3
FLIGHT DATA RECORDERS 031.30.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the blocks and the transmitters of the 301
flight data recorder and their fixing
Check of the operation of the flight data recorder 304
on the aircraft when switching-on by the terminal
switch on the nose landing gear leg with the
operative engines
Requirements after engine(s) replacement 501
BUR-1-2G FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (if installed) 031.31.00 1 ALL
Determination 1
List of instruments and components 1
Description 3
Operation 12
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Logging of operational data, starting time and 301
activation of the ZBN-1-1 or FDR 59BL recorder
before the flight
Checking of the BUR CHECK signaling lamp 303
Check of the operation of the BUR-1-2G flight data 303
recorder
BUR-1-2G flight recorder activation for pre-heating 304
Inspection of the blocks and the transmitters of the 305
flight data recorder and their fixing
Check of the operation of the flight data recorder by 306
means of the UVOP-1 device (if installed ZBN-1-1)
Check of the operation of the flight data recorder 311
on the aircraft when switching-on by the terminal
switch on the nose landing gear leg with the
operative engines
Dismantling and reassembly of the BUR-1-2G 401
airborne recorder units and sensors
Calibration of analog signal transmitters belonging 501
to the BUR-1-2G system
Aircraft number encoding 570
Data calibration and maintenance of FDR 59BL 598.1
Solid-state Flight Data Recorder
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Functional checkup and automatic activation 601
testing of the BUR-1-2G recorder
Functional test of the BUR-1-2G recorder system in 602
the aircraft by test record decoding
BSPI-4-2 FLIGHT DATA GATHERING UNIT (if installed) 031.31.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 3
Servicing 301
Checkup and replacement of fuses in the BSPI-4-2 301
flight data gathering unit
BSPI-4-2 flight data gathering unit detachment 401
BSPI-4-2 flight data gathering unit installation 401
ZBN-1-1 RECORDER WITH CONTAINER (if installed) 031.31.02 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Operation 3
ZBN-1-1 recorder-and-container detachment and 401
installation
Check of the shock-absorbers of the ZBN-1-1 402
Detachment of the MLP-23 tape drive and its re- 404
installation into the ZBN-1-1 recorder-and-container
unit case
Check of the driving belt of the feed mechanism of 404
the MLP-23 tape drive of the ZBN-1-1 recorder
PU-25 or DEP-25 CONTROL AND DISPLAY PANEL 1 ALL
(if installed)
Purpose 1
Description 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
PU-25 control and display panel fastening reliability 301
check
PU-25 control and display panel signaling lamp 301
replacement
PU-25 control and display panel detachment and 401
re-installation
OS 2 INTERFACE BOX (if installed) 031.31.04 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
DV- 15 MV BAROMETRIC ALTITUDE SENSOR (if installed) 031.31.05 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Measurement error check-up 301
Tightness check 303
DV-15 MV barometric altitude sensor detachment 401
and re-installation
DPSM-1 INSTRUMENT SPEED SENSOR (if installed) 031.31.06 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Continuous and relay signal measurement error 301
checkup
Insulation resistance checkup 303
Static and dynamic system tightness check 304
Runner and potentiometer contact reliability 306
checkup
DPSM-1 instrument speed sensor detachment 401
MP-95 OVERLOAD SENSOR (if installed) 031.31.07 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Measurement error checkup 301
Insulation resistance check 303
Runner-and-potentiometer contact reliability 303
checkup
MP-95 overload sensor detachment and re- 401
installation
MU-615 A ANGULAR EXCURSION TRANSMITTER 031.31.08 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Detachment and re-installation of the MU-615 A 401
angular excursion transmitters
DUSU 1-30 AS ANGULAR SPEED SENSOR (if installed) 031.31.09 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Removal / Installation 031.31.09 401
Detachment and re-installation of the DUSU 1-30 401
AS angular speed sensor
DS-11 B ANGULAR EXCURSION SENSOR (if installed) 031.31.10 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
DMP-15 A PRESSURE SENSOR (if installed) 031.31.11 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 031.31.11 301
Insulation resistance check 303
Runner-and-potentiometer contact reliability test 303
Detachment and re-installation of the DMP-15 A 401
pressure sensor
0.4 K LUN 1469.11-8 PRESSURE SWITCH (if installed) 031.31.12 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Testing of 0.4 K LUN 1469.11-8 pressure switch 301
0.4 K LUN 1469.11-8 pressure switch detachment 401
and re-installation
DK 120 OR ELP 362D UNDERWATER ACOUSTIC BEACON 031.31.13 1 ALL
(if installed)
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Accessories 1
Servicing 301
Battery replacement of the DK 120 or ELP-362D 301
underwater acoustic beacon
SRO-2 REPLIER (if installed) 031.32.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Servicing 031.32.00 301
Check of the switch on of the SRO firing circuit 301
safety cut-out
Check of the antenna of product SRO - 2 301
Check of the cable – duct screening, tubes 302
conductor insulation
Removal and installation of the 5-OM unit 302
Check at the test room on the block 5 - OM 303
Check of the product SRO-2 functioning 310
SO-69 TRANSPONDER (if installed) 031.33.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Check for proper function of transponder using 301
built-in-test
Check for proper function of transponder using 301
KASO-II tester
External inspection of transponder units 303
Transponder check by means of KASO-I tester 304
Transponder check by means of IMO-65M tester 311
Check of connection between the transponder and 312
the electromechanical altimeter
Removal and installation of SO-69 transponder 401
units
F 1000 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (IF INSTALLED) 031.34.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 3
List of registered parameters of the flight data 4
recorder
FA 2200 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER (IF INSTALLED) 031.35.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 5
List of registered parameters of the flight data 6
recorder
Servicing 301
Data calibration and maintenance 301
of FA 2200 MADRAS Flight Data Recorder
Removal and installation of the FA 2200 MADRAS 401
Flight Data Recorder
ALL Page: 7
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
ETM-375M PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (IF INSTALLED) 031.35.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
AMU1.01 ACCELERATION MONITORING UNIT (IF INSTALLED) 031.36.00 1 ALL
General 1
Technical data 2
Operation 2
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Processing of AMU1.01 data 301
ALL Page: 8
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THOMMEN CM 30 DIGITAL CHRONOMETER (IF INSTALLED)

1. Purpose
There are installed the Thommen CM 30 digital chronometer on the airplane, located on the LH and RH
instrument panel. The display of the digital clock is backlit. Functions are the following:
• 24 hour clock for Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) or Local Time (LT),
• elapsed time (ET),
• flight time (FT),
• built in test
Refer to the CM30 Digital chronometer Installation and Operation Manual P/N 1777 (Revision 1.0),
dated August 23/ 2012.
1 Circuit breaker 7274-2-3/4 1 Fuse panel

2 Digital chronometer CM 30 2 LH, RH instrument panel
3 DAY/NIGHT Toggle switch 1TW1-2 2 LH, RH instrument panel
(MS27716-22-1)
3. Technical data
Size Length 59 mm (2.323”)

Width 57.15 mm (2.250”)
Height 57.15 mm (2.250”)
Time Base Accuracy better than ± 0.2 s / 24 h
MTBF > 20,000 hrs.
Supply Power Nominal 14 or 28 VDC < 300 mA at 28 VDC
Temperature -55° C to +85° C ground survival and storage

-45° C to +70° C continuous operational
Altitude 55,000 ft.
Weight 210 grams (7.4 oz.)
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Operation
The CM 30 digital chronometer is turned on by switching on BATTERY I, II circuit breakers located on
the overhead panel and circuit breaker on the fuse panel.
The left pushbutton has the legend FT/- and is used to start, stop and reset the flight timer or to
decrease selected value when CM30 is in SET TIME MODE.
The middle pushbutton has the legend TIME and is used to switch display between UTC and local time
or to switch to SET TIME MODE.
The right pushbutton has the legend ET/+ and is used to start, stop and reset the elapsed timer or to
increase selected value when CM30 is in SET TIME MODE.
The DAY/NIGHT Toggle switches serves for lighting intensity selection of the digital chronometer.
FIG. 1 THOMMEN CM30 DIGITAL CHRONOMETER
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FAULT ISOLATION
The troubleshooting of the digital chronometer Type CM30 is mentioned in the THOMMEN Manual,
S/N 1777 - “Installation and Operation Manual Digital Chronometer Type CM30“, Revision 1.0 or later.
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 101
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 102
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SERVICING
1. Replacement of the battery
B. Materials 3 Volt Cell Battery (CR1220)
E. Procedures
In case the battery doesn’t provide enough power to ensure a safe storage of chronograph values
during power off time, a warning message is displayed in the bottom line during the start up phase
of the CM30. After 5 seconds, the warning disappears and the chronograph continues work
operation.
The warning message can be:
Message Description
BAT: LOW Battery capacity is low, replace soon
BAT: DEF Battery capacity is very low, replace immediately
(1) Ensure airplane power is OFF.
(2) Unscrew the 2 attachment screws which fix the CM30 chronometer to the cockpit panel.
(3) Carefully, pull out the CM30 chronometer from the clamp situated behind the cockpit panel.
(4) Access the battery by withdrawing the 2 battery panel screws on the rear of the CM30
chronometer and remove the battery panel and gasket.
(5) Remove / replace the battery.
(6) Reposition the gasket and battery panel and fix using screws.
(7) Install the CM30 chronometer in the mounting clamp in the cockpit instrument panel and fix
using attachment screws.
(8) Ensure full contact between the CM30 chronometer bonding surfaces.
(9) Apply power to theCM30 chronometer and test to ensure the device is fully functional.
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1. Removal and replacement of the CM 30
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Multimeter (e.g. EXTECH MG302 or equivalent)
E. Procedures
(1) Removal of the CM 30
(a) Ensure airplane power is OFF.
(b) Unscrew the 2 attachment screws which fix the CM30 to the LH (or RH) of instruments
panel.
(c) Carefully, pull out the CM30 from the clamp situated behind the glare shield of instrument
panel.
(d) Unplug the CM30 from the airplane connector and if appropriate, also unplug the bonding
lead.
(2) Installation of the CM 30
(a) Check/set the DIP switches of the chronograph situated on the rear side of the CM30,
below battery panel.
(b) Connect the CM30 connector in the mating electrical connector and electrically bond.
Verify the electrical connecter has 360 degree metal to metal contact with the CM30
housing. There should be a maximum resistance of 2.5 mOhm between the electrical
connector and the CM30 bonding interface.
(c) Install the CM30 in the mounting clamp in the LH (or RH) of instrument panel and fix using
attachment screws.
(d) Ensure full contact between the CM30 bonding surfaces. Verify the conductivity of the
electrical bonds at the bezel back, body and mounting clamp. There should be a maximum
resistance of 10 mOhm.
(e) Apply power to CM30 and test to ensure the device is fully functional.
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.05
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLET EFB SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)

1. General
There are Tablet EFB system in the airplane. Tablet EFB system consist from the components
mentioned below – refer to the List of components.
iPad is small portable device that provides interactive interface for users. IPad allows record a lot of
applications namely The Electronic Fly Charts JeppView by Jeppesen as well.
Tablet iPad Air is possible to attach to the tablet holder between 5th and 6th frames on left and right
sides of flight compartment – refer to the section 025.10.00.
1 Apple iPad Air ME987SL/A 2 Between frames No. 5 and 6, LH,

RH
2 iPad Holder RAM-B-189-TAB3-ALA1-KRU 2 Between frames No. 5 and 6, LH,
(Ord. No. 95254390) RH
3 GNS 2000 GPS/GLONASS P/N 4037735104860 1 Between frames 5th and 6th right
BLUETOOTH RECEIVER
4 GNS 2000 GPS/GLONASS P/N 4037735104860 1 Between frames 5th and 6th left
BLUETOOTH RECEIVER
5 USB connector P/N ECF504-5M 2 Between frames 5th and 6th right
6 USB connector P/N ECF504-5M 2 Between frames 5th and 6th left
7 Converter 28V/ 5V P/N LS03-05026 or 1 Frame 5th bottom left
P/N LS03-05003-005
8 EFB Circuit breaker AZRGK-5-2S 1 Overhead panel
NOTE: Installation of iPad holders is described in the Information Bulletin No. L 410 UVP-E/512b.
Installation of EFB power supply system is described in the Service Bulletin No. L-410/018b.
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.06
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 EFB - iPAD AIR
FIG. 2 GNS 2000 GPS/GLONASS BLUETOOTH RECEIVER
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.06
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Operation
The Tablet EFB system is turned on by switching on BATTERY Ι, ΙΙ, .and EFB circuit breaker located on
the overhead panel.
The iPADs and GNS 2000 units are charged/powered with a standard USB-to-mini USB cable connected
into the respective USB socket IPAD and GNS located between frames 5th and 6th right – refer to the fig.
025.10.00-1.
iPad Air Functions:
• AirDrop
• AirPlay
• Control centrum
• Family sharing
• iCloud Drive
• Multitasking
• Notice centrum
• Keyboard QuickType
• Search Spotlight
GNS 2000 is an Apple certified high sensitive GPS/GLONASS Bluetooth Receiver, which supplies highly
accurate position information via Bluetooth to an Apple iPad.
Operation and using in flight are described in Flight Manual.
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.06
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
031.20.06
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 032.00.00 101 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Fault Isolation 102 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11
3 Dec 10/20 202 Nov 1/11
5 Dec 10/20 302 Nov 20/15
6 Dec 10/20 303 Nov 20/15
Record of Revisions 1 Nov 15/13 304 Nov 20/15
2 May 30/14 032.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Mar 10/17 Description and Operation 2 May 30/14
4 Oct 30/19 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
5 Dec 10/20 302 Oct 30/19
6 Dec 10/20 303 May 30/14
2 Nov 1/11 305 May 30/14
Contents 1 Feb 23/18 306 May 30/14
2 Dec 10/20 307 Dec 10/20
3 May 30/14 308 Dec 10/20
4 Mar 10/17 309 Nov 1/11
5 Oct 30/19 310 May 30/14
6 Oct 30/19 311 Nov 20/15
7 May 30/14 312 May 30/14
8 May 30/14 313 May 30/14
9 May 30/14 314 May 30/14
10 Oct 30/19 315 May 30/14
11 Oct 30/19 316 Nov 1/11
032.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 402 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
032.10.00 403 Dec 10/20 032.20.00 315 May 30/14

Removal / Installation 404 Dec 10/20 Servicing 316 Nov 1/11
032.10.01 1 Apr 5/13 Removal / Installation 401 Apr 15/15
3 Nov 1/11 403 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 404 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Apr 5/13 405 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 406 May 30/14
Servicing 301 May 30/14 407 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 408 Nov 1/11
303 Dec 10/20 032.20.01 1 Apr 5/13
304 Oct 30/19 Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13
305 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Apr 5/13
306 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20 Servicing 301 May 30/14
402 Dec 10/20 302 May 30/14
403 Dec 10/20 303 Dec 10/20
404 Dec 10/20 304 Mar 10/17
032.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Apr 5/13
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 032.30.00 1 Feb 23/18
303 May 30/14 3 Feb 23/18
304 Dec 10/20 4 May 30/14
305 Dec 10/20 5 Oct 30/19
306 Dec 10/20 6 Feb 23/18
307 Dec 10/20 7 Feb 23/18
308 Dec 10/20 8 Nov 1/11
309 May 30/14 9 Nov 1/11
310 Nov 20/15 10 Nov 1/11
311 May 30/14 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
312 Nov 15/13 102 Nov 1/11
313 Nov 1/11 032.30.01 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
032.30.01 401 Nov 1/11 032.30.08 1 Nov 1/11

032.30.02 1 Nov 1/11 032.30.09 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Dec 10/20 032.30.10 1 Nov 1/11
403 May 30/14 032.30.12 1 Feb 23/18
032.30.03 1 Nov 1/11 032.30.13 1 Nov 20/15
4 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11 032.30.14 1 Nov 1/11
032.30.04 1 Nov 1/11 032.30.15 1 Nov 1/11
032.30.05 1 Mar 10/17 032.30.16 1 Feb 23/18
Description and Operation 2 Mar 10/17 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
3 Mar 10/17 032.40.00 1 Apr 5/13
Removal / Installation 401 Mar 10/17 3 Nov 1/11
402 Mar 10/17 4 Nov 1/11
403 Mar 10/17 5 Nov 1/11
404 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
032.30.06 1 Nov 1/11 7 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 9 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 10 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Mar 10/17
402 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
032.40.00 501 Oct 30/19 032.40.01 405 Oct 30/19

Adjustment / Test 502 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 406 Oct 30/19
Inspection / Check 601 Oct 30/19 407 Oct 30/19
602 Nov 1/11 408 Oct 30/19
Storage 901 Oct 30/19 409 Oct 30/19
902 Oct 30/19 410 Oct 30/19
032.40.01 1 Nov 1/11 411 Oct 30/19
3 Oct 30/19 Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 502 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11 602 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Approved Repairs 801 Oct 30/19
302 May 30/14 802 Oct 30/19
303 Oct 30/19 803 Oct 30/19
304 Oct 30/19 804 Oct 30/19
305 Mar 10/17 805 Oct 30/19
306 Apr 15/15 806 Oct 30/19
307 Apr 15/15 807 Oct 30/19
308 Apr 15/15 808 Oct 30/19
309 Apr 15/15 032.40.02 1 Nov 1/11
310 Oct 30/19 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
311 Oct 30/19 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
312 Oct 30/19 102 Nov 1/11
313 Oct 30/19 Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
314 Oct 30/19 302 Oct 30/19
315 Oct 30/19 303 Nov 1/11
326 Oct 30/19 304 Nov 1/11
317 Oct 30/19 305 Oct 30/19
318 Apr 15/15 306 Oct 30/19
Removal / Installation 401 Oct 30/19 307 Nov 1/11
402 Oct 30/19 308 Nov 1/11
403 Oct 30/19 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
404 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
032.40.02 403 Nov 1/11 032.40.11 301 Nov 1/11

Removal / Installation 404 May 30/14 Servicing 302 Nov 1/11
405 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20
406 Apr 5/13 402 Nov 1/11
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11 032.40.12 1 Nov 1/11
032.40.03 1 Nov 1/11 032.40.13 1 Nov 1/11
032.40.05 1 Nov 1/11 032.40.14 1 Nov 20/15
302 May 30/14 304 Nov 1/11
032.40.08 1 Nov 1/11 032.50.00 1 Oct 30/19
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19
032.40.09 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
032.40.10 1 Nov 1/11 5 Oct 30/19
302 Nov 1/11 8 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
404 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 15/13
405 Nov 1/11 303 Nov 15/13
406 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 15/13
032.40.11 1 Nov 1/11 305 Nov 15/13

ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
032.50.00 401 Nov 1/11 032.60.03 1 Nov 1/11

Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 15/13 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
502 Nov 15/13 102 Nov 1/11
504 Nov 15/13 402 Nov 1/11
032.50.01 1 Apr 5/13 032.60.04 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Oct 30/19 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 032.60.05 1 Apr 5/13
4 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13
032.50.03 1 Nov 1/11 3 Apr 5/13
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 4 Apr 5/13
032.50.05 1 May 30/14 032.60.06 1 Oct 30/19
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19
032.50.06 1 Oct 30/19 Servicing 301 Oct 30/19
Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19 302 Oct 30/19
032.60.00 1 Apr 5/13 Removal / Installation 401 Oct 30/19
Description and Operation 2 Oct 30/19 402 Nov 1/11
3 Oct 30/19
4 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11
6 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11
032.60.01 1 Nov 1/11
032.60.02 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
14 032-LEP 1 to 6 - -
032-RoR - 5 to 6 -
032-Contents 2 - -
032.10.00 307, 308, - -
402 to 404 - -
032.10.01 303, 401, 402 403, 404 - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
032.20.00 304 to 308 - -
032.20.01 303 - -
032.30.02 2, 301 - -
032.40.00 301 - -
032.40.11 401 - -

ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
LANDING GEAR (GENERAL) 032.00.00 1 ALL
Fault Isolation 101
General 201
Servicing 301
Inspection of the main and the nose landing gear. 301
Check of the conductors on the landing gear legs
and in the space of the main and nose landing gear
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS 032.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Visual check of the main landing gear shock 301
absorber compression
Inspection of main landing gear shock absorbers 301
Inspection of the working cylinders, locks and the 302
guides of mechanical indicators at accessible
places of the main landing gear.
Inspection of the wiring of terminal switches on the 303
locks of the main landing gear and on the cylinders
at accessible places of the main landing gear.
Inspection of the all bonding strips in the space of
the main landing gear.
Inspection of the main landing gear legs 304
Inspection of the split pins on the connecting bolts 305
of the main landing gear leg
Inspection of the smooth surface of the piston rod 306
and the sealing of the main landing gear leg
Inspection of the blinds (of fabric and metal) of the 307
main landing gear leg
Check of the pressure and the compression values 308
of shock absorbers of the main landing gear leg.
Preservation of the lower hinge surface of the main 310
landing gear shock absorber
Check of the play of the main landing gear 311
mounting
Check of the tightening of the bushings of the 315
mechanical indicators of the main landing gear leg
Removal of main landing gear from aeroplane 401
Installation of main landing gear on aeroplane 402
ALL Page: 1
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
2 141 900 (3 257 900, 3 257 900-7) LH MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG 032.10.01 1 ALL
2 142 900 (3 258 900, 3 258 900-7) RH MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation of the shock absorber 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check and charge of the main landing gear leg 301
shock absorber
Refilling of the main landing gear shock absorber 304
with the hydraulic liquid
Removal and installation of the main landing gear 401
leg shock absorber
NOSE GEAR AND DOORS 032.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Check of the nose landing gear shock absorber 301
compression
Inspection of the nose landing gear support shock 301
absorber
Inspection of the cylinder for the nose landing gear 301
wheel servo control
Inspection of the nose landing gear, the working 302
cylinder and the mechanical lock at accessible
places
Inspection of the wiring of terminal switch on the 303
mechanical lock of the nose landing gear and on
the cylinder of the nose landing gear. Inspection of
the all bonding strips in space of the nose landing
gear.
Inspection of the securing of pins and nut 304
tightening of nose landing gear leg
Inspection of the smooth surface of the piston rod 305
of the nose landing gear leg
Inspection of the dust catchers on the slide valve of 305
the nose wheel steering servo and of the piston rod
of the shock absorber of the nose landing gear
Inspection of the blinds (of fabric and metal) of the 306
nose landing gear leg
Inspection of the shock absorber and nose landing 309
gear wheel steering servo
Check of the pressure and compression value of 309
the shock absorber of the nose landing gear leg
Check of the play of the nose landing gear hinges 310
Check of the return motion of the wheel of the nose 315
landing gear to the neutral position
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Inspection of the blinds (of fabric and metal) of the main landing gear leg
B. Materials B 70 or NEFRAS or CSN 656442 Petrol;

VUKOPLAST D 420 Adhesive or equivalent;
VUKOLEP 100 - 366 Adhesive or OTTOSEAL S110
Neutral Silicone or equivalent;
S 2003 Synthetic primer; S 2029/1018 Synthetic
paint; OM-510000 CSN 804603 Tarpaulin of a
green-to-brown shade;
P/N 2121075 Metallic blind (cover),
P/N 2919014 Screws M4x10 ONL 3147 (2 pcs/blind);
P/N 2212076 Fabric blind (cover);
LOCTITE 7471 Activator or equivalent;
LOCTITE 222 glue or equivalent;
100 CSN 037549 Emery paper; Rag
C. Tools 125 CSN 229418 Scraper;

0.8x5 Screwdriver; Brush; Scissors
D. Referenced information 032.10.00.H

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Clean the main landing gear levers from impurities by using a rag and technical gasoline.
CAUTION: THE CLEANING PERIOD WITH TECHNICAL GASOLINE TAKES MAX. 5 MINUTES.
DEGREASING WITH TRICHLOROETHYLENE IS NOT ALLOWED!
(2) If necessary, prepare the adhesive VUKOPLAST D 420 according to the work procedure chart
given in the chapter 20.
(3) Inspect the blinds of lightening openings on the main landing gear leg (L.H. and R.H.).
Blinds on openings of the left (right) landing gear leg must adhere tightly and must be without
any mechanical damage.
NOTE: Make missing fabric blinds on the upper fork of the left (right) main lever from the
tarpaulin 71321/102 of the green-to-brown shade OM-510000, CSN 804603 or
equivalent fabric. Metallic blinds on the wheel axes make of a metal sheet with a
thickness of 1 mm. Ordering of the new blinds (covers) according to the point
B. Materials (see above), is recommended.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.00
ALL Page: 307
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
If is defect of any blind(s) detected, remove the main landing gear leg according to the work
procedure in section 032.10.00, part Removal / Installation. Repair blinds.
(4) Blinds that are untighten or new fabric blinds by the wheels should be sealed or cemented using
the VUKOPLAST D 420 or equivalent adhesive. Both the cementing and finishing operations should
be performed according to the similarly work procedure in section 032.20.00.
(5) Untighten blinds or new metallic blinds on the upper fork of the main gear lever should be sealed or
glued using the VUKOLEP 100 - 366 Adhesive or OTTOSEAL S110 Neutral Silicone or
equivalent. Perform both sealing and finishing operation according to the similarly work
procedure in section 032.20.00. After having finished the sealing, apply a layer of the synthetic
primer S2003 and two layers of synthetic paint S2029/1018 on the cover.
NOTE: Apply paint coating according to work procedure chart, given in the chapter 020.
(6) Install the main landing gear leg according to the work procedure in section 032.10.00, part
Removal / Installation.
9. Check of the pressure and the compression values of shock absorbers of the main
landing gear leg.
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 150 CSN 251238 Slide gauge
D. Referenced information 032.10.00.I

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Provided that the taxiing or towing of the aircraft is made by means of a towing vehicle, the check
should be performed only after shock absorbers cooling down to the ambient temperature.
In dependence on the aircraft mass, the visible part of shock absorber piston rods should be
within the limits shown in the diagram – see the fig. 303.
(2) The size of „x“ should be checked by means of a slide gauge on the main landing gear legs which
should correspond with the values read off from the fig. 303.
In the case that the value measured does not correspond with „x“ from the fig. 303, check and charge
the shock absorber (page 301-303, subsection 032.10.01).
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.00
ALL Page: 308
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS

1. Removal of main landing gear from aircraft

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment HZ 4 - 3 Hydraulic jacks, type 3 or equivalent
C. Tools Wrenches of appropriate sizes from the tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks (see the chapter 007).
(2) Bleed the pressure from the hydraulic system (by extending and retracting wing flaps as well as
the slow and continual stepping on brake pedals).
(3) To facilitate the removal of the main landing gear leg, remove the inertial sensor (23) including
cables and fastening strips with buttons first and then the wheel with brake according to the work
procedure 032.40.01.E.
(4) Take off the hydraulic jack of the main landing gear (10) - Fig. 1 by means of a special wrench
B 096 320 N for the manual locking check and for easier manipulation with the main landing
gear leg during the clearance checking of the main landing gear leg mechanical lock (17).
Unlock the mechanical lock of the main landing gear leg by releasing the retainer (3) - see the
fig. 1 - in the section (032.30.01) by using the wrench B 096 266 N and release the landing gear
leg. Disconnect the tie rod of the landing gear door (13), disconnect the brake hoses and the tie
rod (16) connecting sleeve of the landing door control system with the landing gear nacelle.
Blind the necks.
(5) Unscrew the bolt with the washers (25) on the front suspension, remove the bolt from the sleeve of
the main landing gear mechanical position indicator (22), remove the screw ∅ 10 mm and the leg
from the rear suspension (3).
(6) Move the main landing gear leg backwards (against the flight direction) remove the bushing from
the rear journal and take out the main landing gear leg from the suspension.
(7) When replacing the main landing gear support, remove also the tie rod (13) and levers (14) of the
door control system as well as the sleeve of the main landing gear mechanical position indicator.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.00
ALL Page: 401
Nov 20/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Installation of main landing gear on aircraft

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment CSN 251670 Set of feeler gauges;
Measuring tape with a length of 5 m at least;
HZ 4 - 3 Hydraulic jacks, type 3 or equivalent;
Grease gun
B. Materials CIATIM 201 Grease or equivalent;

2 121 023, 2 121 025 Safety washers
2x20 DIN 94 Split pin; Emery paper P320 (Ord. No.
82059715) or Scotch Brite (Ord. No. 82059715)
C. Tools Wrenches of appropriate sizes from the tool kit,

L 410.9144-06 open-end wrench;
Binding wire for ∅ 1 mm and/or ∅ 1.5 mm of a length
of 600 mm at least
E. Procedures
NOTE: When is installed a new main landing gear, the axis of main wheel is provided by surface
protection by phosphating. The surface protection in the marked places (1) – refer to the
fig. 401 - must be removed, otherwise the wheel cannot be mounted. Remove in the entire
functional area with emery paper with a roughness of P320 and finer, or with Scotch Brite.
(1) Lubricate journals on which the main landing gear leg rotates with the grease CIATIM 201.
(2) Insert the rear journal in the suspension first (3) - see the fig. 1 and afterwards, insert the front
journal in the front journal in the front suspension. Mount the bearing B055102N on the rear
journal and insert in the rear suspension.
(3) Mount the 3 241 008 washer with latches on the front pivot, the 3 241 023 safety washer and the
3 241 009 bolt – refer to the pos. (25). Tighten the bolt so that free motion of the main landing
leg (4) is secured without of axial clearances.
The main landing leg must fall by its own weight from retracted position into the extended one.
(4) Secure the nut of the front suspension.
(5) Mount the rear support (19) - see the fig.1 on the rear suspension. By means of a feeler gauge
determine the clearance between the rear support (19) and the rear casing (18).
(6) Remove the rear support (19) and limit the clearance between the rear support and the rear casing
within the range 0.1 - 0.2 mm by selecting appropriate washers from the kit L 410.5100-04.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Check the clearance between the mechanical lock hook of the main landing gear support (17) and
the suspending pin of the main landing gear. Retract manually the main landing gear. Check the
clearance between the mechanical lock hook of the main landing gear (17) and the suspending
pin of the main landing gear in the retracted position (on the earth) using binding wires with a
diameter of 1 mm and 1.5 mm. The clearance has to be within 1 - 1.5 mm.
The wire with the 1 mm diameter should go freely through, while the wire if 1,5 mm must not.
In the case that clearance differs, proceed in accordance with the paragraph (1) from the work
procedure chart for installation the main landing gear mechanical lock, given in the section 032-30-01
on the page 403.
(8) Secure the nut of the rear suspension (3).
(9) Connect the tie rod of the landing gear door (13), the hydraulic jack of the landing gear (10) with
extended piston rod by means of the wrench B 096 320 N, brake hoses, tie rod (16) interconnecting
the sleeve of the landing gear door control and the landing gear nacelle as well as the tie rod of
the main landing gear mechanical position indicator (22).
(10) Install the wheel with brake (7) according to the work procedure chart for the installation of the
main landing gear wheel with brake and tyre, given in the section 032.40.01.
(11) Install the inertial sensor (23), connect cables and fasten them by strips with buttons.
(12) In the case that when replacing the main landing gear tie rods (13),(16) levers of the landing
gear door control and the sleeve of the landing gear position mechanical indicator have been
removed in the course of replacing the main landing gear leg, install them back and adjust them
respectively.
Proceed installation and adjustment proceed in accordance with 032.10.00.
(13)After having connected the hydraulic jack (10), check the landing gear track according to the
chapter 006. With the non-loaded landing gear (aircraft on jacks), the wheel track should be
adjusted so that the distance of the suspending pin axes of the retracted position locks (pins are
placed on the internal side of the main landing gear leg opposite the gear wheel axis) makes
(2966 ± 10) mm while keeping symmetry in relation to the fuselage longitudinal axis.
If the wheel track is not correct, adjust the length of the hydraulic actuator piston rod using
screwing /or unscrewing of the eye (pos. 21 in fig. 1, in section 032.30.05) of piston rod. Secure
the eye position after the length adjustment.
(14) Lubricate the landing gear using the grease gun in accordance with the lubrication diagram given
in the Maintenance schedule for the aircraft L–410 UVP-E, E9, E20.
(15) Bleed the air from the hydraulic system including brakes according to 029.00.00.
(16) Check the landing gear position indication (green-extended, red-interposition).
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(17) Check the system of the landing gear retraction (see the chapter 29) and adjust the main landing
gear travel and closing the landing gear doors at the same time if necessary according to 029.00.00,
page 501.
(18) Check securing and tightness of connections. No leakage of the hydraulic liquid is admitted.
(19) Put the aircraft down from jacks.
CAUTION: ALWAYS USE NEW SECURING ELEMENTS, I.E. SECURING WASHERS,

SPLIT PINS ETC.
NOTE: Store spare main landing gear legs in the vertical position. After installing them on the
aircraft, check the pressure in the shock absorber according to 032.10.01, page 301.
FIG. 401 SCHEME OF PHOSPHATED AREAS ON THE NEW MAIN LANDING GEAR
(1) Phosphated areas on the new Main Landing Gear
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.00
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 301 CHECK AND CHARGE OF THE SHOCK ABSORBER

(1) Handle; (2) Valve; (3) Nut; (4) Pressure gauge; (5) Hose; (6) P/N 2995102 Charging valve
8 800 400/A-7; (7) Charging fitting; (8) P/N 2995102 Charging valve 8 800 400/A-7;
(9) P/N 2994096 Sealing ring 16x20
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.01
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Refilling of the main landing gear shock absorber with the hydraulic liquid
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment B955091N (XL 410.9551) Charging fitting
HZ 4 - 3 Hydraulic jacks, type 3
200 cm3, 2 cm3 Syringe
B. Materials AMG - 10 Hydraulic liquid

Technical nitrogen
C. Tools Tools from tool kit for landing gear
E. Procedures
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks (see the chapter 007) so that the landing gear wheel does not touch the
earth and the piston rod of the main landing gear is at its extreme extended position.
(2) Unscrew both charging valves (6),(8) - see the fig. 301.
WARNING: BEFORE UNSCREWING CHARGING VALVES (ONLY ONE OF THEM), BLEED

THE PRESSURE OF THE TECHNICAL NITROGEN FROM BOTH AREAS OF
THE SHOCK ABSORBER, NAMELY FROM THE AREA OF THE LOWER
PRESSURE FIRST AND THEN FROM THAT OF THE HIGHER PRESSURE.
(3) Compress the shock absorber piston rod by 155 mm. The absorbing liquid should flow out from
the charging valve opening (6). In the case that there is less of the absorbing liquid in the shock
absorber, refill it by means of a syringe up to the level of the charging valve.
(4) Screw the charging valves (6) and (8) in their places again.
(5) Charge the area (a) - see the fig. 1 - of the shock absorber through the charging valve (6) - see
the fig. 301 - with the technical nitrogen of a pressure of 1 MPa.
(6) Bleed the formed pressure from the area (b) - see the fig. 1 - by screwing in the charging fitting
to the charging valve (8) and remove from this area the excessive absobing liquid at the same
time.
(7) In the case that the absorbing liquid does not flow out through the charging armature, unscrew
the charging valve (8) - see the fig. 301 - and refill the absorbing liquid using a syringe up to the
level of the charging valve.
(8) Screw in the charging armature to the charging valve (6) and bleed the pressure from the area (a)
slowly – see Fig.1
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.01
ALL Page: 304
Oct 30/19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 141 900 (3 257 900, 3 257 900-7) LH MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG,
2 142 900 (3 258 900, 3 258 900-7) RH MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG
1. Removal and installation of the main landing gear leg shock absorber
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Hydraulic jacks – refer to the chapter 7
B. Materials 2 121 024 safety lock - 2 pcs;

2 141 029 insert (teflon) – 4 pcs;
Resistin ML Preservation wax or equivalent;
Aero Shell Grease 22 (ASG 22)
C. Tools Torque wrench 180 – 200 Nm

Torque wrench nut 36 mm
Necessary tool of tool kit
E. Procedures
NOTE: The shock absorber is a replaceable part. It is not required to perform any additional tests due of
the replacement. Replacement of the shock absorber must be performed by skilled personal of
an operator and must be written into the landing gear documentation.
CAUTION: ASSEMBLE THE ORIGINAL REPAIRED SHOCK ABSORBER ON THE AIRCRAFT.

IF THE ORIGINAL SHOCK ABSORBER CAN NOT BE USED, THE NEWLY
ASSEMBLED SHOCK ABSORBER MUST NOT HAVE SHORTER SERVICE LIFE
THAN THE MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG.
CAUTION: BLEED THE PRESSURE OF THE TECHNICAL NITROGEN BEFORE ANY, EVEN
PARTIAL, DISMANTLLING OF THE LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER.
NOTE: To avoid mechanical damage to components, use soft jaws or clamps prescribed when clamping
them. Replace all cotter pins, safety locks and teflon elements after the dismantling with new
ones.
Use exclusively the wooden or duralumin ejectors to eject the pivots.
Put the dismantled parts on clean working places, made of materials that will not damage the
surface of the components.
(1) Remove the 2 141 906 main landing gear absorber:
(a) Lift the aircraft on the jacks according to the 007.00.00 section.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.01
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Dismantle the K38-1200-7 brake and the K38-1100-7 main landing gear wheel according to
the 032.40.01 section.
(c) Dismantle the 2 141 011 lower pivot - unlock the 2 121 024 safety lock and unscrew the
2212022 nut. Slide the pivots out using the duralumin rod and remove the 2 141 029
inserts.
(d) Dismantle the 2 141 011 upper pivot - release the 2 121 024 safety lock and loosen the
2212022 nut. Remove the pivot and the 2 141 029 inserts.
(e) Remove the shock absorber from the lugs of the lever and hinge.
(2) Install the 2 141 906 main landing gear absorber:
(a) Verify the minimum clearance of 1.5 mm as with the full compression of the shock
absorber between the cylinder lid (position 201, fig. 403) and the hinge (position 5,
fig. 402). When a smaller clearance detected, contact the landing gear manufacturer.
(b) Apply the Resistin ML preservative wax to all contact surfaces of the shock absorber and
pivots and inserts.
(c) Insert the shock absorber to the lugs of the lever and hinge. Keep a correct position of the
shock absorber. Observe a position of grease nipples (43) in accordance with fig. 402.
(d) Install the 2 141 011 upper pivot. Center the lugs, inserts and washers. Use the new
2 141 029 inserts and the 2 121 024 safety lock.
(e) Insert the pivot and the 2 141 029 inserts. Tighten the 2212022 nut with the torque wrench
to 180 - 200Nm. Lock the 2 121 024 safety lock by bending to the nut. Try continually the
tilting of the shock absorber - the minimum clearance of 0.8mm to each side.
(f) Install the 2 141 011 lower pivot. Center the lugs, inserts and washers. Use the new
2 141 029 inserts and the 2 121 024 safety lock.
(g) Insert the pivot and the 2 141 029 inserts. Tighten the 2212022 nut with the torque wrench
to 180 - 200Nm. Lock the 2 121 024 safety lock by bending to the nut. Try continually the
tilting of the shock absorber - the minimum clearance of 0.8mm to each side.
(h) Repair the coating according to the 020.20.00 section.
(i) Grease the installed pins by means of the grease gun by the ASG 22 grease or equivalent.
(j) Install the K38-1100-7 main landing gear wheel and the K38-1200.7 brake according to the
032.40.01 section.
(k) Check the pressure and the compression values of shock absorbers of the main landing
gear leg according to work procedures in sections 032.10.00 and 032.10.01.
(k) Lower the aircraft from the jacks according to the 007.00.00.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.01
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 401 MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER

(11) Pivot; (22) Nut; (24) Safety lock; (29) Insert.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.01
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 402 MAIN LANDING GEAR GENERAL ASSEMBLY

(1) Fitting; (5) Hinge; (7), (11), (12) Pivot; (8) Washer; (9), (21) Screw; (18) Pin; (22) Nut;
(23), (24), (25) Safety lock; (29) Insert; (40) Cotter pin 3,2 x 20; (43) Grease nipple KM6;
(80) Lever; (200) Shock absorber.
FIG.403 MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER

(201) Cylinder lid; (203) Cylinder.
EFFECTIVITY
032.10.01
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Inspection of the wiring of terminal switch on the mechanical lock of the nose landing
gear and on the cylinder of the nose landing gear. Inspection of the all bonding strips in
space of the nose landing gear.
D. Referenced information 032.20.00.E

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the safety pin (10) (fig.1) from the tie rod (16) of the nose landing gear front doors,
disconnect the tie rod and open the doors.
(2) At accessible places check visually the reliability of wire attachment from the terminal switch on
the mechanical lock and hydraulic jack of the nose landing gear.
It is not allowed: interruption of wires, damaged insulation and other mechanical defects of wires,
released wire connections.
Repair the wiring according to WP in the chapter 020.20.00. Connect wires.
(3) Check all bonding strips in the nose landing gear zone.
(4) Close the nose landing gear doors, assemble the tie rod and secure it by means of the safety pin.
FIG. 301 LAYOUT OF BONDING STRIPS
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.00
ALL Page: 303
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Inspection of the securing of pins and nut tightening of nose landing gear leg
B. Materials P/N 2964067 Split pin 1.6x16 CSN 021781.09;

P/N 2964068 Split pin 2.5x25 CSN 021781.09; Rag
C. Tools 180 CSN 230380 Combined pliers

No. 697, 6x120 Screwdriver
D. Referenced information 032.20.00.F

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Clean protruding pin ends (4), (5) - see the fig. 302, 303 using a rag.
(2) Inspection of the pin securing of the connection of the nose landing gear wheel axis and the
nose landing gear lever:
• pin (4) ought to protrude from the lever (3) uniformly
• no longitudinal shift is allowed
• split pins (2), fixing pin (4) have to be free of deformations and damages
Replace the defective pins by the new ones and secure them.
(3) Inspect the pin securing connecting the journal with the cylinder:
• the pin (5) has to go out uniformly from the cylinder body (7)
• no longitudinal shift is allowed
• split pins (8), fixing the pin (5), have to be free of deformations and damages
Replace the defective by the new ones and secure.
FIG. 302 CHECK OF THE CONNECTION SECURING OF THE WHEEL AXIS AND THE LEVER
(1) Wheel axis; (2) Split pin 2.5x25 CSN 021781.09; (3) Lever; (4) Pin
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.00
ALL Page: 304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 303 CHECK OF THE CONNECTION OF THE JOURNAL AND THE CYLINDER
(5) Pin; (6) Journal; (7) Cylinder body; (8) Split pin 1.6x16 CSN 021781.09
7. Inspection of the smooth surface of the piston rod of the nose landing gear leg
D. Referenced information 032.20.00.G

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Inspect the piston rod „mirror“ and shock absorber seal on the nose landing gear.
(2) It is not allowed: untightness of sealing evident by the leakage of the hydraulic liquid in streams
along the piston rod, damage of the piston rod surface (scratches, corrosion).
NOTE: A thin wet layer of the shock absorbing liquid on the piston rod surface is allowed.
Remove corrosion according to chapter 020.20.00.
8. Inspection of the dust catchers on the slide valve of the nose wheel steering servo and
of the piston rod of the shock absorber of the nose landing gear
B. Materials Rag
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.00
ALL Page: 305
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Referenced information 032.20.00.H

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Clean the area around the dust catcher with a rag on the steering servo and around the safety
collar on the shock absorber piston rod.
(2) Inspect dust catchers on the nose wheel servo and the shock absorber piston rod.
(3) It is not allowed: any mechanical damage of sealing (cracking, blistering).
9. Inspection of the blinds (of fabric and metal) of the nose landing gear leg
B. Materials B-70 or NEFRAS or CSN 656542 Gasoline;

VUKOPLAST D 420 Adhesive or equivalent;
VUKOLEP 100 - 366 Adhesive or OTTOSEAL S110
Neutral Silicone or equivalent;
S 2003/0600 Synthetic Primer or equivalent;
S 2029/1018 Synthetic Paint or equivalent;
LOCTITE 7471 Activator or equivalent;
LOCTITE 222 Glue or equivalent;
100 CSN 037549 Emery cloth;
Blinds (covers), screws – refer to the fig. 304; Rag
D. Referenced information 032.20.00.I

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Clean the lever (5) – refer to the fig. 304 - of the nose landing gear with a rag and technical
gasoline.
CAUTION: TIME OF CLEANING WITH TECHNICAL GASOLINE MUST NOT EXCEED 5

MINUTES. DEGREASING WITH TRICHLOROETHYLENE IS NOT ALLOWED!
(2) Inspect blinds (fabric and metal covers) placed on lightening openings of the nose landing gear
(lever and wheel axis.)
(3) Blinds placed on lightening openings (1), (2), (3) and (4) on the lever (5) and wheel axis (6) –
refer to the fig. 304 - have to be seal and firm and must not be damaged mechanically.
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.00
ALL Page: 306
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Make missing fabric blinds (1), (2) and (4) from the tarpaulin 71321/102 of the green-to-
brown shade OM-510000, CSN 804603 or equivalent fabric. Ordering of the new
blinds (covers) according to the fig. 304 is recommended.
(4) Untighten metal blinds (covers) should be glued with the VUKOLEP 100-366 Adhesive in the
following way:
• Remove the screws fixings the blind (cover).
• Remove the old rests of adhesive using a scraper, clean both surfaces. Roughen the paint
surface using the emery cloth. The local show-through of the primer is allowed.
• Degrease rough surface twice with a clean rag soaked with the technical gasoline
• Coat the rough degreased and dry surface with a thin uniform adhesive layer using a brush on
both contact surfaces and let it dry in the air for (8 ÷ 10) minutes
• Apply the second layer (thin and uniform) of adhesive and let it dry in the air for (8 ÷ 10)
minutes at the ambient air temperature 15°C ÷ 25°C
• After the drying period, arrange the details so that they contact each other.
Fix blinds with wedges placed one against the other.
• Wipe the excessive adhesive with a rag soaked in the technical gasoline
• Mix the adhesive paste thoroughly before use, because it contains settled admixtures.
Dilute the thickened adhesive (due to solvent vaporization) with a mixture of ethyl acetate
and toluene in a ratio of 1:1 and mix the adhesive thoroughly.
NOTE: Perform the whole gluing procedure at a temperature of 15°C to 25°C.
• The OTTOSEAL S110 Neutral Silicone can be used for gluing and sealing of metal blind
instead of VUKOLEP 100-366 Adhesive.
• Apply the LOCTITE 7471 activator or equivalent on windings of screws before installation
of fixing screws. Apply the LOCTITE 222 glue or equivalent on windings of screws and tight
the screws fixings the blind (cover).
(5) Prepare the VUKOPLAST D 420 adhesive according to the work procedure mentioned in the
chapter 20.
(6) Replace missing blinds with fabric ones according to step (3) and glue them with the
VUKOPLAST D 420 adhesive in the following way:
• Apply the first layer of adhesive on the whole surface of the fabric blind as well as on the surface
of the lever or wheel axis. Let the adhesive dry for 10 minutes. Apply the second layer of
adhesive on both surfaces and let the adhesive dry for 1 - 2 minutes again. Contact and press
together both surfaces. Let the adhesive harden for 24 hours at a temperature of 15° at least.
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.00
ALL Page: 307
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Coat the repaired blinds and the newly glued blinds with a single layer of the
S 2003/0600 primer and two layers of the S 2029/1018 paint.
NOTE: Repair the defected coating of the airframe in accordance with the work procedure given
in the AMM, chapter 20.
FIG. 304 CHECK OF LIGHTENING HOLE BLINDS ON THE LEVER AND WHEEL AXIS
(1) P/N 2123215 Blind; (2) P/N 2143214 Blind; (3) P/N 2123216 or 2143216 Blind;
(4) P/N 2123069 Blind; (5) Lever; (6) Wheel axis; (7) P/N 2123218 Screw M4x5 (2 pcs/blind)
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.00
ALL Page: 308
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 301 CHECK AND CHARGE OF THE SHOCK ABSORBER

(1) Handle; (2) Valve; (3) Nut; (4) Pressure gauge; (5) Hose; (6) P/N 2995101 Charging valve
800 400/A; (7) Charging fitting; (8) P/N 2994096 Sealing ring 16x20
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.01
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Refilling of the shock absorber with the hydraulic liquid

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment B955091N (XL 410.9551) Charging fitting
Jacks
Syringe (e.g. 20 cm3)
B. Materials Hydraulic fluid; Technical nitrogen
E. Procedures
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks (see the chapter 007) so that the landing gear wheel does not touch the
earth and the piston rod of the nose landing gear is fully shifted out.
(2) Unscrew the charging valve.
CAUTION: BLEED THE SHOCK ABSORBER PRESSURE BEFORE UNSCREWING THE

CHARGING VALVE.
(3) The damping liquid flows out from the opening of the charging valve provided that the shock
absorber is completely compressed. Pour the damping liquid into a calibrated vessel.
The shock absorber compression should be performed slowly.
NOTE: The amount of the collected liquid should be (60 ± 5) cm3 at the full piston compression.
In case of a less amount, refill the damping liquid up to the required value.
(4) During the slow extending of the piston rod, pour (60 ± 5) cm3 of the damping liquid into the
landing gear shock absorber by means of an auxiliary vessel attached to the opening of the
charging valve.
(5) After refilling, screw in the valve and charge the shock absorber with the technical nitrogen
according to the Work procedure chart given in this chapter.
EFFECTIVITY
032.20.01
ALL Page: 304
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOSE LANDING GEAR MECHANICAL LOCK

1. General
B055320N nose landing gear mechanical lock secures the nose landing gear in the extended position.
The mechanical lock releases by means of LUN 7185-7 release cylinder.
EFFECTIVITY
032.30.02
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 B055320N NOSE LANDING GEAR MECHANICAL LOCK

(1) Box; (2) Right-hand hook; (3) Left-hand hook; (4),(5),(6) Pin with washer and split pin; (7),(8) Spring;
(9) Spacer; (10) Safety rocker; (11) KP 5 / 7 / U terminal switch; (12) LUN 7185-7 lock release
cylinder; (13),(14),(15) Screw with washer; (16) Grease nipple; (17) Bushing; (18) Stop of
booster; (19) Booster; (20) Washer; (21) Stop block
Booster assy (item 19):
(22) Slide valve; (23) Stop; (24),(25) Spring; (26) Washer; (27) Adjusting nut; (28) Body;
(29) Spring guide
a - (0.1 ÷ 0.15) mm clearance at the locked position of the mechanical lock at both stops.
NOTE: Washer (20) is used only if the dimension (11 + 0.5) mm should be reached.
EFFECTIVITY
032.30.02
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOSE LANDING GEAR MECHANICAL LOCK

SERVICING
1. Check of the play in the mechanical lock of the nose landing gear
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Portable lamp;
Feeler gauge
B. Materials B530050N Set of bushings;

14 CSN 022930 Locking rings

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Check the „a“ play between bushings (1) - see the fig. 301 - of the landing gear yoke
and hooks of the mechanical lock (2) using the feeler gauge.
Use the portable lamp at the checking of play. The play has to meet requirements
given in the legend to the fig. 301. In the case the measured play is larger, replace damaged
bushings by new ones with a diameter larger by 0.1 mm (from the supplied B530050N Set of
bushings).
NOTE: Use exclusively new locking rings 14 CSN 022930 for securing bushings by assembly!
(2) By means of the feeler gauge check the „c“ play between lock hooks (2) and the safety
rocker (3). Use the portable lamp at the checking of play.
NOTE: When checking the "c" play, it is necessary to compress the hook (2) in the counter-
flight direction (A-direction) - refer to the fig. 301 - for over power the force of the
spring (5). Perform the checking with the landing gear locked in the extended position.
In the case that the measured play does not meet the prescribed one, correct it by
scratching the safety rocker (3) up to the necessary value.
EFFECTIVITY
032.30.02
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 301 CHECK OF THE PLAY IN THE MECHANICAL LOCK OF THE NOSE LANDING GEAR
(1) Replaceable bushing; (2) Hook; (3) Safety rocker; (4) Stop bearing surface; (5) Spring
„a“ play - the feeler gauge 0.05 mm has to pass, the feeler gauge 0.1 mm must not pass
(the play can be preserved by selecting the appropriate size of the replaceable
bushing from the bushing set)
„b“ play - 1.5 mm
„c“ play - 0.1 - 0.9 mm
„d“ play - 0.05 - 0.8 mm
EFFECTIVITY
032.30.02
ALL Page: 302
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES

SERVICING
1. Check of the pressure in the main and nose landing gear tires. Inspection of wheels
discs
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment M4 Pressure gauge
Compressor

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Unscrew the cap of the wheel valve and using the pressure gauge check the pressure in tires of
the nose, left and right landing gear.
The pressure values must comply with those shown in the following table:
Pressure in the tire

Wheel
kPa kp/cm2
Main 450 + 30 4.5 + 0.3

Nose 420 + 30 4.2 + 0.3
NOTE: Tires pressure should be checked when the wheels are cooled down to the ambient
air temperature.
In case the pressure differs from these values, the following should be done:
• when the pressure is low, pump the tire with compressor
• when the pressure is high, press the valve cone. Valve leakage should be tested by soap
solution applied on the valve opening. Apply the dust-proof cap.
(2) Inspect the surface of the wheel discs. Inspect the wheels if there are any defects specified.
Not allowed: cracks (visible), or broken parts and deformation of wheel disk rims, tire wear to
the first layer of cord.
Replace the wheel disc. Replace the tire.
(3) Inspect the fixing bolts of the main and nose landing gear wheels.
Not allowed: mechanical damage - breakage of fixing bolts.
Replace all the bolts. (Replace all the bolts even in case that only one bolt is found broken).
EFFECTIVITY
032.40.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Inspection of the main and nose landing gear tires

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Slide calliper

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
Check and measure, with a slide caliper, the wearing or damage of tires of the main and the nose
landing gear.
Not allowed: - to use worn out tires or tires damaged to the first layer of cord fabric
- convexity (shows cord layers damage)
- cracks reaching even the tire carcass and rupture of two cord upper layers of
dimensions above 7 mm.
NOTE: Tires, whose side wear reaches such extent that the pattern is worn at one side
up to 1/2 to 1/3 height (2 or 3 mm), should be turned on the wheel disc.
Replace the tire.
EFFECTIVITY
032.40.00
ALL Page: 302
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MA 100 PRESSURE GAUGE

1. Removal and installation of the pressure gauge MA 100

B. Materials ∅ 0.8 mm Binding wire;

Hydraulic fluid;
ONL 3996.4 Blind 4 (Ord. No. 32143404 - 1 pc);
BU MNPTU 397-51 Paste; Cloth
C. Tools 14x17 CSN 23 0611.6 Double-ended spanner;

19x22 CSN 23 0611.6 Double-ended spanner;
697 6.5x130 Screwdriver;
Side wire pliers;
Flat pliers

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Hydraulic fluid leakage in the MA100 pressure gauge connection during braking is not allowed.
(2) Aeration of the hydraulic system of the parking brake is not allowed.
Verify that the MA100 pressure gauge indicates zero.
(3) Pressure gauge MA 100 removal
(a) Unscrew manually two special screws fixing the central control panel frame to the left and
right control panel frame. Tilt the central control panel.
(b) Cut the fixing wire of the nut of the hydraulic fluid hose and pressure gauge connections.
(c) With spanner 14x17 disconnect the hose from the pressure gauge connection, then blind
the hose with a blind 4 ONL 3996.4 with the help of two spanners 14x17.
(d) With a screwdriver No. 697 6.5x130 remove 4 fixing screws of the pressure gauge.
Blind the pressure gauge connection with PVC foil.
(e) Hand over the pressure gauge to the laboratory.
CAUTION: THE PRESSURE GAUGE SHOULD BE PROTECTED DURING THE

TRANSPORT INTO THE LABORATORY AGAINST MOISTURE,
IMPACTS AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE.
EFFECTIVITY
032.40.11
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Pressure gauge installation
(a) Check if the manufacturing number of the repaired pressure gauge complies with the number
recorded in the pressure gauge certificate. Remove blinds from the pressure gauge connection.
Apply a layer of paste BU on the connection. Install the pressure gauge on the central control
board and fix it with 4 screws.
(b) Lay a cloth under the threaded connection of the hose supplying hydraulic fluid to the
pressure gauge.
(c) By shifting the parking brake lever to the position STOP (upwards) put the parking brake
circuit into operation. Generate pressure by a hand-operated pump of the parking brake,
unscrew the blind of the hose threaded connection. Draining hydraulic fluid with air bubbles
should be caught in the cloth. Check the hydraulic fluid state in the emergency tank.
When hydraulic fluid without bubbles starts to flow, connect, tighten and lock the hose to
the pressure gauge.
(d) Generate pressure with the hand-operated pump of the parking brake. Check the pressure
gauge indication and check the compliance with paragraph (1) and (2).
(e) Return the central control panel and screw on manually 2 special screws.
EFFECTIVITY
032.40.11
ALL Page: 402
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33
LIGHTS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 33.10.01 1 Nov 1/11

2 Dec 10/20 033.10.02 1 Feb 23/18
4 Nov 1/11 033.10.03 1 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 033.10.04 1 Feb 23/18
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Feb 23/18 4 Nov 1/11
2 May 30/14 5 Feb 23/18
3 May 30/14 6 Nov 1/11
4 Feb 23/18 7 May 30/14
5 Dec 10/20 8 May 30/14
6 Nov 1/11 9 May 30/14
033.00.00 1 Feb 23/18 10 May 30/14
Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11 402 May 30/14
202 Nov 1/11 033.10.05 1 Nov 1/11
033.10.00 1 Feb 23/18 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18 033.10.06 1 Nov 1/11
4 Apr 5/13 Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
033.10.07 1 Nov 1/11 033.20.05 1 Nov 1/11

033.10.09 1 Nov 1/11 033.20.06 1 Nov 1/11
033.10.10 1 Apr 5/13 033.20.07 1 Nov 1/11
033.10.11 1 Nov 1/11 033.30.00 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 033.40.00 1 Dec 10/20
033.10.13 1 Nov 1/11 3 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13 302 May 30/14
033.10.15 1 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 Apr 5/13
033.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 033.40.01 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
033.20.01 1 Nov 1/11 033.40.02 1 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 102 Nov 1/11
033.20.02 1 Nov 1/11 033.40.03 1 Dec 10/20
033.20.04 1 Nov 1/11 033.40.04 1 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
033.40.05 1 Nov 1/11 033.50.02 3 Dec 10/20

Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 4 Dec 10/20
3 Nov 1/11 5 Dec 10/20
4 Dec 10/20 6 Dec 10/20
Servicing 301 May 30/14 033.50.03 1 Apr 5/13
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
402 Nov 1/11 302 Apr 5/13
403 Nov 1/11 303 Apr 5/13
404 Nov 1/11 304 Feb 23/18
033.40.06 1 Apr 5/13 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
033.40.07 1 Dec 10/20 Storage 901 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Dec 10/20 902 Nov 1/11
302 Dec 10/20
303 Dec 10/20
304 Dec 10/20
402 Dec 10/20
403 Dec 10/20
404 Dec 10/20
Cleaning / Painting 701 Dec 10/20
702 Dec 10/20
033.50.00 1 Dec 10/20
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
302 Dec 10/20
033.50.01 1 Dec 10/20
033.50.02 1 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 4
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33
LIGHTS
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
8 033-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
033-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
033.10.00 1 to 4 - -
033.10.10 1 - -
033.10.14 - 1 -
L410UVP-E/170d Apr 5/13
- 2 -
033.40.00 2 - -
401 - -
033.40.06 1 to 2 - -
033.50.03 1 - -
2 - -
302 to 304 - -
9 033-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
033-Record of 1 to 2 - -
Revisions
033.10.00 1 to 3 - -
301 to 302 - -
033.10.04 1 L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
7 to 8 9 to 10 -
402 - -
033.10.15 - 1 to 2 -
033.20.00 301 - -
033.30.00 301 - -
033.40.00 301 to 302 - -

ALL Page: 1
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
9 033.40.03 1 - -
301 - -
033.40.05 301 - - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
033.50.00 301 - -
033.50.03 301 - -
10 033-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
033-Record of 2 - -
Revisions
033-Contents 1, 4 to 5 - -
033.00.00 1 to 2 - -
033.10.00 1 to 2 - -
033.10.02 1 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
033.10.04 1, 5 - -
033.40.00 1 to 2 - -
033.40.03 1, 301 - -
033.50.00 1, 301 - -
033.50.02 1 to 2 3 to 4 -
033.50.03 301, 304 - -
11 033-List of 1 to 3 - -
Effective Pages
033-Record of 2 - -
Revisions
033-Contents 5 - -
033.00.00 2 - -
033.40.00 1 to 4 - -
033.40.03 1, 2, 301, 302 - -
033.40.04 1 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
033.40.05 4 - -
033.40.07 - 1, 2, 301 to 304, -
- 401 to 404, -
- 701, 702 -
033.50.00 1, 301, 302 - -
033.50.01 1, 2 - -
033.50.02 1 to 4 5, 6 -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
REDBARON XP GALACTICA P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001 ANTI- 033.40.07 1 ALL
COLLISION BEACON (IF INSTALLED)
Purpose 1
Technical data
Servicing 301
Check of the anti-collision beacons operation 301
Inspection of the anti-collision beacons 301
Removal of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti- 401
collision beacons
Installation of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti- 402
collision beacons
Care and cleaning of the Aveo Engineering 701
Aviation Lights
EMERGENCY LIGHTING 033.50.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Check of the function of the emergency lighting 301
(inner and outer)
B091420N OR B591581N or F0080939 EXTERNAL 033.50.01 1 ALL
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
General 1
B405628N EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL 033.50.02 1 ALL
General 1
ACCUMULATOR BATTERY 033.50.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Description 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the fixing of storage batteries. 301
Measurement of the voltage.
Recharging and check of the accumulator batteries 302
Removal and installation of the accumulator 401
batteries
Storage 901
Storage of the accumulator batteries 901
ALL Page: 5
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALL Page: 6
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. General
The lighting system consists of the internal and external lighting of the aircraft, the central warning
display and the emergency lighting.
The internal lighting consists of the flight compartment lighting, the passenger compartment lighting and
the front baggage compartment lighting.
The external lighting consists of a search light position lights, anti-collision beacons, searchlights for
lighting of the fin /if installed/ and the static ice detector lighting.
2. List of lighting fixtures and types of lamps used
Power
No. Name Type or drawing No. Lamp (Type) Qty
(W)
1. Lighting fixture B082840N SM-16 or SM 26-15 15 1

2. Lighting fixture B082614L / B082614P or LETD 26V 10W BA15D 10 1+1
B580590L / B580590P
3. Navigator’s table lamp LNS (8) LETD 24V 3W BA15D 3 1
(B827014N)
4. Compass lighting LUN 2880.3-8 SM 38-0.05-1 (5V) 1.4 1
5. Portable lamp PL (8) or SM 14 15 1
StealthLite 2410 LED LED
6. Outside air thermometer B580575N SM 37 or SM 28-0,05 1.4 1
lighting
7. Lighting fixture B082401N SM-16 or SM 26-15 15 1
8. Rear panel lamp LZP (8) LETD 24V 3W BA15D 3 1
(B580593N)
9. Instrument panel lighting - A-715-1 0.5 30
10. Emergency instrument - 63 0030 3 5
panel lighting
11. Light assembly B091225L / B091225P LETD 26V 15W BA15D; 15 18
Bulb 30V 5W BA15D 5 9
12. Lighting fixture B590670N SM 30 or SM 28-4,8 5 1
13. Lighting fixture B091345N or SM 37 or SM 28-0,05 1.4 4
B591321N LETD 28V 2W BA7S R6 2 3
14. Lighting fixture (if installed) B590300N LETD 28V 2W BA7S R6 2 1
15. Lighting fixture 08-9340.86 63 014 5 2
EFFECTIVITY
033.00.00
ALL Page: 1
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Power
No. Name Type or drawing No. Lamp (Type) Qty
(W)
16. Position light BANO 57 SM 3-28-70 70 2

CHS 57 SM 28-20-1 20 1
or Whelen
P/N 01-0770963-05 (green) 1
P/N 01-0770963-06 (red) 1
LED -
P/N 01-0771011-03 or 1
P/N 01-0771554-01
(white)
17. Taxi & Landing Lights - LFL 28-200+130-1 or 200+30 3
LFL 28-200+130-2 or
LFSM 28-100+130 or
4162676 or 4263227
TELEFLEX SYNERAVIA
18. Anti-collision beacon MSL-3 or SM 28-60 60 2
Whelen
Models: HRCFA (XXX) Flash tube - 2
and SACF or
RedBaron XP Galactica
LED - 2
P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001
19. Static ice detector lighting - 30V 5W BA15D 16x35 5 1
20. External emergency lighting B091420N SM-30 or SM 28-4,8 5 2
(if installed) LETD 28V/0.17A *) 5 2
or 24V/ BA 9S **) 5 2
21. External emergency lighting B591581N SM-30 or SM 28-4,8 5 3
(if installed) LETD 28V/0.17A *) 5 3
or 24V/ BA 9S **) 5 3
22. Emergency lighting panel B405628N 24V/3W/BA7S 3 8
(EXIT)
23. Lamp for chart holder OL (8) KONT 225 3432 E10 3 2
lighting (if installed) B829016N or L 410.8292-04
24. Lighting fixture (if installed) B590741N LETD 28V 2W BA7S R6 2 2
25. Searchlight for lighting of B571527N SM-21 or SM 26-70 70 1+1
the fin (if installed)
Whelen A730-5 28V Wedge base, Whelen 50 1+1
P/N 34-0228070-67
26. Lighting fixture (if installed) B091579N SM-30 or SM 28-4,8 2 2
27. Lighting fixture (if installed) B091581N SM-30 or SM 28-4,8 2 1
*) Valid until bulletin L 410 UVP-E/248b implementation

**) Valid after bulletin L 410 UVP-E/248b implementation
NOTE: On request of customers can be the aircraft equipped with LED lighting of flight compartment
and / or passengers’ cabin. The description, operation and servicing of the LED lighting of
flight compartment and / or passengers’ cabin is mentioned in AMM Supplement No. 288.
EFFECTIVITY
033.00.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR
1. General
The external lighting of the aircraft consists of anti-collision beacons, position lights, searchlights,
searchlights for lighting of the fin (if installed), and a lamp illuminating the static ice detector.
1. SEARCHLIGHTS I AZRGK-10 1 Between frames No. 8 and No. 9,

Circuit breaker LH side
2. SEARCHLIGHTS I LIGHTS I PPNG-15 K 1 Overhead panel
TAXIING TAXI
LANDING or LANDING
Change-over switch
3. SEARCHLIGHTS II AZRGK-10 1 Between frames No. 7 and No. 8,
Circuit breaker RH side
4. SEARCHLIGHTS II LIGHTS II PPNG-15 K 1 Overhead panel
TAXIING TAXI
LANDING or LANDING
Change-over switch
5. Taxi & Landing Lights LFL 28-200+130-1 or 3 No. 1 frame
LFL 28-200+130-2 or
LFSM 28-100+130 or
4162676 or 4263227
TELEFLEX SYNERAVIA
6. ANTICOLL. BEACON Circuit AZRGK-10 1 Overhead panel
breaker
7. Anticollision beacon MSL-3 1 Top of rudder
1 Fuselage underside, at frame No. 17
or Whelen Models:
HRCFA (XXX) 1 Top of rudder
SACF 1 Fuselage underside, at frame No. 17
or RedBaron XP Galactica 1 Top of rudder;
P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001 1 Bottom of fuselage, at frame No. 17
8. POSITION LIGHTS AZRGK-10 1 Overhead panel
Circuit breaker
9. Position lights BANO 57 (green) 1 Right wingtip tank
BANO 57 (red) 1 Left wingtip tank
CHS 57 (white) 1 Fuselage tail cone
or Whelen
P/N 01-0770963-05 (green) 1 Right wingtip tank
P/N 01-0770963-06 (red) 1 Left wingtip tank
P/N 01-0771011-03 or 1 Fuselage tail cone
P/N 01-0771554-01 (white)
10. ICE DETECTOR LIGHTING KNR 1 Between frames No. 6 and 7,
Push button LH side
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11. Static ice detector lighting B884015N 1 Frame No. 6, LH side

12. Contactor TKD 133 DOD 2 Between frames No. 1 and 2
13. Fuse 1 CSN 354733F/1500 1 Between frames No. 8 and 9, RH side
14. SEARCHLIGHTS signalling cell - 1 AIRFRAME section of CWD
15. LOGO LIGHTS circuit breaker AZRGK 10 1 Overhead panel
(if installed)
16. Searchlight for lighting of the fin FR 100 or 1+1 Stabilizer
(if installed) B571527N or
Whelen A730-5
(01-0770144-01)
3. Operation
The external lighting is operative only if the BATTERY I, II switches on the overhead panel are turned on.
A. Version of the taxi & landing lights system with the SEARCHLIGHTS cell in the AIRFRAME section of
CWD:
When the SEARCHLIGHTS I change-over switch on the overhead panel is turned on, the central
light of the taxi & landing lights comes on. When the SEARCHLIGHTS II change-over switch is
turned on, the two side light of the taxi & landing lights comes on. The taxi & landing lights power
can be changed by setting the SEARCHLIGHTS I, SEARCHLIGHTS II switches on the overhead
panel into the TAXIING or LANDING the position. The switching of taxi & landing lights is signaled by
the illumination of the SEARCHLIGHTS cell in the AIRFRAME section of CWD. (except for the
SEARCHLIGHTS I - TAXIING mode) or:
B. Version of the taxi & landing lights system with the TAXI LIGHTS and LANDING LIGHTS signal cells in
the AIRFRAME section of CWD:
When the LIGHTS I change-over switch on the overhead panel is turned on, the central light of the
taxi & landing lights comes on. When the LIGHTS II change-over switch is turned on, the two side
light of the taxi & landing lights comes on. The taxi & landing lights power can be changed by
setting the LIGHTS I, LIGHTS II switches on the overhead panel into the TAXI or LANDING the
position. The switching of taxi & landing lights is signaled by the illumination of the TAXI LIGHTS or
LANDING LIGHTS signal cells in the AIRFRAME section of CWD.
The anti-collision beacons are switched on and off with the ANTICOLL. BEACON circuit breaker on the
overhead panel.
The position lights are switched on and off with the POSITION LIGHTS circuit breaker on the overhead panel.
The static ice detectors lighting is switched on and off with the POSITION LIGHTS circuit breaker and by
depressing the ICE DETECTOR LIGHTING push button between frames No. 6 and No. 7 on the left-
hand side window frame.
The searchlights for lighting of the fin are switched on and off with the LOGO LIGHTS circuit breaker on
the overhead panel (if installed).
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.00
ALL Page: 2
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 EXTERNAL LIGHTING – SCHEMATIC

(Version of the taxi & landing lights system with the SEARCHLIGHTS signal cell in the
AIRFRAME section of CWD.)
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.00
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 2 EXTERNAL LIGHTING – SCHEMATIC

(Version of the taxi & landing lights system with the TAXI LIGHTS and LANDING LIGHTS signal
cells in the AIRFRAME section of CWD.)
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.00
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAXI & LANDING LIGHTS

1. General
The taxi & landing lights - see fig. 1 - installed on No. 1 bulkhead. The taxi & landing lights illuminate the
ground during take-off, landing and taxiing. The taxi & landing lights consists of three lamps held in
sockets by flanges.
FIG. 1 TAXI & LANDING LIGHTS

(1) Bracket; (2) Flange; (3) Screw; (4) Washer; (5) Screw; (6) Lamp; (7) Rubber sealing
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.03
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.03
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAXI & LANDING LIGHTS

SERVICING
1. Check of the function of the taxi & landing lights


Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Work procedure for version of the taxi & landing lights system with the SEARCHLIGHTS cell in
the AIRFRAME section of CWD:
(a) Check of the lamps of the taxi & landing lights in the taxiing and landing operation mode.
(b) The center lamp (from a set of three) must burn with the SEARCHLIGHT I change-over
switch set to the TAXIING (lesser output, 130 W) as well as to the LANDING (greater
output, 200 W) position. The switching of taxi & landing lights is signaled by the illumination of
the SEARCHLIGHTS cell in the AIRFRAME section of CWD. (except for the
SEARCHLIGHTS I - TAXIING mode).
(c) The two outer lamps (from a set of three) must burn with the SEARCHLIGHTS II change-
over switch set to the TAXIING (lesser output, 2x130 W) or to the LANDING (greater output,
2x200 W) position. The switching of taxi & landing lights is signaled by the illumination of the
SEARCHLIGHTS cell in the AIRFRAME section of CWD. (except for the SEARCHLIGHTS I -
TAXIING mode)
(d) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches on the overhead panel.
(e) Switch the SEARCHLIGHTS I change-over switch on the overhead panel into the TAXIING
and LANDING position and check that the taxi & landing lights operates as specified in
step (1-b). Set the change-over switch to its middle (OFF) position.
(f) If defect is detected, replace malfunction light or light element.
(g) Switch the SEARCHLIGHTS II change-over switch on the overhead panel into the
TAXIING and LANDING positions and check the function of the taxi & landing lights as
specified in step (1-c). Set the change-over switch to its middle (OFF) position.
(h) If defect is detected, replace malfunction light or light element.
(i) Switch off the BATTERY I, II switches on the overhead panel.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.03
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Work procedure for version of the taxi & landing lights system with the TAXI LIGHTS and
LANDING LIGHTS signal cells in the AIRFRAME section of CWD:
(a) Check of the lamps of the taxi & landing lights in the taxiing and landing operation mode.
(b) The center lamp (from a set of three) must burn with the LIGHT I change-over switch set to
the TAXI (lesser output, 130 W) as well as to the LANDING (greater output, 200 W)
position. The switching of taxi & landing lights is signaled by the illumination of the TAXI
LIGHTS or LANDING LIGHTS signal cells in the AIRFRAME section of CWD.
(c) The two outer lamps (from a set of three) must burn with the LIGHTS II change-over switch
set to the TAXI (lesser output, 2x130 W) or to the LANDING (greater output, 2x200 W)
position. The switching of taxi & landing lights is signaled by the illumination of the TAXI
LIGHTS or LANDING LIGHTS signal cells in the AIRFRAME section of CWD.
(d) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches on the overhead panel.
(e) Switch the LIGHTS I change-over switch on the overhead panel into the TAXI and LANDING
position and check that the taxi & landing lights operates as specified in step (2-b).
Set the change-over switch to its middle (OFF) position.
(f) If defect is detected, replace malfunction light or light element.
(g) Switch the LIGHTS II change-over switch on the overhead panel into the TAXI and LANDING
positions and check the function of the taxi & landing lights as specified in step (2-c).
Set the change-over switch to its middle (OFF) position.
(h) If defect is detected, replace malfunction light or light element.
(i) Switch off the BATTERY I, II switches on the overhead panel.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.03
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC ICE DETECTOR LIGHTING

1. General
The B884015N (or L 410.8840) lighting fixture illuminates the static ice detector.
The fixture is installed between frames No. 6 and No. 7 on the left-hand side of the fuselage.
The lighting fixture is equipped with the LED bulb with integrated lens and glazed.
FIG: 1 B884015N STATIC ICE DETECTOR LIGHTING FIXTURE

(1) Lighting fixture housing; (2) LED bulb with integrated lens – type refer to the section
033.00.00; (3) CHS 39-U-7 Socket, (4) Screw; (5) Terminals; (6) Glazing; (7) Screw; (8) Static
Ice Detector
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.04
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.04
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. The Whelen Aviation Strobe Light is a condenser discharge strobe light system. A condenser is
charged to approximately 450 volts DC, then discharged across a xenon flash tube at controlled
intervals. Pulse to discharge of condenser generated by a solid state timing circuit in the power
supply.
The aircraft is equipped with two Strobe lights:
• a top one – installed on the rudder see. Fig. 3, HRCFA or SACF models
• a bottom one – installed near the frame 17 on the fuselage underside, see. Fig 4, SACF model
Whelen Strobe light can emit Aviation Red or White light or split Aviation Red and White in
dependence on used cover.
FIG. 3 WHELEN MODEL HRCFA(XXX) ANTICOLLISION BEACON – TOP OF THE RUDDER

(1) Flange, (2) Sealing, (3) Strobe light with power supply (HRCFA), (4) Screw with washer,
(5) Screw with washer
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.05
ALL Page: 3
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 4 WHELEN MODEL SACF ANTICOLLISION BEACON – UNDERSIDE THE FUSELAGE

(1) Flange; (2) Sealing; (3) Strobe light with power supply (SACF); (4) Screw with washer;
(5) Screw with washer; (6) Cover
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.05
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REDBARON XP GALACTICA P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001 ANTI-COLLISION BEACON

(IF INSTALLED)
1. Purpose
The RedBaron XP Galactica™ version of anti-collision beacon serves as anti-collision warning.
They represent the cutting edge in optics design and the use of LED arrays that have been optimized for
coverage patterns. The RedBaron XP Galactica™ version incorporates 40 of the brightest LEDs available
in the world today, with chromaticity and intensity compliant to all international aviation and safety
standards.
The aircraft is equipped with two anti-collision beacons: a top one installed on the rudder, and a bottom
one - installed near the frame No. 17 on bottom of the fuselage:
NOTE: Replacement of MSL-3 or Whelen Models HRCFA (XXX) or SACF anti-collision beacons for
the RedBaron XP Galactica P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001 Anti-collision beacons is described in
Information Bulletin No. L410UVP-E/556b.
2. Technical data
Dimensions: 64 mm x 64 mm x 39.8 mm
2.52” x 2.52” x 1.565”
Weight: 160 g / 5.29 oz
Operating Voltage Range: 9 – 36 V DC
Power – strobe: 8.8 W (44 W peak)
Current – strobe (at 12 V): 0.75 A (3.7 A peak)
Repetition Flash Rate of Strobe: 50 cycles per minute
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 REDBARON XP GALACTICA ANTI-COLLISION BEACON,

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS IN [inches] mm
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(IF INSTALLED)
SERVICING
1. Check of the anti-collision beacons operation


Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Check of the function of anti-collision beacons installed on top of rudder and bottom of the
fuselage at the frame No. 17.
(2) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches on the overhead panel.
(3) Switch on the ANTICOLL. BEACON circuit breaker on the overhead panel and check that both
beacons are serviceable.
(4) Check both beacons if they make flashes. If failure of beacon is detected, replace appropriate
beacon for new one.
(5) Switch off the ANTICOLL. BEACON circuit breaker and the BATTERY I, II switches on the
overhead panel.
2. Inspection of the anti-collision beacons

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Polarized sunglasses or welder goggles

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Visually check the anti-collision beacons on the top of the rudder and bottom of the fuselage at
the frame No. 17.
(2) Surface of the lights (beacons) must be clean and not damaged.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Any debris or atmospheric deposits accumulated on the surface of the lights should be
removed using a UV Wax such as Farecia Profile UV Wax to ensure ongoing optical clarity.
(4) Turn the lights (beacons) on (as described in WP 033.40.07.A), and do the following:
(a) Put on polarized sunglasses or welder goggles to prevent eye damage when looking into
the lights.
(b) Examine the individual LEDs as per the diagram – refer to the figs. 301 and 302.
If any of the conditions as indicated on the diagram are exceeded, the light shall be
removed and sent to Aveo Engineering for replacement under the Aveo Warranty
Program.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 301 REDBARON XP GALACTICA, TOP LEDS
FIG. 302 REDBARON XP GALACTICA, BOTTOM LEDS
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(IF INSTALLED)
1. Removal of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti-collision beacons

B. Materials White spirit or petrol
C. Tools Required tools from the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Removal of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti-collision beacon from top of rudder
(a) Remove the beacon (2) – see Fig. 401 – together with top flange (3) by screwing out the
screws (13) and remove the washers (8).
(b) Take out the beacon and disconnect connector and cable eye (22).
(c) Wash connecting material in white spirit or petrol and prepare them for repeated use.
Damaged connecting material replace for new ones.
(2) Removal of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti-collision beacon from bottom of the fuselage
(a) Remove the cover (11) – see Fig. 402 – by screwing out 11 screws.
(b) Remove the beacon (2) – together with bottom flange (5) by screwing out the screws (13)
and remove the washers (8).
(c) Take out the beacon and disconnect connector and cable eye (22).
(d) Wash connecting material in white spirit or petrol and prepare them for repeated use.
Damaged connecting material replace for new ones.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Installation of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti-collision beacons

B. Materials LUKOPREN S9780 (or equivalent)

Locking wire 0.5 mm dia.;
Quality automotive polish
C. Tools Required tools from the tool kit.
E. Procedures
(1) Installation of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti-collision beacon on top of rudder
(a) Assemble the beacon (2) with the top flange (3) – see Fig. 401.
When cable eye (22) is not installed, solder the cable eye (22) on Airframe connection
wiring. Connect the conductor eye (22) on the M5x50 bolt between washer (9) and
flange (3) and tight the nut (20).
(b) Connect the connector to the beacon according to the scheme in the Airplane Wiring
Manual and secure it with locking wire.
(c) Install the beacon with flange and sealing (4) on mounting place and secure it by screwing
the screws (13) and washers (8). Seal the bolt M5x50 with LUKOPREN S9780.
(2) Installation of the Redbaron XP Galactica Anti-collision beacon bottom of the fuselage
(a) Assemble the beacon (2) with the bottom flange (5) – see Fig. 402.
When cable eye (22) is not installed, solder the cable eye (22) on Airframe connection
wiring. Connect the conductor eye (22) on the M5x50 bolt between washer (9) and flange
(5) and tight the nut (20).
(b) Connect the connector to the beacon according to the scheme in the Airplane Wiring
Manual and secure it with locking wire.
(c) Install the beacon with flange and sealing (6) on mounting place and secure it by screwing
the screws (13) and washers (8). Seal the bolt M5x50 with LUKOPREN S9780.
(d) Fit in place cover (11) and secure by 11 screws.
(3) When you receive your Aveo Engineering Group Aviation Lights, they will have been factory
polished and ready to install on the aircraft. Upon installation, just give the lights a good coat or
two of a quality automotive polish.
This should protect the lights from dirt and other environmental factors.
(4) Perform the check of the anti-collision beacons operation, according to the WP 033.40.07.A.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 401 REDBARON XP GALACTICA, ON TOP OF RUDDER

(2) RedBaron XP Galactica P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001 Anti-collision beacon;
(3) B571826N Top flange; (4) B574720N Sealing; (8) Washer 4.3 DIN 125-1 type A;
(9) Washer 5.3-A4 FABORY 55420 ISO 7089; (13) Bolt M4x18 CD ONL 3147;
(20) Selflocking nut M5-A2 FABORY 51730; (22) Cable eye 130005-0 M5
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 402 REDBARON XP GALACTICA, BOTTOM OF THE FUSELAGE

(2) RedBaron XP Galactica P/N: AVE-RBXPW-001 Anti-collision beacon;
(5) B571827N Bottom flange; (6) B712147N Rubber sealing; (8) Washer 4.3 DIN 125-1 type A;
(9) Washer 5.3-A4 FABORY 55420 ISO 7089; (11) B515096N Cover; (13) Bolt M4x18 CD
ONL 3147; (20) Selflocking nut M5-A2 FABORY 51730; (22) Cable eye 130005-0 M5
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(IF INSTALLED)
CLEANING / PAINTING
1. Care and cleaning of the Aveo Engineering Aviation Lights

B. Materials Quality automotive polish
C. Tools Necessary tolls from tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) Upon installation, just give the lights a good coat or two of a quality automotive polish. This
should protect the lights from dirt and other environmental factors. Once or twice a month,
just refresh the polish and hand buff to bring back the lights to factory like new condition.
(2) If the lights need a deeper cleaning, they can be polished with a good automotive cleaner wax
and/or a liquid polishing compound. The liquid polishing compounds can normally be found at
automotive parts stores or an automotive paint store. After using a polishing compound, just
give the lights another coat of an automotive polish and you will again protect the lights against
dirt, etc. An electric buffing machine, with a lamb’s wool cover, can also be used for deeper
cleaning and polishing. Under no circumstances should any petroleum based product be used
to clean the lights.
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 701
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
033.40.07
ALL Page: 702
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
1. General
The aircraft emergency lighting serves for the illumination of the EXIT transparencies at the main door
and at the emergency doors as well as for lighting the space just ahead of the aircraft exits.
The emergency lighting is independent of the main power supplies.
1. CENTRAL WARNING AZRGK-5 1 Overhead panel

DISPLAY—AIRFRAME
Circuit breaker
2. Emergency lighting panel B405628N 1 Frame No. 8, upper RH side
(EXIT)
1 Frame No. 17, upper LH side
1 Between frames No. 13 and 14, upper LH
side (if installed)
1 Between frames No. 13 and 14, upper RH
side (if installed)
3. External emergency lighting B091420N or 1 Frame No. 8, lower RH side
B591581N or
F0080939 1 Frame No. 18, lower LH side
1 Frame No. 14 lower LH side (if installed)
1 Frames No. 14 lower RH side (if installed)
1 Frame No. 17 lower RH side (if installed)
4. EMERGENCY LIGHTING 2 PNG-15K-2S 1 Left-hand control panel
Change-over switch
5. Accumulator battery 21 NiCd 450-1 **) 1*) Between frames No. 9 and 10 RH side
or B091619N **) 1*) Frame No. 17, upper LH side
or B091985N **)
or B573805N ***) 1 Frame No. 15, upper LH side (if installed)
1 Between frames No. 7 and 8, upper LH side
(if installed)
6. Fuse 1 CSN 2 Fuse panel
354733F/1500
*) Accumulator batteries in described positions are part of each airplane configuration

**) Valid until bulletin L 410 UVP-E/248b implementation
***) Valid after bulletin L 410 UVP-E/248b implementation
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Operation
The emergency lighting is normally supplied from the main power bus. In the power supply from the
main power bus breaks down, the emergency lighting bulbs are supplied, for a period of 10 minutes,
from two accumulator batteries intended as a standby power source.
When supplied from the main bus, the emergency lighting is actuated by switching on the BATTERY I, II
switches and the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME circuit breaker on the overhead panel
and by throwing the toggle of the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch on the left-hand control panel into its
upper position.
If the main power supply fails, the emergency lighting is automatically switched to its own power supply.
When the BATTERY I, II switches and the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME circuit breaker
are switched on and the toggle of the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch on the left-hand control panel is
in its lower position, the emergency lighting batteries are being charged.
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.00
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SERVICING
1. Check of the function of the emergency lighting (inner and outer)

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Ground power unit

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Connect a ground power unit to the aircraft. (Work procedure can be doing also without the
Ground power unit).
(2) Check of external and internal emergency lighting function.
(3) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches and the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME
circuit breaker on the overhead panel and set the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch on the
left-hand control panel to its upper position.
(4) Check that the transparencies above the main door and the emergency exit door in the passenger
compartment are lit and that the emergency lighting fixtures on the fuselage exterior skin near
the main door and the emergency exit door are lighting as well.
(5) Replace malfunction bulbs.
(6) Switch off the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME circuit breaker.

The emergency lighting must be serviceable.
NOTE: The check must not last longer than 1 minute.
(7) If are battery of emergency lighting detect as discharged, charge the battery refer to the section
033.50.03.
(8) Switch off the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch on the left-hand control panel.
(9) Switch off all switches and circuit breakers on the overhead panel.
(10) Disconnect the ground power unit.
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.00
up to S/N 3201 inclusive and airplanes without Page: 301
executed Service Bulletin L-410/002b Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Check of the function of the emergency lighting (inner and outer)

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Ground power unit

Routine, Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Connect a ground power unit to the aircraft. (Work procedure can be doing also without the
Ground power unit).
(2) Check of external and internal emergency lighting function.
(3) Switch on the BATTERY I, II switches and the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-AIRFRAME
circuit breaker on the overhead panel and set the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch (el. symbol
C91 – refer to the Airplane Wiring Manual) on the LH control panel to ON position.
(4) Check that the all 4 emergency lighting panel EXIT comes on and that the emergency lighting
fixtures on the fuselage exterior skin near the main door and the emergency exit door are
lighting as well.
(5) Replace malfunction bulbs.
(6) Set the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch (el. symbol C91 – refer to the Airplane Wiring Manual)
on the LH control panel to OFF position.
(7) Check that the all 4 emergency lighting panel EXIT are switch off. If a some emergency lighting
panel EXIT remains lit, this means that there is a blown fuse in this table (in this case the power
supply is no longer from the airplane's power bus, but from the accumulator battery of
emergency lighting). It is therefore necessary to remove the front cover of panel and replace
the fuse in the fuse box with a new one. At the same time, it is necessary to check the condition
of the accumulator battery of emergency lighting, the burning of the fuse will most likely result
in damage of the battery (short-circuited by some cells).
(8) Set the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch (el. symbol C91 – refer to the Airplane Wiring Manual)
on the LH control panel to ON position. Switch off the CENTRAL WARNING DISPLAY-
AIRFRAME circuit breaker. The emergency lighting must be serviceable.
NOTE: The check must not last longer than 1 minute.
(9) If are battery of emergency lighting detect as discharged, charge the battery refer to the section
033.50.03.
(10) Switch off the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch on the LH control panel.
(11) Switch off all switches and circuit breakers on the overhead panel.
(12) Disconnect the ground power unit.
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.00
from S/N 3202 and airplanes with executed Page: 302
Service Bulletin L-410/002b Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B091420N OR B591581N OR F0080939 EXTERNAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING

1. General
The external emergency lightings consists of lighting fixtures illuminating the emergency exit area in
case of an emergency situation. The lighting fixtures are installed in the fuselage lower by the side
emergency exit area.
FIG. 1 INSTALLATION OF THE EXTERNAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING B091420N OR B591581N

(IF INSTALLED)
(1) Bracket; (2) Bulb, type SM 30 or LETD 28V/5W/0.17A (Valid until bulletin
L 410 UVP-E/248b implementation) or Lamp type 24V/5W/BA9S (Valid after bulletin
L 410 UVP-E/248b implementation), (3) Glazing; (4) Reflector; (5) Gasket; (6) Socket
Ba-9S-NV 10-9-09
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.01
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 2 F0080939 EXTERNAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING (IF INSTALLED), OUTLINE AND MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.01
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B405628N EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL

1. General
The B405628N emergency lighting panel illuminates the EXIT transparency and consists of B405629N
panel and variants of cover – refer to the below.
The cover lettering is made on a white acrylic plate, which is illuminated by two light bulbs.
Types of covers:
The lettering of B405709N (2 pcs) emergency lighting panel:
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
From airplane S/N 3202 is the each B405629N panel equipped with the cylindrical fuse 5x20mm;
T200mA; P/N 522.710; EN60127-2-5 (Ord. No. 92312747) – refer to the fig. 3 and 4.
Fuses have the el. symbols C92, C93, C110 and C111 – refer to the Airplane Wiring Manual.
Installation of the fuse into the B405628N Emergency Lighting Panel is described in the Service Bulletin
No. L-410/002b.
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.02
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 INSTALLATION OF THE B405628N EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL

(1) Base; (2) Transparency; (3) Lighting fixture printed circuit board; (4) Spring; (5) Printed
circuit board (PCB); (6) Cap; (7) Filling; (8) Conductor; (9) Light bulb; (10) Terminal board;
(11) Eyelet; (12) Soldering helix; (13) Screw; (14) Screw; (15) Screw; (16) Washer;
(17) Bracket
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 2 WIRING SCHEME OF PCB OF THE B405628N EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL

C1 – Condenser; D1, D2, D3, D4 – Diodes, L1, L2 – Light bulb; R1, R2, R3 – Resistors;
RE1 – Relay
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3 INSTALLATION OF THE B405628N EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL

(1) Base; (2) Transparency; (3) Lighting fixture printed circuit board; (4) Spring; (5) Printed
circuit board (PCB); (6) Cap; (7) Filling; (8) Conductor; (9) Light bulb; (10) Terminal board;
(11) Eyelet; (12) Soldering helix; (13) Screw; (14) Screw; (15) Screw; (16) Washer;
(17) Bracket; (18) Fuse holder HTB-24M-R; (19) Cap of fuse holder FTM; (20) Fuse 5x20mm,
T200mA
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 4 WIRING SCHEME OF PCB OF THE B405628N EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL

C1 – Condenser; D1, D2, D3, D4 – Diodes, L1, L2 – Light bulb;
R1, R2, R3 – Resistors; RE1 – Relay; Po – Fuse 5x20mm, T200mA
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
033.50.02
ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34
NAVIGATION AND PITOT / STATIC

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - Contents 3 Apr 15/15

List of Effective Pages 1 Oct 10/20 4 Mar 10/17
2 Oct 10/20 5 Mar 10/17
3 Oct 10/20 6 Mar 10/17
4 Oct 10/20 7 Mar 10/17
5 Oct 10/20 8 Mar 10/17
6 Oct 10/20 9 Mar 10/17
7 Oct 10/20 10 Mar 10/17
8 Oct 10/20 11 Mar 10/17
9 Oct 10/20 12 Oct 10/20
10 Oct 10/20 13 Mar 10/17
11 Oct 10/20 14 Mar 10/17

15 Mar 10/17
12 Oct 10/20
16 Mar 10/17
13 Oct 10/20
17 Mar 10/17
14 Oct 10/20
18 Mar 10/17
15 Oct 10/20
19 Mar 10/17
16 Oct 10/20
20 Mar 10/17
Record of Revisions 1 Apr 5/13
21 Mar 10/17
2 May 30/14
22 Feb 23/18
3 Dec 10/14
23 Feb 23/18
4 Nov 20/15
24 Mar 10/17
5 Mar 10/17
034.00.00 1 Nov 1/11
6 Oct 10/20
7 Oct 10/20
3 Feb 23/18
8 Oct 10/20
4 Feb 23/18
Maintenance Practices 201 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11
202 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Apr 15/15
2 Apr 15/15

ALL Page: 1
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.10.00 1 Feb 23/18 034.11.02 1 Nov 1/11

Description and Operation 2 Mar 10/17 402 Apr 15/15
3 Nov 1/11 034.11.03 1 Nov 1/11
5 Mar 10/17 Servicing 301 Apr 15/15
6 Mar 10/17 302 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 101 May 30/14 034.11.04 1 Nov 15/13
Servicing 301 Nov 20/15 Servicing 301 Apr 15/15
302 Nov 20/15 302 Nov 15/13
303 Nov 1/11 034.11.05 1 Nov 1/11
305 Apr 15/15 Removal / Installation 401 Apr 15/15
306 Apr 15/15 402 Apr 15/15
307 Apr 15/15 034.11.06 1 Apr 15/15
308 Apr 15/15 Description and Operation 2 Apr 15/15
309 Apr 15/15 3 May 30/14
310 Feb 23/18 4 Nov 1/11
311 Feb 23/18 Servicing 301 May 30/14
312 Apr 15/15 302 Nov 1/11
313 Apr 15/15 303 Nov 1/11
314 Apr 15/15 304 Nov 1/11
315 Apr 15/15 Removal / Installation 401 May 30/14
316 Apr 15/15 402 Nov 1/11
317 Apr 15/15 034.11.07 1 Nov 1/11
034.11.01 1 Apr 5/13 3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Apr 15/15 303 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.11.07 401 Nov 1/11 034.11.10 303 Nov 1/11

Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11 Servicing 304 Nov 1/11
404 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
034.11.08 1 Nov 1/11 034.11.11 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Oct 10/20 Servicing 301 Apr 15/15
302 May 30/14 302 Apr 15/15
303 Mar 10/17 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
305 Nov 1/11 034.11.12 1 Mar 10/17
306 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 May 31/12
307 May 30/14 034.11.13 1 Nov 15/13
309 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 501 Apr 15/15
310 Nov 1/11 502 Nov 15/13
402 Nov 1/11 504 Nov 15/13
403 Nov 1/11 034.12.00 1 May 30/14

Servicing 301 May 30/14 Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 15/13
302 May 30/14 502 Nov 15/13
303 Nov 1/11 034.12.01 1 Nov 1/11

Removal / Installation 401 Apr 15/15 Servicing 301 Apr 15/15
402 Nov 15/13 302 Nov 1/11
403 Apr 15/15 034.12.02 1 Nov 1/11

034.11.10 1 Apr 15/15 034.13.00 1 Nov 1/11

302 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 3
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.13.00 401 Apr 15/15 034.17.00 3401 Mar 10/17

Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 3402 Mar 10/17
034.13.01 1 Nov 1/11 3403 Mar 10/17
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 3405 Mar 10/17
302 Nov 1/11 3406 Mar 10/17
034.14.00 1 May 30/14 Adjustment / Test 3501 Mar 10/17
Adjustment / Test 501 Mar 10/17 3503 Mar 10/17
502 Mar 10/17 3504 Mar 10/17
503 Mar 10/17 3505 Mar 10/17
504 Mar 10/17 3506 Mar 10/17
034.14.01 1 Nov 1/11 3507 Mar 10/17
034.15.00 1 Feb 23/18 3509 Mar 10/17
3 Nov 1/11 3511 Mar 10/17
4 Nov 1/11 3512 Mar 10/17
5 Nov 1/11 3513 Mar 10/17
6 Nov 1/11 3514 Mar 10/17
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11 3515 Mar 10/17
602 Nov 1/11 3516 Mar 10/17
603 Nov 1/11 3517 Mar 10/17
604 Nov 1/11 3518 Mar 10/17
034.16.00 1 Nov 1/11 3519 Mar 10/17
034.17.00 3001 Mar 10/17 3521 Mar 10/17
Description and Operation 3002 Mar 10/17 3522 Mar 10/17
3003 Mar 10/17 3523 Mar 10/17
3004 Mar 10/17 3524 Mar 10/17
Servicing 3301 Mar 10/17 034.17.01 3001 Mar 10/17
3302 Mar 10/17 Description and Operation 3002 Mar 10/17
3303 Mar 10/17 Servicing 3301 Mar 10/17
3304 Mar 10/17 3302 Mar 10/17

ALL Page: 4
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.20.00 1001 Mar 10/17 034.21.01 1305 Nov 1/11

Description and Operation 1002 Nov 1/11 Servicing 1306 Nov 1/11
3001 Mar 10/17 Adjustment / Test 1501 Nov 1/11
3002 Nov 1/11 1502 Nov 1/11
034.21.00 1001 Nov 1/11 1503 Nov 1/11
2002 Nov 1/11 2002 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 2101 Apr 5/13 Description and Operation 3001 Nov 1/11
2102 Apr 5/13 3002 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 2501 Apr 5/13 034.21.02 1001 Nov 1/11
2503 Nov 1/11 2001 Nov 1/11
2504 Nov 1/11 2002 Nov 1/11
Inspection / Check 2601 Nov 1/11 3001 Nov 1/11
2602 Nov 1/11 3002 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 3001 Apr 5/13 034.21.03 1001 Nov 1/11
Fault Isolation 3101 Apr 5/13 2001 Nov 1/11
3102 Apr 5/13 2002 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 3501 Apr 5/13 3001 Nov 1/11
3502 Nov 1/11 3002 Nov 1/11
3503 Nov 1/11 034.21.04 1001 Nov 1/11
034.21.01 1001 Nov 1/11 1003 Nov 1/11
1302 Nov 1/11 2002 Nov 1/11
1303 Nov 1/11 2003 Nov 1/11
1304 Nov 1/11 2004 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 5
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.22.00 3001 Nov 1/11 034.22.05 1 Nov 1/11

3003 Nov 1/11 034.22.06 1 Nov 1/11
034.22.01 1 May 30/14 Servicing 301 May 30/14
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 302 Dec 10/14
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Storage 901 Apr 5/13
302 May 30/14 902 Apr 5/13
Removal / Installation 401 Apr 15/15 034.23.00 1 Nov 1/11
403 Nov 1/11 034.23.01 1 Nov 1/11
3002 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
034.22.02 1001 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 501 May 30/14
Removal / Installation 1401 Nov 1/11 3003 May 31/12
1402 Nov 1/11 3004 May 31/12
Description and Operation 2001 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 3501 Apr 5/13
2002 Nov 1/11 3502 May 31/12
3001 Nov 1/11 3503 May 31/12
3002 Nov 1/11 3504 Nov 1/11
034.22.03 1 Nov 1/11 034.25.00 3001 Nov 20/15
302 Nov 1/11 3004 May 31/12
303 Nov 1/11 3005 May 31/12
304 Nov 1/11 3006 May 31/12
Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 3101 Dec 10/14
402 Nov 1/11 3102 Dec 10/14
034.22.04 1 Nov 1/11 3103 Dec 10/14

ALL Page: 6
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.25.00 3501 Dec 10/14 034.25.00 3535 Dec 10/14

Adjustment / Test 3502 Dec 10/14 Adjustment / Test 3536 Dec 10/14
3503 Dec 10/14 3537 Dec 10/14
3504 Dec 10/14 3538 Dec 10/14
3505 Dec 10/14 3539 Dec 10/14
3506 Dec 10/14 3540 Dec 10/14
3507 Dec 10/14 3541 Dec 10/14
3508 Dec 10/14 3542 Dec 10/14
3509 Dec 10/14 034.40.00 1 Nov 1/11
3511 Dec 10/14 034.41.00 1 Mar 10/17
3514 Dec 10/14 302 May 30/14
3515 Dec 10/14 303 May 30/14
3516 Dec 10/14 304 May 30/14
3517 Dec 10/14 034.41.10 1 Nov 1/11
3519 Dec 10/14 034.41.20 1 Nov 1/11
3521 Dec 10/14 3 Nov 1/11
3522 Dec 10/14 4 Nov 1/11
3524 Nov 20/15 302 Nov 1/11
3525 Dec 10/14 034.41.30 1 Nov 1/11
3528 Dec 10/14 302 Nov 1/11
3529 Dec 10/14 Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11
3530 Dec 10/14 602 Nov 1/11
3531 Dec 10/14 603 Nov 1/11
3532 Dec 10/14 604 Nov 1/11
3533 Dec 10/14 605 Nov 1/11
3534 Dec 10/14 606 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 7
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.41.40 1 Nov 1/11 034.41.60 3507 Mar 10/17

Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 3508 Mar 10/17
3 Nov 1/11 3509 Mar 10/17
4 Nov 1/11 3510 Mar 10/17
5 Nov 1/11 3511 Mar 10/17
6 Nov 1/11 3512 Mar 10/17
603 Nov 1/11 034.42.20 1 Nov 1/11
605 Nov 1/11 034.42.30 1 Nov 1/11
034.41.50 3001 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
3003 May 31/12 5 Nov 1/11
3004 May 31/12 6 Nov 1/11
3005 May 31/12 7 Nov 1/11
3006 May 31/12 8 Nov 1/11
3302 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
034.41.60 3001 Mar 10/17 303 Nov 1/11
3003 Mar 10/17 034.42.40 1 Nov 1/11
3005 Mar 10/17 Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11
3006 Mar 10/17 602 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 3501 Mar 10/17 603 Nov 1/11
3502 Mar 10/17 604 Nov 1/11
3503 Mar 10/17 605 Nov 1/11
3504 Mar 10/17 606 Nov 1/11
3505 Mar 10/17 607 Nov 1/11
3506 Mar 10/17 608 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 8
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.42.40 609 Nov 1/11 034.42.60 3511 Oct 10/20

Inspection / Check 610 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 3512 Oct 10/20
034.42.50 1 Oct 10/20 3513 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 3515 Oct 10/20
4 Apr 5/13 3516 Oct 10/20
5 May 31/12 3517 Oct 10/20
6 Nov 1/11 3518 Oct 10/20
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 3519 Oct 10/20
302 Nov 1/11 3520 Oct 10/20
034.42.60 3001 Oct 10/20 3521 Oct 10/20
3003 Mar 10/17 3523 Oct 10/20
3004 Oct 10/20 3524 Oct 10/20
3005 Oct 10/20 3525 Oct 10/20
3006 Oct 10/20 3526 Oct 10/20
3007 Oct 10/20 3527 Oct 10/20
3008 Oct 10/20 3528 Oct 10/20
Servicing 3301 Oct 10/20 3529 Oct 10/20
3302 Oct 10/20 3530 Oct 10/20
3303 Oct 10/20 3531 Oct 10/20
3304 Oct 10/20 3532 Oct 10/20
3305 Oct 10/20 3533 Oct 10/20
3306 Oct 10/20 3534 Oct 10/20
Adjustment / Test 3501 Oct 10/20 3535 Oct 10/20
3502 Oct 10/20 3536 Oct 10/20
3503 Oct 10/20 034.42.61 3001 Mar 10/17
3504 Oct 10/20 Description and Operation 3002 Mar 10/17
3505 Oct 10/20 034.43.00 1 Nov 1/11
3506 Oct 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
3507 Oct 10/20 034.43.10 1 Nov 1/11
3508 Oct 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Mar 10/17
3509 Oct 10/20 3 Nov 1/11
3510 Oct 10/20 4 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 9
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.43.10 5 Nov 1/11 034.44.10 1 Mar 10/17

302 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
305 Nov 1/11 7 Nov 20/15
306 Nov 1/11 8 Nov 1/11
307 Nov 1/11 9 Nov 20/15
308 Nov 1/11 10 Nov 1/11
3003 Nov 1/11 034.44.11 1 Nov 20/15
3005 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 20/15
3006 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 20/15
3302 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 20/15
3303 Nov 1/11 034.44.20 3001 Mar 10/17
3305 Nov 1/11 3003 Nov 20/15
3306 Nov 1/11 3004 Nov 1/11
3307 Nov 1/11 3005 Nov 1/11
3308 Nov 1/11 3006 Nov 1/11
034.44.00 1 Mar 10/17 3007 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 15/13 3010 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 034.44.30 3001 Mar 10/17
4 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 3002 Mar 10/17
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 Servicing 3301 Mar 10/17
302 Nov 1/11 3302 Mar 10/17

ALL Page: 10
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.44.30 3501 Mar 10/17 034.50.00 311 Nov 1/11

Adjustment / Test 3502 Mar 10/17 Servicing 312 Nov 1/11
3503 Mar 10/17 313 Nov 1/11
3504 Mar 10/17 314 Nov 1/11
3505 Mar 10/17 315 Nov 1/11
3506 Mar 10/17 316 Nov 1/11
3507 Mar 10/17 317 Nov 1/11
3508 Feb 23/18 318 Nov 1/11
3509 Mar 10/17 319 Nov 1/11
3510 Mar 10/17 320 Nov 1/11
3511 Mar 10/17 321 Nov 1/11
3512 Mar 10/17 322 Nov 20/15
034.45.00 1 Nov 1/11 Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 603 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 604 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11 034.51.00 1 Mar 10/17
034.50.00 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
303 Mar 10/17 034.51.20 1 Nov 1/11
305 Nov 1/11 034.51.21 1 Nov 1/11
307 Nov 1/11 034.51.30 1 Nov 1/11
309 Dec 10/14 3 Nov 1/11
310 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
310A May 31/12 034.51.40 1 Nov 1/11
310B Apr 5/13 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 11
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.51.40 601 Nov 1/11 034.51.70 515 Dec 10/14

Inspection / Check 602 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 516 Dec 10/14
603 Nov 1/11 517 Dec 10/14
604 Nov 1/11 518 Dec 10/14
034.51.50 1 Nov 1/11 519 Dec 10/14
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11 521 Dec 10/14
602 Nov 1/11 522 Dec 10/14
034.51.60 1 Mar 10/17 523 Dec 10/14
Servicing 301 Nov 20/15 525 Dec 10/14
302 Nov 20/15 526 Dec 10/14
303 Nov 20/15 527 Dec 10/14
304 Nov 20/15 528 Dec 10/14
034.51.70 1 Nov 1/11 529 Dec 10/14
3 Nov 1/11 531 Dec 10/14
4 Nov 1/11 532 Dec 10/14
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11 034.51.80 3001 Mar 10/17
302 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 3002 Mar 10/17
Adjustment / Test 501 Dec 10/14 3003 Mar 10/17
502 Dec 10/14 3004 Mar 10/17
503 Dec 10/14 Removal / Installation 3401 Mar 10/17
504 Dec 10/14 3402 Mar 10/17
505 Dec 10/14 Adjustment / Test 3501 Mar 10/17
506 Dec 10/14 3502 Mar 10/17
507 Dec 10/14 3503 Mar 10/17
508 Dec 10/14 3504 Mar 10/17
509 Dec 10/14 3505 Mar 10/17
510 Dec 10/14 3506 Mar 10/17
511 Dec 10/14 3507 Mar 10/17
512 Dec 10/14 3508 Mar 10/17
513 Dec 10/14 3509 Mar 10/17
514 Dec 10/14 3510 Mar 10/17

ALL Page: 12
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.52.00 1 Nov 1/11 034.53.00 1315 Nov 1/11

Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Servicing 1316 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 034.53.01 1001 Nov 1/11
034.52.11 1 Nov 1/11 1003 Nov 1/11
034.52.12 1 Nov 1/11 034.53.02 1001 Nov 1/11
034.52.20 1 Nov 1/11 034.53.03 1001 Nov 1/11
034.52.30 1 Nov 1/11 Servicing 1301 Apr 15/15
034.52.40 3001 Nov 15/13 034.53.04 1 Nov 1/11
3003 Nov 15/13 Servicing 301 Apr 15/15
3004 Nov 15/13 302 Apr 15/15
034.53.00 1 Nov 1/11 034.53.05 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 1301 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Apr 15/15
1302 Nov 1/11 302 Apr 15/15
1303 Nov 1/11 034.53.06 1001 Nov 1/11
1305 Nov 1/11 034.53.07 1001 Nov 1/11
1308 Nov 1/11 1302 Nov 1/11
1309 Nov 1/11 1303 Nov 1/11
1310 Nov 1/11 1304 Nov 1/11
1311 Oct 10/20 Removal / Installation 1401 Nov 1/11
1312 Nov 1/11 1402 Nov 1/11
1313 Nov //11 034.53.08 1001 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 13
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.53.20 1 Nov 1/11 034.53.61 3001 Nov 15/13

3 Nov 1/11 034.54.00 1 Feb 23/18
034.53.21 1 Nov 1/11 1001 Nov 1/11
034.53.22 1 Nov 1/11 1003 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 1302 Nov 1/11
034.53.23 1 Nov 1/11 1303 Nov 1/11
034.53.24 1 Nov 1/11 1305 Nov 1/11
034.53.25 1 Nov 1/11 1307 Nov 1/11
034.53.26 1 Nov 1/11 1309 Nov 1/11
034.53.30 1 Nov 1/11 1311 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 1313 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 1314 Nov 1/11
034.53.40 1 Nov 1/11 1315 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 1317 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 1318 Nov 1/11
034.53.50 1 Nov 1/11 1319 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 1402 Nov 1/11
034.53.60 3001 Nov 15/13 1403 Nov 1/11
3003 Nov 15/13 034.54.02 1001 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 14
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
034.54.03 1001 Nov 1/11 034.54.20 3003 Nov 1/11

034.54.04 1001 Nov 1/11 Servicing 3301 Apr 5/13
1302 Nov 1/11 3304 Nov 1/11
1303 Nov 1/11 034.54.30 1 Feb 23/18
Removal / Installation 1401 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
1402 Nov 1/11 302 Feb 23/18
1403 Nov 1/11 303 Feb 23/18
1404 Nov 1/11 304 Feb 23/18
034.54.05 1001 Nov 1/11 305 Feb 23/18
Removal / Installation 1401 Nov 1/11 Inspection / Check 601 Feb 23/18
1402 Nov 1/11 602 Feb 23/18
034.54.10 1 Nov 1/11 603 Feb 23/18
3 Nov 1/11 034.55.00 1 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Apr 5/13 034.55.01 1001 Nov 1/11
303 Nov 1/11 1003 Nov 1/11
304 Nov 1/11 1004 Nov 1/11
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11 Servicing 1301 Nov 1/11
602 Nov 1/11 1302 Nov 1/11
604 Nov 1/11 1402 Nov 1/11
034.54.11 1 Nov 1/11 034.55.10 1 Nov 1/11
034.54.12 1 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
034.54.20 3001 Nov 1/11 Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 15
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
034.55.10 601 Nov 1/11

Inspection / Check 602 Nov 1/11
034.55.11 1 Nov 1/11
034.55.20 1 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 501 Nov 1/11
502 Nov 1/11
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11
602 Nov 1/11
034.55.30 3001 Nov 1/11
Adjustment / Test 3501 Nov 1/11
3502 Nov 1/11
Inspection / Check 3601 May 31/12
3602 May 31/12

ALL Page: 16
Oct 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
13 034.44.00 301 - -
034.44.10 1 to 3 - -
7 - -
9 - -
301 - -
034.44.11 1 to 4 -
L410UVP-E/220d Nov 20/15
301 to 302 -
034.44.20 3001 to 3003 - -
3009 - -
3301 - -
034.50.00 322 - -
034.51.60 301 to 304 - -
14 034-LEP 1 to 14 15 to 16 -
034-RR 5 to 6 - -
034-Contents 4 to 22 23 to 24 -
034.11.00 2 5 to 6 -
034.11.08 303 - -
034.11.12 1 - -
034.14.00 - 501 to 504 -
034.17.00 - 3001 to 3004 -
- 3301 to 3304 -
- 3401 to 3406 -
- 3501 to 3524 -
L410UVP-E/236d Mar 10/17
034.17.01 - 3001 to 3002 -
- 3301 to 3302 -
034.20.00 1001, 2001 - -
3001 - -
034.41.00 1 - -
034.41.60 - 3001 to 3006 -
- 3501 to 3512 -
034.42.00 1 - -
034.42.60 - 3001 to 3006 -
- 3301 to 3306 -
- 3501 to 3522 -

ALL Page: 5
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
14 034.42.61 - 3001 to 3002 -

034.43.10 2 - -
034.43.20 3002 - -
034.44.00 1 - -
034.44.10 1 - -
034.44.20 3001 - -
034.44.30 - 3001 to 3002 -
- 3301 to 3302 - L410UVP-E/236d Mar 10/17
- 3501 to 3512 -
034.50.00 302 to 303 - -
034.51.00 1 - -
034.51.60 1 - -
034.51.80 - 3001 to 3004 -
- 3401 to 3402 -
- 3501 to 3510 -
15 034-LEP 1 to 15 - -
034-RR 6 - -
034.00.00 2 3 to 4 -
034.10.00 1 - -
034.11.00 310 to 311 - -
034.15.00 1 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
034.42.60 3510 - -
034.44.30 3508 - -
034.54.00 1 - -
034.54.30 - 1 to 2 -
- 301 to 306 -
- 601 to 604 -
16 034-LEP 1 to 16 - -
034-RR 6 7, 8 -
034-Contents 12 - -
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
034.11.08 301 - -
034.42.50 1 to 3 - -

ALL Page: 6
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
16 034.42.60 3001, 3002, - -

3004 to 3006 3007 to 3008 -
3301 to 3306 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
3501 to 3522 3523 to 3536 -
034.53.00 1311 - -

ALL Page: 7
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 8
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
RDR 2000 WEATHER RADAR WITH THE KMD 540 034.41.40 1 ALL
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (if installed)
General 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Weather radar check 301
Check of RDR 2000 weather radar 601
RDR 2000 WEATHER RADAR WITH THE PFD EFI-890R 034.41.50 3001 L410 UVP-E20
(if installed)
General 3001
Operation 3001
Servicing 3301
Weather radar check 3301
GWX 70 WEATHER RADAR (if installed) 034.41.60 3001 L410 UVP-E20
General 3001
Technical data 3001
Operation 3005
Inspection and check before switching ON 3501
Switching ON and OFF 3501
Configuration and Checkout procedure 3502
GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM 034.42.00 1 ALL
General 1
GARMIN 155 GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if installed) 034.42.10 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
KLN 90A GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if installed) 034.42.20 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
KLN 94 GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if installed) 034.42.30 1 ALL
General 1
Database 2
KLN 94 Controls 6
Operation 7 ALL
Servicing 301
KLN 94 Configuration 301
ALL Page: 11
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
GARMIN 155 XL GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if installed) 034.42.40 1 ALL
General 1
Technical data 1
Operation 2
Check of GPS 155 XL receiver 601
GARMIN GNS 430W NAV/COM/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM 034.42.50 1 ALL
(if installed)
General 1
Technical data 2
List of components (Analog version) 2
List of components (EFIS version) 3
Operation (Analog version) 3
Operation (EFIS version) 4
Servicing 301
Battery replacement 301
GARMIN GTN 750 OR GTN 750Xi AND GTN 650 OR GTN 650Xi 034.42.60 3001 L410 UVP-E20
NAV/COM/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM (If Installed)
General 3001
Technical data 3001
Operation 3007
Servicing 3301
Servicing information 3301
Instruction for update databases 3302
Visual inspection of the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi 3304
and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units
Electrical bonding test of the GTN 750 or 3305
GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units
Inspection and check before switching ON 3501
Switching ON and OFF 3502
Configuration and Checkout procedure 3502
Check of the GTN 650/ 750 or GTN 650/ 750 Xi 3526
with using simulator
GAD-42 INTERFACE ADAPTER (if installed) 034.42.61 3001 L410 UVP-E20
General 3001
Technical data 3001
EGPWS ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING 034.43.00 1 ALL
SYSTEM
General 1
ALL Page: 12
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 1108.XX-8 AIR SPEED INDICATOR

SERVICING
NOTE: The LUN 1108.XX-8 air speed indicator can be tested according one of two variant A or B as
described follows.
1. Bench test of the LUN 1108.XX-8 air speed indicator (A variant)
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment ADTS, Air data test system with speed range 0 to
500kts with accuracy of ±0.5 kts in 50 kt
(e.g. Barfield 1811DA0A);
Vibration equipment with vibration of 0.3g and
fastening panel; Water column equipment in mm;
Source of reg. pressure 0-500 Pa;
Multimeter with function of short-circuit tester
C. Tools Connecting hose ∅ 10 mm, ∅ 4 mm;

Shut-off valve

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Prepare the test site for checking of permitted inaccuracies, see Fig. 301.
FIG. 301 SCHEME OF THE TEST SITE

LUN 1108.XX-8 - Air speed indicator, tested instrument
A.D.T.S. - The device Air data test system with a speed range of 0 to 500kts with
accuracy of ±5kts
V.Z. - Vibration equipment with vibration of 0.3g
H - Connecting hose
EFFECTIVITY
034.11.08
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Prepare the test site for checking of adjustment of the signal equipment as per Fig. 302.
FIG. 302 SCHEME OF THE TEST SITE

LUN 1108.XX-8 - Air speed indicator, tested instrument
A.D.T.S. - The device Air data test system with a speed range of 0 to 500kts with
accuracy of ±5kts
V.Z. - Vibration equipment with vibration of 0.3g
H - Connecting hose
Z.T. - Pressure source with regulation valve
V - Shut-off valve
Z.V.S. - Water column equipment in mm
M - Multimeter with function of short circuit tester
EFFECTIVITY
034.11.08
ALL Page: 302
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARMIN GNS 430W NAV/COM/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if installed)

1. General
The GARMIN GNS 430W is navigation and communication system, which two most important functions
in flying joined in two panel-mounted unit. It is located in the central and right instrument panel.
Display is divided into separate areas (windows) including COM window (left up corner), VLOC window
(below COM win.) and GPS window. All functions are organized in page groups.
Main page groups:
• NAV group (6 available pages) – GPS navigation, map, position, NAVCOM
• WPT group (10 available pages) – information about airports from NavData card (runways, freq.,
VORs, procedures, …), user waypoints
• AUX group (4 available pages) – change unit settings, E6B functions
• NRST group (8 available pages) – detailed information for nine nearest airports, FSS, ARTCC/FIR,
SUA and user waypoints within 200 NM of current position.
GPS operation - The operation of the satellite navigation system is based on the principle of receiving
signals from satellites. The system provides high accuracy of latitude and longitude determination. When
signals are received from more than three satellites, the receiver can operate in 3-D navigation mode
(however, the altitude calculated by the GPS must never be used for vertical navigation).
The accurate altitude input to the GPS receiver is a signal from the altitude encoder or encoding
altimeter or air data computer.
COM operation - The GNS’s COM radio operates in the aviation voice band, from 118.000 to 136.975
MHz, in 25 kHz steps (default), for European operations is allow 8.33 kHz steps. Volume is adjusted
using the “c” knob, rotation clockwise to increase volume. Communications frequencies are selected
with the tuning cursor in the standby COM freq. field, and using the small and large left knobs to dial in
the desired freq.
VLOC operation - The GNS includes digitally-tuned VOR/Localizer and glideslope receivers. Freq.
selection is performed by pressing the small left knob and rotating the small and large left knobs to
select the desired frequency. Volume is adjusted using the “v” knob, rotation clockwise to increase
volume.
GNS 430W Cards - The GNS 430 unit can include two removable data cards, one with a Jeppesen
database /NavData card Approved Navigation Database Card:- Data Card, WAAS IFR, International,
P/N 010-10546-02, Rev. B or later./ (to be inserted into the leftmost card slot), and the second being a
Terrain database /Data Card, TAWS/Terrain, 256 MB, P/N 010-10201-21, Rev. A or later./ (to be
inserted into the rightmost card slot (prepared for future using)).
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.50
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The database on the NavData card is updated every 28 days and must be current for approved
instrument approach operations. Effective and expiration dates of the Jeppesen database are shown on
the database confirmation page during the GNS 430W self test and must be confirmed by pressing the
ENT key. The terrain database is recommended updated every 3 months.
2. Technical data
Operating temperature - 20°C to + 55°C (+70°C - short-term operation)

Operating altitude - 1500 ft to 50 000 ft
Humidity up to 95%
Input power 22 to 30 V DC
1.5A (with 27.5 V input power)
Rated current
+ 3 A (with 27.5 V input power) - transmitting
Receiver
Design: 12-channel Phase Trac12
Max. number of satellites received at a time: 12
Acquisition time: 45 seconds (cold)
12 seconds (warm)
Update rate: 1 per second, continuous
Accuracy: 15 m (RMS)
Velocity: 0.1 kt (RMS - steady state)
Maximum airspeed: 999 kt
Maximum permissible acceleration: 6g
3a. List of components (Analog version)
1 Circuit breaker GPS/NAV I AZRGK-5 1 Overhead panel

Navigation system GARMIN GNS 430W
2 1 Central instrument panel
NAV/COMM/GPS (010-00412-01)
Air data computer SHADIN ADC2000 1 Between 2nd and 3th frame
3
(962830-X)
Indicator KI 525A 1 Left instrument panel
4
(066-03046-0007)
VOR/LOC Indicator KI 206 1 Right instrument panel
5
(066-03034-0004)
RMI Indicator KNI 582 2 LH and RH instrument panel
6
(066-03060-0000)
GA 35
7 GPS Antenna 1 Between frames 9 and 10 up
(013-00235-00)
8 Coax. Coup. Conn. R 858-P1 1 Fin
9 NAV Antenna LUN 3596-8 1 Fin
10 GS Antenna LUN 3593.30-7 1 Frame 1
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.50
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Annunciator GPS LUN 2662.47 1 Left instrument panel

11
Annunciator NAV I LUN 2662.45 1 Left instrument panel
12 Circuit breaker COM I AZRGK-10 1 Overhead panel
13 Antenna (COM I) 5QK405 16 1 Between frames 15 and 16, up
14 Relay B 073576N 1 Frame 4, behind instrument panel
3b. List of components (EFIS version)

Circuit breaker NAV/GPS I
1 AZRGK-5 2 Overhead panel
Circuit breaker NAV/GPS II
Navigation system GARMIN GNS 430W
2 2 Central and RH instrument panel
NAV/COMM/GPS (010-00412-01)
GA 35
3 GPS Antenna 2 Between frames 9 and 10 up
(013-00235-00)
5 Connection R 858-P1 2 Fin
6 GS Antenna LUN 3593.30-7 1 Frame 1
7 COMM Antenna 5QK405 16 1 Between frames 16 and 17 up

8 COMM Antenna 5QK405 16 1 Between frames 6 and 7 down
4a. Operation (Analog version)

The GNS 430W receiver is turned on by switching on the BATTERY Ι, ΙΙ, NAV/GPS Ι and COM Ι circuit
breakers, and by turning the COM power/volume knob (LH up on the unit front panel) clockwise.
Welcome page appears after powering on the unit and is started self-test.
Once the self-test concludes, the confirm database page with effective and expiration dates of Jeppesen
database is displayed. Press ENT to acknowledge and proceed to the instrument panel self-test. Once
was verified instrument operation, press ENT to display Satellite Status Page. Satellite Status Page will
appear as the GNS 430W begins to collect and display satellite information.
Then position fix will be determined. Time required to fix a position will usually from 1 to 2 minutes.
If the unit can only obtain enough satellites for 2D navigation (no altitude), the unit will use the pressure
altitude provided by the altitude encoder. If the altitude encoder is not working, a "Need altitude – display
position page" message will be displayed. When this message occurs, display the position page (4. page in
NAV Group) with use right knob (large to select page groups and small to select page within the group) and
setting current altitude as accurately as possible (again with use right knob). Press the ENT key to return
position page.
The GNS 430W receiver works in conjunction with the KI 525A navigation indicator which are located on the
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.50
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LH instrument panel and KI 525A indicator which is located on the RH instrument panel.
The GNS 430W is connected to the Air data computer from which is receiver altitude information. This
altitude is released to ISA it means to 1013.25 mb.
4b. Operation (EFIS version)

The GNS 430W receiver is turned on by switching on the BATTERY Ι, ΙΙ, ADC I, II, AHRS I, II,
NAV/GPS Ι, ΙΙ, COM Ι, ΙΙ, PFD I, II, DCP I, II, CHP, DCU circuit breakers / switches located on the
overhead panel , and by turning the COM power/volume knob (LH up on the unit front panel) clockwise.
Welcome page appears after powering on the unit and is started self-test.
Once the self-test concludes, the confirm database page with effective and expiration dates of Jeppesen
database is displayed. Press ENT to acknowledge and proceed to the instrument panel self-test. Once
was verified instrument operation, press ENT to display Satellite Status Page. Satellite Status Page will
appear as the GNS 430W begins to collect and display satellite information.
Then position fix will be determined. Time required to fix a position will usually from 1 to 2 minutes.
If the unit can only obtain enough satellites for 2D navigation (no altitude), the unit will use the pressure
altitude provided by the altitude encoder. If the altitude encoder is not working, a "Need altitude – display
position page" message will be displayed. When this message occurs, display the position page (4. page in
NAV Group) with use right knob (large to select page groups and small to select page within the group) and
setting current altitude as accurately as possible (again with use right knob). Press the ENT key to return
position page.
The GNS 430W receiver works in conjunction with the two EFI-890R Primary Flight Display, which are
located on the left and right instrument panel.
The GNS 430W is connected to the two AC 32 Air data computer from which is received altitude
information. This altitude is referenced to ISA it means to 1013.25 mb.
NOTE: During replacement of the blocks is necessary to perform its configuration.
NOTE: See GARMIN GNS 430W Series Pilot’s Guide and Reference, P/N 190-00356-00,
Rev. C, dated March 2008 (or later applicable revision) and AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
MANUAL for more details.
CAUTION: PILOTS USING AN OUT-OF-DATE DATABASE DO SO ENTIRELY ON THEIR

OWN RESPONSIBILITY.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.50
ALL Page: 4 R
Apr 5/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARMIN GTN 750 OR GTN 750Xi AND GTN 650 OR GTN 650Xi NAV/COM/GPS
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)
1. General
The GTN 650 SBAS navigator is a panel-mounted GPS/NAV/COM navigator. It is 6.25 inches wide and
2.65 inches tall. The GTN 650 features a 600 by 266 pixel color LCD touchscreen.
The GTN 650 is a GPS/SBAS unit that may be approved for IFR en route, terminal, oceanic, non-
precision, and precision approach operations, includes an airborne VHF communications transceiver
and airborne VOR/localizer (LOC) and glideslope (G/S) receivers.
The GTN 650 is installed on the right instrument panel.
The GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi navigator is an aviation panel-mounted product. The GTN 750 is 6.25
inches wide and 6.00 inches tall. The GTN 750 features a 600 by 708 pixel color LCD touchscreen.
The GTN 750 is a GPS/SBAS unit may be approved for IFR en route, terminal, oceanic, non-precision,
and precision approach operations, includes an airborne VHF communications transceiver and airborne
VOR/ localizer (LOC) and glideslope (G/S) receivers.
The GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi provides function TAWS-A after unlocking TAWS feature using the TAWS
Enablement Card. There is the MD41 control panel on the copilot’s side serving as an additional
indicator. The GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi is installed on the central instrument panel.
GTN Software Loader Card Creation

The GTN comes pre-loaded with software. However, to ensure that the latest software is loaded it is
recommended that software from a current GTN Downloadable Software SD Card, P/N 010-01000-( ),
be loaded into the GTN.
A GTN Software Loader Card may be created using GTN Downloadable Software and an SD card in
conjunction with a GTN software application downloaded from the Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s
website. The Dealer Resource Center will allow the technician to choose which software package(s) to
load onto the card.
2. Technical data
Operating temperature range - 20°C to + 55°C

Operating altitude range - 1500 ft to 55 000 ft
Humidity up to 95%
Input power 11 to 33 V DC
max. 1.5 A (with 28 V input power) main connector
Rated current max. 2.33 A (with 28 V input power) – COM connector
max. 0.58 A (with 28 V input power) – NAV connector
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3001
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GTN 650 Weight (Installed with 115-01293-00

7.0 lbs (3.20 kg)
rack and connectors)
GTN 750 Weight (Installed with 115-01294-00
9.3 lbs (4.24 kg)
rack and connectors)
GTN 650 Display Size 4.9 inch diagonal
GTN 750 Display Size 6.9 inch diagonal
GTN 650 Resolution 600 x 266 pixels
GTN 750 resolution 600 x 708 pixels
Output Power 10 Watt Mode: 10 watts minimum
16 Watt Mode: 16 watts minimum
Number Of Channels: 15-(12 GPS and 3 GPS/WAAS/SBAS)
Reacquisition: 10 seconds typical
Position Update Interval: 0.2 sec (5 Hz)
Maximum airspeed: 1000 knots maximum (above 60,000 ft)
1 NAV/GPS I Circuit breaker AZRGK-5 2 Overhead panel

NAV/GPS II Circuit breaker
2 NAV/COMM/GPS GTN 650 1 RH instrument panel
Navigation system (P/N 011-02256-00) or
GTN 650Xi
(P/N 011-04631-00)
3 NAV/COMM/GPS GTN 750 1 Central instrument panel
Navigation system (P/N 011-02282-00) or
GTN 750Xi
(P/N 011-04634-00)
4 GPS/WAAS Antenna GA 35 2 Between frames 9 and 10 up
(013-00235-00)
6 Connector 858S20E1 2 Fin
7 G/S Antenna LUN 3593 30-7 1 Frame 1
8 COM Antenna Comant CI268-5 1 Between frames 16 and 17 up
1 Between frames 6 and 7 down
9 Diplexer CI507 2 Between frames 6 and 7
10 Annunciator Control Unit MD41-1028 1 Glare shield, RH
11 G/S Annunciator LED-50-11-ED-E1TKX 1 Glare shield, RH
GAD-42 Between frames 1st and 2nd right
12 Interface adapter 1
(P/N 010-00154-01) down
13 Circuit breaker KLIXON 7274-2-1 1 Fuse panel
Between frames 1st and 2nd right
14 Relay B073576N 2
up
15 Relay B073576N 3 Between frames 5th and 5a down
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3002
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3001 SAMPLE OF WIRING DIAGRAM - ANALOG/DISCRETES+DATA BUSES

(The FN101, FA1, FA2 etc. symbols are mentioned in the WIRING MANUAL)
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3003
Mar 10/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3002 GTN 750 FRONT PANEL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3004
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3003 GTN 750Xi FRONT PANEL
Direct-To Key - Press to provide a direct course to a selected waypoint
Home Key - A single press of the Home Key returns the user to the main page to access
features. Pressing and holding the HOME key while on any page will display the default MAP
page
Volume and Squelch Knob - Upper left knob controls volume of the COM and NAV radios.
Press to use the IDENT function of the NAV radio. Pressing and holding the volume knob will
change the frequency to emergency frequency
Large and Small Knobs - Both are rotary knobs. The small knob can be pressed and held in
to flip-flop.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3005
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 3004 GTN 650 FRONT PANEL
FIG. 3005 GTN 650Xi FRONT PANEL
Using the Touchscreen

Most of the controls are operated by touching the display. Highlighted icons and keys may be simply
touched to make a selection. A list of menu items may be scrolled by touching the screen and retaining
pressure while sliding your finger up or down. Map displays may be panned by touching the screen and
retaining pressure while sliding your finger in the desired direction.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3006
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In case the TAWS feature is enabled on the GTN 750 this additional control components are used:
The MD 41 TAWS annunciator ad indication G/S Caution / Inhibit. For control see an AFM.
FIG. 3006 MD 41 TAWS ANNUNCIATOR
FIG. 3007 G/S CAUTION / INHIBIT INDICATION
4. Operation
The GTN 650 or 650Xi and 750 or 750Xi is turned on by switching on BATTERY Ι, ΙΙ, NAV/GPS Ι, ΙΙ,
circuit breakers located on the overhead panel.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system annunciations should disappear
typically within the first 30 seconds after power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the GTN display bezel.
The splash screen displays the following information:
• Copyright
• Database List and System version
• Instrument Panel Self-Test
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When
this information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is
prompted to continue. Databases that are not current will be shown in amber.
CAUTION: UPDATE OF THE DATABASES OF THE BOTH GTN 6XX AND GTN7XX UNITS
CAN BE PERFORMED TOGETHER ONLY.
NOTE: See GARMIN GTN 650W Pilot’s Guide P/N 190-01007- 03 Revision A and GTN 750W
Pilot’s Guide P/N 190-01007- 03 Revision F dated August 2013;
and/or GARMIN GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide P/N 190-02327- 03 Revision C (or later
applicable revision) for more details.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3007
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3008
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SERVICING
1. Servicing information
The GTN 650 or 650Xi and GTN 750 or 750Xi do not require servicing. They are designed to detect
internal failures.
A thorough self-test is executed automatically upon application of power to the units, and built-in tests
(BIT) are continuously executed.
Detected errors are indicated as failure annunciations, system messages, or a combination of the two.
Operation of the GTN 650 or 650Xi and GTN 750 or 750Xi is not permitted unless the inspections
described in this section have been completed within time intervals prescribed in Table 1.
All antennas connected to the GTN should be maintained in accordance with appropriate inspection
data for the antenna installation refer to the Work procedure 034.50.00.A in AMM.
NOTE: For servicing information refer to the GARMIN GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC Maintenance
Manual P/N 190-01007-A1, Rev. 6, dated October 2013;
and/or GARMIN GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual P/N 190-01007-C1, Rev. 1,
dated January 2020 (or later applicable revision).
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Instruction for update databases

A. Preparatory work
(1) Obtain PC or laptop with the internet connection.
(2) Make sure you have a usable SD card reader.
(3) Remove the SD card currently inserted in the GTN or GTN Xi series unit.
B. Update guide
(1) Download and install the “JEPPESEN DISTRIBUTION MANAGER” to PC or laptop from the
following link:
http://ww1.jeppesen.com/support/technical_support_details.jsp?prodNameTxt2=Jeppesen%20
Distribution%20Manager%20(JDM)
(2) Insert the database SD card into the SD card reader and run the JEPPESEN DISTRIBUTION
MANAGER.
(3) Insert the username and password:
Username: _________________
Password: _________________
Be advised that the username and password remains the same for each airplane’s S/N.
(4) Download the relevant database into the database SD card.
(5) Insert database SD card into the GTN or GTN Xi unit. Each SD card belongs only to navigator
in which it has been previously inserted.
(6) Turn on the GTN unit following instruction described in the relevant AFM supplement and
confirm the database update. Update process will automatically proceed. SD card remains
inserted until the next database update.
For more information about the downloading the database into the SD card, follow the link:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hkLFWyRKw98
For more information about the uploading the database into the GTN or GTN Xi unit, follow the link:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7fF-6Rc1UOI
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Description/Procedure Interval

Equipment Removal and replacement of the following items. See Section 6 of On Condition
Removal and Maintenance Manual GTN 6XX/7XX and/or GTN Xi Series.
Replacement • GTN 6XX/7XX and/or GTN Xi Series
• NAV antenna cable splitter
• NAV antenna cable diplexer
• Fan
Cleaning the The front bezel, keypad, and display can be cleaned with a soft cotton cloth On Condition
Front Panel dampened with clean water. DO NOT use any chemical-cleaning agents.
Care should be taken to avoid scratching the surface of the display
Display The display backlight LEDs are rated by the manufacturer as having a On Condition
Backlight usable life of at least 36,000 hours. This life may be more or less than the
rated time depending on the operating conditions of the GTN and/or GTN
Xi Series. Over time, the backlight lamp may dim and the display may not
perform as well in direct sunlight conditions. The user must determine by
observation when the display brightness is not suitable for its intended
use. Contact the Garmin factory repair station when the backlight lamp
requires service.
Battery The GTN and/or GTN Xi Series has an internal keep-alive battery that will On Condition
Replacement last about 10 years. The battery is used for GPS system information.
Regular planned replacement is not necessary. The GTN and/or GTN Xi
Series will display a ‘low battery’ message when replacement is required.
Once the low battery message is displayed, the battery should be
replaced within 1 to 2 months. If the battery is not replaced and becomes
totally discharged, the GTN unit will remain fully operational, but the GPS
signal acquisition time may be increased. There is no loss of function or
accuracy of the GTN unit with a dead battery. The battery must be
replaced by the Garmin factory repair station or factory authorized repair
station.
Test-Bonding Perform an electrical bonding check of the GTN and/or GTN Xi Series per refer to the
Check Work procedure 034.42.60.B. Maintenance
Schedule of
airplane
Visual The GTN and/or GTN Xi Series unit, GMA 35 (if installed), switches, and refer to the
Inspection wiring harnesses should be inspected to ensure continued integrity of the Maintenance
installation. These items must be inspected in accordance with Work Schedule of
procedure 034.42.60.A. airplane
TAB. 1 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Visual inspection of the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Portable lamp (e.g. StealthLite 2410 LED)
C. Tools 3/32-inch hex drive tool;

Necessary tools from tool kit

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Conduct a visual check of the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units,
switches, and their wiring harnesses to ensure continued installation integrity.
(2) Unscrew gradually the knurled head screws fixing the right and central instrument panel in the work
position, and swing down the panels.
(3) Remove the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units from the mounting rack.
To remove the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units from the rack, insert the
hex drive tool into the access hole on the unit face. Rotate counterclockwise until the unit is forced
out about 3/8 inches and the hex drive tool completely stops. This will allow the unit to be freely
pulled from the rack.
(3) Inspect the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units for security of attachment,
including visual inspection of mounting racks and other supporting structure attaching the racks to
airplane instrument panel.
Verify the countersunk fastener heads are in full contact with unit mounting rack holes.
(4) Inspect all parts of system for signs of corrosion.
(5) Inspect all switches, knobs, and buttons for damage.
(6) Inspect condition of wiring, shield terminations, routing, and attachment/ clamping.
(7) Check the fan intake slots on the sides and bottom of the GTN or GTN Xi series unit’s bezel for
dust, dirt, or obstructions. Clean as needed.
(8) Conduct a visual check of the GPS/SBAS antenna cable over braid.
(9) Reinstall the GTN or GTN Xi series units in the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops, about 3/8
inch short of the final position. A 3/32-inch hex drive tool is then inserted into the access hole at the
bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while pressing on the left side of the bezel
until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
Be sure not to over tighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbs can damage the locking mechanism.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3304
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Fix the right and central instrument panels to the operational position. Attach the right instrument
panel to the fuselage main frame and the central panel to the left and right instrument panel by
means of knurled head screws.
3. Electrical bonding test of the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Milliohm meter with an accuracy of ± 0.1 milliohms
(or better)
C. Tools 3/32-inch hex drive tool

Necessary tools from tool kit

Periodical
E. Procedures
Perform an electrical bonding check as follows:
(1) Unscrew gradually the knurled head screws fixing the right and central instrument panel in the work
position, and swing down the panels.
(2) Remove the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units from the mounting rack.
To remove the GTN 750 or GTN 750Xi and GTN 650 or GTN 650Xi units from the rack, insert the
hex drive tool into the access hole on the unit face. Rotate counterclockwise until the unit is forced
out about 3/8 inches and the hex drive tool completely stops. This will allow the unit to be freely
pulled from the rack
(3) Remove the backplate assembly from the rack.
(4) Measure the resistance between the mounting rack and nearby exposed portion of airplane metallic
structure and verify it is less than or equal to 10 milliohms. In the event of bonding test failure,
remove the GTN or GTN Xi series rack and clean the attachment points with a bonding brush at
both the GTN or GTN Xi series rack and the airplane and reattach the rack to the rails in the panel.
Re-verify the resistance between the mounting rack and nearby exposed portion of airplane metallic
structure and ensure that the resistance is less than or equal to 2.5 milliohms.
(5) Reinstall the backplate assembly.
(6) Reinstall the GTN or GTN Xi series units in the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops, about 3/8
inch short of the final position. A 3/32-inch hex drive tool is then inserted into the access hole at the
bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while pressing on the left side of the bezel
until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3305
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Be sure not to over tighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbs can damage the locking mechanism.
(7) Fix the left and central instrument panels to the operational position. Attach the right instrument
panel to the fuselage main frame and the central panel to the left and right instrument panel by
means of knurled head screws.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3306
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT / TEST
After installation of the GTN 650/ 750 or GTN Xi series units or other relating components, perform the
following procedures:
• Inspection and check before switching ON - Refer to the WP (Work Procedure) No. 1 in this Section.
• Switching ON and OFF - Refer to the WP No. 2 in this Section.
• Configuration and Checkout procedure - Refer to the WP No. 3 in this Section
• Ground checks - Refer to the WP No. 4 in this Section
1. Inspection and check before switching ON

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Multimeter (e.g. EXTECH MG 302 or equivalent)
E. Procedures
(1) Visual check.

Perform the visual check of the GTN 650/ 750 or GTN Xi series units installation and wiring
(undamaged seals of units, connections of the cables and connectors).
(2) Operating voltage

Check the operating voltage 28.5 V DC +2.5 / -3V of the board main.
(3) Measure a contact resistance of the grounding of the GTN 650/ 750 or GTN Xi series units. It
must be less than 600 μΩ.
(4) Perform a continuity test to check wiring of the installation. Verify by means of the measure that
connector pins are attached properly.
(5) Check the connectors attaching at the rack.
(a) Slide the GTN or GTN Xi series to the rack until it stops.
(c) Insert hex drive tool into the access hole at the bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool
clockwise while pressing on the left side of the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in the
rack. Count turns until stop. Be sure not to over tighten the unit into the rack
(d) Number of turns until to the stop must be minimally three. If number of turns is less than
three it is necessary to move the rack to properly fit the unit to the rack.
(e) Switch on main avionics circuit breaker.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3501
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Switching ON and OFF

E. Procedures
NOTE: The GTN 650/ 750 or GTN Xi series must be turned off during starting aircraft engine(s).
(1) Switching ON
Check switching on the BATTERY I, II circuit breakers on the overhead panel.
Switch on the COM I, II, NAV/GPS I, II circuit breakers on the overhead panel. Perform
switching on according to the Supplement of the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for a specific a
GTN 650/ 750 or GTN Xi series Installation.
(2) Switching OFF

Perform switching off according to the Supplement of the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for a
specific a GTN 650/ 750 or GTN Xi series Installation.
3. Configuration and Checkout procedure

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment W-meter 100W, e.g. Rohde Schwarz;
IFR 4000 (NAV 401L) simulator
B. Materials Test record ident. No.: BP42002N GTN 750/ 650

Configuration Data, for the specific S/N of the airplane or
Test record ident. No.: BP429 02N GTN 750/ 650 Xi
Configuration Data, for the specific S/N of the airplane;
Test record ident. No.: BP420 01N GTN 750/ 650
Ground test record, for the specific S/N of the airplane or
Ground test record, for the specific S/N of the airplane
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3502
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Procedures
Perform configuration in Configuration Mode. Access to configuration mode as follows:
(1) Switch off the GTN 750/ 650 or GTN 750/ 650 Xi power by the NAV/GPS I and/or II circuit
breakers on overhead panel.
(2) Press and hold the ‘HOME’ key and apply power to the GTN 750/ 650 or GTN 750/ 650 Xi by
the NAV/GPS I and/or II circuit breakers.
(3) Release the ‘HOME’ key when the display activates and the Garmin logo appears fully lit on the
screen.
The first page displayed is the Configuration Mode page, as shown on Figure 3501. While in
configuration mode, pages can be selected by touching the desired key on the display.
Scroll on the page by UP/ DOWN on the screen.
FIG. 3501 CONFIGURATION MODE GTN 650 AND GTN 750 AND/OR GTN 650 Xi AND GTN 750 Xi
Set the GTN 650/ 750 according to the Test record ident. No.: BP42002N Configuration Data,
for the specific S/N of the airplane.
Set the GTN 650Xi/ 750Xi according to the Test record ident. No.: BP42902N Configuration
Data, for the specific S/N of the airplane.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3503
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Specific setting procedures according to the BP42002N, GTN 750/650 Configuration Data
and/or BP42902N, GTN 750/650 Xi Configuration Data
(sample of the BP42002N and BP42902N Test Records are mentioned on next pages)
The following procedures are performed using SD cards for enablement of functions. This Data
Cards are locked to specific GTN installations. The first time the Data Card is inserted into a
GTN it becomes “locked” to that particular GTN and will not work in other installations. Thereby
mark SD cards (write for example: GTN 750 Xi/ airplane S/N).
TERRAIN CONFIGURATION
The GTN 750 supports TAWS-A feature. The TAWS-A Enablement card is necessary for
unlocking.
(a) Switch off the GTN 750/ 650 or GTN 750/ 650 Xi power by the NAV/GPS I and/or II circuit
(b) Remove the database SD card and insert the TAWS-A ENABLEMENT CARD.
(c) Run the GTN unit in the configuration mode (press and hold the ‘HOME’ key and apply power
to the GTN).
(d) Click on the TAWS-A key in GTN options and click YES.
Set TAWS Setting according to the BP420 02N GTN 650/ 750 Configuration Data and/or
BP42902N, GTN 750/650 Xi Configuration Data.
CHARTS CONFIGURATION
The GTN is able to display Jeppesen maps ChartView and FliteCharts. This function must be
enabled by a special enablement SD card:
(b) Remove the database SD card and insert the CHARTVIEW ENABLEMENT CARD.
(c) Run the GTN unit in the configuration mode (press and hold the ‘HOME’ key and apply
power to the GTN unit).
(d) Touch the CHARTVIEW key in the option CHARTS CONFIGURATION and touch YES.
COM TRANSMIT POWER

A 16W COM Enablement card (P/N 010-00878-04) is needed to enable 16W COM transmit
power.
(b) Remove the database SD card and insert the 16W ENABLEMENT CARD.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3504
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
to the GTN).
(d) Click on the Com Transmit Power key in GTN options and click 16W.
WEATHER RADAR
A Digital Radar Enablement Card (P/N 010-00878-42) is needed to enable Digital Radar.
RADAR TURBULENCE DETECTION and GROUND CLUTTER SUPPRESSION are enabled
by these cards.
(b) Remove the database SD card and insert the card with required weather function.
to the GTN).
(d) Click on the Weather Radar key in GTN options and click required weather function.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3505
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42002N____Page 1/5 – Rev L
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3506
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42002N____Page 2/5 – Rev L
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3507
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42002N____Page 3/5 – Rev L
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3508
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42002N____Page 4/5 – Rev L
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3509
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42002N____Page 5/5 – Rev L
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3510
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42902N____Page 1/5 – Rev IR
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3511
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3512
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3513
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3514
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3515
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)

Run the GTN unit in the configuration mode (press and hold the ‘HOME’ key and apply power to
the GTN). Fill out Test record ident. No.: BP42001N or BP42901N for the specific S/N of the
airplane (sample of the BP42001N and BP42901N Test Records are mentioned on next pages).
(a) Discrete Inputs Page (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.3.1)
Verify that discrete inputs set according to the Test record ident. No.: BP420 02N for the
specific S/N of the airplane meet proper value active/ inactive.
In case the TAWS feature is unlocked, verify inputs of indication of an extended landing
gear. If all three landing gear legs are extended and locked a state is ACTIVE. In any other
case the state is INACTIVE.
If wing flaps are in 42° position the state is ACTIVE. In other positions the state is
INACTIVE. Press the “TAWS Inhibit” key on the MD41 to change state TAWS INHIBIT IN
to ACTIVE. Press the “G/S INHB” key to change state GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT IN to
ACTIVE.
(b) Discrete Outputs Page (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.3.2)
Verify that discrete inputs set according to the Test record ident. No.: BP42001N or
BP42901N for the specific S/N of the airplane meet proper value active/ inactive.
In case the TAWS feature is unlocked, verify that at state changes to active:
• J1001-35: TAWS Audio Active inhibits TCAS annunciation. Simulate using a simulator
IFR an intruder so, that the TCAS announces a warning. Activate TAWS ACTIVE OUT
during this announcement and verify that TCAS announcement is interrupted.
• J1001-53: Glideslope Caution Annunciate, the G/S CAUTION indicator comes on.
• J1001-54: Glideslope Inhibit Annunciate, the G/S INHB ON indication comes on
• J1001-57: TAWS/Terrain Inhibit Annunciate: TERR INHB indication on MD 41 comes on
• J1001-71: TAWS Warning Annunciate, the PULL UP indication on MD 41 comes on
• J1001-72: Terrain not Available Annunciate, the Terrain N/A indication turns off on the
MD 41
• J1001-73: Terrain Warning annunciate, the TERR indication n the MD 41 TAWS

comes on
In case, when is the Bendix King Gold Crown avionics installed, further verify:
• J1001-72: GPS Annunciate: the NAV signalization on the NAV/GPS Annunciator is

over switched to GPS annunciation
• J1001-73: GPS Select: the relay (FN55 – symbol refer to the Wiring Manual) on the
frame No. 4 switch on (verify by hearing) – Note: The functional test of the output will
be performed within the tests of the autopilot system.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3516
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) HSDB (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.3.3)
Turn on the GWX and both GTN units.
Verify, on GTN Diagnostic/HSDB page, that unit connected through HSDB port/ Ethernet is
switched on and configured correctly and transmits and receives on the proper port.
When is on the both GTN units the Crossfield set on the Present, according to the
BP42002N or BP42902N Test Record, carry out the following check. Verify that the
respective GTN has in LRU Status section displayed ONLINE.
(d) Audio Configuration

Set the Alert Volume according to the BP42002N or BP42902N Test Record.
(e) GAD 42 Configuration Page Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record -
Step 10.3.4)
Switch on the Electric Trim circuit breaker and the AP FD circuit breaker if AP installed, or
AHRS I, if AP not installed.
Verify that Status is ACTIVE on the External Systems/GAD 42.
Change any of the options to a different number. Verify that after changing one of the
options the STATUS field changes to SENDING then changes back to ACTIVE.
(f) Lighting Bus Interface (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.3.5)
Touch the 'Minimum Level' key to set the lighting bus to its minimum setting.
Slowly vary the lighting bus level that is connected to the GTN. Verify that the Source Input
Level value displayed on the configuration screen tracks the lighting bus setting. Continue
to maximum brightness and verify proper operation.
(g) Main Data Inputs Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.3.6)
GTN Diagnostic/Main Data
In case, when is the EFI-890R Universal avionics installed:
Switch on the ADC1 only and verify that the GTN 750 is powered on. Switch off it.
In case, when is the Bendix King Gold Crown avionics installed:

Verify that the communication with KA90 (ARINC 3) is active refer to the BP42002N or
BP42902N Test Record. Verify that the Heading is displayed in the GTN Diagnostics->
Main data Inputs.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3517
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42001N____Page 1/3 – Rev H
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3518
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42001N____Page 2/3 – Rev H
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3519
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42001N____Page 3/3 – Rev F
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3520
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3521
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3522
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3523
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Ground Checks (Normal Mode)

When is the Universal avionics installed:
Turn on the ADC#1, the both GTN, PFD#1 and PFD#2. Carry out the following tests. Fill out
the Test record ident. No.: BP42001N or BP42901N Ground test record for the specific S/N of
the airplane.
When is the Bendix King Gold Crown avionics installed:

Switch on the RADIO-NAVIGATION systems circuit breakers and Autopilot system circuit
breakers on the overhead panel
(a) Self –Test (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.4.1)
When is the Universal avionics installed:

Power on the GTN and power it up in normal mode. After switch on of the GTN run the
self-test, check the correct display on the PFD.
During the self-test display the EHSI / EFIS on both PFDs. Set the GPS1 on PFD # 1 and
set the GPS2 on PFD # 2. Verify that the lateral deviation is in the left half of the range, the
vertical in the upper half. Turn on the autopilot, the Flight Director tilts alternately to the
right and left. Confirm with the CONTINUE key.
When is the Bendix King Gold Crown avionics installed:

Turn on the autopilot in FD mode.
Power on the GTN and power it up in normal mode. After switch on of the GTN run the
self-test, check the correct display on the instruments. The LH HSI, RH CDI indicated
horizontal and vertical deviation in half of the range left and up, LH RMI indicated NAV1
bearing 135°. The TO and NAV1 flags are indicated, GPS indication is displayed. Switch
on the AP/FD circuit breaker on the overhead panel, the Flight Director tilts alternately to
the right and left. Confirm with the CONTINUE key.
If the TAWS function on the GTN 750 or GTN 750 Xi is unlocked, all cells on the MD-41
annunciator control table and on the G/S annunciator comes on during the self-test. The
TAWS Test is displayed on the Terrain page of the GTN 750 Xi. After successful
completion of the test, sounds the TAWS System test OK message.
(b) Signal acquisition check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.4.2)
(b1) At the start of this test, all other avionics should be turned off and the GTN powered
on in normal mode.
(b2) Ensure the GTN is able to acquire sufficient satellites to compute a GPS position.
From the Home page, touch the ‘System’ key and then touch the ‘GPS Status’ key.
Under GPS Solution, ensure that a 3D Fix or 3D Diff Fix is obtained. If the unit is
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3524
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
unable to acquire satellites, move the aircraft away from obstructions which might be
shading GPS reception. If the situation does not improve, check the GPS antenna
installation.
NOTE: After installation, the initial acquisition of position can take up to 20 minutes.
Subsequent acquisitions will not take that long.
(b3) Once GPS position information is available, perform the following steps:
- On the GPS Status page, verify that the LAT/ LON agree with a known reference
position.
- While monitoring the GPS Status page, turn on other avionics one at a time and
check the GPS signal reception to make sure it is not affected (no significant
signal degradation).
(c) Weather Radar Interface Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record
- Step 10.4.3)
(c1) Start the GTN in normal mode.
(c2) On the Home page, touch Weather and then Radar.
(c3) Touch the ‘Mode’ key and select Standby mode and wait for the Warm-Up to complete.
(c4) Touch the ‘Mode’ key again and select Test.
(c5) Verify that the GWX begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
(c6) Verify that stabilization is on (STAB On is displayed in the upper right corner of the
radar display).
(d) TAWS-A Test (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.4.4)
A 3D GPS position fix is required to conduct this check.
(d1) Select the TERRAIN page from the normal mode Home page on GTN 750 and/or
GTN 750Xi. Touch the MENU key in TERRAIN menu and touch the TEST TAWS key.
(d2) Wait until the TAWS self-test completes (10-15 seconds) to hear the TAWS system
status aural message.
• The aural message “TAWS System Test OK” will be annunciated if the TAWS
system is functioning properly.
• The aural message “TAWS System Failure” will be annunciated if the TAWS system
is NOT functioning properly. Also, ‘TAWS FAIL’ will appear in amber on the screen.
• If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the audio system or
associated wiring and the TAWS capability must be considered non-functional.
Verify the TAWS audio wiring to the audio panel.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3525
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Check of the GTN 650/ 750 or GTN 650/ 750 Xi with using simulator
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment W-meter 100W, e.g. Rohde Schwarz
IFR 4000 simulator (NAV 401L)
Multimeter (e.g. EXTECH MG 302 or equivalent)
B. Materials Test record ident. No.: BP420 01N GTN 750/ 650
Test record ident. No.: BP420 04N GTN 750 Ground
test record, for the specific S/N of the airplane

Periodical
E. Procedures
Perform this test at the special workshop designed for avionics devices.
When is the Universal avionics installed, perform this checkout according to the Test record ident.
No.: BP42001N or BP42901N Ground test record for the specific S/N of the airplane.
When is the Bendix King Gold Crown avionics installed, perform this checkout according to the Test
record ident. No.: BP42004N Ground test record for the specific S/N of the airplane.
Move the aircraft to outside free place away from obstructions which might be shading GPS reception.
(1) Check of the GPS/SBAS
(a) GPS Signal Acquisition Test (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or BP42004N Test
Record - Step 10.5.1)
Check number of acquired satellites on the free place, navigation and estimated deviation
of EPE position. Verify GPS signal acquisition on „GPS status page“.
(b) GPS and VHF EMC Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or BP42004N Test
Verify that a GPS acquisition is not disturbed by the VHF COM I, II transceivers. Transmit
subsequently each VHF COM transceiver for 20 seconds on frequencies 121, 150;
121, 175; 121, 200; 131, 250; 131, 275 and 131, 300 MHz. Observe the number of
acquired satellites before and after transmitting. Number of acquired satellites must not be
markedly reduced and flags must not be displayed.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3526
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) GPS and TCAS II EMC Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.5.3)
When is TCAS II installed only. Verify that GPS remains operational and GPS acquisition is not
disturbed when the TCAS II switched on.
(d) Correct load of waypoint database (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or BP42004N
Test Record - Step 10.5.4)
Verify a correct loading of the waypoint database on the page: System ->System Status-
>Database Info
(e) Crossfill Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record - Step 10.5.5)
When is Universal avionics installed only. Verify that the crosside navigator is Present on the
page: Setup -> Interfaced equipment/ Crossfill.
(f) NAV/GPS switching test (Refer to the BP42004N Test Record - Step 10.5.6)
When is Bendix King Gold Crown avionics installed only.
Verify that it is displayed on the left LH HSI as the active NAV navigation source. On the
GTN, tune the NAV to frequency set on the IFR simulator. Verify that the bar on the HSI is
displayed correctly. Using SW buttons CDI on GTN switch navigation source for LH HSI to
GPS. Verify that the GPS / NAV signaling cell indicates GPS and that the HSI display
changes accordingly.
(2) Test of COM
(a) Automatic Squelch Function Check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or BP42004N
Test Record - Step 10.6.1)
Verify automatic squelch function SQ. Press the volume knob at left upper corner of the
bezel to switch off squelch. Set a desired volume. Press shortly repeatedly the knob to
switch on squelch.
(b) Connection with another RDST (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or BP42004N Test
Tune the unit to a local VHF frequency and verify the receiver output produces a clear and
understandable audio output. Verify the transmitter functions properly by contacting another
station and getting a report of reliable communications
(c) Antenna VSWR check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or BP42004N Test Record -
Step 10.6.3)
Measure the antenna VSWR.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3527
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Check of the sensitivity and power output of the COM (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N
or BP42004N Test Record - Step 10.6.4)
Measure a sensitivity of the COM receiver. Sensitivity must agree with values in the
P/N 190-01004-02 GTN625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual Rev. J dated April 2014;
P/N 190-01007-02 GTN725/750 TSO Installation Manual Rev. J dated April 2014;
P/N 190-02327-02 GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual Rev. 4 dated December 2019.
Measure the transmitter output. Output must agree with values in the
P/N 190-01004-02 GTN625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual Rev. J dated April 2014;
P/N 190-01007-02 GTN725/750 TSO Installation Manual Rev. J dated April 2014;
Perform a test communication with an ATC tower during engine running before every flight.
(e) IFR 4000 Test Set
COMM VHF AM R/F I/O setting
FREQ Frequency
RF LVL Radio Frequency level < -101dBm receiver sensitivity
M MOD Master Modulation 0%, 30%
identification
MOD TONE Off/ On tone 1200Hz
signal
CHNL SP Channel space 8,33 kHz
PWR MTR Peak / Average Power
GEN/RX Generate or Receive Mode Indication
the transmitter frequency received over
TX FREQ the RF I/O Connector or via the ANT
Connector
the transmitter power received
TX PWR 16W nom.
(0.1 to 30 W) over the RF I/O Connector
the selection of SINGLE or
TX MOD CONTINUOUS tone pulse pair Indication
transmission
RX POWER Low receive power for power measuring Indication
The FREQ field of the IFR 4000 can be set for following values:
In PRESET can every mode set for three channels: 118.00 MHz, 137.00 MHz a 156.00 MHz.
Preset is used for quick confidence testing.
When set to CHANNEL, you can tune to any channel frequency in the band of respective
mode. This the setting is used to test any channel from 118.00 to 156.00 MHz with a
channel space of 8.33 or 25 kHz. The TX MOD field displays the modulation depth value
(0% up to 99%) of the signal received via the or connector antenna. The set channel
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3528
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
spacing of 8.33 or 25 kHz is set in the CHNL SP field. The mode switches in the GEN / RX
field between transmission and reception.
Signal + Noise/ Noise Ratio is a measure of receiver sensitivity.
• First measuring method

Connect an IFR 4000 transmitter directly to a VHF COMM receiver and set the RF LVL
for nominal 2 μV (-101 dBm). Set the MOD TONE field to 1020 Hz and adjust the
receiver audio output for FSD on an Audio Power Meter. The M MOD Field is then
toggled between 30% and 0%. Adjust RF Level for a 6 dB difference on the Audio
Power Meter. The RF level in μV should be ≤ to the nominal figure of 2 μV (-101 dBm).
• Second measuring method Sensitivity Test is SINAD (Signal to Noise and Distortion)
SINAD is preferred for taking into account distortion, while Signal + Noise/Noise Ratio
only deals with noise. A SINAD Meter is an AC Voltmeter with a notch filter to remove
the 1 kHz fundamental audio tone, leaving just the noise and distortion. The SINAD
Meter is driven by a differential amplifier to display the difference between audio with
the tone, and audio without the tone (i.e. just noise and distortion)
To measure 12 dB SINAD, connect the SINAD Meter to the Receiver audio output.
Adjust the Receiver audio level on the Receiver to a level that is compatible with the
SINAD Meter (most SINAD Meters are auto-ranging and autonulling, so this usually
isn't too critical). Generate a signal on the receive channel, modulated with a 1000 Hz
tone. Adjust the RF output level of the IFR 4000 until the SINAD Meter reads 12 dB.
Observe the power measurement limits specified for the IFR4000.
(3) Test of VOR mode
(a) NAV/COM Switching check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N Test Record
- Step 10.7.1)
Perform toggling using the small knob at a right bottom corner of the unit.
(b) VOR Sensitivity check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test Record
- Step 10.7.2)
Measure the sensitivity of the VOR receiver. The sensitivity must agree with values in the:
P/N190-01004-02 GTN625/ 635/ 650 TSO Installation Manual Rev. J dated April 2014;
P/N190-01007-02 GTN725/ 750 TSO Installation Manual Rev. J dated April 2014;
Use for sensitivity check Signal + Noise/ Noise Ratio
Connect an IFR 4000 transmitter directly to a VHF COMM receiver and set the RF level for
nominal value 2 μV (-101 dBm). Set the MOD TONE field to 1020 Hz and adjust the receiver
audio output for FSD on an Audio Power Meter. The M MOD Field is then toggled between
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3529
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
90% and 0%. Adjust RF Level for a 6 dB difference on the Audio Power Meter. The RF level
in μV should be ≤ to the nominal figure of 2 μV (-101 dBm).
(c) TO/ FROM indication check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test
Verify correctness of the TO/ FROM indication. Turn the OBS control for 360º. On 270° and
90º ± 10º must be toggled TO/ FROM.
(d) Course indication check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test Record -
Step 10.7.4)
Using a VOR test set verify on frequency VOR 108.00 MHz indication on courses 0°, 30°, 60°,
90°, 102°, 150°, 180°, 210°, 240°, 270°, 300°, 330°. Deviation must not exceed ± 2, 7°.
VOR Bearing accuracy should be verified at 30° steps typically at an RF level of

100 μV (-67 dBm).
The BRG Field is used to select each 30° step. When TO is selected in the TO/ FROM
Field, flying a bearing towards the ground station is simulated and the TO Flag should be
in view on the HSI. When FROM is selected in the TO/FROM Field, flying a radial away
from the ground station is simulated and the FROM Flag should be in view on the CDI.
(e) IFR 4000 Test Set
VOR R/F I/O setting
FREQ Frequency
RF LVL Radio Frequency level ≤ 2μV Receiver sensitivity - direct
connection by a cable
(-101dBm)
- 43 dBm - connection by an antenna
M MOD Master Modulation
MOD TONE Identification tone or sign identification signal
BRG VOR bearing ±4º Error on all bearings at RF
LVL -67dBm.
TO/FROM Direction TO/FROM Test for RF LVL -87 dBm to -
17 dBm for 30Hz a 9960Hz
30 Hz MOD Modulation Depth
9950 Hz MOD Modulation Depth
TONE DEL the 30 Hz Variable, 30 Hz
Reference or both tones to be
deleted
Connect a tested VOR receiver directly by a cable to a RF I/O connector of an IFR 4000
tester or by antenna.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3530
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Set using FREQ, RF LVL, TONE, M MOD keys required values at appropriate fields.
The FREQ Field may be set to either:
- PRESET provides three fixed selectable channels for each Mode: 108.00 MHz, 108.05 MHz
and 117.95 MHz. Preset is used for quick confidence testing.
- CHANNEL allows the selection of any on-channel frequency with the Mode band. This the
setting is used to test any channel from 108.00 to 117.95 MHz
Flag Tests
- NAV Flag Tests typically should be conducted over an RF level range of 10 μV (-87 dBm)
to 20 mV (-17 dBm). The 30 Hz MOD Field should be set to 0% or use the TONE DEL
Field to delete the tone. The NAV Flag should come into view on the CDI/ HSI (on PFD)
and/or RMI. This should be repeated for the 9960 Hz MOD.
(4) LOC receiver check

Connect a tested LOC receiver directly by a cable to a RF I/O connector of an IFR 4000 tester
or by antenna.
The FREQ Field may be set to either:
- PRESET provides three fixed selectable channels for each Mode: 108.10 MHz, 108.15 MHz
and 110.15 MHz. Preset is used for quick confidence testing.
- CHANNEL allows the selection of any on-channel frequency with the Mode band. This the
setting is used to test any channel from 108.10 to 111.95 MHz
Receiver Bandwidth Tests
- The FREQ Field may be set to:
VAR allows the selection of the frequency from 107.00 to 113.00 MHz in 1 kHz increments to
perform receiver bandwidth and adjacent channel tests.
(a) LOC sensitivity check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test Record -
Step 10.8.1)
Measure the sensitivity of the LOC receiver. The sensitivity must agree with values in the:
Use for sensitivity check Signal + Noise/ Noise Ratio
Connect an IFR 4000 transmitter directly to a VOR receiver and set the RF level for nominal
value 2 μV (-101 dBm). Set the MOD TONE field to 1020 Hz and adjust the receiver audio
output for FSD on an Audio Power Meter. The M MOD Field is then toggled between
70% and 0%. Adjust RF Level for a 6 dB difference on the Audio Power Meter. The RF level
in μV should be ≤ to the nominal figure of 2 μV (-101 dBm).
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3531
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The flag should come out of view at 5 µV (-93 dBm) on the input receiver.
(b) LOC deviation indication check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test
Using an IFR 4000 simulator verify on frequency LOC 108.1 the indication of the deviation
with the standard test signal.
(5) GS receiver check
(a) GS sensitivity check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test Record -
Step 10.9.1)
Measure the sensitivity of the GS receiver. The sensitivity must agree with values in the
(b) GS deviation indication check (Refer to the BP42001N or BP42901N or B42004N Test
Using a set test verify on frequency LOC 108.1 (GS 334.7 MHz) the indication of the
deviation at the standard test signal.
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3532
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42004N____Page 1/3 – Rev I
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3533
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42004N____Page 2/3 – Rev I
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3534
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BP42004N____Page 3/3 – Rev I
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3535
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
034.42.60
L410 UVP-E20 Page: 3536
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Check of LOC (ILS) receiver: accuracy of centre position setting, pointer deflection
symmetry receiver sensitivity, warning signal, identification signal power
D. Referenced information 034.53.00.D-4

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Prepare a control and measuring equipment as shown on Fig. 1301 of the technological
procedure 034.53.00.D – 2.
(2) Connect the cable with a socket marked LUN 3561 to the plug 811 – P8, P16 on the Z 764
testing equipment. By means of an interconnecting cable connect the LUN 3503.20 navigation
receiver (conductor marked LUN 3503.10), the LUN 3503.61 navigation converter (conductor
marked LUN 3503.51), and the LUN 3710.05 navigation indicator (conductor marked
275 – P4). Connect the antenna. Connector (two – pin) of the LOC receiver on the navigation
receiver to the IKGM – L simulator output by means of a coaxial cable. Connect the LF
voltmeter to NF 150 ohms terminals. Connect the DC digital voltmeter between the IND LOC
(not the ground) and +5V terminals. Connect the oscillograph to VST LOC terminals. Set the
change – over switch on the Z 764 testing equipment to the position 150. Connect. The YE–2T
DC power supply to terminals +28V, and connect the DC voltmeter in parallel to the power
Supply.
(3) Check of the LOC receiver
(4) Accuracy of centre position setting
(5) Pointer deflection symmetry
(6) Receiver sensitivity
(7) Warning signal
(8) Identification signal power
(9) Technical requirements
(10) A centre position setting error must not exceed + 10 µA.
(11) The pointer deflection must be symmetrical within + 4% of the measured centre position.
(12) The receiver sensitivity must be better than 5 µV.
EFFECTIVITY
034.53.00
L 410 UVP-E Page: 1311
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) The localizer warning flag will appear if:
• the HF signal is absent
• the modulation depth of both modulation signals is equal to zero
• the modulation depth of one of the 90 Hz or 150 Hz signals is equal to zero while the
modulation depth of the other one equals to 20%
• the level of standard deflection signal equals to 50% of the nominal value.
The identification signal power on a 150 ohms load must not be less than 100 mW (voltage of
3.88 V).
(14) The ILS – LOC standard deflection signal is a standard test signal for the localizer receiver
whose difference in the modulation depth of 80 Hz and 150 Hz signals is equal to 4dB. When
the standard signal is present the deflection is 90 µA + 10%.
NOTE: The LOC receiver deflection range is measured by means of a digital voltmeter
having an internal resistance at the 1V range greater than 1 M ohms. Current
measurement in µA is replaced by voltage measurement with two indicators
connected. The voltage in mV then corresponds to the current in µA.
(15) Switch on all the instruments of the testing equipment as per para 1., except for the power
supply of the navigation set, and let them operative for 30 minutes ( this is not necessary if the
check immediately follows the GPR receiver check per the technological procedure
034.53.D – 3 ).
(16) Prepare the IKGM – L for the check of KRP – ILS. Switch on the 27V + 1V power supply of the
navigation set, switch on the navigation set by means of the volume controller on the navigation
receiver panel, set the function selection switch to ILS position, and after a period of 5 minutes
carry out the following checks.
(17) Set a frequency of 110.3 MHz + 1kHz (measured by the meter ) on the simulator, and a
frequency of 110.3 MHz on the navigation receiver panel.
Measure the error of centre position setting as follows:
• Set the HF signal level to 1mV + 10%, the modulation depth of the 90 Hz and 150 Hz
modulation signals to 20%, and then set the supply voltage successively to 23V, 27V and
30V + 0.5V. Set the voltage to 27V + 1V after the measurement is finished.
• Set the HF signal level, modulated 90 Hz and 150 Hz, with 20% modulation depth,
successively to 50 µV, 1mV and 10 mV + 10%.
• Set the HF signal level to 1mV + 10% and vary the modulation depth from 18% to 22%.
The centre position setting error must comply with para 10 in all the cases.
EFFECTIVITY
034.53.00
L 410 UVP-E Page: 1312
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 38
WATER / WASTE

Section Section
Subject Subject
Title page - - 038.30.00 15 Dec 10/20

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 16 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11 17 Dec 10/20
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20 18 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11 19 Dec 10/20
3 Nov 1/11 20 Dec 10/20
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 302 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11 303 Nov 1/11
038.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
038.30.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11
6 Nov 1/11
7 Nov 1/11
8 Nov 1/11
9 Nov 1/11
10 Nov 1/11
11 Nov 1/11
12 Nov 1/11
13 Dec 10/20
14 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 38
WATER / WASTE
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
MM is reissued on Nov 1/11. This contains revision No. 1
2. 038-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
038-Record of 1 - -
Revision L-410/003d Dec 10/20
038-Contents 1 - -
038.30.00 302, 403 13 to 20 -

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 38
WATER / WASTE
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
WASH (if installed) 038.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Check of wash basin, hoses and tank fixing 301
Check of the function of the discharge valve 301
WASTE DISPOSAL 038.30.00 1 ALL
Toilet with collecting vessel-version A (fig. 1) 1
(if installed)
Toilet with collecting bag - version B (fig. 2) 3
(if installed)
Discharging toilet - version C (fig. 3, 4) (if installed) 5
PORTA POTTI 335 Chemical toilet - (fig. 5, 6, 7) - 8
(if installed)
PORTA POTTI 465 Chemical toilet - (fig. 5, 6, 8) - 12
(if installed)
PORTA POTTI 365 toilet - (fig. 9, 10, 11) - (if 13
installed)
Servicing 301
Inspection of the toilet and its equipment 301
Check of toilet condition and of its fixing. Check of 303
venting condition
Removal and installation of the toilet 401
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. PORTA POTTI 365 toilet - (fig. 9, 10, 11) - (if installed)

Porta Potti 365 portable toilet produced by Thetford Company is installed on the airplane.
The toilet is installed between frame No. 19a and No. 21 on the RH fuselage side (see Fig. 10) or
between frames No. 18 and 19a on the RH fuselage side (see Fig. 11).
Toilet consists of two detachable sections, the waste-holding tank and the flush-water tank. Waste-
holding tank represents bottom part of toilet. Toilet flushing is provided by means of pump. Waste
maximum level is secured by means of indication for timed emptying of the waste holding tank.
NOTE: For other information's and details see Thetford User Manual.
Before toilet using is necessary to prepare the toilet for using according to the steps (A) Preparing
waste-holding tank and (B) Preparing flush-water tank.
After the toilet has been prepared open and then close valve blade of emptying spout while the
removing seat and cover remain closed (this releases excess pressure). Flush toilet by using the pump.
After toilet using open valve blade by handle removing, flush toilet by pushing of pump and closing the
valve blade.
It is recommended to check waste holding tank after each flight day or when toilet was used to prevent
its overfill. Empty waste holding tank if necessary. When waste holding tank level indicator starts to
deflect from green field to red field, then only 3 liters of free volume remain in the waste holding tank.
Then it is necessary to empty the waste holding tank immediately. Disconnect toilet and take waste
holding tank to an authorized waste disposal area (normal toilet or sink) to empty it. Put the waste
holding tank on its side and turn the emptying spout upwards for waste holding tank handling.
Unscrew rotating emptying spout and then empty waste holding tank, during the process keep vent
button pressed to avoid splashing. Press vent button only when emptying spout is pointing downwards.
After the tank emptying flush the waste tank out with clean water, if necessary prepare the toilet for
application.
NOTE: Preparing for use, toilet storage, use during winter, activities and maintenance see Thetford
User Manual.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 13
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 9 MAIN PARTS OF THE PORTA POTTI 365

(1) Cover; (2) Seat; (3) Toilet bowl; (4) Water filler cap; (5a) Piston pump or
(5b) Bellow pump (depends on model); (6) Pour out spout; (7) Cap pour out spout;
(8) Lip seal; (9) Vent seal; (10) Vent button; (11) Valve handle; (12) Storage for toilet fluids;
(13) Level indicator waste-holding tank (depends on model); (14) Clasp
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 14
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Preparing waste-holding tank (after toilet removal from its location - according to the section
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(1) Slide the latch to the leftt and remove flush water tank from waste holding tank.
(2) Turn the pour out spout upward.
(3) Unscrew the cap pour out spout.
(4) Fill the waste-holding tank with max. 3 litres clean water. Add the any Thetford Aqua Kem
agent to waste-holding tank.
(5) Turn the emptying spout back into the position, put the cap back on.
(6) Put the both parts of toilet together by pressing the flush water tank on the waste holding tank.
CAUTION: NEVER ADD TOILET ADDITIVES DIRECTLY VIA THE BLADE AS THIS COULD
DAMAGE THE LIP SEAL OF THE WASTE-HOLDING TANK. ONLY FILL THE
WASTE-HOLDING TANK VIA THE POUR OUT SPOUT.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 15
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Preparing flush-water tank

(7) Unscrew the cap of the flush-water tank. Verify that the cap is equipped with the hole dia
2mm. This hole is necessary for pressure change elimination at the any flight modes.
(8) Fill flush-water tank with max. 12 litres clean water. Add the any Thetford Aqua Rinse agent.
(9) Screw the cap of the flush-water tank.
C. Using of the toilet

Opening the blade.
The toilet may be used with the blade open or closed. To open the blade, pull the valve handle as
described. Always close the blade after use.
Follow the instructions on label located on inner side of toilet door for use of the toilet.
Flushing the toilet.
You can achieve the most effective flush by operating the pump with three or four short flushes.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 16
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ORDINARY TOILET PAPER, AS THIS MAY CAUSE CLOGGING.
D. Emptying waste-holding tank

(10) Disconnect toilet, after toilet removal from its location and turn the pour out spout upwards on
the waste-holding tank.
(11) Unscrew the cap pour out spout.
(12) Take waste holding tank to an authorized waste disposal area (or normal toilet). To empty
splashing, press and the vent button with your thumb while the pour out spout is pointing
downwards.
(13) Fill the waste-holding tank with max. 3 litres clean water for flushing.
(14) Shake the waste-holding tank.
(15) Empty waste holding tank through pour out spout.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 17
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Emptying flush-water tank

(16) Disconnect the flush-water tank from the waste-holding tank.
(17) Unscrew the cap of the flush-water tank.
(18) Empty flush-water tank if you don’t expect to use your toilet for a long (winter) period. First
empty the tank through the water fill opening, then, to empty the tank completely, pump the last
drops of water out of the pump.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 18
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 10 INSTALLATION OF PORTA POTTI 365 TOILET BETWEEN FRAME No. 19a AND No. 21
(1) Porta Potti 365 Toilet - Ord. No. 96633048, (2) E3 Compression Latch
E3-59-12 – Ord. No. 39030598 – 6 pcs, (3) B406165N Mounting panel,
(4) M5x8 BN500 Bolt – Ord. No. 31074160 – 10 pcs
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 19
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 11 INSTALLATION OF PORTA POTTI 365 TOILET BETWEEN FRAME No. 18 AND 19a
(1) Porta Potti 365 Toilet - Ord. No. 96633047, (2) E3 Compression Latch
E3-59-12 – Ord. No. 39030598 – 6 pcs, (3) B406206N Mounting panel,
(4) M5x8 BN500 Bolt – Ord. No. 31074160 – 10 pcs
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 20
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WASTE DISPOSAL
SERVICING
1. Inspection of the toilet and its equipment

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Pail
B. Materials Water with added deodorant
C. Tools Spanner 8x10 CSN 23 0611.6

Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Toilet with collecting vessel-version A (fig. 1) (if installed)
(a) Check the toilet and its equipment. The following is not permitted: soiled seat and/or its
neighborhood, soiled vessel and dish including the lid and the floor around the toilet.
(b) Wash soiled components with warm water with temperature up to 50°C into which deodorant
has been added.
(2) Toilet with collecting bag - version B (fig. 2) (if installed)
(a) Wash soiled places with water with admixture of detergent.
(b) Check fixing of the toilet by tightening four screws with a CSN 23 0611.6 spanner 8x10.
(c) Check the cleanness of the WC bucket, and/or remove it, wash it with hot water with admixture
of detergent, dry it and put it on its place and shut the toilet.
(3) Discharging toilet version C (fig. 3) (if installed)
(a) Check the toilet fixing. In case the screw tightening is insufficient (4 pieces), tighten the loose
screws by means of a CSN 230611.6 spanner 8x10.
(b) Check the cleanliness of the toilet, including the dish. Wash soiled places with warm water
with admixture of detergent.
(4) PORTA POTTI 335 Chemical toilet (figs. 6 and 7) (if installed)
(a) Check the toilet fixing.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 301
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) PORTA POTTI 465 Chemical toilet (figs. 6 and 8) (if installed)
(b) Install / Replace batteries (if necessary)
• In case of batteries discharge replace them with a new ones.
• Remove battery pack by pushing on bottom and pulling straight up (see Fig. 301).
FIG. 301 INSTALL / REPLACE BATTERIES (PORTA POTTI 465 CHEMICAL TOILET ONLY)
• Replace all of the 6 batteries at one time (Use only "AA" Cell alkaline batteries).
WARNING: WITHIN THE REPLACEMENT OF THE MONO-CELL BATTERIES IN THE

BATTERY PACK BE SURE THE POLARITY OF CELLS IS SET
PROPERLY.
• After the replacement has been performed push the pack back into the toilet flush
pump in the way the latch mechanism could lock together with the pump cut out.
(c) Check the cleanliness of the toilet, including the dish. Wash soiled places with warm water
(6) PORTA POTTI 365 toilet (figs. 9, 10 and 11) (if installed)
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
remove sleeve pos. 6. Toilet sleeve installation is performed by reverse

procedure.
(b) Toilet installation
• Put on toilet to the box pos. 4.
• Attach holders pos. 3 to the toilet sleeve and lift and press them to the toilet. Holders
safety-catch must snap.
(5) PORTA POTTI 465 Chemical toilet (if installed)
(a) Toilet removal
• Separate toilet cover pos. 1 - refer to the fig. 8 in this section - from the attachment
points in the back part of toilet with help of fingers.
• Release quarter-turn fasteners pos. 2 with screwdriver size 6.5 x 150 mm and remove
mounting panel pos. 3.
• Pull out toilet from its location.
• Perform the toilet installation by the reverse procedure than toilet removal as described
above.
(6) PORTA POTTI 365 toilet (if installed)
(a) Toilet removal
• Release E3 Compression Latch (pos. 2 – refer to the fig. 10 or 11 in this section) with
flat screwdriver and remove mounting panel pos. 3.
• Pull out toilet from its location.
• Perform the toilet installation by the reverse procedure than toilet removal as described
above.
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
038.30.00
ALL Page: 404
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51
STRUCTURES

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 051.10.00 9 Nov 1/11

2 Nov 1/11 051.11.00 1 Mar 30/16
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Mar 30/16
2 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Mar 30/16
Contents 1 Mar 30/16 302 Mar 30/16
2 Nov 1/11 303 Mar 30/16
051.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 304 Mar 30/16
Servicing 301 May 30/14 306 Mar 30/16
302 May 30/14 307 Mar 30/16
303 May 30/14 308 Mar 30/16
304 May 30/14 309 Mar 30/16
305 May 30/14 310 Mar 30/16
306 May 30/14 311 Mar 30/16
307 May 30/14 312 Mar 30/16
308 May 30/14 313 Mar 30/16
309 Nov 1/11 314 Mar 30/16
310 Nov 1/11 315 Mar 30/16
051.10.00 1 Nov 1/11 316 Dec 10/20
3 Nov 1/11 318 Mar 30/16
4 Nov 1/11 319 Mar 30/16
5 Nov 1/11 320 Mar 30/16
6 Nov 1/11 321 Mar 30/16
7 Nov 1/11 322 Mar 10/17
8 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
051.11.00 323 Mar 10/17

Servicing 324 Mar 10/17
325 Feb 23/18
326 Feb 23/18
051.20.00 1 Dec 10/20
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
5 Mar 30/16
6 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51
STRUCTURES
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
4 051-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
051-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
051-Contents 1 - -
051.00.00 301 to 308 - -
051.10.00 301 - -
5 051-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
051-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
051-Contents 1 - - L410UVP-E/225d Mar 30/16
051.11.00 - 1 to 2 -
- 301 to 322 -
051.20.00 5 - -
6 051-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
051-Record of 1 - - L410UVP-E/236d Mar 10/17
Revisions
051.11.00 322 323 to 324 -
7 051-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
051-Record of 1 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
Revisions
051.11.00 - 325 to 326 -
8 051-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
051-Record of 1 - -
051.11.00 316 - -
051.20.00 1 - -
EFFECTIVITY 051-RECORD OF REVISIONS

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
EFFECTIVITY 051-RECORD OF REVISIONS

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 308 SAMPLE OF CORROSION INHIBITING COMPOUNDS APPLICATION ON DAMAGED PAINT
EFFECTIVITY
051.11.00
ALL Page: 315
Mar 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Indoor application of the compounds (CIC) – Protective treatment of the inner areas of the wing.
A. Material:
Name AI Identifier Pcs/acft

Cotton cloth 83001393 20
Technical petrol, 1 liter 82132811 1
Penetration coating Ardrox AV 8, UBS can, 1 liter 82055138 7
Masking tape, width 50 mm, 100 m 88311017 1
Sealing - Profile 1624 (PR 303-2), (as needed) 5 m 81733032 1
Fuel gauge sealing (H3471) 98110916 8
Packing (fuel level transmitter) B560560N 2
Sealing (filling neck) B560395N 2
Upper suspension of the fuel tanks B660074N 42
Profile sealing (wing tip tank – wing) (as needed) B008096N 2
Paint brush, width 1” 89010501 6
Bent paint brush – long, width 1” 89010101 3
Spray gun (UBS thread) with hose extension (different - -
lengths)
Air pressure supply (for spray gun) - -
Light source – portable lamp - -
Bolt (collect fuel tank cover) B660206N 10
Hose 1U 12-15 TU-38-005, 1 m 81476112 1
Hose 6/12, ISO 4639-1 FUP 386, 1 m 81479612 1
Hose 8/13 ČSN 635387, 1 m 81470008 1
Filter screen ADTEC 190 µm 83033095 10
(a) Preparation Works.
• Works should be performed in covered hangar with possibility of temperature control and
air moisture regulation.
• Airplane must be electrically grounded.
• Discharge all fuel from fuel tanks according to the AMM section 012.10.00 and
subsequently ventilate the fuel vapor from the fuel tanks. Respect safety instructions for
fuel handling.
• Extend wing flaps to maximal extension angle.
• Lift the airplane on the hydraulic lifting jacks according to the AMM section 007.00.00
and support wing by the supporting stands.
EFFECTIVITY
051.11.00
ALL Page: 316
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRFRAME PARTS INTERCHANGEABILITY

1. General
Interchangeability criterion of components, parts, aircraft subassemblies and assemblies as well as of all
built-in instruments and devices makes the so called coefficient of interchangeability (K V ) that is given by
the relation:
Tm
KV =
To
where Tm means the working capacity of removal and reinstallation work on replacement of the component
(in standard hours) while To means the total working capacity when replacing the component (in standard
hours, too). For the total working capacity there holds good the relation
To = Tp + Tm
where Tp means the working capacity of matching works when replacing the component (expressed in
standard hours).
There follows from the above stated that components which do not need to be matched on replacement
have K V = 1. Parts which must be matched have the coefficient less than 1. The higher is the working
capacity of the matching works the lower is the interchangeability coefficient.
2. Interchangeability of components
From the viewpoint interchangeability all the components of the L410 UVP-E, -E9, -E20 aircraft are
classified into two groups:
Components with the coefficient of interchangeability equal to 1 are classed into the first group.
Components with coefficient of interchangeability lower then 1, i.e. such which need a certain matching
before installation on the aircraft, belong to the second group.
A. Components with Coefficient of Interchangeability equal to 1:
Aircraft manufacturer guarantees the interchangeability coefficient equal to 1 for:
• all machined parts
• all pressed rubber parts
• all seals
• all machined weldments, pressings and castings of metal
• all rendor instruments and devices and their parts as well
• all other removable airframe sections, assemblies and subassemblies (tubular and flexible pull
rods, bonding strips, armored tubes, pipelines, seats, assembling and inspection holes) with the
exception of those stated in subsection C. - Parts with coefficient of interchangeability less than 1.
EFFECTIVITY
051.20.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Survey of parts with coefficient of interchangeability 1:
No. Name of part Type (Drwg. No.) See Chapter
1. Engine M 601 E 071

2. Wing (without fairings) B 524 200 N 057
3. Aileron, LH+RH B 025 601 P/L 057
4. Aileron trim tab B 025 820 N 057
5. Stabilizer B 032 501 N 055
(changed up to the
Fig. No. B 532 210 P/L)
6. Elevator, LH+RH B 533 200 P/L 055
7. Elevator trim tab, LH+RH +B 533 203 P/L 055
B 533 220 P/L
8. Fin B 030 570 N 055
9. Rudder B 531 200 N 055
10. Rudder trim tab +B 531 203 N 055
B 531 204N
11. Main landing gear B 055 210 P/L 032
12. Mechanical main landing gear lock, LH+RH B 055 140 P/L 032
13. Nose landing gear B 555 310 N 032
14. Engine mount N 061 000 N 071
15. Pilot's seat RH, LH B 081 120 P/L 025
(changed up to the
Fig. No. B 581 670 P/L)
16. Passenger's double seat B 081 013 N 025
B 581 668 N
17. Passenger's single seat B 081 014 N 025
B 581 667 N
18. Side window XL 410.1650-01 056
19. Glazing panel, LH+RH L 410.1142-02, 1141-02 056
20. Connecting necks (couplings) - 029
21. Engine air intake pipeline - 030
021
22. Stairs B 596 281 N 052
23. Manual control assy B 035 250 N 027
24. Foot control assy B 036 240 N 027
25. Emergency tank B 057 430 N 029
26. Collector fuel tank LH+RH 621 1232 028
621 1242
27. Middle fuel tank, LH+RH XL 410.6622, 6612 028
28. Outer fuel tank, LH+RH XL 410.6623, 6613 028
29. Screen XL 410.7122-04 033
EFFECTIVITY
051.20.00
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52
DOORS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 052.12.00 401 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 052.20.00 1 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 May 30/14 6 Nov 1/11
2 May 30/14 7 Nov 1/11
052.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 8 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 10 Nov 1/11
052.10.00 1 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Dec 10/20 402 Nov 1/11
302 Dec 10/20 052.30.00 1 Nov 1/11
Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/20 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
052.11.00 1 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11
052.12.00 1 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11 403 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11 404 Nov 1/11
6 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
052.50.00 1 Nov 1/11

3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
052.60.00 1 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
052.70.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
052.80.00 1 Nov 1/11
102 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11
402 Dec 10/20
403 Dec 10/20
404 Nov 1/11
405 Nov 1/11
406 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52
DOORS
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
3 052-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
052-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
052.10.00 301 to 302 - -
052.30.00 301 - -
052.70.00 301 - -
052.80.00 301 - -
4 052-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
052-Record of 1 - -
Revisions
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
052.10.00 301, 302, 401 - -
052.20.00 301 - -
052.80.00 402, 403 - -

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER / CREW
SERVICING
1. Check of the main door and emergency exit door and their suspensions
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment No. 6 Slide-in magnifying glass;
Portable lamp (e.g. L 410.9618);
Stairs (e.g. B097300N)
B. Materials dia 10 Seal (3 pcs) (Ord. No. 87194008) – if installed;

NTN-012-4.3 Cable eye (Ord. No. 39646643) – if
installed; Silicone oil;
dia 0.5 mm 11343.0 - 1 m Locking wire – if installed;
Graphite (or WD-40 Multipurpose product)
C. Tools 8x160 No. 698 Screwdriver;

No. 2470 Leading tongs

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Put the stairs (e.g. B097300N) to the emergency exit door.
(2) Check the proper function of the entrance door closing and locking. Lubricate the lock with
graphite (apply small amount of graphite upon the key, slide the key into the lock and turn the
key in the lock several times both ways) or with WD-40 Multipurpose product.
NOTE: The lock must not be lubricated with oil in any case.
(3) Check the entrance and cargo door sealing for damage. Lubricate the sealing with silicone oil.
(4) Check if the lock rods and latch are well lubricated.
(5) Check the main door if the rivets and screws are not loosened, especially in the zone of the
hinge, if the hinge wire is secured with retaining rings.
(6) Check the main door for cracks and for other damages.
(7) Check the main door closing lever for damage, its fixing, play and the spring rigidity on the
safety pin.
(8) Check the function of opening and closing the emergency exit door.
NOTE: For this check it is necessary to remove the seal – if installed. Return the seal after
the inspection.
(9) Check the function of the latch (if installed) for closing the door from the pilot's side.
EFFECTIVITY
052.10.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Check the sealing around the emergency exit door. Lubricate the sealing with silicone oil.
(11) Check the emergency exit door for cracks, for loose rivets and screws fixing the hinges and
upholstery or for other damages.
(12) Check the entry door frame and emergency exit doors frames on fuselage.
• corrosion
• cracks
• loosened rivets
• any deformations
In case of found defect, make the photo documentation and consult further process with
manufacturer of airplane.
(13) Put the seal on handle cover and emergency exit handle.
EFFECTIVITY
052.10.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER / CREW
1. Removal of the main door

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Auxiliary platform
C. Tools Wrenches, screw drivers of needed sizes

from the tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) Open the entrance door, release the entrance door strut by releasing it from fittings (16)
(see fig. 3 in section 052.12.00), remove the retaining ring and the washer.
(2) Remove the entrance and cargo door bonding strips from the door frame - it is on the upper
door frame.
(3) Open the cargo door (2) after releasing the latch pin (3) and the pin (11) of the locking rod (8)
(see fig. 1 in section 052.11.00).
(4) Remove the retaining rings off the hinge wire. Release sequentially the cargo door and the
entrance door by pulling out the wire.
(5) Put the entrance and the cargo doors upon a suitable auxiliary platform to prevent their
damage.
2. Installation of the main door

B. Materials C 1005 (0080) Lacquer

No. 100 Emery cloth
C. Tools Wrenches and screwdrivers of needed dimensions

from the tool kit
Brush (size 8)
EFFECTIVITY
052.10.00
ALL Page: 401
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Procedures
(1) Position the entrance and cargo doors on the fuselage and secure them with the hinge wire.
Secure the hinge wire with retaining rings.
(2) Clean the places for conductive interconnection to metallic luster and install the bonding strip.
Coat the cleaned places for bonding strip and the screw head with lacquer.
(3) Close the cargo door (2) and secure it by means of the latch pin (3) and the locking rod (8)
pin (11) (see fig. 1 in section 052.11.00).
(4) Slide the strut upon the entrance door and fix it to fittings by means of the washer and retaining
ring.
(5) Close the entrance door and check its function.
EFFECTIVITY
052.10.00
ALL Page: 402
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY EXIT
SERVICING
1. Emergency exit door check

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment No. 6 Slide in magnifying glass;
Portable lamp (e.g. L 410.9618)
B. Materials dia 10 Seal (3 pcs) (Ord. No. 87194008) – if installed;

NTN-012-4.3 Cable eye (Ord. No. 39646643) – if
installed;
dia 0.5 mm 11343.0 - 1 m Locking wire – if installed;
Graphite (or WD-40 Multipurpose product)
C. Tools No. 698 Screwdriver, 8x160;

No. 2470 Leading tongs

Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Emergency exit door in the cockpit:
• Check if the emergency exit door in the cockpit closes and opens properly:
NOTE: To do this, it is necessary to remove the lead seal – if installed. After the check
provide the door with the seal again.
• Check for correct function of the locking mechanism of the emergency exit door from the inside.
• Inspect and check the function of the emergency exit door lock. Lubricate the lock with
graphite (apply small amount of graphite on the key, slide the key intro the lock and turn it
several times both ways) or with WD-40 Multipurpose product.
NOTE: The lock must not be lubricated with oil in any case.
• Check if the door sealing is not damaged.
• Check the door for cracks, loosened rivets, loosened screws of the hinges and upholstery
panel, and for deformations occurrence.
(2) Emergency exit door in the passenger compartment.
• Inside the pilot's cockpit and passenger compartment check the locking pin with flag of the
emergency exit door.
EFFECTIVITY
052.20.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Inside the pilot's cockpit and passenger compartment the locking pin with flag of the
emergency exit door must be positioned into the locking hole.
EFFECTIVITY
052.20.00
ALL Page: 302
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LANDING GEAR
1. Removal of nose landing gear rear door

C. Tools Screwdriver
Wrenches of respective dimensions from the tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) Disconnect the bonding strip from the door.
(2) Disconnect the door control linkage.
(3) Remove the split pins, washers and pins from the door hinges and remove the door.
2. The nose landing gear rear door installation

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 0.05 to 1.00x100 CSN 25 1670 Feeler gauges
B. Materials B 70 or NEFRAS or CSN 65 6542 Petrol

CIATIM 201 Lubr. grease
Fine emery cloth
C 1005/0080 Lacquer
C. Tools Clips
Flat file
Wrenches of respective sizes from the tool kit
Soft pencil
Painting brush
E. Procedures
CAUTION: THIS WORK PROCEDURE CONCERNS THE INSTALLATION OF NEW (SPARE)

DOOR WHICH IS DELIVERED WITH FITTING ALLOWANCE.
WHEN INSTALLING THE ORIGINAL DOOR OMIT OPERATIONS 3 TO 7.
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks (see chapter 007).
(2) Fix the door into hinges and secure it with pins.
EFFECTIVITY
052.80.00
ALL Page: 401
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Close the nose landing gear.
(4) Close the door, mark-out all the circumference for cutting-off, leaving the following gaps:
• At the frame No. 5 2 mm

• At the contact with front door 1 mm
• At the contacts with fuselage skin 2.5 mm
• At the contact with small tiltable cover 2 mm
(5) Remove the pins, remove the door, cut it off according to mark-line, clean it up using a file.
(6) Wash sliding surfaces of the bearings with cleaning petrol, dry them up and lubricate them with
the lubrication grease CIATIM 201.
(7) Fix the door into hinges again and secure it with pins.
(8) Clean-up the place for earthing to metallic luster and fix the bonding strip. Paint the cleaned up
places for bonding strip and the screw head with lacquer.
(9) Connect the door control linkage, secure it with the bolt, nut, washer and split pin.
(10) Check the function of the door by several closings and openings. Make fitting, if necessary.
(11) Paint the machined places with paint according to work procedure “Repair of aircraft outer coat“
mentioned in chapter 020.
3. Removal of main landing gear nacelle tilting doors

E. Procedures
NOTE: This work procedure chart is identical both for the RH side and the LH side doors.
(1) Remove the front fiberglass laminated cover on the outer side of the landing gear nacelle, by
means of unscrewing the screws around the circumference.
(2) Disconnect the bonding strip between the hinge on the cover and the control tie rod.
(3) Unlock and disconnect the control tie rod from the hinge on the cover. Fix the tie rod with a string
to the landing gear so that it would not touch the ground.
(4) At the place of locking the piano hinge wires (about in the middle of the hinge) release the split
pins, remove the distance tubes of both ends of the wires and pull the wires out by means of slight
turning with hand.
EFFECTIVITY
052.80.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Main landing nacelle tilting door installation

B. Materials Fine emery cloth; Bearing oil; Colorless lacquer;

B 70 or NEFRAS or CSN 656542 Petrol;
Molyka paste;
2x18 CSN 02 1781.04 Split pin (for control tie rod);
1x10 CSN 021781.04 Split pin (for piano hinge)
E. Procedures
CAUTION: • THIS WORK PROCEDURE CONCERNS THE INSTALLATION OF A NEW (SPARE)

DOOR. THE INSTALLATION IS PERFORMED BY MANUFACTURERS SERVICE
GROUP.
• AIRCRAFT MUST BE LIFTED ON JACKS DURING WORK – SEE CHAPTER 007.
NOTE: This work procedure chart is identical both for the LH side and the RH side doors.
(1) Wash both halves of the hinge and the hinge wires with petrol and lubricate them with MOLYKA
paste.
(2) Extend the landing gear.
(3) Position the door into the piano hinge on the landing gear nacelle, connect the hinge to the hinge
wires and secure the wires at both ends with split pins underlain with the distance tubes removed
when removing the door.
(4) Connect the control tie rod to the hinge on the cover and lock the connection with the split pin.
If needed, adjust the length of the tie rod so that with retracted landing gear the cover would fall
into the nacelle outline without stress.
NOTE: For connection only a prescribed special bolt must be used, manufactured in tolerance
preventing vibrations and knockouts of the connection.
(5) Clean up the place for the bonding strip to metallic luster and screw the bonding strip between
the hinge on the cover and the control tie rod. Paint the connection with lacquer.
(6) Retract and extend the landing gear several times and check the function of the door.
(7) Screw the front fiberglass laminated cover to the landing gear nacelle.
EFFECTIVITY
052.80.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Check the gaps using the vernier caliper:
• at the contact with nacelle leading and trailing parts.......................................4 +− 13 mm
• at the place of contact with the skin on the bottom side at the frame No. 12..8 +− 23 mm
• at the place of contact with the skin on the bottom side at the frame No. 14..8 +− 13 mm
5. Removal of the nose landing gear front door

C. Tools Combination pliers

Screwdriver from the tool kit
E. Procedures
(1) Unscrew the screws fixing the covers (with bonded rubber protections) at the places of the hinges
(2 + 2 pcs) from inside the landing gear bay. Tilt the covers so that the door hinge bolts be accessible.
(2) Unscrew the screw fixing the bonding strip to the LH and the RH door hinge and to the nose
landing gear door.
(3) Disconnect the control linkage of the nose landing gear door.
(4) Unscrew the nuts, remove the washers and the fitted bolts from the hinges of the LH and the RH
doors of the nose landing gear and the remove the door.
6. Installation of the nose landing gear front doors

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 0.05-1.00x100 CSN 251670 Feeler gauges
B. Materials B-70 or NEFRAS or CSN 656542 Petrol

CIATIM 201 Grease
Fine emery cloth
C 1005/0080 Lacquer
C. Tools Clips
Flat file
Soft pencil
Painting brush
Screwdriver from the tool kit
EFFECTIVITY
052.80.00
ALL Page: 404
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 53
FUSELAGE

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 053.10.00 301 May 30/14

2 Dec 10/20 303 May 30/14
Record of Revisions 1 Feb 23/18 304 May 30/14
2 Dec 10/20 053.11.00 1 Nov 1/11
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
2 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 May 30/14 4 Nov 1/11
2 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 401 Nov 1/11
3 May 30/14 402 Feb 23/18
4 Nov 1/11 Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11
053.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 802 Nov 1/11
Servicing 301 Feb 23/18 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
302 May 30/14 3 Nov 1/11
303 May 30/14 4 Nov 1/11
304 May 30/14 053.13.00 1 Feb 23/18
Inspection / Check 601 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
602 Nov 1/11 Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11 302 Feb 23/18
802 Nov 1/11 303 Feb 23/18
803 Nov 1/11 304 Feb 23/18
804 Nov 1/11 305 Feb 23/18
805 Dec 10/20 306 Feb 23/18
807 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
808 Nov 1/11 403 Nov 1/11
053.10.00 1 Nov 1/11 404 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
053.13.00 405 Nov 1/11 053.40.00 301 May 30/14

Removal / Installation 406 Nov 1/11 Servicing 302 May 30/14
053.14.00 1 Nov 1/11 053.50.00 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13 Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13
302 May 30/14 4 Nov 1/11
Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11 5 Nov 1/11
802 Nov 1/11 6 Nov 1/11
803 Apr 5/13 Servicing 301 May 30/14
804 Apr 5/13 302 Nov 1/11
053.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
302 Nov 1/11 404 Nov 1/11
053.21.00 1 Nov 1/11
053.22.00 1 Nov 1/11
053.30.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
302 Dec 10/20
303 May 30/14
304 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11
053.30.01 1 Nov 1/11
053.40.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 53
FUSELAGE
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
MM is reissued on Nov 1/11. This contains revision No. 1
2 053-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages 2
053-List of 1 - -
Revisions
053-Contents 1 - -
2 L410UVP-E/170d Apr 5/13
053.10.00 301 to 304 - -
053.14.00 2 - -
803 to 804 - -
053.50.00 2 - -
3 053-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
053-List of 1 - -
Revisions
053.00.00 301 to 304 - -
053.10.00 301 to 304 - - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
053.14.00 301 to 302 - -

053.20.00 301 - -
053.30.00 301 to 303 - -
053.40.00 301 to 302 - -
053.50.00 301 - -
4 053-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
053-List of 1 - -
Revisions
053-Contents 2 - -
L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
053.00.00 301 - -
053.11.00 2, 402 - -
053.13.00 1 301 to 306 -
053.50.00 401 to 402 - -

ALL Page: 1
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
5 053-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
053-List of 2 - -
053.00.00 805 to 806 - -

053.30.00 301 to 302 - -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Replacement of ice-protection strips

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Ceramic tray; Stirring spattle;
Rubber gloves; Balance;
B. Materials B100161N - LH Ice-protection strip;

B100162N - RH Ice-protection strip;
CSN 66 2118 Toluen lacquer ... 0.80 kg;
Hypalon 20 rubber ... 0.15 kg or
EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 (Ord. No. 82154122);
Acetone ... 1 l;
CSN 80 4110 Sterile cotton ... 0.5 kg;
width 25.4 Self-sticking tape ... 5 m;
Emery cloth;
U 2054 polyurethane paint;
U 7002 hardener; U 6002 thinner;
VUKOPLAST D 420 adhesive or
3M Scotch-Weld 847 Nitrile High Performance
Rubber and Gasket Adhesive 0.5 kg
C. Tools Painting brush

Knife
E. Procedures
(1) Put the suitable stairs (e.g. B097300N) to the place of ice-protection strips.
(2) Prepare vessels, tools and necessary material according to the material list.
(3) Tear off the damaged ice-protection strips from the fuselage LH and RH sides.
(4) Clean up the surface carefully, removing the rubber residuals and adhesive using cotton and
solvents.
(5) In the place of the torn-off ice-protection strip repair the damaged paint with U 2054 polyurethane
paint of desired color.
Paint preparation:
4 weight parts of U 2054 polyurethane paint, 1 part of U 7002 hardener. Mix it properly and let it
rest for about 20 min. In case of necessity, when hardening has already started, arrange the
viscosity of the enamel by the U 6002 thinner.
(6) Roughen the area for gluing on the aircraft and on the rubber ice-protection strip by emery cloth.
EFFECTIVITY
053.00.00
ALL Page: 805
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Prepare the VUKOPLAST D 420 adhesive according to work procedure given in chapter 20
(without RF Desmodur).
(8) Prepare the Hypalon paint by dissolving Hypalon 20 in toluene in the ratio 1 : 4 of the weight
parts - dissolve the paint 48 hrs. before use.
(9) The area for gluing must be made free of oil and acetone.
(10) Limit the area on the fuselage LH and RH side with glue tape.
(11) Prepare the D 420 VUKOPLAST adhesive with RF Desmodur in the ratio of 100 : 10 weight parts.
(12) Apply one layer of the adhesive upon the skin of the fuselage LH side and rubber ice protection
strip, let it dry for 10 minutes.
Apply the second layer and before it gets dry, set the lower edge with the help of another worker
and successively all the length of the LH side of the cover sheet border.
Set up individual points of the strip edge and finally press all surface with use of the roller
(punch through the bubbles with needle).
(13) On the rubber ice-protection strip on the fuselage RH side measure and cut the cutouts for the
door hinges.
Before drying the second layer of the adhesive set-up the lower edge with respective alignment
and press it successively around the lower door hinge.
Set up into the cover sheet border including the upper hinge cut-out. Successively set up individual
points of the strip edge and finally press all the area (punch through the bubbles).
(14) After sticking to degrease the surface of the rubber ice-protection strip with acetone.
Remove the limiting strips and clean up the overflows.
(15) Paint the surface of the ice-protection strips with Hypalon or EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27.
Let it dry for 12 hrs. at the temperature of 15°C at min.
(16) Put the stairs to their place.
(17) Store the used vessels, tools and unused material.
6. Reaming of wing - fuselage attachment

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Inside calliper
Service platform
Wing support
Drilling machine
B. Materials Rape - seed oil
EFFECTIVITY
053.00.00
ALL Page: 806
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PLATES / SKIN
SERVICING
1. Inspection of the fuselage skin


Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Put the stairs (e.g. B097365N) to the aircraft fuselage.
(2) Walk around the aircraft observing the fuselage skin.
• damage especially at joints (cracks, skin performance, sharp grooves, corrosion)
• deformations of the skin marked with sharp breaking, or mark line
2. Paint renovation of the rubber ice-protection strips on the fuselage

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Vessel for protective paint;
Vessel for toluene;
Flat painting brush;
B. Materials Hypalon 20-Klei 23CA-TU-38 I 05290-75

or EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 (Ord. No. 82154122);
CSN 662118 Toluene;
Emery cloth No. 15;
CSN 80 4730 Hairless textile Molino type 393/130

Periodical
EFFECTIVITY
053.30.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Procedures
(1) Inspect, before paint renovation, the rubber ice-protection strips on both side of fuselage.
Unsticking of the edges of the rubber ice-protection strips is not permitted.
Do the action for fault elimination.
(2) Prepare protective paint HYPALON 20 or EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 according to work procedure
given in chapter 053, vessels, emery paper, toluene and put the stairs (e.g. B097365N) to the
place of rubber ice-protection strips.
NOTE: • Observe rules for working with inflammables of the class No. 1 when working with
HYPALON or EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 and toluene.
• Observe rules for working with toxic agents when working with HYPALON or
EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 and toluene.
(3) Grind the margins of damaged paint coating with emery cloth No. 150.
(4) In case that all the paint coating surface is cracked, remove old paint with toluene with the help
of hairless textile.
(5) The surface of ice-protection strips on the fuselage should be cleaned with toluene before painting.
(6) Paint the ice protection strips on the fuselage with continuous layer of HYPALON or
EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 and let it dry for min. 12 hrs. at the temperature of min 15°C.
(7) Store the vessels and aids used for renovation of the protective paint. Wash the painting brush
from HYPALON or EK-Gummifarbe 6667/27 in toluene.
3. Check of the fuselage skin at the zone of propeller rotation

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Slide-in magnifying glass No. 6
Rule

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Put the stairs (e.g. B097300N) to the proximity of ice-protection strips.
(2) Check if impressions on the skin due to flying ice are not bigger.
EFFECTIVITY
053.30.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 055.00.00 803 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Approved Repairs 804 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 805 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Mar 30/16 806 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 055.10.00 1 Feb 23/18
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
Contents 1 Feb 23/18 302 Dec 10/20
2 Dec 10/20 303 Mar 30/16
055.00.00 1 Feb 23/18 304 May 31/12
Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
3 Feb 23/18 402 Dec 10/20
4 Feb 23/18 403 Dec 10/20
5 Feb 23/18 404 Dec 10/20
6 Feb 23/18 055.20.00 1 Feb 23/18
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
302 May 30/14 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
303 Feb 23/18 402 Feb 23/18
304 May 30/14 403 Feb 23/18
305 Dec 10/20 404 Feb 23/18
306 Feb 23/18 Inspection / Check 601 May 30/14
307 Mar 30/16 602 May 30/14
308 Mar 30/16 603 May 30/14
Removal / Installation 401 Mar 30/16 604 Nov 1/11
402 Nov 1/11 055.30.00 1 Feb 23/18
Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
802 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
055.30.00 3 Feb 23/18

Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
402 Dec 10/20
403 Dec 10/20
404 Dec 10/20
055.40.00 1 Feb 23/18
3 Feb 23/18
4 Feb 23/18
402 Feb 23/18
403 Feb 23/18
404 Feb 23/18
405 Feb 23/18
406 Feb 23/18
Inspection / Check 601 May 30/14
602 May 30/14
603 May 30/14
604 Nov 1/11
055.50.00 1 Mar 30/16
302 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
3 055-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
055-List of 1 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/145d May 31/12
055-Contents 1 - -
055.10.00 302 303 -
- 304 -
4 055-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
055-List of 1 - -
Revisions
055.00.00 301 to 304 - - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
055.10.00 301 to 303 - -

055.20.00 301 to 302 - -
601 to 603 - -
055.40.00 601 to 603 - -
5 055-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
055-List of 1 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/225d Mar 30/16
055.00.00 - 305 to 308 -
401 - -
055.10.00 302 to 303 - -
055.50.00 1 - -

ALL Page: 1
Mar 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
6 055-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
055-List of 2 - -
Revisions
055.00.00 1 to 4 5 to 6 -
303, 305, 306 - -
055.10.00 1 to 2 - -
401 to 404 - - L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
055.20.00 1 to 2 - -
401 to 404 - -
055.30.00 1 to 2 3 to 4 -
401 to 404 - -
055.40.00 1 to 2 3 to 4 -
401 to 406 - -
055.50.00 2 - -
7 055-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
055-List of 2 - -
Revisions
055-Contents 2 - -
055.00.00 305 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
055.10.00 301 to 302 - -

402 to 404 - -
055.30.00 402 to 404 - -
055.50.00 - 301 to 302 -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
STABILIZERS - GENERAL 055.00.00 1 ALL
General 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Inspection of the tail unit surface 301
Inspection of the elevator and rudder and their 301
fabric skin
The tail unit leading and trailing edges check 303
Inspection of the tooth bands on the trailing edges 303
of tail unit
Check of the play in the suspensions of the 304
elevator and rudder
Inspection of longerons / stringers on the upper 305
side of the horizontal stabilizer from the inner side
of the stabilizer
Replacement of the fabric covering of rudder and 401
elevator
Repair of piano-hinges on the elevator and rudder 801
trim tabs
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 055.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the skin of the stabilizer and the 301
integrity of spot welds
Check of the horizontal stabilizer in the ribs edges 302
Removal of the horizontal stabilizer 401
Installation of the horizontal stabilizer 402
ELEVATOR 055.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Check of the attachment reliability of controlling 301
drums of elevator trimming tabs and of spar web
Inspection of the elevator in the area of the fixing of 301
the control lever
ALL Page: 1
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Removal / Installation 055.20.00 401 ALL
Removal of the elevator 401
Installation of the elevator 402
Removal of the elevator trim tabs 403
Installation of the elevator trim tabs 403
Check of the radial and axial clearance in the 601
elevator hinges
Inspection of elevator (LH, RH) internal surfaces by 601
non-destructive method
VERTICAL STABILIZER 055.30.00 1 ALL
General 1
Removal of the vertical stabilizer 401
Installation of the vertical stabilizer 402
RUDDER 055.40.00 1 ALL
General 1
Removal of the rudder 401
Installation of the rudder 402
Removal of the rudder trim tab 404
Installation of the rudder trim tab 405
Inspection of rudder internal surfaces by non- 601
destructive method
ATTACH FITTINGS 055.50.00 1 ALL
Attach fittings of the stabilizer / fuselage 1
Elevator hinges 1
Hinges of the rudder 2
Hinges of the elevator trim tabs 2
Hinges of the rudder trim tab 2
Servicing 301
Inspection of the bushings of tail unit suspension 301
fittings
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Inspection of longerons / stringers on the upper side of the horizontal stabilizer from the
inner side of the stabilizer
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps;
Endoscope with a probe dia. 8 mm;
B. Materials Blinders; contact glue
D. Referenced information 055.00.00.G

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Prepare the steps to the tail unit and endoscope.
(2) Remove the elevator - refer to the AMM section 055.20.00
(3) Remove the lids on lower side of the horizontal stabilizer and remove the blinders from the
shroud of the horizontal stabilizer
(4) Inspect the longerons / stringers (No. 1 and 2, between ribs No. 3 and 6 - refer to the
fig. 302) with use endoscope on the upper side of the horizontal stabilizer from the inner side of
the stabilizer. Not permitted defects are described in Step (7).
NOTE: Step (5) is valid only for aircraft from Serial Number 2902 inclusive up to 3217
inclusive.
(5) Inspect the rear stringer on lower skin of horizontal stabilizer between ribs No. 3L (LH) and 3P
(RH) - refer to the fig. 303 - with use endoscope from the inner side of the horizontal stabilizer.
Not permitted defects are described in Step (7).
(6) Inspect the upper and lower skin along the stringers on lower and upper side of horizontal
stabilizer along the whole area of the stabilizer. If there is some suspicion of the crack (i.e.
wavy skin or crack of the skin) on the skin inspect that area from the inside as well. There are
defect which are not permitted stated in Step (7).
• cracks
• loosened rivets
• corrosion
• hollows and cracks with sharp edges or cracks
In case of found defect consult further steps with manufacturer.
EFFECTIVITY
055.00.00
ALL Page: 305
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Install the lids and on lower side of the horizontal stabilizer. Install the blinders with use contact
glue on the shroud of the horizontal stabilizer.
(9) Repair the outer paint - refer to the AMM section 020.20.00
(10) Install the elevator - refer to the AMM section 055.20.00.
(11) Put away steps.
FIG. 302 INSPECTION OF LONGERONS / STRINGERS ON THE UPPER SIDE OF THE HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER FROM THE INNER SIDE OF THE STABILIZER
EFFECTIVITY
055.00.00
ALL Page: 306
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
SERVICING
1. Inspection of the skin of the stabilizer and the integrity of spot welds
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steel rule;
Steps (e.g. B097365N)

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Bring the steps (e.g. B097365N) to the tail unit.
(2) Check the upper and bottom skin of the horizontal stabilizer.
Make sure that no defects indicated in point (4) occur on it.
CAUTION: CHECK WITH ESPECIALLY ATTENTION THE AREA BETWEEN RIBS No. 3
UP TO No. 7b – REFER TO THE FIG. 301.
FIG. 301 SAMPLE OF THE SKIN CRACK OCCURENCE
EFFECTIVITY
055.10.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Check the rivet joints whether the rivets are not loosened according to the point (4).
The single loosened rivets may be accepted.
• the crack longer then 40 mm, skin fracture, sharp scratches, corrosion, loosening of more
then 3 rivet (or 3 welds).
Drill up the crack up to 40 mm length with borer dia 3 mm and make sure that the crack does not
grow larger.
(5) Check the spot welds whether they are not damaged and check absence of fatigue cracks.
(6) Check the area of hinges whether there are no cracks.
(7) If is detected any defect (crack, loosened rivet(s) etc.) on the upper and/or lower skin of the
horizontal stabilizer, carry out the check of the stringers of horizontal stabilizer from inner space
with the endoscope, similarly as described in AMM work procedure 055.00.00.G
2. Check of the horizontal stabilizer in the ribs edges

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097365N);
Thorn made of hard rubber

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Bring the steps (e.g. B097365N) to the tail unit.
(2) Check of stabilizer by tapping with a finger (or with a thorn made of hard rubber) on critical
places of lower and upper skin of the stabilizer (especially at the areas of ribs No. 3, 4, 6, 7a,
7b, 9, 10), whether is heard no creaky sound, signalizing possible crack.
Repeat tapping test on the suspected places.
NOTE: Further indications of possible crack occurrence are loosened rivets.
(3) Critical places which are subject to test are on upper and lower skin in riveting line of each rib:
(a) Approximately at the 1/3 and at the 2/3 of the distance between the front and rear spar
(position of stiffeners)
(b) Before the end of stabilizer skin behind the rear spar (rear stiffener)
EFFECTIVITY
055.10.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
1. Removal of the horizontal stabilizer

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 150 CSN 25 1238 Sliding gauge (or equivalent),
0.05 to 1x100 CSN 25 1670 Feeler gauges (or
equivalent),
B960095N (XL 410.9600-02) Assembly mandrels,
B098705N (2 pcs) Screw for lock of the control
cables,
Assembly platform, tie device pulley block, crane
B. Materials B-70 Petrol or NEFRAS or 140/200 CSN 656541 Petrol

∅ 0.8 mm Binding wire
C. Tools Needed tools from the set of tools
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the fairings fuselage-to-stabilizers: front fairing, vertical stabilizer shroud, left and right
rear fairings, left and right upper fairings, left and right lower fairings (refer to the chapter 53).
(2) Remove the rudder - refer to the AMM section 055.40.00 part REMOVAL / INSTALLATION.
(3) Remove the inlet piping of the pneumatic de-icing and the cross distributor. Blind the ends of the
piping and cross distributor. Disconnect the vertical stabilizer electro wiring. Disconnect the HF
antenna holder (if installed) by unscrewing two screws.
(4) Remove the vertical stabilizer - refer to the AMM section 055.30.00 part REMOVAL /
INSTALLATION. Remove the elevator - refer to the AMM section 055.20.00 part REMOVAL /
INSTALLATION. (If a lifting mechanism is used, the removal of the elevator is not necessary).
(5) Remove the pull rod of elevator control passing into the fuselage. Remove the by-pass bridging
of the cable turnbuckles of the elevator trim tab in the fuselage rear part.
(6) Lock the cables at the drums by means of the binding wire or the B098705N screws to prevent
the cable loosening. Disconnect the control cables of the elevator trim tab in the fuselage rear part.
Take the cables out from pulleys. Fasten the cables ends to the next partition by means of the
binding wire.
EFFECTIVITY
055.10.00
ALL Page: 401
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Remove a cover fillet of the horizontal stabilizer at the rear hinges. Remove split pins, nuts, washers
from the horizontal stabilizer front and rear hinges, successively.
Screw the assembly mandrels B960095N (XL 410.9600-02) on the thread of the fitted bolts to the
stop and by easy hammer strokes and with use a duralumin mandrel the bolts pull out, one by
one, from the front and rear hinges.
(8) Wash dismounted jointing material in petrol. Replace the damaged material.
The good one is prepared for further use.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO THE REMOVAL OF THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER FRONT

RIGHT HINGE, MEASURE AND WRITE DOWN GAPS VALUES BETWEEN
THE FUSELAGE HINGES AND HORIZONTAL STABILIZER HINGES.
THE DISMOUNTED SHIM BLOCKS HAVE TO BE CAREFULLY PUT BACK
ON THE SCREW IN THE SAME SEQUENCE AS THEY WERE BEFORE
THE REMOVAL.
2. Installation of the horizontal stabilizer

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment IN-11 Dynamometer (or equivalent);
0.5 to 1.00x100 CSN 251670 Feeler gauges (or
equivalent);
Gauge the = 1 mm dim. 7x300 mm (or equivalent);
150 CSN 251238 Slide caliper (or equivalent);
B960095N (XL 410.9600-02) Assembly mandrel;
A tie device; crane; pulley block; assembly platform
Suitable steps (e.g. B097365N);
12-610-1492 A suspension device
B. Materials B300041N up to B300050N (orig. No. L410.3000-23)

Set of the spacers;
CIATIM 201 or AeroShell Grease 22 or equivalent;
RESISTIN ML Preservative;
HYLOMAR Jointing Compound;
B-70 Petrol or NEFRAS or equivalent for washing;
∅ 0.8 mm Binding wire;
Blinding pieces for the piping;
2x18 CD CSN 02 1781.04 Split pins - 6 pcs
EFFECTIVITY
055.10.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Procedures
(1) Check the horizontal stabilizer front and rear hinges, whether the bushes are not damaged or
squeezed. Squeezed bushes have to be replaced by new ones. Holes of the hinges on the
fuselage and horizontal stabilizer are washed by petrol, dried and conserve with RESISTIN ML
preservative. Mount carefully the horizontal stabilizer suspended on the tie device by means of
a crane on the fuselage, with help of the assembly mandrels put in the bolts.
Heads of the bolts must be installed from the inner side.
(2) By means of the feeler gauges measure the clearance between horizontal stabilizer hinges and
the fuselage and on the horizontal stabilizer on left front hinge and rear hinges except the left bottom
hinge. The minimum distance is 1 mm in direction from the bolts heads and minimum 0.5 mm
from the nuts of all hinges mentioned above. Check the clearance of the right rear bottom hinge
with help of a gauge of dimensions 7x300 mm made of metal sheet s = 1 mm. Tighten strongly
the fitted bolts on the left rear bottom hinge and on the right front hinge.
In order to ensure the gaps between the fittings it is necessary to use the selectable B300041N
up to B300050N (orig. No. L410.3000-23) spacers for the right front hinge of the horizontal
stabilizer - refer to the fig. 401.
(3) Put on washers and slotted nuts on the bolts. Retighten the right front and left rear bottom bolts
with force. Tap on the other bolts for no clearance left, retighten the nuts lightly. Lock all bolts by
means of new 2x18 CD CSN 02 1781.04 split pins. Spray RESISTIN ML preservative into
spaces in hinges joints. The bolts are to be all over coated with RESISTIN ML preservative.
(4) Check whether the trim tabs control cables are mounted in the right way in the pulleys. Unlock
and connect the elevator trim tabs control cables which must be tensioned in accordance with
the work procedure - procedure of tension cables adjustment control – refer to the chapter 27.
Check the cables tension using dynamometer IN – 11 (or equivalent).
(5) Install the cover on the horizontal stabilizer at the rear hinges.
(6) Install the elevator - refer to the AMM section 055.20.00 part REMOVAL / INSTALLATION.
(7) Install the vertical stabilizer - refer to the AMM section 055.30.00 part REMOVAL /
INSTALLATION.
(8) Before connecting the cross distributor of the de-icing system, apply the HYLOMAR Jointing
Compound on its screw joint, retighten the screw joint and lock it by the binding wire of
∅ 0.5 mm and connect the HF antenna by means of two screws (if installed).
(9) Install the rudder - refer to the AMM section 055.40.00 part REMOVAL / INSTALLATION.
EFFECTIVITY
055.10.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Check the gap between the horizontal stabilizer shroud and elevator leading edge in the area of
the rib 2 to 10. It must be min. 2 mm, max. 8 mm and in the area of the rib 1c to 2 it must be min
4 mm. Check the gap between horizontal stabilizer and the box spar of balance of elevator which
is to be min. 5 mm.
(11) Install the fairings fuselage-to-stabilizers: front fairing, vertical stabilizer shroud, left and right
(12) Check all joints and their locking.
Material C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N

EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2
EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131
P/N B300041N B300042N B300043N B300044N B300045N B300046N B300047N B300048N
d [mm] 10.5 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.5
D [mm] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
t [mm] 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Qty 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Material 12071.7 L-VARD.13

CSN 412071 425301.22
P/N B300049N B300050N
d [mm] 11 11
D [mm] 17.5 17.5
t [mm] 0.4 0.6
Qty 2 2
FIG. 401 B300041N UP TO B300050N (ORIG. No. L410.3000-23) SET OF SPACERS
EFFECTIVITY
055.10.00
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VERTICAL STABILIZER
1. Removal of the vertical stabilizer

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment B960316N (L 410.9600-06) Assembly mandrel
Assembly platform
B. Materials B-70 Petrol or NEFRAS or equivalent for washing
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the fairings fuselage-to-stabilizers: front fairing, vertical stabilizer shroud, left and right
(2) Remove the rudder refer to the AMM section 055.40.00 part REMOVAL / INSTALLATION.
(3) Disconnect the coaxial cables of the VHF antenna and the NAV antenna leading from the
fuselage to the coaxial connections and carry out the disconnection of the HF antenna
(if installed).
(4) Disconnect the intake piping of the pneumatic de-icing from the cross distributor and blind the
end part of the tube and cross distributor.
(5) Disconnect the bridging cable on the stabilizer and fuselage.
(6) Remove, successively, the split pins, nuts and washers from the front and rear hinges of the vertical
stabilizer (see the fig. 1). Gradually screw an B960316N (L 410.9600-06) assembly mandrel on
the thread of the rear hinges screws to the stop (the mandrel is a part of the ground equipment –
refer to the chapter 12). Insert a cloth, which will catch spacers, under the left front hinge.
Push out the screws from the rear hinges, by light hammer-knocking on a duralumin mandrel.
After removing the rear screws, in the described way, remove the screws from the front hinges.
CAUTION: THE BOLT IS TO BE POSITIONED CORRECTLY. WHEN HAMMERING OUT

THE BOLT, THE STABILIZER COVER MUST NOT BE DAMAGED.
NOTE: A suitable assembly is necessary platform for removal of the vertical stabilizer.
(7) Wash dismounted jointing material in petrol. Replace the damaged material. The good one is
prepared for further use.
EFFECTIVITY
055.30.00
ALL Page: 401
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: IN COURSE OF THE VERTICAL STABILIZER DISASSEMBLY, TWO WORKERS

MUST TAKE CARE OF ITS CENTER POSITION TO PROTECT FITTING FROM
DAMAGE:
PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF THE VERTICAL STABILIZER LEFT FRONT HINGE,
MEASURE AND WRITE DOWN THE DIMENSIONS BETWEEN THE HINGES
OF THE FUSELAGE AND THE VERTICAL STABILIZER.
THE REMOVAL L 410.3000-24 SPACERS HAVE TO BE CAREFULLY PUT
BACK ON THE SCREW IN THE SAME SEQUENCE AS THEY HAVE BEEN
MOUNTED BEFORE THE DISASSEMBLY.
2. Installation of the vertical stabilizer

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 0.05-1.00x100 CSN 25 1670 Feeler gauges or
equivalent;
150 CSN 25 1238 Slide caliper or equivalent;
B960316N (L 410.9600-06) Assembly mandrel;
B096025N Assembly mandrel;
Assembly platform
B. Materials RESISTIN ML Preservative;

HYLOMAR Jointing Compound;
ALODINE 600 (conductive) or equivalent;
S2318 Primer and U2066 / RAL3020 (red) Paint;
B300061N up to B300068N (orig. No. L410.3000-24)
Set of the spacers; ∅ 0.8 mm Binding wire;
2.5x20 CD CSN 02 1781.04 Split pin - 4 pcs
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the blind from the end part of the intake piping of the pneumatic de-icing.
Before connecting the cross distributor of the de-icing system, apply the HYLOMAR Jointing
Compound on its screw joint, retighten the screw joint and lock it by the binding wire of
dia. 0.8 mm.
(2) Check the vertical stabilizer front and rear hinges if the bushes are not damaged or squeezed.
The holes of the hinges as well as assembly screws have to be cleaned and lubricated with
grease RESISTIN ML.
EFFECTIVITY
055.30.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Mount carefully the vertical stabilizer on the fuselage front hinges (refer to the fig. 1) and put in the
bolts without the spacers, with the B960316N (L 410.9600-06) assembly mandrel screwed on.
(4) In the similar way mount the vertical stabilizer on the rear hinges of the fuselage including putting
in the fitted bolts with the B096025N assembly mandrel. The heads of the screws of the front
hinges must be mounted from the outer side, the heads of the screws of the rear hinges must be
put forward.
(5) Measure the gaps between the vertical stabilizer front hinges and the fuselage hinges by means
of feeler gauges. According to the found out dimensions of the gaps choose the suitable dimensions
from the B300061N up to B300068N (orig. No. L410.3000-24) set of spacers and on the left front
hinge take up the gap by mounting the chosen (16) spacers (refer to the fig. 1 and fig. 401).
There must be no clearance in the left front hinge.
(6) Check the following gaps between the hinges on the fuselage and the hinges on the vertical
stabilizer:
(a) The front right hinge:

between the outer half of the hinge on the fuselage and the hinge on the vertical stabilizer
min. 1 mm,
between the inner half of the hinge on the fuselage and the bush of the hinge on the vertical
stabilizer: min. 0.5 mm.
(b) The rear left and right hinges in the axial direction min. 1 mm, max. 3.5 mm in the radial
direction vertically: 0.5 mm, horizontally: 1 mm.
(7) Put the washer and castle nuts on the fitted bolts. The nuts are tightened slightly and loosened
for one slot and locked by means of new 2.5x20 CD CSN 02 1781.04 split pins.
(8) Clean the places for attachment of the bridging to metallic luster with use emery paper and
paint the place with the ALODINE 600 (conductive). Install the bridging; the screw head and
excessively polished places must be paint with S2318 Primer and U2066 / RAL3020 (red) Paint.
(10) Connect the coaxial cables of the VHF antenna and the NAV antenna leading from the fuselage
to the coaxial connections and carry out the connection of the HF antenna (if installed).
(11) Install the rudder - refer to the AMM section 055.40.00 part REMOVAL / INSTALLATION.
(12) Check the gap between the vertical stabilizer shroud and the rudder nose - min. 8 ± 3 mm in the
area of the screws and the rivets it is min. 2 mm at the lower rudder trimming it is 4 mm between
vertical stabilizer and the trimming arm.
(13) Install the fairings fuselage-to-stabilizers: front fairing, vertical stabilizer shroud, left and right
(14) Check all joints and their locking.
EFFECTIVITY
055.30.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Material C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N C22E+N

EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2 EN 10083-2
EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131 EN 10131
P/N B300061N B300062N B300063N B300064N B300065N B300066N B300067N B300068N
t [mm] 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Qty 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
FIG. 401 B300061N UP TO B300068N (ORIG. No. L410.3000-24) SET OF SPACERS
EFFECTIVITY
055.30.00
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTACH FITTINGS
SERVICING
1. Inspection of the bushings of tail unit suspension fittings

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Not aplicable
B. Materials Not aplicable
C. Tools Not aplicable

Inspection
E. Procedures
(1) Check the ovalness and diameters of holes in the fin and stabilizer suspension fittings for
suspension on the fuselage - in accordance with the work procedure 053.40.00.RA, points (B)
and (C) mentioned in the Inspection Manual of Airplane.
Perform the check simultaneously with the inspection of the fuselage suspension fittings
(pylons).
EFFECTIVITY
055.50.00
ALL Page: 301
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
055.50.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56
WINDOWS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - Servicing 301 May 30/14

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 302 May 30/14
2 Nov 1/11 056.20.00 401 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 402 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11 403 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 May 30/14
2 Nov 1/11
056.10.00 1 Nov 1/11
3 Nov 1/11
4 Nov 1/11
302 Dec 10/20
303 Dec 10/20
304 May 30/14
402 Dec 10/20
403 Dec 10/20
404 Dec 10/20
405 Dec 10/20
406 Dec 10/20
407 Dec 10/20
408 Nov 1/11
Approved Repairs 801 Nov 1/11
802 Nov 1/11
056.20.00 1 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56
WINDOWS
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
1 056-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
056-List of 1 - -
Revisions
L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
056-Contents 1 - -
056.10.00 301 to 302 303 to 304 -
056.20.00 301 to 302 - -
2 056-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
056-List of 1 - -
056.10.00 302 to 303 - -

402 to 407 - -

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
SERVICING
1. Inspection of the windshields of pilot's cabin

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097300N)
B. Materials Neutral soap

Flannel cloth
Bucket
Water

Routine
E. Procedures
(1) Prepare a bucket with lukewarm water (max. 40°C) with a 5 % solution of neutral soap.
(2) Bring the steps (e.g. B097300N) to the cockpit.
(3) Check the glasses of the pilot's cockpit windows whether they are not dirty.
(4) If dirty, clean the windows with the prepared soap solution - see point (1).
After cleaning, dry the glasses with soft cloth (flannel is the best).
2. Inspection of the windshields of pilot's cabin

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps (e.g. B097300N)
B596281N Steps
B. Materials a 6-fold magnifying glass

a ruler
type K1 indicator with a GOST 22249-76 needle
(serving needles No. 1 to 10)

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Bring the steps (e.g. B097300N) to the front fuselage part.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 301
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Open and lock the entrance door leading to the passenger cabin. Bring the B596281N entrance
steps to the doorsill.
(3) Remove dust, impurities, ice and greasy stains from the windscreen – see work procedure
056.10.00.A, para (4).
(4) The inspection shall be performed in good illumination; apply a lamp if necessary.
(5) Check visually the front glasses of the pilot's compartment and the determination of condition
(failure) of windscreen:
(a) Chipping off up to ∅ 1 mm:
• on outer surface is allowed 6 off (per one product)
• on inner surface is allowed 3 off (per one product)
If dimension or range of the failure is greater than is mentioned above – replace windscreen
according to the work procedure in section 030.41.01, REMOVAL / INSTALLATION.
(b) Hair scratch thickness up to 0.1 mm
(c) Thick scratch thickness up to 0.3 mm:
• spread on outer surface is allowed 200 mm (per one product)
• spread on inner surface is allowed 100 mm (per one product)
If dimension or range of the failure is greater than is mentioned above – replace windscreen.
(d) Crack is not allowed. Replace windscreen.
(e) Spall:
• If spread on the outer glass surface penetrating the transparent zone to a depth of
more than 3 mm – replace windscreen.
(f) Sealing of is not allowed. Replace windscreen.
(g) Adhesive layer separation:
• Discontinuous, not reaching under the conductive strip, at a distance of at least 30 mm

from glass circumference, the length not exceeding 400 mm
• Around temperature sensors and conductors, within 3 mm zone
• Spread in electrically heated zone, each up to 20 cm2 area, total area not exceeding
20% from transparent zone of glass.
If dimension or range of the failure is greater than is mentioned above – replace windscreen.
(h) Bubbles in adhesive layer:
• Groups of bubbles are not allowed.
• Single bubbles in vision zone, up to 3 mm dia, not interfering with outlook
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 302
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Single bubbles within 20 mm from the glass periphery, up to 3 mm dia
If dimension or range of the failure is greater than is mentioned above – replace windscreen
(i) Sealing compound separation not specified under the condition that minimum insulation
resistance of 1 MΩ and leakage proofness are retained.
(j) Change of adhesive layer colour along periphery within 5 mm from glass edge.
(k) Total quantity of allowable defects shall not prevent the crew from proper outlook.
(l) If one of the windscreen cracks during flight, it is necessary to turn off the electrical heating
and to continue the flight to the airplane of destination or base aerodrome where the
windscreen shall be replaced.
NOTE: Above mentioned check and the determination of failure windscreen is processed
according to Windscreen Maintenance Manual TSK 109.00.000 RE-LU
(6) Close the entrance door of the passenger cabin.
(7) Remove the B596281N steps.
(8) Remove the steps (e.g. B097300N).
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 304
May 30/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
1. Removal of the side triangular glasses

C. Tools Screwdrivers and spanners of needed size from the

set of tools
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the upholstery under the outlook window.
(2) Remove the outlook window in open position with its hinges and locking clamps of outlook window
from the pilot's cockpit frame.
(3) Remove the upper and lower hinge, handle and lock pin from the outlook window.
(4) Remove the left and right frame with the window from the fuselage, clean out the hermetic sealing
off the fuselage frame and the window frame.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 401
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Installation of the side triangular glasses

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 12-610-3459 Spacer;
112-610-14932 Technological pins
B. Materials B012193N Spacer with screws - 2 pcs;

B114060N or L410.1141-34 Spacer - 2 pcs;
B114059N or L410.1141-28 Spacer - 6 pcs;
CHEMOPREN 50 or CHEMOPREN EXTREM Glue;
PR 1425-B2 Windshield and Canopy Sealant;
AEROSIL Filling agent;
9.5/8 Threads;
SLOVIEL R 20 Separator or equivalent;
S 9410 or S 6410 LUKOPREN;
Denatured alcohol;
Sponge;
A piece of flannel;
No. 150 Emery cloth
C. Tools dia 10 mm Punch;

12-610-3462 Special punch;
2210/1 dia 7.5 mm Special drill for plexiglass;
Filling pistol for LUKOPREN S 9410 or S 6410
E. Procedures
CAUTION: THE WORK CONNECTED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE SIDE TRIANGULAR
OUTLOOK WINDOW CAN BE RELIABLY PERFORMED ONLY BY SKILLED
PERSONNEL.
(1) General instruction for installation of the side triangular outlook windows:
• When applying the CHEMOPREN 50 or CHEMOPREN EXTREM glue make sure that the
glue does not come in contact with the organic glass.
• The organic glass must be protected against scratching.
• Prepare the PR 1425-B2 Windshield and Canopy Sealant according to the work procedure
in the chapter 20. It is applied on the surfaces that must be degreased by petrol in advance.
• The special nuts have to be sealed in the fuselage frame by means of PR 1425-B2
Windshield and Canopy Sealant.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 402
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Prior to the installation check quality of the glass - it must not be scratched and it must not
silver.
(2) Put the rubber gasket on the glass so that the joint of the gasket is be in the bottom rear part of
the window.
(3) Mark with a red pencil the places for the oval holes on the rubber gasket according to the cut outs
in the glass (except three places in each corner of the glass) and remove the sealing off the glass.
(4) In the spot of the rubber sealing joint and according to the marking by a red pencil cut the cut-outs
by means of a punch dia 10 at distance 5 mm from the edge - see fig. 401, det. A.
(5) Further, cut in both walls of the rubber sealing 25 oval holes according to the marking by means
of a special punch - see fig. 401, det. B.
FIG. 401 THE WINDOW SEALING

(1) Thread 9.5/8
(6) Put the sealing on the glass so that the oval holes in the sealing are opposite to the recesses in
the glass, the joint of the sealing must be at the bottom window part. On both sides of the sealing
a shoemaker thread 9.5/8 is lightly stuck by the CHEMOPREN 50 or CHEMOPREN EXTREM
glue - see fig. 401, det. C.
(7) In the places of application of the sealing cement (on the sheet frames and on fuselage frame)
degrease the surfaces and let them dry.
(8) Install 4 centering pins in the fuselage frame, put on the frame two B012193N special spacers
with screws for attachment on the outlook window hinges.
(9) Install a 12-610-3459 spacer on the glass into the recess for the outlook window.
The spacer serves as protection against shrinkage and deformation of the window along its
circumference.
(10) On the frames apply a layer of the PR 1425-B2 sealant which has been is prepared in advance,
and thick it by means of filling agent AEROSIL as required.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Install the glass with the sealing on technological pins and attach the frame with applied sealing
cement by four screws to the fuselage (112-610-14932 technological pins).
(12) Draw out a flag of the sealing successively by means of the stuck threads and simultaneously install
successively special nuts which are in the place of sinking covered with PR 1425-B2 sealant.
In the course of installation the technological pins are replaced by nuts with screws.
(13) The gaps between the frame and fuselage are filled with the PR 1425-B2 sealant.
(14) After hard-setting (16 hours at temperature 20°C) the cement is cleaned away, the
12-610-3459 spacer is dismounted.
(15) Install the assembled hinges of the outlook window, including the clamping springs which block
the outlook window in open position, on the screw installed in the fuselage.
(16) Install the outlook window. Check the gap between the side triangular window glass (11) and glass
of the outlook window (12), see fig. 1. It should be 0.8 mm to 1.2 mm.
Drill 4 holes dia 7.5 + 0.1 mm by means of a special drill for Plexiglas 2210/1 dia 7.5 mm according
to the holes in the hinges.
(17) Install 4 pins with a rubber sealing in the outlook window and fasten the window on the hinges
by means of two sunk screws and two special screws.
NOTE: When setting and installing the outlook window, make sure that it is flashed up with the
fixed glass. Do it by putting B114060N or L410.1141-34 and B114059N or
L410.1141-28 spacers under the hinges.
(18) Install the lock knob - maintain the clearance 0.3 mm from the glass - use a suitable shim.
Install the cap of the lock knob.
(19) Install the knob of the handle with rubber sealing.
(20) Seal the outlook window
• Prepare the SLOVIEL R 20 separator ( or equivalent) with denatured alcohol in 1:1 weight
parts ratio.
• Open the outlook window and separate the parts in the place of their contact with the sealing
with fixed part, by means of the SLOVIEL R 20 separator in two layers, dry 4 hours.
• Measure the play between the fix and tiltable part of the window. The play must be uniformly.
• Measure the humidity and temperature.
• Degrease thoroughly the fixed part of the window on which the Lukopren S 9410 or S 6410
is applied with denatured alcohol and emery paper. Roughen the whole groove by means of
emery paper No. 150, and carefully remove the dust by means of a clean brush.
• Prepare the Lukopren S 9410 or S 6410 and filling pistol. The tip of the tube is cut to the
diameter coincident with the window groove width.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Fill the groove of the window fixed part with the LUKOPREN S 9410 or S 6410 with
sufficient overlapping and until 5 minutes after application of the LUKOPREN shut the
tiltable part of the window.
• Let the sealed window vulcanized: 10 days at the humidity min. 35% or 5 days at the
humidity over 50%. After 4 hours of the vulcanization put away the jig and cut off the
overflows.
• After finishing the vulcanization open the window, clean it from the separator, adjust the sealing
layer of the LUKOPREN and separate again the tiltable part of the window.
CAUTION: THE LUKOPREN IS USED WITHIN THE TEMPERATURE LIMIT FROM

16 TO 30°C.
NOTE: On the places where bubbles appeared it is allowed to apply the LUKOPREN S 9410
or S 6410 again. The window with applied layer of the separator is shut and
vulcanized for min. 72 hrs. After the vulcanization open the window, clean away
overflows and the separator and apply the separator on the window tiltable part
again.
(21) Check the tightness by the rain test (see the work procedure in the chapter 53. In the case of
untightness check height of the special nuts and if needed adjust them (shorten them).
(22) Wash the inner and outer side of the glass by lukewarm solution of soap by means of a sponge
and polish the glass by a clean flannel.
(23) Install the upholstery back under the left and right outlook windows.
3. Removal of rear window glass of pilot cockpit

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Table for removal parts
C. Tools Spanners and screwdrivers of needed size from the

set of tools
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the upholstery around the window.
(2) Remove the rear window glass, the window frames and clean the fuselage frame thoroughly from
the PR 1425-B2 sealant.
(3) Put the removed parts on a suitable platform covered with felt in order to prevent their damage.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 405
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Installation of rear window glass in pilot cockpit

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 112-610-14932 Technological pins
B. Materials 9.5/8 Shoemaker threads;

PR 1425-B2 Windshield and Canopy Sealant;
CHEMOPREN 50 or CHEMOPREN EXTREM Glue;
Soap solution;
Viam paste;
Sponge;
Flannel cloth;
7743/7744 rubber th = 4 mm;
Acetone;
Trichlorethylene;
Emmery paper;
DESMODUR RF Additor
C. Tools Spanners and screwdriwers of needed size from the

set of tools;
Knife;
Scraper
E. Procedures
CAUTION: THE OPERATIONS DEALING WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE REAR

WINDOWS GLASS OF THE PILOT COCKPIT CAN BE RELIABLY DONE
BY SKILLED PERSONNEL ONLY.
NOTE: General instructions for installation of the rear glass are the same as those of the side
triangular outlook window.
(1) Put the rubber sealing on the glass in such a way that the sealing joint is in the window bottom
part.
(2) The sealing shoemaker threads 9.5/8 are to be slightly stuck on both sides with
CHEMOPREN 50 or CHEMOPREN EXTREM and let them dry/see fig. 401 C).
(3) Install 4 technological pegs in the fuselage frame. Set the rubber washer of 4 mm max. thickness,
which should be adjusted if needed, on the pegs. Install the glass with the rubber sealing on pegs.
(4) In places where old sealing cement has been coated, remove it mechanically with the help of a
knife, a scraper and/or something similar, down to the basic material.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 406
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The cleaned surface has to be degreased with degreasing agents (acetone, trichlorethylene).
Let the degreasing agents vapour from the surface (10 to 15 minutes at the temperature
of 15° to 30°C).
(5) Prepare the PR 1425-B2 Windshield and Canopy Sealant according to tech. condition of
chapter 20 and thicken it as required by means of filling agent AEROSIL.
(6) Coat the rim with a layer of PR 1425-B2 Windshield and Canopy Sealant, adjust the rim in the
fuselage frame and tighten it by means of nuts and screws.
NOTE: Prior to mounting, all nuts are applied in the place of their sinking by the mixture of
PR 1425-B2 Windshield and Canopy Sealant and take out the technological pins.
(7) Screw all nuts, then pull out both stuck threads and by doing that pull the flange of the sealing on
the glass frame and on the fuselage frame.
After pulling out the flange of the sealing, tighten the nuts, finally (the grooves must be in the flight
direction). Remove the technological pins and replace them by nuts and screws.
(8) After hardening, approximately 16 hrs at temperature 20°C, clean out the sealing cement.
(9) Check tightness by the rain test. In case of untightness check height of the special nuts.
(10) Wash the inner and outer side of the glass by solution of lukewarm water and soap, by means
of a sponge.
Polish it then by the Viam paste by means of a clean flannel.
(11) The upholstery, which is torn away (artificial leather), is stuck by the adhesive CHEMOPREN 50
or CHEMOPREN EXTREM anew.
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 407
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
056.10.00
ALL Page: 408
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57
WING

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 057.00.00 405 Oct 30/19

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 406 Oct 30/19
2 Dec 10/20 Approved Repairs 801 Feb 23/18
3 Dec 10/20 802 Feb 23/18
4 Dec 10/20 803 Feb 23/18
Record of Revisions 1 Apr 15/15 804 Feb 23/18
2 Feb 23/18 805 Oct 30/19
3 Dec 10/20 806 Oct 30/19
4 Feb 23/18 807 Oct 30/19
Record of Temp. Revisions 1 Nov 1/11 808 Oct 30/19
2 Nov 1/11 057.10.00 1 Feb 23/18
Contents 1 Oct 30/19 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
2 Dec 10/20 3 Feb 23/18
3 Oct 30/19 4 Feb 23/18
4 Feb 23/18 Servicing 301 Feb 23/18
057.00.00 1 Feb 23/18 302 Feb 23/18
Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18 303 Feb 23/18
3 Feb 23/18 304 Feb 23/18
4 Feb 23/18 305 Feb 23/18
5 Feb 23/18 306 Feb 23/18
6 Feb 23/18 057.20.00 1 Feb 23/18
8 Feb 23/18 Inspection / Check 601 Feb 23/18
Fault Isolation 101 Feb 23/18 602 Feb 23/18
102 Feb 23/18 057.30.00 1 Feb 23/18
Removal / Installation 401 Oct 30/19 Description and Operation 2 Feb 23/18
402 Feb 23/18 3 Feb 23/18
403 Oct 30/19 4 Feb 23/18
404 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
057.30.00 301 Feb 23/18 057.51.00 403 Feb 23/18

Servicing 302 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 404 Feb 23/18
303 Dec 10/20 405 Feb 23/18
304 Oct 30/19 406 Feb 23/18
305 Oct 30/19 Inspection / Check 601 Feb 23/18
306 Dec 10/20 602 Feb 23/18
307 Dec 10/20 603 Feb 23/18
308 Dec 10/20 604 Feb 23/18
Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18 057.52.00 1 Feb 23/18
057.40.00 1 Feb 23/18 3 Feb 23/18
3 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
4 Feb 23/18 402 Feb 23/18
Servicing 301 Feb 23/18 403 Feb 23/18
302 Feb 23/18 404 Feb 23/18
Removal / Installation 401 Oct 30/19 405 Feb 23/18
402 Oct 30/19 406 Feb 23/18
057.50.00 1 Feb 23/18 407 Feb 23/18
Servicing 301 Feb 23/18 409 Feb 23/18
302 Feb 23/18 410 Feb 23/18
303 Feb 23/18 411 Feb 23/18
304 Feb 23/18 412 Feb 23/18
305 Feb 23/18 413 Feb 23/18
306 Feb 23/18 414 Feb 23/18
307 Feb 23/18 415 Oct 30/19
308 Feb 23/18 416 Oct 30/19
309 Feb 23/18 057.53.00 1 Feb 23/18
057.51.00 1 Feb 23/18 Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18
Removal / Installation 401 Feb 23/18 403 Dec 10/20
402 Feb 23/18 404 Feb 23/18

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
057.54.00 1 Feb 23/18

402 Feb 23/18

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
9 057.53.00 1 to 2 - -
401 to 404 - -
L410UVP-E/249d Feb 23/18
057.54.00 1 to 2 - -
401 to 402 - -
10 057-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
057-List of 3 - -
Revisions
057.00.00 401, 403 to 406 - - L410UVP-E/300d Oct 30/19
805 to 806 807 to 808 -

057.30.00 303 to 306 - 307 to 310
057.40.00 - 401 to 402 -
057.52.00 - 415 to 416 -
11 057-List of 1, 2 3, 4 -
Effective Pages
057-List of 3 - -
Revisions
057-Contents 2 - - L-410/003d Dec 10/20
057.00.00 404 - -
057.30.00 303, 306 307, 308 -
057.53.00 403 - -

ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
-
-

ALL Page: 4
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57
WING
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
General 1
Fault Isolation 101
Removal of the wing 401
Installation of the wing 403
Removal and repair of cracks on the wing 801
Removal and repair of cracks on the wing flap and slats 805
Repair of epoxy filler in a joint of upper or lower 805
spar cap
Restoring surface protection of the joint main spar 806
caps on the upper and lower outside of the wing
between ribs 10 and 11
MAIN FRAME 057.10.00 1 ALL
Front spar 1
Rear spar 1
Ribs 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the wing spar cap in the area, where 301
it is not covered by the skin
AUXILIARY STRUCTURE 057.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Rear ribs 1
Vats of the fuel tanks 1
Boxes for fastening the flanges of the fuel tanks 1
Checking the areas for the placing of fuel tanks 601
PLATES / SKIN 057.30.00 1 ALL
Leading edges 1
The middle skin 1
The rear skin of the wing 2
ALL Page: 1
Oct 30/19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
Servicing 057.30.00 301 ALL
Inspection of the whole surface of the wing 301
Inspection of the shroud and fabric tapes 301
Inspection of the fabric skin of ailerons 302
Inspection of the skin on the upper and lower wing 302
surface
Inspection of the lower skin around the opening(s) 303
for the pull rod(s) of the aileron control system
between ribs No. 23 and 24 LH, RH
Inspection of the upper and lower skin of RH and 305
LH wing top side between ribs No. 11 and No. 31
Inspection of the upper skin of RH and LH wing top 305
side between ribs No. 11
Inspection of the Bottom Wing Panel around the 306
three Drainage Holes and around the
Reinforcement Strap on the Wing Rib No. 3.
Replacement of elevator and rudder fabric cloth skin 401
ATTACH FITTINGS 057.40.00 1 ALL
Fitting for connecting the wing with the fuselage 1
Fittings for the suspension of the engine bed 1
Suspensions for the suspending of slats and wing flaps 1
Suspension of ailerons 2
Suspension of the spoilers 2
Suspension of the ABC tabs 2
Suspension of the wing tip fuel tanks 2
Servicing 301
Inspection of the suspensions of wing flaps and 301
ailerons at accessible places
Inspection of the lower fixing bolts connecting the 301
rear wing suspension with lower spar cap
Replacement of the wing flap hinges attached on 401
the wing
FLIGHT SURFACES 057.50.00 1 ALL
General 1
Servicing 301
Inspection of the trailing edges of ailerons and wing 301
flaps
Inspection of the ABC tabs and spoilers 301
Inspection of the skin of the wing flaps and slats 302
Check of the radial and axial clearance of bearings 303
of moving areas and their proper securing
Inspection of the skin of the wing flaps and slats 304
and the surface of leading edges
Check of the gap between the spoilers and the 306
trailing edge of the wing
Inspection of the rubber stops of spoilers and ABC 307
tabs
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Installation of the wing

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment B596301N Protractor for measuring deflections of
ailerons, elevator and wing flaps;
B098796N Protractor for measuring deflections of
rudder and rudder trim tab;
N 10 Levelling instrument;
B969585N or L410.9690 Wing lifting mechanism;
B960581N or L 410.9600-08 Guidance spine for
wing; B962104N or XL 410.9620 Rear support
B. Materials RESISTIN ML Rust Inhibitor;

PR 1425-B2 Hermetic paste;
K 88 or 6286 Glues;
∅ 0.8 mm Tinned binding wire;
No. 120 Abrasive paper;
Colourless varnish;
3.2x32 CSN 021781.04 Split pins (4 pcs.)
C. Tools 0.05 ÷ 1.00x100 CSN 25 1650 Feeler gauges

(joint gauges);
Necessary tools from the tool kit;
∅ 4.1 mm Drill bit;
M 5 Screwing tap
E. Procedures
NOTE: The left and right internal wing flaps with the slat must be dismantled.
(1) Fasten the B969585N or L410.9690 lifting equipment on the wing.

Clean the hinges of the wing in the fuselage and lightly grease the calibrated bores with
RESISTIN ML Rust inhibitor.
Bind the handling ropes onto the left and right end of the wing.
(2) With a crane with the help of a pulley block with lifting capacity 2,000 kg, lift the wing over the
prepared fuselage.
(3) Slowly lower the wing with the pulley block.
(4) After lowering the wing to the fuselage at the distance of about 10 cm, insert between the free
wing and the fuselage of the front and rear hinges 2 pcs of spacers made of wood in the
EFFECTIVITY
057.00.00
ALL Page: 403
Oct 30/19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
dimensions 1,200 x 100 x 100 mm. The pad secures that the wing will by no means bear on the
fuselage, by which the safety of the assembly of the drainage piping is secured. Carry out the
assembly of the drainage piping of the wing. After connecting the drainage piping of the wing
remove the wooden pad.
(5) Screw the B960581N or L 410.9600-08 guidance spine onto the pins of the wing-fuselage
hinges. Clean the pins and grease them lightly with RESISTIN ML Rust inhibitor.
(6) Lower the wing with a pulley block to the level of the fuselage hinges and gradually insert the
pins of the main hinges. The connecting will begin from the front hinges.
Screw out the guidance spines from the front hinges. Screw out the guidance spines from the
pins. Screw the castle nuts, tighten them with hand and turn with wrench them by one slot so
that possible to mount and secure the new 3.2x32 CSN 021781.04 split pins.
(7) Measure the axial clearance between the wing-fuselage hinges. The clearance must be
minimally 0.5 mm.
(8) Measure the clearance between the bottom flange of the front spar of the wing and the end of
partition No. 12. The clearance must be minimally 2 mm.
(9) Dismantle the wing lifting equipment.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT CLOSING HEADS OF THE RIVETS AND SCREWS ON
THE REAR SPAR ARE NOT DAMAGED. THEY ARE THE CLOSING HEADS
OF THE RIVETS ON THE REAR SPAR AND THE HYDRAULIC PIPING, WHICH IS
CONNECTED BY THE ELECTROMAGNETIC VALVE WITH A DOUBLE
HYDRAULIC LOCK.
(10) Connect the bridging between the fuselage and the wing after having previously cleaned the
contacting surface into a metallic lustre. After connecting coat the connection with a colourless
varnish.
(11) Connect the electric bundles between the wing and the fuselage, secure the plug nuts with binding
wire ∅ 0.5 mm.
(12) Connect the heating piping between the wing and the fuselage.
(13) Connect the piping for the wing de-icing system and attach the piping between the wing and the
fuselage for the de-icing of the tail surfaces.
(14) Connect the control of the ailerons and carry out the adjustment of deflections by the B596301N
protractor.
(15) Connect the piping of the ram pressure sensor between the wing and the fuselage.
(16) Connect the HF aerial (provided it has been installed) in the fuselage front part by means of putting
on the insulator, soldering the attachment and screwing on 2 screws on the ceiling in the pilot′ cabin.
EFFECTIVITY
057.00.00
ALL Page: 404
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• hollows and dents larger than 3 mm
• loosened rivets
Carry out the repair according to work procedure in section 020.20.00.
Pay special attention to the skin in the places of cut-outs for lids, openings for screws in the
rivet rows.
Check the skin of the LH, RH wing lower side with special attention on the all drain and
technological holes. Refer to the fig. 2 in section 051.10.00 for the scheme of the drain holes.
Carefully check the area between the root and the engine nacelle on the left, right side
(between left and right ribs 3 up to 8), and check condition of surface of the strips on the LH
and RH wing top side on the ribs No. 8 and 10, and skin under the fairing of wing-to-nacelle.
(4) Put away stairs.
5. Inspection of the lower skin around the opening(s) for the pull rod(s) of the aileron
control system between ribs No. 23 and 24 LH, RH
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Suitable steps
B. Materials If repaired - refer to the Information Bulletin

No. L410UVP-E/523b
C. Tools If repaired - refer to the Information Bulletin

No. L410UVP-E/523b
D. Referenced information 057.30.00.D1

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Prepare a stairs (e.g. B097300N) under the wing between ribs No. 23 and 24 LH (RH).
(2) Check the lower skin around the opening(s) for the pull rod(s) of the aileron control system
between ribs No. 23 and 24 LH, RH
• corrosion
• cracks
• loosened rivets
If crack(s) is detected, carry out the repair according to Information Bulletin No. L410UVP-E/523b.
(4) Put away stairs.
EFFECTIVITY
057.30.00
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAB. 301 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CRACK LENGTHS OF THE CUT OUT SKIN AT THE RIB 24
EFFECTIVITY
057.30.00
ALL Page: 304
Oct 30/19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Inspection of the upper and lower skin of RH and LH wing top side between ribs No. 11
and No. 31
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Suitable steps
D. Referenced information 057.30.00.S

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Put the suitable steps to the wing.
(2) Inspect of upper skin of RH and LH wing top side between ribs No. 11 and No. 31.
• cracks
• loosened rivets
• corrosion
In case of found defect, consult further steps with manufacturer.
(3) Put away steps.
7. Inspection of the upper skin of RH and LH wing top side between ribs No. 11
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Steps
D. Referenced information 057.30.00.W

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Put the suitable steps to the wing.
(2) Inspect of upper skin of RH and LH wing top side between ribs No. 11 (LH, RH).
• cracks
• loosened rivets
• corrosion
EFFECTIVITY
057.30.00
ALL Page: 305
Oct 30/19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In case of found defect, consult further steps with manufacturer.
(3) Put away steps.
8. Inspection of the Bottom Wing Panel around the three Drainage Holes and around the
Reinforcement Strap on the Wing Rib No. 3.
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Suitable steps; Mirrors or Borescope;
Light Source
D. Referenced information 057.30.00.BR

Periodical
E. Procedures
(1) Remove the Wing-Fuselage Fairing 261 AL, 261 CL (Left Wing), and 261 AR, 261 CR (Right
Wing) – see section 006.00.04.
(2) Inspect the described area on the Left and Right Wing.
Inspection shall be performed by Inspection Mirrors or Borescope.
NOTE: As the inspection is performed on fully equipped aircraft, there are hoses which lead
through all these three holes. The inspection should be successfully performed
without removal of these hoses. When there are doubts during the inspection or the
hose fitting obstruct the inspection, the affected hose or its fitting must be dismounted
according to the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
Examine the cross-hatched area around the Holes in the Bottom Wing Panel in the vicinity of
the Wing Rib No. 3, and also examine the cross-hatched area between the Stringer 163 and
the Front Wing Spar around the Reinforcement Strap – see Figure 302.
Pay special attention to the area where the Crack could be partially hidden under the
Reinforcement Strap.
Possible Cracks should start on the Front or Aft Edge of the Hole, and should grow in a parallel
way to the Flight Direction – see example of Possible Cracks on the Figure 302.
If a crack is detected, contact the aircraft type certificate holder for instructions on continued
operation.
EFFECTIVITY
057.30.00
ALL Page: 306
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 301 PREVIEW OF THE INSPECTED AREA
EFFECTIVITY
057.30.00
ALL Page: 307
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 302 – BOTTOM VIEW TO THE INSPECTED AREA WHICH IS SHOWN ON THE FIGURE 301
EFFECTIVITY
057.30.00
ALL Page: 308
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Installation of the spoilers

A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment 0.05 - 1.00x100 CSN 25 1670 Feeler gauges;
150 CSN 25 1238 Sliding rule;
B096267N Blocking fixture;
and B936760P);
Stairs (e.g. B097365N);
Hydraulic truck (e.g. 6999AF or
HYDROCOM MA-801-03 or equivalent)
B. Materials B-70 or NEFRAS or CSN 65 6541 Petrol;

CIATIM 201 or AeroShell Grease 22 Grease or
equivalent; Emery paper;
MOLYKA Lubricating paste;
ALODINE 600 (conductive) or equivalent;
S2318 Primer; U2066 / RAL3020 (red) Paint;
1x8 DIN 94 Split pin (2 pcs);
1.6x12 DIN 94 Split pin
C. Tools Neccessary tolls from the tool kit
E. Procedures
CAUTION: • THIS WORK PROCEDURE IS EFFECTIVE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE

ORIGINAL SPOILER
• INSTALLATION OF THE NEW (SPARE) SPOILER WILL BE CARRIED OUT BY

THE SERVICE OF THE MANUFACTURING PLANT (SEE SECTION 051.20.00)
• CHECK AGAIN THE BLOCKING OF THE SPOILER BY THE BLOCKING

FIXTURE
(1) Wash the bearings of the control rods of the spoiler with petrol and dry them.
Grease the rod bearings with CIATIM 201 or AeroShell Grease 22 Grease or equivalent.
(2) Lightly coat the hinge needle with MOLYKA lubricating paste.
(3) Slip on and set the spoiler into the hinges suspension.
Slip on the hinge needle and secure with a washer and a 1x8 DIN 94 new split pins.
(4) Connect the spoiler control rod with the bolt, washer, nut and 1.6x12 DIN 94 new split pin.
EFFECTIVITY
057.53.00
ALL Page: 403
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Clean the places for attachment of the bridging to metallic luster with use emery paper and paint the
place with the ALODINE 600 (conductive) refer to the section 020.12.00.
(6) Install the bridging; the screw head and excessively polished places must be paint with S2318
Primer and U2066 / RAL3020 (red) Paint.
(7) Coat excessively cleaned places under the frame with S2318 Primer.
(8) Bring the system of spoilers into the state of readiness according to the work procedure for the
removal of the spoiler (step 1) mentioned in this part.
(9) Bring the ground hydraulic source. Connect the ground hydraulic source on airplane – refer to
the section 029.00.00 - and induce working pressure 14.7 MPa according to the ground
hydraulic source pressure gauge.
(10) Release the blocked position of the spoilers and insert the spoilers in the following way:
(a) Press the push buttons on the left control wheel.
CAUTION: DURING THE WHOLE TIME OF RELEASING THE EXTENDED POSITION

OF THE SPOILER THE PUSH BUTTONS MUST BE PRESSED.
(b) Turn the small lever (4) - see fig. 401 of the blocking fixture (3) and dismantle the fixture
from the cylinder piston rod.
(c) Release the depressed push buttons.
(11) Check, and if necessary adjust the zero position of the spoilers.
(12) Check the linking of the spoilers outline with reference to the wing, according to the work
procedure mentioned in section 020.30.00.
(13) Check the lateral clearance of the spoiler from the edges, which should be 6 ± 1 mm.
(14) Check the gap between the spoilers lower side and the wing’s shroud strip, which should be
3 ± 1 mm.
(15) Check the gap between the spoilers trailing edge and the slat, which should be 3 ± 1 mm.
(16) Mount on the fairing wing-fuselage between the right and left rib of the wing No. 4a at the wing’s
rear spar.
(17) Turn off the all switches.
EFFECTIVITY
057.53.00
ALL Page: 404
Feb 23/18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61
PROPELLERS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - - 061.20.03 1 Dec 10/14

2 Dec 10/20 Servicing 301 Dec 10/14
2 Dec 10/20 Removal / Installation 401 Dec 10/14
2 Nov 1/11 061.20.04 1 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Dec 10/14 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
061.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 302 Nov 1/11
202 Nov 1/11 061.20.05 1 Nov 1/11
061.20.00 1 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 061.20.06 1 Nov 1/11
5 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
7 Nov 1/11 402 May 31/12
8 Nov 1/11 061.20.07 1 Dec 10/20
Servicing 301 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11
302 Nov 1/11 3 Nov 1/11
061.20.01 1 Nov 1/11 4 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter, Page Date

Section,
Subject
061.20.09 1 Nov 1/11

061.20.10 1 Nov 1/11
061.40.00 1 Nov 1/11
061.40.01 1 Dec 10/20
402 Nov 1/11

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61
PROPELLERS
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
3 061-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
061-List of 1 - - L410UVP-E/145d May 31/12
Revisions
061.20.06 402 - -
4 061-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
061-List of 1 - - L410UVP-E/170d Apr 5/13
Revisions
061.20.00 2 - -
5 061-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
061-List of 1 - -
Revisions
061-Contents 1 to 2 - - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
061.20.00 2 - -
301 - -
061.20.06 301 to 302 - -
6 061-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
061-List of 1 - -
Revisions
061-Contents 1 - - L410UVP-E/208d Dec 10/14
061.20.03 1 - -
301 - -
401 - -

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
7 061-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
061-List of 2 - -
Revisions
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
061-Contents 2 - -
061.20.07 1 - -
061.40.01 1 - -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61
PROPELLERS
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
PROPELLERS (GENERAL) 061.00.00 1 ALL
General 1
General 201
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY 061.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
CONTROLLING 061.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 2
Servicing 301
Check of the operation of the automatic blade 301
feathering
LUN 7816-8 PROPELLER SPEED GOVERNOR 061.20.01 1 ALL
LUN 7880.01-8 SOLENOID VALVE ACTUATOR 061.20.02 1 ALL
LUN 2601-8 OR LUN 2601A-8 PROPELLER TIME RELAY 061.20.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Servicing 301
Checking of the operation of the propeller time 301
relay
Removal and the installation of the propeller time 401
relay
LUN 7840-8 AUXILIARY PUMP 061.20.04 1 ALL
Servicing 301
Operation check of the LUN 7840-8 auxiliary pump 301
Removal and installation of the LUN 7840-8 401
auxiliary pump
LUN 3193 CYCLIC SWITCH 061.20.05 1 ALL
Removal and installation of the LUN 3193 cyclic 401
switch
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
ZO - 4s (8) DELAY CIRCUIT 061.20.06 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Servicing 301
Check of the delay time of the ZO-4s (8) delay 301
circuit. Inspection of the delay circuit.
Removal and installation of the ZO - 4s (8) delay 401
circuit
LUN 3280-8 PRESSURE SWITCH OF AUTOMATIC 061.20.07 1 ALL
FEATHERING
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 2
TKE 52 PODG, TKE 54 PODG RELAY 061.20.08 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
TKD 501 DOD CONTACTOR 061.20.09 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
065 2600 PROPELLER SPEED LIMITER 061.20.10 1 ALL
INDICATING 061.40.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
0.7 S LUN 1492.04-8 PRESSURE SWITCH 061.40.01 1 ALL
Removal and installation of the 401
0.7 S LUN 1492.04-8 pressure switch
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LUN 3280-8 PRESSURE SWITCH OF AUTOMATIC FEATHERING

1. Purpose
LUN 3280-8 pressure switch of automatic feathering gives an impulse for ABC tab extension the switching
on of the automatic feathering circuit of the propeller and of the switching on of channel IELU, which limits
the gradient of increase of gas temperatures during the engine starting.
The pressure switch is made as a cylindrical container with a pressure inlet in the axis. The switch is
equipped with a seven pole fork and an outlet of static pressure. On the lid of the switch there is a
sealed cover are placed, under which the calibrating elements.
2. Technical data
Nominal voltage 28 V
Operating voltage 23.5 till 30.5 V
The switching degrees:
I. Switching degree is possible to set with calibration elements within the pressures 0.15 + 0.31 MPa
II. Switching degree is possible to set with calibration elements within pressures 0.08 + 0.18 MPa
III. Switching degree switches on during the pressure of 0.05 ± 0.015 MPa higher
than degree II and is together with this degree calibrated
CAUTION: THE PRESSURE SWITCHES ARE INTERCHANGEABLE UNDER THE CONDITION THE
CALIBRATION HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT I.E. THE SETTING OF SWITCHING ON OF
THE IST, IIND AND IIIRD DEGREE. THE CALIBRATION MAY BE CARRIED OUT BY:
• THE MANUFACTURER OF THE PRESSURE SWITCH
• THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ENGINE
The current:
The Ist IInd degree enable to switch on a maximum current inductive load 1 A (with a time
constant 0.01 s)
The IIIrd degree enables to switch on the maximum current load 20 mA
The allowed inaccuracies of the calibrated switch under normal conditions
(+ 15 up to + 35°C, rel. air humidity 45 - 80 %, air pressure 87 up to 107 kPa),
at the supply within the supply voltage:
Degree Normal conditions - 55°C, + 100°C
I. ± 2% ± 4%
II. ± 1.5% ± 3%
III. ± 2% ± 4%
EFFECTIVITY
061.20.07
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: The inaccuracies are in relation to the nominal pressure range of the switch.
3. Operation
The pressure switch operates as a converter of oil pressure of the engine’s torque-meter to switching on
of the contacts. The pressure switch is connected to the outlet of the pressure oil for the measuring of
the engine’s torque at the decreasing of pressure of oil for the measuring of the contacts of the Ist
degree will switch on first. Through these contacts and resistor R 1 voltage will be brought on the control
electrode of thyristor T 1 , which will close. By this it will connect the circuits for the extending of the ABC
tab and for the blocking of the other engine’s feathering circuit and the signalization of the readiness of
feathering. During a further decrease of pressure the contact of the IInd degree will close on and
through the resistor R 2 voltage will be brought to the control electrode of thyristor T 2 , which will close.
By this it will connect the circuit for automatic feathering. The contacts of the IIIrd degree close during
the same pressure as does the IInd degree. The IIIrd degree of the pressure switch switches-over the
IELU channel, which limits the gradient of increase of gas temperatures during the starting of the engines.
EFFECTIVITY
061.20.07
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.7 S LUN 1492.04-8 PRESSURE SWITCH

The technical description and operation of the 0.7 S LUN 1492.04-8 pressure switch are mentioned in the
section 032.40.14.
FIG. 1 DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION OF 0.7 S LUN 1492.04-8 PRESSURE SWITCH
EFFECTIVITY
061.40.01
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
061.40.01
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77
ENGINE INDICATING

Section Section
Subject Subject
Title page - - 077.10.04 101 Nov 1/11

List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20 Fault Isolation 102 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Nov 20/15 302 May 30/14
2 Dec 10/20 303 Nov 1/11
2 Dec 10/20 077.10.05 1 Nov 1/11
4 Dec 10/20 3 May 30/14
077.00.00 1 Nov 1/11 4 May 30/14
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11
077.10.00 1 Nov 1/11 302 May 30/14
077.10.01 1 Nov 1/11 304 Nov 1/11
077.10.02 1 Nov 1/11 402 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 077.20.00 1 Dec 10/20
Fault Isolation 101 Nov 1/11 Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13
102 Nov 1/11 077.20.01 1 Nov 1/11
Description and Operation 2 Nov 1/11 077.20.02 1 Apr 5/13
077.10.04 1 May 30/14 Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13
Description and Operation 2 May 30/14 3 Apr 5/13
3 May 30/14 4 Apr 5/13
4 May 30/14

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Page Date

Section
Subject
077.20.02 101 Apr 5/13

302 Nov 20/15
303 Nov 20/15
304 Nov 20/15
305 Nov 20/15
306 Nov 20/15
307 Nov 20/15
308 Nov 20/15
309 Nov 20/15
310 Nov 20/15
311 Nov 20/15
312 Nov 20/15
313 Nov 20/15
314 Nov 20/15
315 Nov 20/15
316 Dec 10/20
317 Dec 10/20
318 Dec 10/20
Removal / Installation 401 Apr 5/13
402 Apr 5/13
077.20.03 1 Dec 10/20
Description and Operation 2 Apr 5/13

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77
ENGINE INDICATING
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
3 077-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages 2
077-List of 1 - -
Revisions
077-Contents 2 - -
077.20.00 1 to 2 - -
077.20.02 1 3 - L410UVP-E/170d Apr 5/13
2 4 -
101 - -
301 to 304 - -
401 to 402 - -
077.20.03 - 1 to 2 -
4 077-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
077-List of 1 - -
Revisions
077-Contents 2 - -
077.10.04 1 to 2 3 to 4 - L410UVP-E/196d May 30/14
301 to 302 - -
077.10.05 1 to 2 3 to 4 -
301 to 302 - -
077.20.02 301 to 304 305 to 310 -
5 077-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
077-List of 1 - -
Revisions L410UVP-E/220d Nov 20/15
077-Contents 2 - -
077.20.02 301 to 310 311 to 316 -

ALL Page: 1
Nov 20/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
6 077-List of 1 to 2 - -
Effective Pages
077-List of 2 - -
Revisions
077-Contents 2 3, 4 -
L-410/003d Dec 10/20
077.10.05 303 - -
077.20.00 1 - -
077.20.02 316 317, 318 -
077.20.03 1 - -

ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77
ENGINE INDICATING
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
Description and operation 1
General 1
Maintenance practices 201
General 201
POWER 077.10.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
LUN 1540.02-8 TORQUE TRANSMITTER 077.10.01 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
LUN 1539.02-8 TORQUE INDICATOR 077.10.02 1 ALL
General 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
LUN 1333.12-8 INTEGRATED SPEED TRANSMITTER 077.10.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
LUN 1347.XX-8 GENERATOR SPEED INDICATOR 077.10.04 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the LUN 1347.XX-8 generator speed 301
indicator
Removal and installation of the LUN 1347.XX-8 401
generator speed indicator
ALL Page: 1
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
LUN 1348.XX-8 PROPELLER SPEED INDICATOR 77-10-05 1 ALL
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the LUN 1348.XX-8 propeller speed 301
indicator
propeller speed indicator
TEMPERATURE 077.20.00 1 ALL
General 1
Operation 1
LUN 1377-8 INTER-TURBINE TEMPERATURE 077.20.01 1 ALL
TRANSMITTERS
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
LUN 1370.XX-8 INTER-TURBINE TEMPERATURE 077.20.02 1 ALL
INDICATOR
Purpose 1
Technical data 1
Operation 1
Fault Isolation 101
Servicing 301
Check of the LUN 1370.XX-8 inter-turbine 301
temperature indicator
(Version of the procedure with use UPT-1M,
Series 2 panel)
Check of the LUN 1370.XX-8 inter-turbine temperature 305
indicator
(Version of the procedure with use EXTECH
PRC 70 or EXTECH 422123 Temperature calibrator)
Check of LUN 1370.02-8, LUN 1370.08-8 inter- 310
turbine temperature indicator (Version of the
procedure with use FLUKE 724 Temperature
calibrator)
Check of LUN 1370.02-8, LUN 1370.08-8 inter- 316
turbine temperature indicator (Version of the
procedure with use Barfield TT 1000A Turbine
Temperature Test Set)
inter-turbine temperature indicator
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject
KV L410E-8 OR KV-L410-H80 COMPENSATING LINE 077.20.03 1 ALL
Purpose 1
ALL Page: 3
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALL Page: 4
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Checking of inaccuracy of LUN 1348.XX-8 propeller speed indicator

Permissible inaccuracies of the propeller speed indicator at + 20°C (± 5°C):
Permissible inaccuracy of the speed indicator

Data of propeller Speed of integrated
speed indicator speed transmitter in rotation on scale
in rotation on scale
(rpm) (rpm) in % of integrated speed
of speed indicator
transmitter
0 0 ± 1.5 ± 37.5 ± 75
500 1014 ± 1.5 ± 37.5 ± 75
1000 2029 ± 1.5 ± 37.5 ± 75
1500 3043 ±1 ± 25 ± 50
2000 4058 ±1 ± 25 ± 50
2500 5072 ±1 ± 25 ± 51
(3) Connect the checked LUN 1348.XX-8 propeller speed indicator according to inspection
workplace – fig. 301. Fasten LUN 1333.12-8 integrated speed transmitter by means of universal
flange to the speed source.
(4) By means of speed source increase the rotation according to chart of permissible inaccuracies
shown in item (2). Read out the values on the indicator; perform calculation of inaccuracies,
compare with the chart.
(5) Bring the measuring workplace into initial status.
EFFECTIVITY
077.10.05
ALL Page: 303
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
077.10.05
ALL Page: 304
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEMPERATURE
1. General
The temperature indication is intended to measure the inter-turbine temperature. The system of inter-
-turbine temperature measuring measures the temperature between the gas generator turbine and the
propeller turbine. The measurement takes place in front of the propeller turbine stator. The system
consists of the LUN 1377-8 inter-turbine temperature transmitter the LUN 1370.XX-8 inter-turbine
temperature indicator and compensating line.
1. Inter-turbine temperature transmitter LUN 1377-8 18 On both engines

2. Inter-turbine temperature indicator LUN 1370.XX-8 2 On center instrument panel
3. Compensating line KV L410E-8 or 2 Interconnecting line between ITT
KV-L410-H80 transmitter and ITT indicator
(and IELU or Autostart Kit/ Engine
Limiter Unit (ELU))
3. Operation
The operation of the inter-turbine temperature measuring system is illustrated by descriptions in
Sections 077.20.01 and 077.20.02.
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 SCHEMATIC DRAWING OF THE TEMPERATURE INDICATION SYSTEM
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.00
ALL Page: 2
Apr 5/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 305 CONNECTIONS FOR SIMULATING A THERMOCOUPLE

(e) Proceed as follows to simulate a thermocouple:
- Attach the thermocouple leads to the appropriate TC miniplug, then to the TC input/
output as shown in figure 305.
- If necessary, press MEAS/SOURCE for SOURCE mode.
- Press TC for the TC display. If desired, continue pressing this key to select the
desired thermocouple type. Select the K type.
- Enter the temperature you want by pressing and keys. Press and to
select a different digit to edit.
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.02
ALL Page: 315
Nov 20/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1D. Check of the LUN 1370.XX-8 inter-turbine temperature indicator

(Version of the procedure with use Barfield TT 1000A Turbine Temperature Test Set)
A. Fixture, Test and Support Equipment Barfield TT 1000A Turbine Temperature Test Set;
Z 03 M vibration pedestal

Periodical
E. Procedures
NOTE: Follow the User Instruction Manual of the Barfield TT 1000A Turbine Temperature Test
Set; Doc. No. P/N: 56-101-00901, Revision D or later.
(1) Place the calibrated inter-turbine temperature indicator on the Z 03 M vibration pedestal.
The vibrating pedestal can be replaced by tapping on the calibrated inter-turbine temperature
indicator.
(2) Check the inter-turbine temperature indicator with use Barfield TT 1000A Turbine Temperature
Test Set:
- Rotate the “FUNCTION” selector to ”RESISTANCE MEASURE“ position
- Rotate the “RESISTANCE RANGE“ selector to 20Ω position.
- Place “ON/OF“ switch to “ON“ position.
- Short test lead clips together and press the Red pushbutton while adjusting “SYSTEM
RES.” control knob for displayed system resistance to be simulated. Set the 8Ω.
- Rotate the “FUNCTION“ selector to “INDICATOR TEST“ position.
- Connect test lead clips to indicator terminals. Observe polarity! Alumel is negative (-) and
connects to the TT-1000A Black clip: Chromel is positive (+) and connects to the
TT-1000A Red clip.
- Set “TEMP. ADJ.“ control knob for the desired test temperature as displayed on the digital
indicator.
- Compare readings of indicator under test with TT-1000A indications. The measured
inaccuracy must not exceed the values specified in the following table 301.
(3) Check the inter-turbine temperature indicator on the values 100ºC, 200ºC, 300ºC, 400ºC,
500ºC, 600ºC, 680ºC, 700ºC, 735ºC, 800ºC a 900ºC. The measured inaccuracy must not
exceed the values specified in the following table 301.
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.02
ALL Page: 316
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Check the unbalancing of the indicator on scale readings 400, 700 and 900. Turn the indicator
to the left-right and away from yourself by 90°. The measured inaccuracy must not exceed the
values specified in the following table 301.
(5) Check whether the pointer of the indicator is moving up the scale continuously and without
visible jumps, when the voltage is being changed continuously. The needle must not jam or size.
The check is performed with the Z 03 M vibration pedestal turned off.
(6) Bring the test workstation back to its original state.
FIG. 306 BARFIELD TT 1000A TURBINE TEMPERATURE TEST SET

(1) „ON/OFF“ Switch; (2) LCD digital indicator; (3) “TEMP. ADJ” Control knob; (4) “FUNCTION”
Selector; (5) “PUSH TO MEASURE ACFT. LEAD RES.” Black pushbutton; (6) “SHORT TEST
LEADS AND PUSH TO SET SYSTEM RES.” Red pushbutton; (7) “RESISTANCE RANGE“
Selector; (8) “SYSTEM RES.” Control knob
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.02
ALL Page: 317
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.02
ALL Page: 318
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
KV L410E-8 OR KV-L410-H80 COMPENSATING LINE

1. Purpose
The KV L410E-8 compensating line is intended to interconnection of the LUN 1377-8 inter-turbine
temperature transmitters (9 pc transmitters per one engine), to the LUN 1370.XX-8 inter-turbine
temperature indicator and integrated electronic limiter unit (IELU) – valid for airplane with M601E
Turboprop engines.
The KV-L410-H80 compensating line is intended to interconnection of the LUN 1377-8 inter-turbine
temperature transmitters (9 pc transmitters per one engine), to the LUN 1370.XX-8 inter-turbine
temperature indicator and Autostart Kit/ Engine Limiter Unit (ELU) – valid for airplane with H80-200
Turboprop engines.
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.03
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIG. 1 KV L410E-8 COMPENSATING LINE
EFFECTIVITY
077.20.03
ALL Page: 2
Apr 5/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 90
SUPPLEMENTS

Section, Section,
Subject Subject
Title page - -
List of Effective Pages 1 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11
Record of Revisions 1 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11
2 Nov 1/11
Contents 1 Dec 10/20
2 Nov 1/11
090.00.00 1 Dec 10/20
Description and operation 2 Dec 10/20

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 90
SUPPLEMENTS
RECORD OF REVISIONS

Section,
Subject
1 090-List of 1 - -
Effective Pages
090-Record of 1 - -
090-Contents 1 - -
090.00.00 1 to 2 - 3 to 20

ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Section,
Subject

ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 90
SUPPLEMENTS
CONTENTS

Section,
Subject
SUPPLEMENTS (GENERAL) 090.00.00 1 ALL
General 1
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALL Page: 2
Nov 1/11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SUPPLEMENTS (GENERAL)
1. General
This chapter contains supplementary information on the optional equipment, which is installed in the
aircraft. It may also contain supplementary information concerning the aircraft operation and
maintenance.
The information given in this chapter complete or supersede the basic Maintenance Manual in those
sections as specified. Where not otherwise stated, information shown in the basic Maintenance Manual
remains effective.
The Set of Supplements consists of a List of Supplements for respective aircraft S/N and relevant
Supplements. Each Supplement consists of a Title Page, List of Revisions, and the proper text.
EFFECTIVITY
090.00.00
ALL Page: 1
Dec 10/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
090.00.00
ALL Page: 2
Dec 10/20

003d Amm en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

003d Amm en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

003d Amm en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOCUMENTATION BULLETIN

DB No. L-410/003d Airplane Type: L-410

Applicability: Maintenance Manual for L410UVP-E, -E9, -E20 Aeroplane

Compliance Time: After receiving of the bulletin

RECORD OF ISSUED DOCUMENTATION BULLETINS

Bulletin No. Number of Revised Date of Entry

1 001 d Dec 15 / 95 000-1, 009-1, 010-1, 011-1, 012-1,

21 102 d Oct 31 / 08 012-8, 023-3, 028-8, 030-6

EFFECTIVITY RECORD OF ISSUED

Bulletin No. Number of Revised Date of Entry

22 107 d Nov 18 / 08 004-2, 012-9, 024-5, 025-4, 026-5,

MM is reissued Nov 1/11. This contains revisions from No. 1 to No. 24

25 145d May 31/12 012-10, 020-5, 023-4, 024-6, 026-6,

EFFECTIVITY RECORD OF ISSUED

Chapter Page Date Chapter Page Date

Title page - - 006.00.01 19 Nov 1/11

EFFECTIVITY: 006-LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Chapter Page Date Chapter Page Date

006.00.04 11 Nov 1/11

EFFECTIVITY: 006-LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Chapter, Numbers of Pages

MM is reissued on Nov 1/11.

EFFECTIVITY: 006-RECORD OF REVISIONS

Chapter, Numbers of Pages

EFFECTIVITY: 006-RECORD OF REVISIONS

4. Fin and rudder

Rudder trim tab area..................................................................................... 0.433 sq.m

FIG. 4 GAUGE LINES MARKING MAX. RUDDER DEFLECTIONS

100 Lower half of fuselage to rear frame No. 21

FIG. 1 MAJOR ZONES

343 Right elevator trim tab

FIG. 10 ACCESS PANELS - LANDING GEAR NACELLE

FIG. 11 ACCESS PANELS - VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL STABILIZERS

Chapter, Page Date Chapter, Page Date

EFFECTIVITY 008-LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EFFECTIVITY 008-LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Chapter, Numbers of Pages

MM is reissued on Nov 1/11. This contains revisions from No. 1 to No. 3

EFFECTIVITY: 008-RECORD OF REVISIONS

Chapter, Numbers of Pages

EFFECTIVITY: 008-RECORD OF REVISIONS

Subject Chapter, Page Effectivity

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2. Positioning of the airplane into horizontal position

FIG. 1 HORIZONTAL POSITIONING OF THE AIRPLANE

1. Levelling of the airplane

B. Materials Levelling Record No. Do-L410-1262.2;

C. Tools Screwdriver; Double-ended spanner; Twine for

(a) No other work may be performed on the airplane during levelling.

Necessary fixture: 112-610-39690 Rulers kit.

IV. Phase - Check of fuselage curvature

V. Phase - Check of landing gear track

VI. Phase – Check of alignment F, G according to the table 6 of Levelling Record

(41) Perform identical measurements on the LH side of the airplane.

VII. Phase - Check of alignment A, B according to the table 7 of Levelling Record

VII. Phase - Check of alignment C according to the table 12 of Levelling Record

Approximately Positions of Levelling

FIG. 301 POSITION OF THE LEVELLING DEVICE